il 


-WALTER  WALDEN 


THE  VOODOO  GOLD  TRAIL 


THE 
VOODOO  GOLD  TRAIL 


BY 


WALTER  WALDEN 

Author  of 
The  Hidden  Islands,  Etc. 


BOSTON 

SMALL,  MAYNARD   &   COMPANY 
PUBLISHERS 


COPYRIGHT,  1922 

BY  SMALL,  MAYNARD  &  COMPANY 
(INCORPORATED) 


Printed  in  the  United  States  of  America 


THE    MURRAY    PRINTING   COMPANY 
CAMBRIDGE,  MASS. 


CONTENTS 


HAPTER 

PAGE 

I 

WE  GET  INTERESTING  NEWS       . 

1 

II 

WE  MEET  WITH  A  SERIOUS  REVERSE    . 

7 

III 

WE  SAIL  ON  A  DIFFERENT  QUEST    . 

14 

IV 

WE  PICK  UP  THE  TRAIL    

21 

V 

WE  GAIN  AN  ALLY       

35 

VI 

WE  BREAK  UP  THE  VOODOO  CEREMONIAL  . 

46 

VII 

A  DISTRESS  CALL  GOES  TO  THE  Pearl 

54 

VIII 

THE  VOODOO  STRONGHOLD       

66 

IX 

THE  STAMPEDE         

80 

X 

THE  GOLD  TRAIL  AGAIN   

86 

XI 

AT  HIDE  AND  SEEK  WITH  THE  ENEMY  . 

98 

XII 

IN  CAPTIVITY  —  THE  MESSAGE    . 

107 

XIII 

JULIAN'S  NARRATIVE  —  THE  SECRET   MES- 
SAGE       

116 

XIV 

JULIAN    CONTINUES    THE    NARRATIVE  •  — 
NORRIS'S  BIG  GUN    

122 

XV 

AN  EXCHANGE  OF  PRISONS     

128 

XVI 

THE  ESCAPE       

136 

XVII 

JULIAN'S  STORY  AGAIN  —  THE  SEARCH  FOR 
THE  LOST  COMRADES       

146 

XVIII 

OUR  BOAT  is  SCUTTLED     

154 

XIX 

WE  STEAL  A  MARCH  ON  THE  ENEMY    . 

161 

XX 

THE  MYSTERIOUS  TRAIL          

169 

XXI 

WE  SEEK  IN  VAIN  FOR  A  LOST  TRAIL;  AND 

XXII   THE  ISLE  IN  CROW  BAY 181 


213876* 


CONTENTS 

CHAPTER  PAGE 

XXIII  WHAT  THE  WATER  HID     .      .     .     .     .      .195 

XXIV  IN  THE  HIDDEN  VALE  —  A  NEW  ACQUAINT- 

ANCE      204 

XXV  WE  CONSORT  WITH  A  PICKPOCKET   .      .      .  214 

XXVI  DOINGS  ON  THE  LITTLE  ISLE  AGAIN      .      .  224 

XXVII    THE  GOLD-MINE 234 

XXVIII  WE  ARE  TRAPPED  —  THE  BATTLE    .     .     .244 

XXIX    How  THE  ENEMY  PERISH,  AND  THE  MONKEY 

DISCOVERS  THE  TREASURE 257 

XXX    THE  CACHE  ON  THE  ISLE 268 

XXXI    WE  RUN  THE  GAUNTLET  —  HOME  BOUND     .  278 


THE  VOODOO  GOLD  TRAIL 


CHAPTER  I 

WE    GET    INTERESTING    NEWS 

IT  was  on  a  tropic  sea,  and  night,  that  I  heard  a  little  scrap 
of  a  tale  that  had  in  it  that  which  was  destined  to  preserve  my 
life.  The  waning  moon  had  not  yet  risen;  the  stars  were  all 
out,  the  Milky  Way  more  than  commonly  near.  The  schooner's 
sails  were  barely  drawing,  and  flapped  idly  at  times.  I  leaned 
on  the  rail,  listening  to  the  purling  of  the  sea  against  the 
vessel's  side,  and  watching  the  phosphorescence  where  the  water 
broke.  The  bell  had  just  sounded  a  double  stroke — two  bells. 
Near  by,  the  taciturn  black  fellow — who  was  our  guide,  and 
who  alone  (as  shall  appear)  knew  our  course  and  destination 
— was  in  talk  with  Rufe,  our  black  cook. 

Heretofore,  this  man — black  he  was,  but  having  hair  straight 
as  an  Indian's — had  been  steadfastly  mum  on  the  subject  of 
his  past;  this  manifestly  being  but  part  and  parcel  of  his 
policy  to  avoid  any  hint  of  the  place  to  which  he  was  piloting 
us.  But  now,  I  gathered,  he  was  reciting  to  Rufe  an  episode 
set  in  this  far  away  land  to  the  south;  and  I  cocked  my  ear. 
He  was  telling  of  something  that  had  happened  in  his  grand- 
father's experience,  who,  as  he  said,  was  in  the  service  of 
the  king  of  that  land.  It  was  one  day  when  this  king  was  set 
upon  by  his  enemies,  who  came  thundering  on  the  doors;  and 

i 


2  THE  VOODOO   GOLD  TRAIL 

the  king  employed  the  narrator's  grandfather  to  assist  him  in 
his  escape.  The  king  collected  his  jewels  and  much  gold  which 
he  put  in  a  bag,  and  set  it  on  the  back  of  his  servant.  Then 
he  led  the  way  to  a  dungeon  in  the  palace.  Set  in  the  thick 
rock  wall  of  this  dark  cell  was  a  shrine,  a  carved  Calvary  — 
Christ  on  the  cross  and  figures  at  the  foot. 

"  The  king,"  the  black  narrator  was  saying,  "horrify  my 
gran'father,  when  he  put  his  hand  right  on  the  Virgin,  and 
pull  that  piece  out.  Then  the  sacrarium  swing  open,  and  there 
is  one  big  hole,  and  the  king  push  my  gran'father  through,  and 
come  after." 

And  he  went  on  to  tell  how  the  king  had  led  on,  groping 
down  the  steps  of  this  secret  passage,  and  presently  out  into 
the  forest;  and  how  they  two  finally  came  to  a  fortress,  and 
found  safety. 

It  is  this  circumstance  that  (for  the  very  good  reason  in- 
dicated) stands  most  forward,  as  I  look  back  over  the  early 
days  of  that  voyage.  And  you  are  to  hear  more  of  that. 

Sailing  the  seas  in  search  of  adventure  was  not  altogether  a 
new  thing  for  me.  Nor  was  it  to  be  quite  a  novelty — the 
drifting  into  mysterious  places,  and  the  poking  into  hornets' 
nests.  Indeed,  my  friend,  Ray  Reid,  declared  that  it  seemed 
like  I  was  picked  out  to  drag  poor,  inoffensive  young  inno- 
cents (meaning  himself)  into  all  kinds  of  scrapes — and  that 
every  little  while.  But  it  was  with  neither  a  light  heart  nor  an 
indifferent  purpose  that  I,  for  one,  set  forth  on  this  new  en- 
terprise, of  which  it  has  been  given  me  to  tell  the  tale.  I  had 
been  orphaned  of  my  dear  mother  two  years  before,  when  I 
was  barely  sixteen;  and  recently  my  father,  who  was  a  builder 
of  houses,  had  variously  suffered,  in  pocket  and  in  health, 


WE  GET  INTERESTING  NEWS  3 

and  had  journeyed  far  to  the  west,  in  the  hope  to  recuperate 
both.  And  I  lay  awake  nights,  trying  to  hatch  schemes  for 
earning  money,  and  that  in  considerable  amount.  It  was 
mortgages  harassed  us;  one  on  our  home,  and  more  on  other 
property. 

It  was  then  there  came  the  letter  from  Julian  Lamartine, 
a  good  friend,  far  south  in  New  Orleans,  and  in  whose  com- 
pany my  comrades  and  I  had  sailed  in  a  former  voyage.  He 
now  proposed  —  in  fact  he  had  long  planned  —  another  ad- 
venture. This  time  it  was  to  seek  certain  gold  fields  in  the 
tropics,  his  letter  said,  of  which  he  had  had  some  private 
news.  The  real  mainspring  of  his  enterprise,  I  allege,  was  to 
seek  to  make  some  return  to  my  comrades  and  myself  for  cer- 
tain services  we  had  rendered  him  on  this  former  voyage.  For 
it  was  on  this  occasion  he  came  into  his  wealth;  and  he  main- 
tained he  owed  it  all  to  us.  Thus,  it  was  Julian  Lamartine, 
who  was  finding  the  ship  and  all  the  equipment — in  short 
paying  the  whole  shot. 

Most  of  our  original  crew  were  either  scattered  or  hope- 
lessly entangled  in  some  employment  or  other,  so  that  there 
remained  only  three  to  make  that  journey  from  Illinois  to 
the  point  of  departure  in  the  southland:  Ray  Reid,  Robert 
Murtry,  and  myself  (Wayne  Scott,  to  give  you  my  name). 
Two  old  friends  met  us  in  the  station  in  New  Orleans.  They 
were  Julian  and  our  former  sailing  master,  Jean  Marat. 

"  I  am  so  ver'  glad  to  see  you  once  again,"  said  Jean  Marat, 
as  with  his  beaming  smile  he  took  our  hands.  "We  go  some 
more  an'  fight  thee  pirates,  eh?"  he  continued. 

"  Say  now!"  broke  in  Ray,  "I  want  you  to  let  me  get  my 
full  growth  before  you  steer  me  among  any  more  of  that  crew." 


4  THE  VOODOO  GOLD  TRAIL 

Ray  often  told  how  he  had  been  scared  out  of  two  years' 
growth  in  a  minute,  that  he  never  would  be  able  to  raise  a 
moustache,  and  that  the  reason  he  hadn't  lost  his  hair  was 
because  he  had  had  his  hat  on.  I  don't  believe  Ray  ever  knew 
what  it  was  to  be  really  scared.  An  earthquake  wouldn't  dis- 
concert him;  he'd  make  sport  while  the  ground  was  shaking 
him  off  his  feet. 

When  greetings  were  over,  Julian  spoke  up,  "Madame 
Marat  has  insisted  that  we  take  supper  with  her.  The  carriage 
is  outside,  and  it's  time  we  were  going." 

Madame  Marat  was  the  mother  of  Jean  Marat.  She  was 
a  handsome,  sympathetic,  motherly  soul,  and  we  had  all 
sampled  her  cookery.  When  we  were  bowling  along  behind 
the  horses,  Julian  put  his  hand  on  my  knee.  "Wayne,"  he 
said,  "You  ought  to  have  seen  how  she  took  on  when  I  told 
her  you  had  lost  your  mother.  If  it  hadn't  been  winter  she 
would  have  taken  the  train  next  day,  and  gone  to  you.  But 
she  declared  she  would  never  have  lived  to  reach  there  in  the 
cold." 

When  we  had  climbed  the  stairs  and  gone  into  the  little 
parlor,  Madame  Marat  held  forth  her  hands  to  me,  "Ah,  mon 
cherel"  she  said.  And  she  had  me  in  her  motherly  clasp — 
only  a  mother  knows  how. 

Madame  pushed  us  in,  to  a  table  steaming  and  savory  with 
her  French  things,  dishes  she  knew  so  well  how  to  concoct. 
And  there  was  grinning  black  Rufe,  who  had  been  all  his  life 
in  the  service  of  Julian  Lamartine's  family.  And  then,  when 
the  meal  was  well  under  way,  and  we  had  all  had  our  fill 
of  comparing  notes,  Julian  opened  the  business  of  our  pro- 
jected voyage. 


WE   GET  INTERESTING  NEWS  5 

"  You  probably  noticed  that  I  hadn't  much  to  say  in  my 
letter  regarding  details,"  he  said,  "where  we're  going  and  so 
on.  The  fact  is,  I  don't  know." 

We  showed  our  interest. 

"  It  was  Rufe,  here,  that  picked  up  the  information,"  went 
on  Julian.  "I'm  going  to  let  him  tell  you  how  it  was.  Rufe," 
he  turned  to  the  black  fellow,  "tell  the  boys  how  you  found  the 
man." 

"  Well,"  began  Rufe,  "you  sees  I  got  some  kin  living  up 
Tchoupetoulas  way,  an'  I  hadn'  been  to  see  um  fo'  a  right 
smart  long  time.  So  I  goes.  An'  dere  I  meets  up  wid  a  niggah 
I  ain't  seed  befo',  whose  name  is  Amos.  He  ben  in  town  moh 
dan  a  week,  an'  he  was  low  down  sick — lef  by  some  ship  he 
been  a'  sailin'  on.  He's  home  way  off  some'ere,  he  don'  say 
where.  Well,  I  dopes  him  up  on  calomel  and  quinine,  like 
ol'  Mistah  Lamartine  use  ter  do,  an'  he  soon  gets  well,  an'  he 
kinder  tuck  a  shine  to  me.  An'  after  a  while  he  tells  me  how 
he  an'  a  brother  of  hisn  has  got  a  gol'  mine  some'eres,  an'  as 
how  his  father  discover  dat  gol'  mine.  Amos  was  a  little  pick- 
aninny then,  an'  his  father  tells  him  as  how  he  is  goin'  to  show 
him  dat  gol'  mine  when  he  gits  big  'nuff.  But  when  he  try 
to  sell  the  gol'  wat  he  take  fum  de  mine,  a  ornery  debbil  of 
a  white  man  gits  in  wid  Amos'  father  in  de  mine,  an'  murder 
him.  Amos  say  he  know  dat,  'cause  he's  father  nebber  come 
back,  and  dat  white  man,  he  jis'  is  swimmin'  in  gol'  fum  dat 
time  on. 

"  Amos  plumb  refuse  to  tell  whar  dat  place  is,  'cept  hit  on 
an  islan'  down  South  America  way.  But  he  say  ef  I  got  some 
sure  'nuff  hones'  folks  dat  '11  go,  he  take  'em  to  dat  island 
and  divide  up  fair  an'  square,  w'en  de  gol'  mine  is  foun'.  He 


6  THE  VOODOO   GOLD  TRAIL 

say  he  an'  his  brother  ain't  nebber  foun'  de  mine,  cause  dat 
white  man  tol'  'em  dat  ef  dey  come  nosin'  roun'  dey  is  goin' 
to  get  shot.  And  Amos  showed  me  in  his  leg  where  he  once 
did  git  shot." 

"  Well  say,"  broke  in  Ray,  "did  this  Amos  ever  show  you 
what  kind  of  stuff  he  burns  in  his  pipe?" 

"  Yes,  perhaps  he's  just  yarning,"  spoke  up  Robert,  "so  as 
to  get  somebody  to  take  him  back  home." 

Julian  shook  his  head. 

"  No,"  he  said.  "That's  what  I  thought  when  Rufe  first 
told  me  the  story.  But  I've  talked  with  him  enough  times 
to  feel  satisfied  he's  in  earnest.  He  tells  a  straight  story,  so 
far  as  he  will  tell.  And  he  refuses  to  say  where  the  island 
is,  but  agrees  to  take  us  there." 

We  all  saw  this  black  fellow,  Amos,  the  next  day,  and  we 
came  to  Julian's  conviction  of  the  fellow's  truthfulness;  though 
I  will  not  avouch  that  our  willingness  to  believe  had  not  some- 
thing to  do  with  it.  He  was  rather  a  taciturn,  sober-featured 
being.  His  hair  was  not  crinkly  like  the  average  negro,  and 
his  nose  resembled  an  Indian's.  Though  illiterate,  he  showed 
intelligence,  and  he  would  add  nothing  to  the  tale  he  had  told 
to  Rufe,  except  that  the  islands  of  Cuba  and  Jamaica  might 
be  considered  to  lie  in  the  path  to  this  island  of  his  nativity 
and  our  goal. 


CHAPTER  II 

WE    MEET   WITH    A    SERIOUS    REVERSE 

I  SHALL  not  dwell  on  our  preparations  for  the  voyage;  nor 
shall  I  attempt  a  lengthy  description  of  the  schooner  Pearl 
which  lay  in  the  Basin.  Jean  Marat's  eyes  sparkled,  when 
first  we  came  in  view  of  her.  She  was  of  one  hundred  and 
twenty-one  tons  burden,  and  sported  a  flying-jib,  jib,  fore  main- 
sail, fore-sail,  fore  gaff  top-sail,  main-sail,  and  main  gaff  top- 
sail. Forward,  a  companionway  led  down  to  the  men's 
quarters;  after,  the  cabin  roof,  with  its  grated  skylight,  was 
raised  but  a  little  above  the  deck.  Two  small  boats  hung  in 
davits.  The  cabin  was  sufficiently  spacious,  and  there  were 
four  staterooms,  and  then  there  was  the  galley — the  jolly 
Rufe's  domain.  And  he  took  great  pride  in  exhibiting  its 
treasures. 

A  day  early  in  August  saw  us  out  in  the  broad  Gulf  of 
Mexico,  all  of  the  Pearl's  sails  set  to  the  westerly  breeze. 
Madame  Marat  mothered  our  party.  In  fair  weather  when 
she  was  engineering  Rufe's  activities  in  the  galley,  she  sat 
with  her  lace- work  on  the  deck.  Even  the  roughest  of  the 
sailors  would  put  himself  in  the  way  of  her  smile. 

And  then,  late  one  afternoon  there  gradually  rose  out  of 
the  sea  the  higher  peaks  of  Jamaica.  And  on  the  following 
day  we  made  the  harbor  of  Kingston,  a  beautiful  city,  with 

7 


8  THE  VOODOO  GOLD  TRAIL 

its  fringe  of  cocoa  palms  at  the  front,  and  at  its  back  the 
mountains  clad  in  tropical  vegetation.  It  was  here  events 
were  brewing  that  were  to  set  a  kink  in  our  plans.  It  was 
here,  too,  that  Madame  Marat  had  old  friends  expecting  her 
arrival.  Indeed,  we  had  not  long  been  at  anchor  till  they  had 
found  us  out;  Monsieur  Paul  Duchanel  and  Madame  Duchanel. 

But  a  real  shock,  too,  awaited  us.  I  had  no  sooner  made 
my  bow  to  the  Duchanels  than  I  turned,  directed  by  Ray's 
grinning  look,  to  see  an  old  friend  of  our  former  voyage, 
Grant  Norris,  whom  we  had  believed  to  be  in  England.  He 
had  come  over  the  other  rail. 

"  Thought  you  were  going  to  slip  away  on  another  ramble 
without  me,  did  you?"  was  his  greeting. 

Julian  and  Marat  had  kept  this  thing  a  surprise  for  Ray, 

Robert  and  myself.    They  had  been  in  correspondence  with 

Norris,  and  he  had  found  it  convenient  to  join  us  here.    He 

explained  that  his  sister's  husband  had  been  sent  by  his  London 

-employers  to  represent  them  in  Jamaica. 

What  with  entertainment  in  the  home  of  the  Duchanels 
and  in  that  of  Norris's  sister,  and  the  drives  over  the  wonderful 
roads,  among  groves  of  palms,  mahogany,  and  multi-colored 
tropical  vegetation,  three  days  had  soon  gone.  It  was  on  the 
fourth  day  that  we  three  boys  found  the  cherished  opportunity 
to  turn  a  little  trick  at  the  expense  of  Jean  Marat  and  Grant 
Norris.  These  two  were  crack  shots  with  the  rifle;  we  had 
witnessed  samples  of  their  shooting  years  back.  On  this  day 
we  six  drove  out  of  Kingston  some  miles,  to  a  mountain  stream 
to  fish.  Robert  and  I  carried  what  purported  to  be  cases 
holding  fancy  fishing  rods.  Ray  was  to  manage  the  show. 

"  Now,  gentlemen,"  he  began,  when  we  had  settled  down 


WE  MEET  WITH  A  SERIOUS  REVERSE          9 

on  a  grassy  slope  beside  the  stream,  "now,  gentlemen,  I  want 
to  show  you  the  trick  of  the  disappearing  mangoes."  He  pro- 
duced two  small  green  mangoes  and  set  one  each  on  the  ends 
of  two  long  bamboo  fishing  rods.  These  he  handed  to  Marat 
and  Norris.  "Now,  gentlemen,"  he  again  began  his  speech, 
"wave  them  slowly  from  side  to  side.  Watch  the  mangoes 
very  carefully  and  see  them  disappear.  Watch  very  carefully 
or  you  will  miss  it." 

Robert  and  I  had  slipped  away  behind  the  bushes  to  a 
distance  of  about  sixty  yards.  Marat  and  Norris  smilingly 
watched  the  mangoes,  as  they  waved  them  far  above  their 
heads.  Then  suddenly  their  faces  changed,  as  the  mangoes 
shattered,  as  if  from  an  internal  explosion. 

Robert  and  I  sped  back,  as  the  two  astounded  men  were 
scratching  their  heads  over  Ray's  trick.  And  we  exhibited 
our  .22  caliber  rifles,  fitted  with  silencers. 

"  Ah,  that  was  ver'  clever,"  said  Marat,  as  he  slapped  us 
on  the  back. 

Norris  rolled  Robert  in  the  grass  in  playful  punishment. 
"To  think,"  said  Norris,  "that  these  kids  would  play  a  trick 
like  that  on  us!  — and  to  put  silencers  on  their  guns." 

Robert  and  I  had  worked  long,  and  expended  very  much 
ammunition,  in  our  ambition  to  emulate  these  two  rifle-men, 
and  now  we  had  our  reward. 

When  we  arrived  back  in  Kingston  with  our  basket  of 
fish  that  evening,  it  was  to  hear  startling  news.  There  was 
great  excitement  in  the  home  of  the  Duchanels.  A  family  of 
close  friends  and  neighbors  had  this  day  been  bereft  of  their 
little  seven-year-old  daughter,  Marie  Cambon.  She  had  been 
last  seen  before  noon  at  play  in  the  yard  of  the  Cambon  home, 


10  THE  VOODOO  GOLD  TRAIL 

where  there  was  much  growth  of  flowers  and  decorative  bushes, 
at  the  back.  The  city  and  surrounding  country  was  being 
carefully  searched,  we  were  told. 

Our  party  was  making  preparations  to  join  in  the  search 
when  black  Rufe  appeared.  His  usual  jovial  face  was  a  pic- 
ture of  terror. 

"  Amos,  he  done  daid,"  he  announced. 

"Amos  dead!"  said  Julian,  "What,  how  —  what  do  you 
mean?"  he  stammered. 

Rufe  told  the  story.  He  and  Amos  had  been  on  board  the 
Pearl  when  the  news  of  the  disappearance  of  the  Cambon 
child  came  to  them.  "It's  the  voodoo,"  Amos  had  said.  And 
thereupon  he  became  restless,  and  presently  was  for  rowing 
ashore.  He  wanted  to  get  a  nearer  view  of  a  certain  sailing 
vessel  he  pointed  out;  but  insisted  on  getting  that  view  from 
some  place  up  the  shore;  he  would  not  go  near  it  in  a  boat.  So 
the  two  rowed  to  shore  and  made  their  way  toward  the  de- 
sired spot.  It  was  a  sheltered  region  amongst  the  trees  and 
brush.  Amos  was  well  in  advance  of  Rufe.  Suddenly  a  group 
of  two  blacks  and  one  white  man  appeared  in  an  open  space. 

"  Dat  white  man  an'  Amos  on  a  suddent  stopped,"  said 
Rufe,  "like  two  high  stumps,  de  white  man  wid  his  han'  to 
his  face.  Den  Amos  turn  'roun'  an'  say,  'Run!'  And  he  run 
one  way,  an'  I  run  anoder.  I  run  nigh  half  a  mile,  an'  den 
I  gets  ashame'  o'  myse'f  an'  stop.  I  run  jes'  'cause  he  sayed 
'run.'  I  sayed  to  myse'f,  'Dis  ain't  no  way  fo'  you  to  do,'  an' 
den  I  goes  back.  I  goes  de  way  I  seen  Amos  run —  I  picked  up 
a  club,  not  a  knowin'  jis'  what  hits  all  about.  I  didn'  go  fur 
till  I  see  Amos  lyin'  on  de  groun',  an'  a  puddle  o'  blood.  An' 
he  was  plumb  daid." 


WE  MEET  WITH  A  SERIOUS   REVERSE         11 

"  Did  you  hear  a  shot?"  said  Norris. 

"No,  dar  warn't  no  shot;  hit  was  a  knife  dat  did  it,"  de- 
clared Rufe.  "Now  you-all  know,  Julian,"  continued  the  poor 
black,  "it  ain't  my  way  to  run;  I  run  jes'  'cause  he  sayed 
run." 

We  reassured  him,  telling  him  we  knew  him  too  well  to 
doubt.  And  then  we  took  steps  to  recover  the  body. 

Darkness  had  spread  over  the  city  and  harbor  by  this 
time.  With  Rufe's  help  effort  was  made  to  identify  the  vessel 
that  had  excited  Amos's  curiosity;  and  it  was  learned,  finally, 
that  a  sailing  vessel  had  moved  out  of  the  harbor  soon  after 
darkness  had  fallen;  and  before  the  return  of  day  it  became 
possible  to  identify  the  vessel.  It  was  the  schooner  Josephine, 
owned  by  a  Monsieur  Mordaunt,  that  had  thus  stolen  away 
in  the  murk. 

It  was  then  the  parents  of  the  missing  little  Marie  Cambon 
made  known  to  us  certain  facts  that  had  apparently  strong 
bearing  on  these  events.  For  a  year  past  this  M.  Mordaunt 
had  been  a  suitor  for  the  hand  of  their  elder  daughter, 
Josephine.  He  had  come  to  Kingston  in  his  handsome  yacht; 
and  had  almost  taken  the  society  of  Kingston  by  storm.  He 
appeared  well  educated,  accomplished,  and  apparently  pos- 
sessed vast  riches,  expending  money  with  astounding  lavishness. 
He  professed  to  come  from  France,  but  balked  all  efforts  to 
induce  him  to  be  particular  as  to  his  antecedents;  till  finally 
it  became  whispered  about  that  this  Mordaunt  bore  an  as- 
sumed name,  and  that  he  not  only  was  of  mixed  blood,  but 
that  some  of  it  was  ignoble  blood. 

It  was  then  Cambon  forbade  him  the  house.  For  the  past 
several  weeks  he  had  sought  an  interview  with  Miss  Josephine, 


12  THE  VOODOO   GOLD  TRAIL 

who  had  been  dutifully  guided  by  her  parents,  though  she  was 
slow  to  accept  the  unfavorable  reports. 

The  next  day  following  the  tragedy  there  came  news  of  a 
mysterious  ship's  boat  having  put  in  in  the  night  beyond  Port- 
land Point,  and  taken  on  a  pair  of  black  men  who  had  with 
them  a  huge  hamper. 

Madame  Cambon's  condition  was  pitiable.  Not  a  tear  did 
she  shed;  she  was  dazed  and  all  but  dumb  of  the  shock.  She 
would  not  rest,  but  must  go  with  the  others  in  the  search.  She 
walked  until  her  limbs  gave  way,  then  she  must  continue  in 
a  carriage.  In  the  morning  her  strength  failed,  and  blessed 
unconsciousness  came.  It  was  Madame  Marat  took  her  in 
hand. 

Our  party  joined  in  the  hunt,  and  it  was  not  till  noon  of 
the  day  following  the  disappearance,  that  all  came  together 
again.  We  had  been  guided  by  people  of  Kingston  in  the 
search.  Now  we  of  the  Pearl  had  all  come  to  experience  a 
desire  to  put  our  heads  together  to  some  purpose  as  a  separate 
party.  It  quickly  developed  that  all  minds  were  as  one  on 
several  particulars.  Even  had  we  not  lost  our  guide  in  the 
quest  for  gold,  that  lure  had  been  pushed  aside  by  this  new, 
humane  call. 

"  And  now,"  said  Norris,  "We've  got  to  decide  what's  to 
be  our  line." 

"  And  you  all  know  as  well  as  I  do,"  began  Ray,  "who  it 
is  that's  got  it  all  figured  out." 

And  they  all  turned  their  eyes  on  myself.  It  was  always 
Ray's  way,  when  in  the  old  days  our  little  troop  of  boys  met 
problems,  he  usually  contrived  to  put  the  solution  up  to  me. 
During  our  former  voyage,  whenever  an  enigma  presented,  he 


WE  MEET  WITH  A  SERIOUS  REVERSE         13 

discouraged  all  efforts  of  the  others  by  assuring  them  that 
Wayne  would  work  it  out  without  half  trying;  just  leave  it  all 
to  him!  And  there  was  the  inevitable  result.  Ray  was  al- 
ways incorrigible. 

A  number  of  circumstances  were  significant:  This  M. 
Mordaunt  held  a  grievance  against  the  Cambon  family;  his 
character  is  at  least  under  suspicion;  the  time  and  manner  of 
his  sailing  away  is  also  suspicious;  the  close  association  be- 
tween Amos's  getting  the  news  of  the  child's  disappearance  and 
his  suddenly  awakened  interest  in  that  vessel  in  the  harbor 
was  a  suspicious  circumstance;  it  developed  that  Mordaunt 's 
yacht  lay  opposite  to  that  point  to  which  Amos  went  to  ob- 
tain a  nearer  view  of  the  vessel  of  his  interest;  it  is  very  prob- 
able that  the  white  man  seen  by  Rufe  was  Mordaunt,  and 
that  he  it  was  caused  Amos's  death;  that  it  must  have  been 
that  Amos  had  some  knowledge  of  him  the  publishing  of  which 
he  had  some  reason  to  fear;  this  Mordaunt  then  must  be  a 
very  fiend;  on  learning  of  the  child's  disappearance  Amos 
had  declared  that  it  was  the  voodoo,  and  according  to  Rufe's 
account  he  talked  like  he  knew  —  this  is  a  thing  Madame 
Cambon  must  not  hear  of — 

"Jus'  so,"  agreed  Marat.  "She  could  not  stand  to  think 
that." 

"Now  then,"  I  said,  "we  are  agreed  on  one  thing.  We 
must  seek  Mordaunt's  schooner  yacht  Josephine,  and  not  for- 
get voodoo  for  a  guide." 

"  Of  course  we're  agreed  on  it,"  said  Ray,  in  his  tantalizing 
manner,  mingling  sport  with  earnest. 


CHAPTER  III 

WE   SAIL  ON  A  DIFFERENT   QUEST 

THERE  were  none  among  us  who  had  not  heard  stories  of 
the  voodoo,  of  that  strange  snake  worship  of  the  negroes;  how 
at  night  the  devotees  came  together  secretly  in  the  forest; 
and  how  they  got  themselves  into  a  frenzy  of  excitement  with 
the  music  of  the  drum  and  the  drinking  of  rum,  which  they 
mixed  with  the  blood  of  fowls,  or  better  that  of  a  goat;  how 
at  times  they  were  not  satisfied  with  anything  less  than  the 
blood  of  a  human  (the  goat  without  horns').  It  was  more 
often  a  child,  black  or  white,  which  was  sacrificed  to  the 
voodoo  god,  which  was  incarnate  in  the  form  of  a  small  green 
snake,  kept  in  a  basket  on  a  platform,  on  which  appeared 
the  papaloi  or  mamaloi  who  presided  at  the  horrid  ceremony. 
Then  it  became  an  orgie — dancing — cannibalism,  for  after  the 
warm  blood  had  been  drunk,  the  flesh  was  boiled  and  eaten. 

Thus  you  can  imagine  our  horror  at  the  thought  of  sweet 
little  Marie  Cambon  falling  into  such  hands;  and  so  too  you 
will  understand  our  easy  abandonment  of  every  other  ambi- 
tion that  we  might  turn  our  zeal  toward  the  rescue  of  this 
poor  innocent. 

Monsieur  Cambon 's  suspicions,  too,  had  turned  to  this 
Mordaunt,  when  the  report  of  the  schooner's  flight  in  the  dark 
had  come  to  him,  and  particularly  so  when  the  news  came  of 

14 


WE  SAIL  ON  A  DIFFERENT  QUEST  15 

the  mysterious  landing  of  a  boat  to  take  off  the  black  men 
with  the  great  basket.  But  we  of  the  Pearl  were  very  care- 
ful not  to  repeat  to  Cambon  anything  of  Amos's  mention  of 
the  voodoo.  Such  a  blow  to  let  strike  a  parent,  we  felt,  would 
serve  no  purpose. 

Let  us  pass  over  those  hours  of  preparation  for  the  sailing 
in  pursuit  of  the  schooner  Josephine. 

Monsieur  Cambon,  accompanied  by  his  daughter,  Josephine, 
came  with  us  to  the  boat,  to  give  last  expression  of  gratitude 
and  God  speed.  Miss  Josephine  pulled  me  aside  for  a  word. 
Her  face  was  pale,  and  a  wild  look  was  in  her  eyes  as  they 
gazed  into  mine. 

"You  go  after  him!"  She  meant  it  for  a  question,  though 
she  gave  it  the  form  of  an  accusation. 

I  made  no  denial. 

"He  did  not  steal  Marie!"  she  said,  her  tone  expressing  a 
wish  rather  than  a  conviction.  I  could  see  that  she,  even,  now 
had  begun  to  doubt,  for  she  knew,  too,  that  Mordaunt  had 
stolen  away  under  cover  of  night. 

"  I  am  convinced  he  did,"  I  asserted. 

Her  face  became  more  pale.    "Oh,  tell  me!"  she  said. 

I  considered  a  moment;  then  decided  that  it  would  be  a 
kindness,  if  I  could  cure  her  of  her  belief  in  this  man.  Pledg- 
ing her  to  secrecy  I  then  told  her  Rufe's  story  of  Amos,  though 
carefully  omitting  any  mention  of  the  voodoo.  I  believe  she 
matched  other  circumstances  with  what  I  had  to  say,  to  the 
end  that  conviction  was  stealing  into  her  heart.  Finally  she 
spoke. 

"Oh,  I  didn't  want  to  believe!"  she  said.  "Oh,  I  hope  he 
will  die!" 


16  THE  VOODOO  GOLD  TRAIL 

And  she  turned  away. 

It  was  at  four  bells  of  the  morning  watch  (ten  o'clock) 
that  we  sailed  out  of  Kingston  harbor.  We  set  our  course 
to  the  east  in  spite  of  the  fact  that  the  mysterious  boat  had 
landed  to  the  west,  beyond  Portland  Point;  the  home  of  the 
voodoo  was  to  the  east,  not  to  the  west.  He  who  was  our 
guide  living,  was  still  our  guide,  though  dead.  Indeed  there 
seemed  almost  ground  for  believing  that  his  spirit  continued 
to  direct  us,  on  a  number  of  occasions,  when  we  were  com- 
pletely at  a  loss. 

Madame  Marat  had  remained  in  Kingston;  so  the  Pearl 
company  consisted  of  Grant  Norris,  Jean  Marat,  Julian  Lamar- 
tine,  Rufe,  Ray  Reid,  Robert  Murtry,  and  myself,  not  to 
mention  the  sailors,  forward. 

When  we  had  passed  Morant  Point,  Captain  Marat  set  the 
course  east  north-east.  We  aimed  for  the  home  of  the 
voodoo.  It  was  the  only  clue  we  had.  At  midnight  we 
sighted  the  white  flash  of  an  island  light;  it  was  day  when 
we  passed  the  towering  rock.  Then  at  last  the  peaks  of  the 
great  island  we  sought  began  to  creep  up  out  of  the  sea.  The 
great  jumbled  mass  of  rocks  came  even  nearer,  spreading  out 
as  if  to  engulf  us,  till,  on  the  following  day  we  dropped  anchor 
off  the  city. 

It  was  not  a  cheerful  passage,  this  from  island  to  island. 
Even  Ray  had  been  caught  in  the  general  gloom.  We  had 
time,  each  severally,  during  these  two  days,  to  come,  by  re- 
flection, to  a  realization  of  the  apparent  hopelessness  of  our 
task.  Beyond  the  almost  haphazard  selection  of  this  one  large 
port  as  our  first  point  of  contact,  we  had  no  plan.  While  the 
query, — what  next?  was  uppermost  in  the  minds  of  each,  he 


WE  SAIL  ON  A  DIFFERENT  QUEST  17 

dreaded  to  hear  another — every  other — confess  that  he  did 
not  know.  For  of  necessity  he  could  not  know.  And  so,  when 
we  moved  in,  in  that  late  afternoon,  seeking  a  suitable  anchor- 
age, every  eye — independently — sought  out  every  sail  within 
view,  only  half  daring  to  hope  for  a  sight  of  a  vessel  that 
should  appear  to  be  the  Josephine. 

When  everything  had  been  made  snug  above  deck,  and  the 
harbor  officials  had  made  their  visit,  dusk  was  on.  No  move 
could  be  made  until  morning.  And  then  came  supper.  All 
lingered  at  the  table,  knowing  that  the  time  had  come  for  a 
council  of  war.  It  was  Norris  who  volunteered  to  open  the 
ball. 

"  Well  comrades,"  he  began,  seeking  to  be  cheerful,  "I  sup- 
pose we'll  now  have  to  decide  on  a  fresh  start.  How  are  we 
going  to  find  out  if  the  Josephine  is  here?" 

"  Well,"  said  Captain  Marat,  "If  she  have  not  change  her 
name,  that  will  be  easy." 

Captain  Marat  had  hit  on  the  thing  that  was  troubling 
us  all.  The  man  Mordaunt,  we  knew,  had  at  one  time  changed 
the  name  of  his  vessel  to  honor  her  whom  he  had  hoped  to 
make  his  wife,  and  now  he  might  have  two  reasons  for  making 
another  change  in  name:  He  had  been  disappointed  in  his 
hope,  and  there  was  the  criminal  reason  —  for  concealment. 
None  had  taken  any  note  of  the  schooner,  and  Monsier  Cam- 
bon's  description  of  the  vessel  made  a  picture  that  answered 
for  almost  any  schooner  yacht  of  dimensions  a  little  greater 
than  the  Pearl. 

It  was  also  unfortunate  that  none  of  us  had  set  eyes  on 
this  man  Mordaunt.  But  Monsieur  Cambon  had  been  able  to 
give  us  one  characteristic  of  the  man  that  might  go  far  toward 


18  THE   VOODOO  GOLD  TRAIL 

identifying  him,  should  we  be  fortunate  enough  to  encounter 
him  under  favorable  conditions.  Cambon  described  him  as 
of  medium  though  strong  build;  of  finely  chiseled,  rather  hand- 
some features;  black  eyes,  black  hair,  which  he  wore  a  little 
long  and  which  was  disposed  to  curl.  His  manners  Cambon 
described  as  studiously  polished,  if  self-assertive.  But  the 
single  characteristic  that  interested  me  most  was  a  certain 
mannerism. 

"  Sometimes,"  M.  Cambon  had  said,  "when  he  is  uncon- 
scious of  his  surroundings,  deeply  cogitating  on  something, 
he  will  take  the  lobe  of  his  ear  between  thumb  and  finger, 
pulling  or  stroking  —  like  when  others  scratch  the  head  when 
they  are  puzzled." 

It  took  us  but  a  short  time  to  determine  on  a  course.  Some 
were  to  go  in  a  small  boat  among  the  many  ships  of  the  harbor, 
while  others  should  visit  the  city.  We  spent  an  hour  on  deck, 
breathing  the  balmy  air,  and  watching  the  many  lights  of 
the  ships  and  the  city.  There,  too,  was  the  revolving  red 
light  on  Point  Lomentin,  and  the  green  light,  set  in  by  the 
city. 

We  were  early  astir,  all  eager  to  be  doing.  Ray  and  Julian 
went  with  Grant  Norris  to  sail  about  the  harbor,  to  seek  news 
of  the  Josephine;  Robert  and  myself,  with  Captain  Marat, 
rowed  to  a  wharf  of  the  city.  It  was  verily  a  city  of  blacks. 
Mulattoes  were  few,  and  we  walked  up  and  down  numerous 
streets  before  we  found  a  white  man  whose  appearance  en- 
couraged us.  He  was  a  Frenchman,  seated  before  an  apothe- 
cary shop.  The  smile  on  his  thin  smooth-shaven  face  invited 
us  to  stop.  He  and  Captain  Marat  were  directly  in  conver- 
sation, in  the  tongue  they  knew  best. 


WE  SAIL  ON  A  DIFFERENT  QUEST  19 

The  Frenchman  gave  us  his  name — Jules  Sevier — and  had 
us  into  his  shop,  with  its  many  bottles  of  patent  medicines, 
in  rows.  He  and  Marat  sipped  French  wine  while  they  con- 
tinued their  talk.  At  last  the  apothecary  turned  to  Robert 
and  myself. 

"  Ah,"  he  said,  "I  am  'fraid  you  have  one  ver'  deeficult  task. 
But  I  am  glad  you  fin'  your  way  to  me.  I  will  help  you  all 
I  can." 

It  developed  that  he  knew  nothing  of  either  the  schooner 
Josephine  or  M.  Mordaunt,  or  anyone  to  fit  the  description 
Marat  was  able  to  give  him.  But  after  listening  to  the  re- 
cital of  the  circumstances  (set  about  the  disappearance  of 
little  Marie  Cambon)  he  said, — "Oui,  oui!  it  was  thad  man. 
Such  things  like  thad  have  happen  more  times  than  the  world 
think.  You  have  come  to  the  right  place." 

Jules  Sevier  at  the  last  told  us  that  he  would  make  some 
private  inquiries,  and  advised  that  we  come  back  on  the  fol- 
lowing day  to  learn  the  results. 

We  were  soon  in  our  boat,  somewhat  cheered  by  the  bit 
of  encouragement  we'd  got,  alloyed  as  it  was. 

"  I  think  it's  a  good  sign,"  declared  Robert,  "that  we  went 
so  straight  to  that  man.  He  can  help  us  if  anybody  can." 

Robert  was  something  of  a  fatalist  you  see. 

"  Yes,  he  know  ver'  much  about  the  voodoo,"  said  Jean 
Marat. 

We  boarded  the  Pearl,  to  wait  several  hours  before  the  others 
showed  up.  When  they  drew  near  we  could  see  that  they  had 
been  unsuccessful.  They  had  found  no  schooner  of  the  name 
sought,  nor  any  with  a  newly  painted  name. 


20  THE  VOODOO   GOLD  TRAIL 

"  Of  course,"  said  Norris,  "she  might  be  lying  hid  behind 
some  small  island,  or  point,  miles  away,  and  it  will  take  any- 
way a  week  to  find  out." 


CHAPTER  IV 

WE    PICK   UP    THE    TRAIL 

IN  the  morning  all  but  Rufe  went  to  shore.  Rufe  would 
have  none  of  it. 

"  Say,"  he  said,  when  Ray  offered  to  remain  aboard  in  his 
place,  "say,  you-all,  you  ain't  guine  git  dis  niggah  in  dat  town 
to  be  voodooed  by  dem  heathen  niggahs.  Hum-n!  An'  I  ain't 
got  no  rabbit-fut,  nor  nuthing." 

Julian,  Ray,  and  Norris  went  sight-seeing,  while  Marat, 
Robert,  and  I  made  our  way  to  the  apothecary  shop. 

Jules  Sevier  greeted  us. 

"  I  ver'  sorry  I  have  no  news  for  you,"  he  said.  "There  is 
one,  I  could  not  find,  who  have  a  son  who  carry  the  mail,  and 
know  ver'  much  of  thees  country.  Maybe  tomorrow  she  weel 
be  home,  and  we  can  learn  sometheeng." 

He  ushered  us  into  the  shop,  where  there  awaited  us  a 
black  woman  of  middle  age,  who,  Sevier  said,  would  tell  us  a 
tale  that  we  would  travel  far  to  find  a  match  for.  She  could 
speak  only  in  the  French;  so  Jean  Marat  got  her  tale,  which 
he  interpreted  for  Robert  and  myself. 

Her  husband  had  been  a  voodoo  devotee;  but  twelve  years 
ago  he  had  been  induced  to  renounce  the  worship,  and  turn 
to  one  of  the  Christian  denominations.  One  of  his  old  asso- 

21 


22  THE  VOODOO  GOLD   TRAIL 

dates  contrived  to  introduce  into  his  food  one  of  the  poisons 
so  well  known  to  the  voodoo. 

The  man  died. 

The  authorities  insisted  on  his  immediate  burial.  The  poor 
widow  had  gone  to  visit  his  grave  on  the  following  day,  only 
to  find  his  empty  coffin,  beside  the  opened  grave.  The  body 
was  gone.  The  remains  were  found,  however,  hours  later,  with 
the  heart  and  lungs  removed.  She  said  she  then  was  con- 
vinced poison  had  been  given  him  to  put  him  in  a  trance,  and 
that  the  voodoo  worshipers  had  exhumed  him  a  few  hours 
after  burial,  and  resuscitated  him,  to  obtain  the  living  blood 
for  admixture  with  the  rum,  and  to  take  the  heart  for  a  voodoo 
feast. 

When  the  woman  had  gone,  Jules  Sevier  told  us  that  he 
was  prepared  to  escort  some  one  of  us  to  witness  an  actual 
voodoo  ceremonial  that  very  night.  He  assured  us  that  by 
reason  of  the  nearness  of  the  locality  to  the  city,  our  sensi- 
bilities would  be  subjected  to  no  greater  shock  than  to  witness 
the  sacrifice  of  fowls.  We  none  of  us  confessed  to  over  much 
curiosity,  even  for  so  mild  a  show;  but  in  this  quest  we  were 
on,  some  more  actual  knowledge  of  these  practices  might  stand 
us  in  good  stead. 

It  fell  to  me  to  be  Sevier 's  companion  on  the  excursion; 
and  I  returned  alone,  at  dusk,  to  take  supper  with  him,  and 
prepare  for  the  show.  The  apothecary  assured  me  that  if  we 
were  to  go  as  white  men,  we  should  see  little  to  our  purpose, 
since  it  would  then  be  necessary  to  depart  before  any  important 
part  of  the  ceremonial  should  begin.  So  he  brought  into  a 
back-room  certain  grease-paints,  and  a  pair  of  black,  woolly 
wigs,  and  two  outfits — jackets,  trousers,  and  hats, — of  the 


23 

same  nondescript  style  that  I  had  seen  on  the  streets  of  the 
city. 

He  set  to  work  to  help  me  to  smear  and  rig  myself  first; 
and  when  the  operation  was  complete  he  set  a  glass  before 
me.  I  was  shocked  at  the  spectacle,  and  I  set  to,  to  rubbing 
my  wrist,  to  see  if  this  black  stain  might  not  be  permanent, 
so  natural  did  it  appear.  It  refused  to  rub  off.  Sevier  saw  my 
embarrassment,  and  laughingly  assured  me  that  any  tallow 
would  take  it  off. 

We  passed  out  at  the  back,  into  the  dark,  and  made 
our  way  through  the  streets.  The  rows  of  unattractive  build- 
ings with  their  second  story  balconies,  shallow  and  overhang- 
ing, were  like  the  pictures  I'd  seen  of  the  Chinatown  of  a 
great  city.  The  stench  from  the  gutters  was  nauseating,  the 
heat  stifling.  We  had  presently  passed  the  outskirts  of  the 
city,  and  were  treading  a  rough  road. 

For  some  time  I  had  been  cocking  my  ear  to  a  distant  sound. 
It  began  as  a  scarcely  discernible  rumble;  then  it  would  swell 
to  a  roar,  as  of  an  approaching  storm,  and  die  away,  and  then 
swell  again,  and  then  fall  away  again,  in  a  most  improper  and 
bewildering  fashion.  The  blackened  apothecary  at  my  side 
informed  me  that  it  was  the  Ka — the  voodoo  drum,  and  that  I 
should  presently  see  the  drummer.  When  we  had  covered  some 
above  a  mile  of  this  road,  the  drummer  seemed  to  have  taken 
his  instrument  and  gone  some  considerable  distance  away,  for 
the  rumble  had  now  become  scarce  audible.  But  my  con- 
ductor informed  me  it  was  a  peculiarity  of  the  thing  that  it 
was  heard  with  greater  distinctness  at  a  distance  than  when 
near  by;  and  so  the  lesser  sound  was  evidence  that  we  were 
drawing  near  our  goal.  The  skin  over  my  spine  was  becom- 


24  THE  VOODOO  GOLD  TRAIL 

ing  a  bit  rreepy.  The  ghostly  palms  looked  down  on  us,  and 
seemed  to  whisper  things.  If  I  had  been  alone  I  am  quite 
sure  I  should  have  turned  back.  In  an  interval  between  the 
rumblings  of  the  drum  I  heard  a  cricket,  and  that  familiar 
sound  gave  me  some  comfort. 

Then  at  last  we  made  out  a  great  fire  ahead,  and  between 
us  and  the  leaping  flames  were  many  dusky  figures,  grotes- 
quely capering.  As  we  approached  we  saw  that  one  or  two 
were  already  in  a  frenzy  of  excitement,  and  there  was  con- 
stant drinking.  Then  I  made  out  the  drummer.  He  was 
sitting  astride  of  what  appeared  to  be  a  cask,  his  fingers  play- 
ing upon  the  end.  The  dancers  seemed  as  if  they  would  fly 
into  the  treetops  with  ecstacy,  at  each  swelling  of  the  sound. 

We  two  kept  well  out  in  the  shadows,  till  all  of  that  hundred 
or  more  of  blacks  seemed  to  have  reached  the  height  of  intoxi- 
cation; then  we  moved  in.  Finally  the  dancing  ceased,  and  an 
old  crone  in  a  red  robe  mounted  a  rude  platform,  taking  her 
place  beside  the  snake-box. 

She  first  addressed  the  mob;  and  then  each  worshiper  in 
turn  came  forward,  spoke  words,  and  lay  some  offering  before 
the  box.  My  companion  whispered  me  the  explanation  that 
they  were  asking  favors.  The  old  crone  —  the  mamaloi  —  set 
her  ear  to  the  box,  and  gave  out  the  answers,  one  by  one. 

All  now  crowded  close,  as  the  mamaloi  seized  a  white  rooster 
by  the  head  in  the  one  hand,  flashing  a  knife  in  the  other.  A 
sweep  of  the  blade,  and  the  black  devotees  directly  were  mix- 
ing blood  with  the  rum  in  their  cups,  which  they  drank.  Fowl 
after  fowl  followed  the  first,  and  all  presently  found  their  way 
into  pots  for  cooking.  And  the  wild  caperings  recommenced 
with  the  drinking,  and  the  shouting,  and  all. 


WE  PICK  UP  THE  TRAIL  25 

I  began  to  sicken  of  the  spectacle;  and  then  I  noted  sus- 
picious eyes  taking  us  in.  It  was  then  Jules  Sevier  whispered 
me — "Come,  it  is  time  we  go  now."  And  so  we  slipped  off  in 
the  shadows. 

The  drum  ceased  its  rumble,  and  the  tree-frogs  began  their 
warble:  to  which  music  I  trod  the  dark  road  with  a  lighter 
step.  "They  will  keep  on,"  said  Sevier,  "till  they  be  exhaust', 
or  ver'  drunk,  and  then  they  fall,  and  sleep  all  the  day." 

Certain  odors  of  the  dank  vegetation  filled  my  nostrils; 
similar  odors  ever  after  have  served  to  recall  the  spectacle  I 
had  witnessed  that  night. 

The  city  was  quiet;  the  populace  seemed  all  to  be  sleeping. 
The  howling  of  some  cats  was  all  the  sound  we  heard  as  we 
threaded  the  streets. 

Soon  we  were  busied  with  removing  the  black  stain  from 
our  skins.  The  operation  consumed  nearly  an  hour — with  the 
fats,  the  soap,  and  the  rubbing.  And  then  I  was  lighted  to  my 
bed  by  Sevier. 

We  were  at  breakfast,  when  there  arrived  at  the  back  door 
the  mother  of  the  mail  carrier,  that  Sevier  had  told  us  of.  The 
apothecary  had  her  in,  and  questioned  her  while  we  ate.  She 
had  no  knowledge  of  any  Monsieur  Mordaunt,  but  her  son 
had  often  made  mention  of  one  Duran,  a  white  man,  of  the 
north  coast,  who  was  much  abroad  in  his  schooner  yacht,  and 
who  had,  many  years  back,  come  suddenly  into  untold  wealth. 
It  was  said  the  source  was  wealthy  connections  in  France. 

"Ah,  thad  is  your  man!"  said  Jules  Sevier,  when  he  had 
repeated  to  me  what  the  woman  told.  "Thad  is  your  man. 
Duran  he  is  on  this  island,  Mordaunt  w'en  he  is  in  Jamaica, 
or  where  not." 


26  THE  VOODOO  GOLD  TRAIL 

In  an  hour,  appeared  Captain  Marat  and  Robert.  While 
they  were  not  a  little  entertained  by  the  account  of  my  last 
night's  experiences,  they  found  greater  interest  in  the  news 
of  the  morning. 

"  We're  on  his  trail  now,"  declared  Robert. 

"  Yes,"  agreed  Marat.  "Now  it  weel  not  be  hard  to  find 
heem,  I  theenk." 

But  Jules  Sevier  had  a  word  to  say.  He  spoke  rapidly  in 
French  with  Jean  Marat  for  some  minutes;  then  he  turned  to 
Robert  and  myself. 

"  I  have  explain'  to  Captain  Marat,"  he  said,  "thad  eet 
will  not  do  to  spik  weeth  the  authorities  about  thees  matter. 
The  authorities  are  too  much  in  the  voodoo  themselv'.  You 
weel  have  to  keep  quiet  about  thees  business,  except  w'en  you 
know  with  whom  you  spik.  The  voodoo  are  ver'  strong  in 
thee  government  here." 

Sevier  left  his  shop  in  the  care  of  an  assistant,  and  accom- 
panied us  to  the  shore.  He  gave  us  much  valuable  informa- 
tion about  the  region  to  which  we  were  going,  and  advice  as 
to  our  dealing  with  the  natives.  Before  we  stepped  into  the 
boat  he  held  out  a  small  parcel  to  me. 

"  Here  is  some  supply  of  the  paint,"  he  said,  "and  the 
two  black  wigs.  They  may  be  of  use  to  you,  if  you  go  back 
in  the  country.  Remember  these  people  ver'  suspicious  of 
white  men." 

It  was  with  some  relish  that  we  up  anchor  and  away  from 
that  city  of  stenches.  The  heat  was  oppressive,  of  which  we 
got  some  relief  when  well  out  to  sea. 

What  with  squalls,  followed  by  dead  calms,  which  in  turn 
flung  us  about,  and  then  held  us  much  off  our  course,  it  was 


WE  PICK  UP  THE  TRAIL  27 

some  days  before  the  Pearl  finally  approached  the  land  again, 
this  time  on  the  north  coast  of  this  island  of  towering  peaks. 

We  delayed  the  noon  meal  until  we  had  cast  our  anchor 
within  the  sheltering  reefs.  Our  first  care  was  to  search  the 
harbor  for  some  vessel  answering  the  description  of  the 
Josephine,  owner  M.  Duran.  And  we  were  in  no  doubt  that 
Duran  and  Mordaunt  were  one  and  the  same.  Both  our  boats 
were  lowered,  and  manned  by  two  parties  of  searchers:  Cap- 
tain Marat,  Ray,  and  Robert  went  in  one,  Grant  Norris, 
Julian  Lamartine,  and  myself  set  off  in  the  other.  There 
were  sailing  vessels  a  plenty  in  the  harbor,  but  not  one  whose 
appearance  touched  our  present  interest.  But  when  our  boat 
returned  to  the  Pearl,  the  three  of  us  a  bit  dejected  over  our 
non-success,  we  found  the  others  awaiting  us,  and  having  a 
different  story.  They  had  not  found  the  schooner  we  sought, 
but  they  had  at  any  rate  come  across  news  of  her.  Captain 
Marat  had  chanced  to  speak  with  the  first  officer  of  a  steamer 
in  from  Kingston  on  the  day  before. 

"  This  man  say,"  exclaimed  Captain  Marat,  "thad  w'en 
the  steamer  come  in,  he  see  the  Josephine,  which  he  recognize 
to  have  seen  in  Kingston  harbor,  and  she  have  a  new  name 
painted  on — Orion.  An'  ver'  soon  after,  he  see  the  Orion  sail 
away  out  of  the  harbor." 

At  this  last  bit  I  felt  my  heart  fall. 

"  Don't  cry  yet,  Wayne,"  said  Ray,  "wait  till  you  hear  the 
rest." 

And  then  Jean  Marat  went  on  to  relate  how  he  had  con- 
tinued his  inquiries,  with  the  result  that  he  had  found  a  sailor 
whose  vessel  had  lain  near  the  Orion  and  who  told  of  seeing  a 
white  man  of  the  Orion  go  to  shore  in  a  boat,  into  which  had 


28  THE  VOODOO  GOLD  TRAIL 

been  put  a  basket  of  unusual  proportions.  This  sailor  had 
been  quite  sure  that  the  white  man  had  not  returned  aboard 
when  the  schooner  Orion  had  sailed  away. 

We  were  all  now  in  a  flutter  of  excitement;  it  was  the  recol- 
lection of  the  story  of  the  big  basket  that  had  been  taken 
aboard  the  boat,  together  with  the  two  blacks,  beyond  Port- 
land Point,  in  Jamaica.  Whatever  doubts  we  had  held  of 
our  being  on  the  right  track  were  thus  dispelled. 

Night  had  fallen  quickly  while  we  talked,  all  squatting  in 
a  circle  on  the  deck.  I  could  hear  Rufe  mumbling  to  him- 
self, and  rattling  pans  in  the  galley.  The  sailors,  leaning  on 
the  rail,  forward,  were  watching  the  lights  of  the  city. 

"  We  have  now  only  to  find  Mordaunt — or  Duran — and 
the  big  basket,"  said  Julian.  "It  looks  like  everybody  notices 
that  basket." 

"  Yes,  that  is  the  first  step,"  agreed  Norris.  "But  that 
city  over  there  is  big,  and  there's  no  telling  when  this  Duran 
will  throw  the  basket  aside." 

"  Yes,"  said  Robert,  "when  he  gets  the  little  one  among 
the  voodoo  folks  he  won't  have  any  more  use  for  the  basket." 

"  Say!"  broke  in  Ray,  "I  don't  believe  a  man  can  turn  over 
a  little  kid  to  the  voodoos  to  be  killed  that  way,  unless  he's 
a  voodoo  himself.  This  Mordaunt — Duran,  or  whatever  his 
name  is — is  just  bluffing,  to  make  the  Cambons  give  in  to 
him.  All  he  wants  is  to  set  up  housekeeping,  with  Miss 
Josephine  Cambon  as  Mrs.  Duran." 

"  Ah,  no,"  said  Captain  Jean  Marat,  "this  man  have  mix' 
blood;  ver'  many  of  the  mulatto'  are  ver'  cruel;  and  mos'  of 
these  men  who  have  ver'  near  all  white  blood  are  the  mos' 
cruel.  They  like  best  of  anything  to  have  vengeance.  The 


WE  PICK  UP  THE  TRAIL  29 

more  exquisite  they  can  make  the  suffering  of  others,  the  more 
exquisite  the  pleasure  they  feel." 

I  had  been  very  late  dropping  off  to  sleep,  troubled  as  I  was 
with  thoughts  of  little  Marie  and  her  danger.  It  seemed  I 
had  barely  closed  my  eyes,  when  Rufe  came  beating  a  pan 
about  our  ears.  "De  sun  soon  up,"  he  said.  "Dey  ain'  no  mo' 
sleep  fob  de  weary." 

The  light  was  already  on  the  mountain  peaks;  and  soon 
the  sun  leaped  into  view.  Cool  breezes  came  from  the  hills, 
carrying  the  heavy  vegetal  odors  from  the  forests. 

Early  the  Pearl  was  abandoned  by  all  except  Rufe  (who  re- 
fused to  go  ashore)  and  two  black  sailors.  We  separated  into 
parties  of  two,  to  search  the  city.  It  was  Robert  Murtry  who 
paired  with  me  this  day. 

We  passed  up  one  street  and  down  another,  hour  after  hour, 
in  this  search  for  one  whom  we  had  never  set  eyes  on  .  It  was 
much  as  if  we  were  dependent  on  instinct  to  spot  our  man, 
should  we  meet  up  with  him.  Unfortunately  we  were  a  good 
deal  conspicuous  because  of  our  color. 

At  noon  Robert  and  I  munched  the  lunch  we  carried,  and 
so  continued  along  street  after  street  of  this  large  but  unat- 
tractive city,  with  its  uncouth,  wooden  structures. 

At  last,  far  up  the  street  we  glimpsed  a  white  man.  We 
hurried  after  him,  but  lost  him  at  a  second  turning. 

The  afternoon  was  better  than  half  gone,  when  there  stepped 
out  from  a  house,  almost  treading  on  our  toes,  a  white  man 
who  seemed  startled  at  the  sight  of  us.  He  passed  on  down 
the  way  we  had  come.  We  moved  on  a  few  steps  and  looked 
back,  to  see  that  our  man  had  also  turned,  and  was  observing 
us.  A  few  yards  more  brought  us  to  a  tight-board  fence.  When 


30  THE   VOODOO   GOLD  TRAIL 

the  man's  head  was  turned,  I  pulled  Robert  through  a  gap  and 
so  got  us  behind  the  board  screen.  We  contrived  to  get  a 
peep  down  the  street,  and  soon  observed  our  man  retracing 
his  steps.  We  were  each  at  a  knot-hole  when  he  came  near. 

And  then  it  was  I  experienced  a  thrill  of  conquest.  The 
man  had  stopped  in  an  attitude  of  wonder.  At  once  his  hand 
went  to  his  ear,  and  he  pulled  gently  and  intermittently  at 
the  lobe  of  it,  while  he  continued  to  puzzle  over  the  thing 
that  was  in  his  mind. 

Here  was  our  man  at  last.  How  fortunate  that  he  had  pos- 
sessed that  mannerism!  It  was  rather  a  well-formed,  swarthy 
face  he  had,  clear-cut  features,  and  hair  that  curled.  I  do  not 
know  if  it  was  what  I  knew  of  him,  but  I  seemed  to  see  some- 
thing sinister  in  his  aspect. 

He  stepped  toward  that  opening  in  our  fence.  For  the  mo- 
ment I  was  in  panic;  there  was  no  time  to  dodge  into  the 
shed  at  the  back.  Then  I  whipped  out  my  pocket-knife,  and 
Robert  and  I  were  at  a  game  of  "mumble  the  peg,"  when  we  felt 
the  man's  eyes  upon  us.  We  were  careful  not  to  look  up.  He 
must  have  stood  there  observing  us  for  about  the  space  of  a 
minute,  and  then  we  heard  his  step  as  he  went  his  way.  We 
sprang  to  the  break  in  the  fence  and  cautiously  peeked.  He 
looked  back  at  frequent  intervals  as  he  walked  down  the  street. 

"  Well,  he's  spotted  us,"  said  Robert.  "How  can  we  follow 
him?" 

"Well  just  have  to  do  it  anyway,"  I  answered.  "It's  our 
only  chance." 

We  stepped  out  boldly,  making  some  effort  to  reduce  the 
space  between  the  man  Duran  and  ourselves,  all  the  while, 
endeavoring  by  playful  punches  at  one  another  to  make  it 


WE  PICK  UP  THE  TRAIL  31 

appear  that  we  had  no  more  serious  purpose  than  to  pass  the 
time  of  a  holiday. 

Presently  the  man  turned  off  the  street,  disappearing  from 
our  sight. 

"  There  he  goes!"  said  we  both  together;  and  we  darted  off, 
one  after  the  other.  When  we  reached  the  place  where  our 
quarry  had  made  his  turn,  we  looked  in  vain  down  the  side 
street.  He  was  nowhere  in  view.  On  each  of  the  two  corners 
stood  a  two-story  house  with  the  usual  shallow  balcony  above 
the  walk. 

"  He  may  have  gone  into  one  of  these  houses,"  suggested 
Robert. 

"  Yes,"  I  agreed,  "and  he  may  be  watching  us  now." 

From  a  point  of  vantage  we  watched  for  above  an  hour; 
but  our  man  did  not  again  appear. 

"  Well,"  I  finally  began,  "he's  given  us  the  slip.  We  can't 
do  better  than  go  hunt  up  the  others." 

We  were  anything  but  dejected,  for  we  had  discovered  the 
region  of  one  of  Duran's  haunts. 

We  had  not  long  to  wait  at  the  wharf,  and  our  friends  were 
much  interested  in  the  tale  we  spun  them. 

"  It's  plain  enough  that  fellow  suspected  you  were  looking 
for  him,"  declared  Norris.  "It  wasn't  just  ordinary  curiosity 
made  him  go  back  to  see  what  you  were  up  to." 

"  We  must  loose  no  time,"  pressed  Captain  Marat.  "Some 
of  us  who'  he  have  not  see'  can  watch  for  thees  Duran." 

And  now  came  the  return  of  Robert  and  myself  to  the 
street  of  our  adventure,  accompanied  by  Jean  Marat  and  Ray, 
to  whom  we  pointed  out  the  place  where  we  had  last  seen 
Duran,  by  which  name  I  shall  now  call  him.  Then,  leaving 


32  THE  VOODOO  GOLD  TRAIL 

Marat  and  Ray  on  the  watch,  we  returned  to  join  the  others, 
and  go  aboard  the  schooner.  It  was  considered  needful  to  make 
some  provision  for  a  possible  sojourn  ashore  for  some  part  of 
our  company. 

"  I  sho'  is  glad  you-all  is  come  back,"  Rufe  greeted  us,  as 
\ve  climbed  aboard.  "Some  o'  dem  heathen  voodoo  niggars 
has  been  a'  circumvallatin'  aroun'  dis  heah  ship." 

"  What  do  you  mean  by  that?"  demanded  Norris. 

"  Jes'  what  I  say,"  returned  Rufe.  "Less'n  two  hours  ago 
Neb  come  to  me  an'  says  dey's  a  boat  a  comin'.  I  goes  out, 
an'  I  see  four  o'  dem  niggars  a  rowin'  dis  way,  jes'  like  dey 
fixed  to  come  on  board.  I  goes  in  afte'  mah  shot-gun,  and  I 
lays  it  on  de  roof,  so's  dey  kin  see  it;  an'  when  dey  is  close, 
I  says:  'I  reckon  you-all  better  not  come  too  close  to  dis 
heah  ship.'  Dey  seems  kin'  o'  s'prised,  an'  eyein'  dat  gun,  and 
hol'n  back  wid  dere  oars.  Den  one  o'  dem  niggars  up  an' 
says:  'Whar  is  you-all  from?'  And  I  says — 'We's  from  de 
good  ole  U.  S.,  I  reckon.'  He  says  —  'Ain'  you  been  in 
Kingston?' 

"  I  begin  to  smell  dat  rat,  an'  I  say  to  myself  dat  dese  here 
niggars  is  from  dat  schooner  we  is  lookin'  fob,  an'  dey's  come 
to  git  wisdom. 

"  I  scratch  my  head,  an'  say — 'Kickston — Kickston — if  dey 
is  a  town  in  de  U.  S  by  dat  name,  I  ain'  heered  of  it.'  He  says, 
'No,  Kickston,  dat's  in  Jamaica.'  I  say,  'Oh,  I  reckon  you 
mean  de  kick  dat's  in  de  rum.  No  we  ain'  got  no  Jamaica 
rum  wid  no  kicks  by  de  ton  in  it —  we  ain'  got  no  rum  at  all; 
dis  here  ship  is  strictly  temperance.'  " 

"Well,  did  that  satisfy  him?"  laughed  Norris. 

"Not  'zactly,"  returned  Rufe,  "He  wanted  to  know  whar 


WE  PICK  UP  THE  TRAIL  33 

we-all  was  a  goin',  and  I  tol'  him  dat  depend  on  de  wind  an' 
how  de  'maggot  bite' — we  ain't  got  no  sailin'  orders,  'zactly. 
And  den  he  seem  plumb  disgusted,  an'  dey  rows  away  widout 
no  t'anks  fob  all  de  wisdom  I  give  um." 

"  Well,  did  you  see  what  way  their  boat  went?"  I  asked. 

"  Yes,  sah,"  said  Rufe,  "I  got  de  glasses,  an'  I  wach  um  row 
way  up  de  shore  to  de  east,  I  reckon  way  outside  de  town." 

"  It's  plain  enough,"  began  Norris.  "That  man,  Duran,  has 
had  his  eyes  on  us,  and  sent  those  blacks  out  to  confirm  his 
suspicions  that  we  had  followed  from  Kingston." 

"  And  I'll  bet,"  offered  Robert,  "that  he  sent  them  since 
Wayne  and  I  saw  him,  and  that  he  is  now  a  long  way  from  that 
place  where  we  left  Captain  Marat  and  Ray  on  watch." 

Night  had  come  on  while  we  talked.  Rufe  set  a  meal  before 
us,  and  while  we  supped  we  had  new  meat  for  discussion.  It 
was  part  of  the  information  we  got  of  Jules  Sevier  that  criminal 
voodooism  was  practiced  only  back  in  the  hills.  It  was  plain, 
then,  that  the  trail  must  finally  lead  us  somewhere  beyond  the 
city.  And  what  more  reasonable  than  to  conclude  that  Duran's 
blacks  had  gone  that  way  in  their  boat?  It  was  there  then, 
we  must  seek  little  Marie  Cambon.  And  it  was  then  I  made 
the  suggestion  that  Robert  and  I  should  follow  that  trail  alone, 
if  we  found  that  it  pointed  inland. 

As  expected,  Marat  and  Ray  had  got  no  news  of  the  man, 
Duran.  Captain  Marat,  however,  had  got  into  talk  with  a 
mulatto,  of  whom  he  drew  the  information  that  the  part  of 
the  city  in  which  we  had  come  upon  Duran  was  a  hot-bed  of 
the  city  voodoo,  whose  practices  were  said  to  be  of  a  moderate 
nature.  It  was  well  back  in  the  hills  that  voodooism  went  full 
swing. 


34  THE  VOODOO   GOLD   TRAIL 

Captain  Marat  fell  in  with  Robert's  and  my  plan  to  take 
up  the  trail  on  land,  alone,  if  occasion  should  come;  and  he 
helped  us  with  our  equipment.  We  would  have  with  us  our 
little  rifles  and  some  fishing  tackle.  If  the  trail  should  lead  us 
into  the  country  a  dove  or  two,  and  some  fish,  now  and  then, 
might  prove  welcome  additions  to  our  grub-sacks. 


CHAPTER  V 

WE   GAIN   AN   ALLY 

IT  was  an  hour  before  dawn  that  we  pushed  away  from  the 
schooner  in  one  of  the  boats;  Captain  Marat,  Grant  Norris, 
Ray,  Robert  and  myself.  We  passed  among  the  sleeping  ves- 
sels with  their  white  night-lights  showing  aloft. 

The  harbor  light  still  continued  its  revolutions,  sending 
bright  rays  out  over  the  sea.  Norris  and  Ray  were  at  the 
oars.  The  land  breeze  was  cool;  there  was  little  sound  except 
the  swish  of  the  oars.  But  as  we  moved  on  down  the  shore, 
presently  there  came  the  night  sounds  from  the  country,  frogs' 
voices  in  the  ascendent.  Then  all  at  once,  it  seemed,  light 
burst  on  the  high  peaks  of  the  mountains;  in  a  few  minutes  it 
was  full  day.  The  royal  palm  and  cocoanut  trees  lined  the 
shore,  curving  out  over  the  sand  beach. 

We  came  opposite  two  boats  on  the  white  sand;  and  a  pair 
of  huts  showed  above  the  bushy  growth.  Here  we  went  to 
shore.  Jean  Marat  entered  into  talk  with  some  black  children 
who  had  appeared  on  the  beach  at  our  approach.  Did  white 
men  ever  land  there?  he  asked.  No,  no  white  man  had  been 
there  for  ever  so  long  —  years.  Did  black  sailors  ever  land 
there?  Yes,  two  the  evening  before.  "And  oh  yes,  two  days 
—  three  days  before,  some  black  men  came  in  a  boat  with  — 
oh,  such  a  big  basket !  Two  men  carry  the  basket  and  go  back 

35 


36  ,     THE  VOODOO   GOLD  TRAIL 

in  the  country."  There  was  but  one  road  or  trail,  going  any 
distance  back.  There  was  a  small  village  a  few  hours  walk 
toward  the  hills. 

I  felt  my  heart  leap  with  hope  at  the  mention  of  the  basket. 
And  yet  I  was  never  destined  to  hear  of  it  again. 

"It  looks  like  we're  on  the  right  trail,"  said  Norris,  when 
Jean  Marat  had  interpreted  for  us  the  last  statement  of  the 
little  blacks. 

"  Yes,"  said  Marat.  "And  now,"  he  added,  turning  to  Robert 
and  me,  "you  still  feel  you  weesh  to  go,  only  you  two  to- 
gether?" 

"  Yes,"  I  answered  for  us  both.  "As  you  have  admitted, 
we  two  alone  won't  attract  so  much  attention.  And  then  we 
have  the  black  wigs  and  paint.  If  we  get  up  in  the  hills  and 
need  you  we  can  signal." 

Our  equipment  made  but  a  small  pack  each.  The  rifles  we 
bore  in  their  canvas  cases. 

"  Now,  boys,"  cautioned  Marat,  when  we  stood  among  the 
cocoanut  palms  at  the  beginning  of  the  path,  "now,  boys,  go 
ver'  slow  and  ver'  careful.  Wen  you  have  find  thee  place — if 
you  are  so  fortunate,  just  come  for  us." 

"  Or  if  you  get  up  on  the  side  of  one  of  those  mountains," 
broke  in  Ray,  "you  can  signal  us  at  night." 

"  And  look  here,"  began  Norris,  "if  signalling  is  going  to 
be  that  easy,  you  let  us  know  how  things  are  going — before 
the  third  day,  or  by  all  that's  holy!  I'll  be  hiking  after  you 
to  see  what's  up." 

Grant  Norris  was  not  one  that  was  used  to  holding  back 
while  others  were  doing,  he  was  always  eager  to  be  in  the  fore- 
front of  the  fray. 


WE  GAIN  AN  ALLY  37 

"  Well  you  can  depend  on  it,  Norris,"  I  assured  him,  "we'll 
not  delay  letting  you  know,  when  we've  located  them." 

And  so,  after  a  shake  of  the  hand  all  round,  Robert  and  I 
plunged  into  the  brush.  Cocoanut  palms  and  cabbage  palms 
leaned  over  our  path;  the  sweet  odor  of  orange  blossoms  de- 
lighted our  nostrils.  Beyond  the  second  of  the  cottages  —  a 
palm-thatched  ajoupa — the  ragged  leaves  of  banana  plants  gave 
an  added  touch  to  the  tropic  scene.  A  mile  or  more  back  from 
the  beach,  the  trail  took  us  into  open  country;  here  tall  grass 
bordered  the  way. 

Two  leisurely  hours  of  tramping  had  brought  us  again  among 
the  trees.  The  ground  became  broken,  and  we  had  some  stiff 
climbs.  And  then  at  last  we  came  upon  a  wee  bit  of  a  village. 
There  were  dwellings  of  various  descriptions;  some  were  of 
stone,  most  seemed  to  be  of  palm-thatch.  And  there  were 
numbers  of  children,  though  none  who  could  understand  two 
words  of  English.  But  they  pointed  a  way  toward  the  hilly 
side  of  the  hamlet,  as  if  to  indicate  that  that  way  we  should 
find  something  in  our  line.  And  at  last  we  came  upon  one  who 
could  make  something  of  our  speech. 

In  the  midst  of  a  cluster  of  palms  stood  a  stone  cottage, 
better  kept  than  any  we'd  passed;  and  the  garden  showed 
straighter  rows.  While  Robert  and  I  stood  contemplating  the 
scene,  there  came  from  the  back,  a  woman;  black,  like  all  the 
rest,  but  with  superior  features  and  an  intelligent  eye. 

"  Yes,  sar,  I  speak  the  English,"  she  answered  our  inquiry. 

We  began  with  no  fuller  explanation  than  that  we  were 
strangers;  but  she  invited  us  to  a  seat  on  a  bench  in  a  cool 
arbor  at  the  back,  and  before  we  could  protest,  she  had  up 
a  small  table  and  dishes  of  food. 


38  THE  VOODOO   GOLD  TRAIL 

One  thing  leads  to  another  in  talk,  and  it  was  not  long  till 
it  became  plain  that  our  hostess  was  in  no  sort  of  sympathy 
with  the  voodoo. 

"  It  is  very  horrible,  the  things  they  do,"  she  said.  And 
she  told  of  a  neighbor  who  had  lost  a  child  at  the  hands  of  the 
voodoo  worshipers  less  than  two  months  gone.  "If  it  was  not 
for  my  brother,  Carlos,  I  would  leave  thees  island,"  she  said. 

And  thus  it  came  about  that  we  finally  confided  to  this 
woman  the  purpose  of  our  visit  to  the  region,  telling  her  the 
story  of  the  kidnapping  of  the  Cambon  child,  making  men- 
tion of  Mordaunt,  alias  Duran,  and  all. 

She  showed  much  excitement  while  she  listened,  and  when 
we  had  finished,  she  spoke  with  vehemence. 

"Oh,  thad  Duran!"  she  said.  "Ah,  my  brother,  he  will 
help  you.  Wait  till  Carlos  come.  I  cannot  explain  now,  but 
he  will  be  very  glad  to  help  you." 

Carlos  was  gone  to  the  city  on  some  marketing  errand,  and 
would  be  back  by  night,  she  said. 

And  so  we  lay  aside  our  packs,  and,  to  while  away  the  time, 
set  off  to  explore  the  region,  a  mile  or  so  farther  inland.  Our 
hostess  warned  us  to  keep  aloof  from  an  old  ruin  of  a  palace 
we  were  likely  to  see  on  our  tramp.  The  place,  she  said,  had 
a  bad  name.  The  natives  had  it  that  the  old  ruin  was  now  the 
abode  of  zombis  (devils) ;  and  there  were  stories  of  men  who 
had  gone  to  explore  the  place  and  had  never  returned.  Some 
of  the  stories  were  fanciful,  she  admitted,  but  she  had  herself 
seen  one  man  return  nursing  a  bullet  wound,  and  who  had 
refused  to  talk  of  his  experience,  and  had  gone  away  never  to 
return. 

Robert  and  I  moved  on  up  the  valley,  curious  for  a  look 


WE  GAIN  AN  ALLY  39 

at  this  tabooed  ruin.  The  path  for  some  time  led  through 
heavy  forest  growth,  where  was  a  perfect  tangle  of  lianas,  run- 
ning from  ground  to  tree,  and  tree  to  tree,  in  a  great  network. 

Presently  we  came  to  an  open  space.    Robert  was  ahead. 

"  There  she  is,"  he  said,  pointing. 

The  ground  sloped  away,  down  to  the  left  hand  of  our  path. 
The  forest  trees  hid  the  bottom  of  the  valley — a  big  ravine 
I  prefer  to  call  it — and  over  there,  over-topping  the  trees  on 
the  other  side  of  the  valley,  a  mile  away,  loomed  a  wonderful 
structure — or  the  ruins  of  one. 

For  a  minute  we  gazed  in  speechless  wonder. 

The  air  was  clear,  and  from  our  high  vantage  point  we  could 
see  with  unusual  distinctness  the  high  walls  of  each  story  which 
seemed  to  rise  a  wide  step  behind  that  of  the  story  below. 
Flanking  a  great  arched  portal  at  the  ground,  either  side  rose 
wide  stone  buttressed  terraces,  zigzagging  in  their  ascent.  The 
top — the  fourth  or  fifth  story  of  the  palace  showed  only 
crumbling  walls,  and  trees  grew  up  there,  evidently  rooted  in 
the  crevices.  And  one  tree,  I  saw,  poked  its  head  through  a 
window  opening.  The  grandeur  and  bizarre  beauty  of  the 
structure  made  it  seem  like  a  chapter  out  of  "Arabian  Nights 
Entertainments." 

"  Who'd  think  to  see  a  thing  like  that  here ! "  I  said. 

"  I'd  like  to  get  inside  of  it,"  said  Robert.  And  I  saw  it 
was  a  hope  he  expressed. 

"  And  what  about  the  devils  that  live  there?"  I  quizzed 
him,  though  I  had  the  same  thought  as  he. 

"  I  don't  take  any  stock  in  that  part  of  those  stories,"  said 
Robert  —  "Any  more  than  you  do,"  he  added,  studying  my 
face. 


40  THE  VOODOO  GOLD  TRAIL 

"  Well,  suppose  we  try  getting  a  little  closer,"  I  said. 

So  we  again  took  up  the  march,  now  moving  down  into  the 
ravine.  When  we  had  crossed  the  open  ground,  we  found  a 
way  into  the  tangled  growth.  It  was  apparently  an  old,  though 
now  unused,  path,  that  must  have  been  cut  through  the  forest 
with  much  labor.  When  we  reached  the  stream,  it  was  at  a 
shallow  fording;  and  then  we  ascended  the  other  side  of  the 
ravine  by  a  path,  grass  overgrown  like  that  of  the  descent. 
Seldom  would  we  see  more  than  fifty  feet  in  front,  so  close 
was  the  growth,  and  winding  the  path. 

We  moved  silently,  the  effort  of  the  climb  taking  all  our 
breath.  When  we  had  gone  what  we  judged  to  be  some  over 
half  the  distance  to  the  palace,  we  came  to  a  halt,  to  rest,  and 
to  consider.  We  had  hoped  that  by  this  time  we  should  have 
come  to  a  close  view  of  the  structure.  But  there  was  yet  no 
sign  of  a  break  in  the  trees. 

"  Perhaps  if  we  go  a  little  farther  we'll  come  to  some  open- 
ing," suggested  Robert. 

Directly,  the  slope  of  ascent  became  more  gentle,  and  we 
went  with  greater  ease.  But  we  were  soon  brought  to  a  sud- 
den halt.  We  had  just  made  a  sharp  turn  of  the  path,  when 
we  came  upon  a  bleached  human  skull,  fixed  in  the  notch  of 
a  tree.  Below  it  were  nailed  two  long  bones.  They  evidently 
were  meant  to  be  crossed,  though  now  they  lay  almost  parallel, 
doubtless  due  to  the  giving  way  of  some  rusty  support.  The 
skull  was  small,  apparently  that  of  a  child;  and  the  sight  was 
not  cheerful. 

"  It's  a  warning,"  I  whispered. 

Robert  nodded  agreement,  and  then  there  was  a  question 
in  his  eyes. 


WE   GAIN  AN  ALLY  41 

"  Better  try  it  a  little  farther,"  I  said. 

And  so  we  moved  on  cautiously.  The  trees  were  very  tall 
and  very  close  set  together,  making  the  wood  very  dark,  where 
not  so  much  as  a  fly  buzzed.  I  was  debating  whether  to  call 
a  halt,  when  the  light  of  open  ground  showed  ahead.  By  way 
of  caution  I  pulled  Robert  with  me  off  the  path  to  the  right; 
there  might  be  danger  in  the  path;  and  we  crawled  through 
the  heavy  undergrowth  and  tangle  of  lianas  to  the  edge  of  the 
forest. 

When  we  looked  out  across  the  open  it  was  to  find  ourselves 
almost  under  the  walls  of  that  great  ruin.  The  tooth  of  decay 
had  gnawed  big  gaps  in  the  top  parts,  but  the  lower  stories 
still  boasted  a  sound  fabric;  and  might  even  be  habitable. 
What  a  place  to  play  in! 

But  we  got  a  rough  awakening  from  our  dreaming  contempla- 
tion: There  came  the  sudden  crack  of  a  gun,  and  the  ball 
whizzed  close  over  our  heads,  causing  us  to  drop  flat  on  the 
ground  and  wriggle  away  lively  into  the  underbrush. 

For  above  a  quarter  of  an  hour  we  crouched  in  our  burrow, 
not  daring  to  move,  or  even  converse  in  a  whisper.  Then,  with 
infinite  labor  and  extreme  caution,  we  finally  worked  our  way 
back  to  the  path,  down  which  we  trotted,  half  expecting  a  shot 
from  some  ambush. 

We  had  just  passed  the  ford  at  the  bottom  of  the  ravine 
when  we  were  startled  by  the  sudden  appearance  of  a  black 
directly  in  our  path. 

It  proved  to  be  Carlos,  the  brother  of  our  hostess,  who  had 
come  in  search  of  us.  When  we  had  recited  our  adventure  he 
was  inclined  to  scold. 


42  THE  VOODOO  GOLD  TRAIL 

"  Id  is  ver'  danger'  to  go  to  thad  place,"  he  said,  "Melie 
say  she  tell  you  about  thad." 

The  shadows  already  covered  the  open  spaces  and  it  was 
night  when  we  came  to  the  cottage  of  Carlos  and  Melie  Brill. 

Carlos  told  us  that  he  had  got  it  of  friends  in  the  city  that 
M.  Duran's  schooner  had  been  in  the  harbor. 

"  And  where  did  the  schooner  go  that  he  did  not  go  with  it?" 
I  asked. 

"  Oh,  the  schooner  she  go  not  so  ver'  far,"  said  Carlos.  "She 
hide  in  one  bay  not  ver'  far  away,  I  guess." 

We  had  not  spoken  long  with  Carlos  Brill,  till  it  became  plain 
that  in  his  mind  this  man,  Duran,  was  associated  with  some 
kind  of  emotion,  and  it  was  equally  plain  that  that  emotion 
could  not  be  given  the  name  of  love.  The  real  nature  and 
source  of  this  sentiment  he  seemed  disposed  to  keep  to  him- 
self; though  he  was  in  no  pains  to  make  us  believe  that  his 
willingness  to  help  us  was  entirely  disinterested. 

Melie  Brill  had  a  meal  prepared.  The  chief  dish  was  a  soup, 
as  she  called  it;  carrots,  yams,  pumpkins,  turnips,  bananas, 
salt  pork,  and  pimentos,  boiled  all  together.  Pineapple  and 
bananas  made  the  desert.  Our  host  gave  us  to  understand  we 
were  already  installed,  as  of  the  household.  They  would  listen 
to  no  other  way  of  it. 

These  two,  brother  and  sister,  were  not  much  of  a  kind  with 
their  neighbors.  It  was  plain,  dark  as  they  were,  they  were 
of  some  mixed  blood,  it  was  shown  in  the  features  and  hair, 
which  was  straight,  not  even  deigning  to  curl. 

Before  we  had  finished  our  supper  there  appeared  the  black 
neighbor  who  had  so  recently  lost  a  child  to  the  voodoo.  She 
seemed  to  have  sensed,  in  some  manner,  the  purpose  of  our 


WE  GAIN  AN  ALLY  43 

visit,  for  she  wished  Robert  and  me  all  kinds  of  success.  This 
was  interpreted  to  us  by  Melie  Brill,  for  the  woman  had  only 
the  West  Indian-French.  She  gave  me  a  kind  of  fetish;  it  was 
of  some  very  hard  wood,  the  shape  of  a  bird,  bill  and  tail,  and 
the  thickness  of  a  marble.  She  said  that  within  was  a  drop  of 
blood  of  a  great  wizard,  and  that  it  would  preserve  me  from 
a  violent  death  (and  so  from  the  attacks  of  the  zombis)  and 
would  insure  success  in  my  undertakings.  She  was  soon  gone, 
for  it  is  the  practice  among  all  the  natives  to  retire  to  bed 
early. 

The  desire  to  press  our  business  was  upon  Robert  and  my- 
self, and  we  put  a  number  of  questions.  We  desired  to  know 
who  they  were  who  inhabited  the  ruined  palace,  and  who  it 
could  have  been  who  fired  the  shot  at  us  over  there. 

"  I  do  not  know  who  it  is  who  stay  there,"  Carlos  answered, 
"an'  I  do  not  know  who  fire'  the  shot." 

"  Don't  you  think  it's  that  man,  Duran,  who  makes  that 
his  headquarters?"  I  pressed. 

Carlos  exchanged  a  look  with  his  sister  before  he  spoke.  "I 
have  suspect  for  some  time,  that  Duran  he  keep  there,  when 
he  not  away  in  hees  schooner,"  he  said.  "I  have  think  that 
for  two  year." 

"Hasn't  anyone  seen  him  around  there?"  queried  Robert. 

"  No,"  returned  Carlos.  "No  one  have  seen  any  white  man 
that  way,  but  I  suspect  Duran  he  go  there." 

"  Then,"  I  asked,  "do  you  think  that's  where  he  has  hidden 
little  Marie  Cambon?" 

"  Yes,  ver'  like',"  said  Carlos. 

Further  talk  only  strengthened  our  conviction.  Next  we 
required  of  Carlos  to  guide  us  to  a  barren  hillside — some  spot 


44  THE  VOODOO   GOLD  TRAIL 

in  range  of  the  harbor,  so  many  miles  below.  This  Carlos 
professed  to  be  easy  of  accomplishment. 

We  went  the  way  we  had  been  in  the  afternoon.  The  forest 
was  of  an  inky  blackness;  even  the  stars  could  seldom  be  seen 
from  the  path.  Carlos  had  no  trouble  to  keep  the  road.  A  per- 
fect hush  was  over  everything  until  the  night  birds  and  frogs 
tuned  up  to  show  that  the  world  was  not  dead. 

When  we  got  out  into  that  open  space,  instinctively  we 
turned  our  eyes  across  the  valley  in  the  direction  of  the  mys- 
terious palace.  And  then,  as  if  for  our  particular  benefit,  a 
light  flashed  over  there.  It  disappeared  in  the  same  moment, 
only  to  appear  again,  perhaps  at  another  point  near.  Again  it 
went  out,  and  though  we  waited  some  minutes,  it  showed  no 
more. 

"  There's  some  one  there,  sure  enough,"  observed  Robert. 

"  Thee  people  here  have  see'  the  light  many  times,"  said 
Carlos.  uThey  theenk  it  is  the  zombis." 

"  I  guess  Duran  is  the  king  Zombi,"  said  Robert. 

Carlos  laughed.    "I  theenk  you  right,"  he  said. 

We  passed  through  another  patch  of  forest  and  climbed  to 
a  ledge  on  the  steep  hillside.  To  gather  a  pile  of  wood  was 
the  work  of  but  five  minutes.  Then  we  set  it  akindle. 

Using  our  jackets  for  a  screen,  we  began  to  signal,  alter- 
nately covering  and  exposing  our  fire.  Our  friends  on  the  Pearl 
must  have  kept  a  good  watch,  for  hardly  two  minutes  had 
passed,  till  we  made  out  an  answering  signal. 

"  Ray  is  on  the  job,"  said  Robert. 

Then  I  spelled  out,  in  short  and  long  flashes,  the  following 
words: 

Good  So  Far. 


WE  GAIN  AN  ALLY  45 

Then  came  from  the  sea  the  terse  acknowledgment:  O.K. 

"  That  ought  to  hold  Norris,"  said  Robert. 

"  Yes,  till  tomorrow  night,"  I  returned.  "If  we  don't  signal 
them  again  tomorrow  night,  Norris  will  be  piling  up  here  hand 
over  foot." 

Carlos  had  been  very  quiet,  taken  up  with  watching  our  pro- 
cedure. That  mode  of  communication  was  far  from  unknown 
to  him,  but  it  seemed  to  him  marvelous  that  white  folk  should 
use  it.  But  the  wonder  of  it  all  was  that  we  could  spell  out 
any  words  we  pleased  in  that  way. 

"  An'  if  you  tell  your  frien's  to  come,  they  weel  come?"  he 
asked. 

"  Yes,"  I  answered,  "they  will  come,  in  a  hurry." 

That  somehow  seemed  to  please  Carlos;  and  he  became  pen- 
sive. We  had  put  out  the  fire  and  were  already  on  our  way 
back  through  the  black  forest.  When  we  came  again  to  the 
open  space,  we  stopped  for  near  half  an  hour,  in  the  hope  that 
we  might  again  have  a  sight  of  the  mysterious  light  over  at  the 
old  ruin. 

While  we  squatted  on  the  ground,  watching,  my  mind  was 
taken  up  with  the  problem  of  how  to  discover  where  little  Marie 
Cambon  was  hid;  and  would  our  little  handful  of  men  be  suffi- 
cient to  storm  the  place?  I  put  the  questions  to  Carlos. 

"No — No!"  declared  Carlos,  "the  voodoos  are  too  many, 
and  they  watch  ver'  careful,  as  you  have  find  out." 

He  referred  to  our  being  fired  on. 

"  Wait  till  tomorrow,  then  maybe  I  fin'  out  sometheeng," 
he  said. 

Carlos  and  his  sister  made  us  a  pallet  in  the  arbor  at  the 
back. 


CHAPTER  VI 

WE   BREAK  UP    THE   VOODOO    CEREMONIAL 

CARLOS  was  gone  when  Robert  and  I  awoke.  Melie  told  us 
he  had  gone  off  early  on  our  business,  and  had  left  word  that 
we  were  to  lay  close,  till  he  returned. 

Our  excursion  over  to  that  old  ruin  of  a  palace,  we  were 
to  learn,  had  been  a  bit  rash.  In  fact,  before  the  morning  was 
gone,  the  woman  who  had  given  me  the  fetish  came  over  to  re- 
port that  black  men  had  been  about,  with  inquiries  as  to  the 
movements  of  the  two  white  boys. 

Carlos  turned  up  at  noon.  He  had  been  angling  among  some 
of  the  lesser  voodoo  devotees.  There  was  no  news  of  any 
white  child  being  held  for  sacrifice;  but  there  had  been  passed 
word  of  a  big  voodoo  ceremonial  to  take  place  either  this  night 
or  the  next.  The  place  was  some  ten  miles  back  in  the  hills. 

"  Some  of  the  voodoos  near  here  have  gone  from  their 
home'/'  he  said,  "an'  some  more  make  ready  to  go." 

The  news  was  disturbing.  I  had  no  doubt  that  a  big  voo- 
doo ceremonial  could  mean  nothing  less  than  that  there  was 
to  be  the  offering  of  the  "goat  without  horns."  And  here,  too, 
was  the  big  voodoo  doings  to  follow  close  upon  the  arrival  of 
Duran  with  little  Marie  Cambon. 

And  what  was  to  do?  Call  our  friends  from  the  Pearl? 
Manifestly,  we  could  not  bring  so  many  whites  into  the  region 

46 


WE  BREAK  UP  THE  VOODOO  CEREMONIAL  47 

without  attracting  attention.  Duran  would  be  forewarned,  and 
so  our  purpose  defeated.  We  two  must  continue  to  go  it  alone, 
trust  to  luck  and  our  own  devices.  And  there  was  our  new 
ally,  Carlos  Brill. 

"  We  must  go  and  see  what's  going  on,"  I  said  to  Carlos, 
"and  if  it's  ten  miles,  we  must  start  soon." 

"  Oh,  if  we  go  before  dark,"  returned  Carlos,  "and  some  one 
see  white  boys,  they — " 

"  We  have  a  cure  for  that,"  I  interrupted.  "You'll  see,  we'll 
fool  them." 

Robert  and  I  got  our  packs  together,  to  which  we  added 
some  small  pieces  of  clothing  that  I  begged  of  Carlos.  Soon 
we  stood  all  fixed  for  a  long  march. 

"  And  now,"  said  I  to  Carlos,  "you  and  Melie  are  to  come 
a  short  way  with  us  to  bid  us  goodbye,  for  it  is  to  be  under- 
stood that  we  are  going  back  the  way  we  came.  But  then  you 
are  to  keep  watch  on  the  brush;  and  if  you  hear  the  whistle 
of  a  bird  you're  to  come  over  quietly  and  meet  us." 

"  Yes,  yes,"  nodded  Carlos,  comprehending. 

And  so  Carlos  and  Melie  walked  with  us  till  we  were  in  the 
midst  of  the  village;  and  there  we  shook  hands  as  we  parted, 
and  again  waved  a  goodbye,  as  we  moved  out  of  view,  numbers 
of  curious  blacks  looking  on. 

When  we  had  gone  a  mile  or  more  seaward,  we  turned  aside; 
and  from  a  screen  of  brush,  we  watched  the  path  for  a  quarter 
of  an  hour,  for  possible  followers. 

"  Do  you  think  there  were  any  of  the  voodoo,  there?"  ques- 
tioned Robert  at  last. 

"  Perhaps  not,"  I  answered,  "but  they'll  soon  hear  of  our 
going." 


48  THE  VOODOO  GOLD  TRAIL 

We  picked  a  suitable  spot  in  the  brush,  and  set  up  our  dress- 
ing room.  Forth  came  the  kinky,  black  wigs,  and  paints  given 
us  by  Jules  Sevier.  We  worked  on  one  another,  turn  about. 
At  the  end  of  twenty  minutes  I  set  the  wig  on  Robert's  head. 
The  result  was  satisfactory.  His  color  was  a  dusky  brown,  all 
but  black.  A  few  minutes  drying,  and  the  stain  refused  to 
rub  off. 

"  Bob,  you  are  pretty/'  I  told  him.  "I'll  defy  Rufe  to  know 
you." 

"  I'll  say  the  same  for  you,  Wayne,"  said  he.  "Even  Ray 
wouldn't  know  you." 

A  jacket  and  a  jumper,  and  an  old  hat,  got  of  Carlos,  and 
a  twist  and  turn  to  Robert's  slouch  cover,  completed  our 
make-up. 

Going  back,  we  skirted  the  village  on  the  west.  We  came 
in  time  into  the  brush  back  of  the  Brill  hut. 

A  whistled  bird-call  brought  Carlos.  When  he  put  aside 
the  bush  and  stepped  into  view,  that  moment  his  face  was  a 
picture — his  mind  contending  between  the  certainty  of  our 
identity  and  doubt  of  his  eyes. 

"  Ah,"  he  began,  "that  is  ver'  suprise'.  How  you  do  it?" 
And  then  he  must  have  Melie  over  to  the  show. 

Carlos  had  soon  got  himself  ready,  and  we  were  off  for  the 
hills. 

For  some  miles  we  kept  pretty  much  in  cover  as  we  moved 
toward  the  mountains.  Carlos  knew  the  way  through  the 
forest,  where  we  ofttimes  slipped  on  the  moist  roots  of  the 
great  trees,  and  scrambled  amongst  the  lianas  that  were  every- 
where. Two  hours  had  gone  when  we  had  our  first  rest  in  a 
clump  of  cabbage  palms. 


WE  BREAK  UP  THE  VOODOO  CEREMONIAL    49 

Towering  above  us,  on  a  mountain,  stood  an  old  abandoned 
fortress.  Carlos  said  its  walls  were  a  hundred  feet  high  and 
with  a  thickness  of  twenty  feet.  Our  way  lay  to  the  eastward 
of  that  old  stronghold. 

Our  progress  now  had  us  puffing,  for  it  was  up-up-up.  We 
kept  as  much  as  possible  in  the  glades.  Pigeons  were  plenti- 
ful, and  we  spied  a  predatory  hawk,  at  which  Robert  and  I 
got  our  little  rifles  out  of  their  cases.  But  Carlos  put  up  his 
hand  in  caution. 

"  To  shoot  is  not  safe,"  said  he.  "Sound  go  ver'  far,  an' 
we  do  not  want  anyone  know  some  ones  is  here." 

And  then  we  gave  Carlos  another  turn  of  surprise.  To  see 
a  bird  fall,  and  no  sound  of  the  gun, — that  was  beyond  reason. 
He  snapped  his  finger  at  his  ear  to  make  sure  he  had  not  lost 
his  hearing. 

We  showed  him  the  silencers  set  on  the  rifles  and  tried  to 
explain  them,  but  he  shook  his  head;  his  physics  wasn't  up 
to  such  juggling  with  sound. 

The  shadows  were  over  everything  when  we  stopped  beside 
a  brook  to  rest  and  make  a  meal.  Carlos  found  wood  that 
burned  with  little  smoke,  and  we  soon  had  a  bird  apiece,  broil- 
ing. Out  of  a  bag  Carlos  poured  farine.  With  water  he  made 
a  paste.  Then  came  macadam — codfish  stewed  with  rice.  We 
topped  off  with  bananas,  and  water  from  the  stream. 

The  scene  was  like  to  have  been  the  last  to  my  eyes  on  this 
earth.  A  high  peak  towered  some  seven  miles  to  the  east.  We 
could  see  the  blue  sea  below,  many  miles  to  the  north,  with  the 
golden-yellow  horizon.  Great  tracts  of  forest  were  everywhere 
between,  with  bits  of  glades,  and  palm  groves. 

While   we   looked,    the   coast   line   darkened,   the   valleys 


50  THE   VOODOO  GOLD  TRAIL 

blackened;  the  gloom  crept  up  the  slopes;  swiftly  it  enveloped 
the  three  of  us.  Then  for  several  minutes  the  mountain  peaks 
glowed  at  the  tops  as  if  afire,  and  then  they,  too,  went  out, 
and  it  was  night.  The  world  was  changed.  The  trees  seemed 
like  personalities  now,  come  awake  like  the  owls,  with  the  go- 
ing out  of  the  light.  Tree-ferns  below  us  seemed  to  whisper 
with  their  greater  neighbors — mysterious  gossip.  Night  birds 
piped  their  solemn  dirge,  insects  tweeked;  tree  toads  shrilled 
in  competition  with  the  bellowing  bull-frogs;  owls  hoarsely 
laughed,  and  called  their  "what-what-what." 

A  strange  oppression  crept  over  me  and  I  yearned  for  the 
deck  of  the  Pearl. 

Suddenly  Carlos  sat  erect — listening.  I  cocked  my  ear,  but 
there  was  nothing  but  the  usual  night  sounds.  A  minute  passed. 
Then,  ever  so  faintly  I  discerned  the  peculiar  low  rumble.  It 
was  something  I  had  heard  before.  It  rose  and  fell  in  waves 
of  sound;  and  wave  upon  wave  it  swelled  in  volume. 

"It's  the  voodoo  drum!"  I  whispered  Robert. 

"  That's  over  a  mile  away,"  he  observed,  listening. 

"  Seex  mile! — maybe  seven  mile!"  corrected  Carlos. 

We  collected  our  belongings  and  were  off  in  the  direction  of 
the  sound.  When  we  entered  the  forest,  we  no  longer  heard 
the  sound.  But  after  stumbling  among  the  slimy  roots,  and 
bumping  our  noses  on  the  swinging  lianas,  for  half  an  hour, 
we  came  again  out  in  the  open,  and  again  we  heard  the  drum- 
ming. Carlos  ofttimes  avoided  the  jungles  by  detours.  At  the 
end  of  an  hour  the  rolling  of  the  drum  seemed  only  a  few 
hundred  yards  away. 

"  T'ree  more  mile,  I  guess,"  said  Carlos. 

On  and  on  we  stumbled  in  the  dark.    The  moon  was  not 


WE  BREAK  UP  THE  VOODOO  CEREMONIAL  51 

due  till  near  morning,  and  so  distinct  was  the  drumming  that 
we  did  not  seem  any  longer  to  be  approaching  the  place,  but 
were  already  arrived. 

Then  at  last  the  sound  seemed  more  distant. 

"  Now  we  ver'  close,"  said  Carlos. 

Something  or  other  was  contradictory. 

A  quarter  of  a  mile  or  so  through  the  dense  forest,  and  a 
bright  light  showed  in  front. 

Now  cautiously  we  moved  forward  till  we  came  to  the  edge 
of  an  open  space.  The  place  appeared  to  have  been  partly 
cleared  by  hand,  for  many  tree-stumps  presented. 

We  climbed  into  the  low  branches  of  a  great  tree.  The  great 
fire  blazed  but  a  hundred  yards  from  our  perch.  The  drummer 
sat  astride  his  instrument  (a  cylinder  of  wood)  the  fingers  of 
both  hands  playing  on  the  skin  stretched  over  the  one  end.  The 
dancers  were  very  many.  Here  was  a  repetition  of  the  things  I 
saw  in  the  company  of  Jules  Sevier. 

To  the  right  of  the  fire  there  was  the  raised  platform,  on 
which  stood  the  snake-box.  Back  of  all  was  some  form  of 
shelter,  out  from  which  in  time  came  a  figure  cloaked  in  red, 
and  wearing  a  red  kerchief  wound  about  the  head.  This  was 
the  papaloi  (voodoo  king).  This  appearance  was  the  signal 
for  a  hush,  and  a  halting  of  the  dance.  All  grouped  round. 
There  were  the  usual  requests  for  favors  and  the  listening  at 
the  box  for  the  answers. 

Then  came  the  slaughter  of  the  fowls;  and  the  mixing  of 
the  rum. 

I  had  begun  to  breath  more  freely  on  my  perch.  But  then 
Robert  touched  me  on  the  arm. 

"What's  that  thing  on  the  ground?"  he  whispered. 


52  THE  VOODOO   GOLD  TRAIL 

I  strained  my  eyes.  The  figures  of  the  blacks  obscured  the 
view.  But  at  last — what  I  saw  froze  my  blood. 

"  We  must  save  it,"  I  said.    "It's  little  Marie  Cambon." 

As  I  look  back  on  the  experience  of  the  hours  following,  it 
is  as  if  I  were  recalling  a  horrid  dream. 

"Robert,"  I  whispered,  "the  rifles!" 

We  slipped  to  the  ground,  seized  our  little  guns,  and  got 
back  to  our  places. 

The  red-robed  papaloi  was  fumbling  with  a  rope  that  hung 
from  a  liana.  An  attendant  was  kneeling  on  the  ground  hold- 
ing a  cup  to  the  lips  of  the  child. 

In  another  moment  the  child  was  swinging  in  the  air  by 
the  rope,  its  head  just  clearing  the  ground.  I  heard  it  whimper 
in  fright.  The  papaloi  took  up  a  knife. 

"  Give  it  to  him  in  the  hand,"  I  said  in  Robert's  ear. 

We  leveled  our  guns  together.  There  was  no  sound  of  the 
explosions.  The  papaloi  dropped  the  knife,  seized  his  right 
hand  with  his  left,  and  he  bent  over  in  pain.  I  had  given  my 
shot  to  the  rope.  After  my  second  squeeze  of  the  trigger  it 
hung  by  a  strand;  a  third  lead  missile,  and  the  child  went 
gently  to  the  ground. 

The  voodoo  worshipers  began  to  scatter  in  panic  of  this 
strange  visitation. 

We  in  the  tree  slipped  to  the  ground.  I  thrust  my  rifle  into 
the  hands  of  Carlos  and,  intent  on  making  the  most  of  the 
panic,  rushed  forward.  The  papaloi  saw  me  coming,  and 
called  on  the  nearest  of  his  followers.  But  I  had  up  the  child 
before  any  could  interfere,  and  I  sprinted  back  and  thrust  it 
into  the  arms  of  Robert. 

"  Run!  both  of  you!"  I  cried.   And  I  sought  to  delay  pur- 


WE  BREAK  UP  THE  VOODOO  CEREMONIAL    53 

suit,  hurling  piece  after  piece  of  dead-wood  at  the  nearest 
blacks,  who  were  already  at  the  chase,  urged  on  by  the  wounded 
papaloi. 

I  meant  to  run  for  it,  and  elude  the  voodoos  in  the  thick 
forest,  so  soon  as  the  laden  Robert  and  Carlos  should  have 
a  good  start.  My  missiles  danced  about  the  shins  of  the  fore- 
most blacks,  and  they  held  up. 

I  was  backing  toward  the  edge  of  the  jungle,  and  in  the 
way  of  readily  making  my  escape;  but  some  wily  black  with 
a  club  must  have  taken  a  thought  worth  two  of  that,  and  got 
on  the  wrong  side  of  me.  I  was  just  in  the  thought  it  was 
about  time  to  make  my  break,  when  I  got  a  crack  on  the  back 
of  my  head  that  put  me  to  sleep. 


CHAPTER  VII 

A  DISTRESS  CALL  GOES   TO   THE  PEARL 

I  DO  not  know  how  long  I  was  unconscious,  but  when  I  opened 
my  eyes  I  could  see  the  bright  stars,  and  I  made  out  two 
black  heads  of  negroes,  who  bore  me  in  some  kind  of  a  litter 
to  which  I  was  bound,  wrists  and  ankles. 

I  could  hear  the  voices  of  others  ahead,  so  I  knew  that  there 
were  more  in  the  party.  My  head  felt  big,  and  a  dizziness, 
and  a  sore  spot,  reminded  me  of  the  whack  I'd  got.  We  soon 
came  to  a  stand,  and  there  sounded  a  call.  A  turn  of  my  litter 
gave  me  a  view  of  a  structure  towering  near  by.  Something 
in  the  contour  was  familiar.  It  was  the  great  palace  we  were 
now  come  to. 

I  have  to  make  mention  of  a  matter  of  importance.  It  was 
not  little  Marie  Cambon  we  had  saved  from  the  voodoos. 
This  I  saw  when  I  grabbed  the  little  one  from  the  ground.  It 
was  a  young  mulatto.  So  little  Marie,  then,  must  still  be  im- 
mured in  this  old  ruin.  Perhaps,  after  all,  I  should  find  a  way 
to  save  her  and  myself.  Some  unreasoning  blind  faith  seemed 
to  hold  me  up,  in  spite  of  my  desperate  situation. 

My  litter  was  soon  in  motion  again,  and  we  passed  through 
some  kind  of  portal.  A  lantern  illumined  the  way,  and  we 
went  up  a  broad  stairway.  In  the  dim  light  I  made  out  richly 
carved  pillars;  mahogany  shone  red  in  the  wood  work,  if  I  were 
not  dreaming,  and  marble  figures  looked  down  on  me. 

54 


A  DISTRESS  CALL  GOES  TO  THE  PEARL       55 

Again  we  came  to  a  stand,  this  time  in  a  great  hall,  and  my 
litter  was  let  down  to  the  floor.  One  came  out  and  stood  over 
me.  It  was  the  voodoo  great-priest  —  the  papaloi  —  as  I  could 
see  by  the  red  bandanna  he  still  wore  on  his  head,  and  his 
hand  bound  in  a  blood-stained  rag.  I  noted  this  black's  fea- 
tures were  as  regular  as  a  white  man's;  and  now  there  was  a 
sneering  smile  on  them. 

"  So  you  think  you  very  wise  and  can  defy  the  Great 
Power,"  he  said.  He  turned  and  spoke  something  to  an  attend- 
ant, who  stooped  and  tore  open  my  shirt,  while  another  held 
the  lantern.  It  was  to  lay  bare  my  skin  where  it  was  unstained 
and  still  white. 

"Humph!"  grunted  the  papaloi,  "so  I  thought.  It  is  one 
of  the  white  boys." 

"  You  came  from  Jamaica,  in  the  schooner,"  he  addressed 
me.  "You  make  plenty  good  blood  for  the  drink — and  plenty 
good  meat  for  the  feast."  This  last  with  a  malicious  grin. 

I  could  perceive  that  here  was  one,  this  voodoo  priest,  who 
was  in  the  confidence  of  Duran.  It  was  doubtless  to  him  Duran 
delivered  the  children  procured  for  sacrifice.  And  so  here  must 
be  the  source  of  the  vast  wealth  of  that  white  fiend  of  tinged 
blood.  Something  spurred  me  to  defiant  speech. 

"  You  can  tell  Duran,  alias  Mordaunt,"  I  began,  "that  I 
have  had  my  fortune  read,  and  that  I  would  not  exchange  my 
fate  for  his  at  any  price." 

He  stared  for  a  moment  speechless.  Then  he  said  something 
to  the  two  litter  bearers,  who  loosed  the  ropes  that  held  me  to 
the  litter;  then  they  stood  me  on  my  feet,  and  one  holding 
either  arm,  led  me  through  a  doorway,  the  papaloi  following, 
attended  by  another  black  with  the  lantern.  It  was  many  steps 


56  THE  VOODOO  GOLD  TRAIL 

we  went  down  the  bare  passage;  a  turn,  and  we  stood  before  a 
door.    A  heavy  bolt  was  drawn,  and  the  door  opened. 

"  Very  soon  you  die,"  spoke  the  papaloi,  as  I  was  thrust  in. 

I  heard  the  bolt  slide  into  place  with  a  click,  and  I  stood 
in  darkness.  I  felt  in  my  pocket  for  my  flash  lamp.  It  was 
gone.  I  put  my  feet  forward  cautiously,  step  by  step,  my  hand 
on  the  wall;  and  moved  around  my  dungeon  till  I  came  to  the 
door  again.  I  became  used  to  the  dark,  got  my  bearings,  and 
paced  the  damp  floor,  side  to  side  and  end  to  end.  It  was 
four  paces  one  way,  eight  the  other.  As  I  moved  about,  sud- 
denly I  caught  in  my  eye  a  few  stars  peeking  in  on  me.  There 
was  a  slit  in  the  wall  high  up.  By  reason  of  the  thickness  of 
the  wall  the  view  out  was  had  only  when  standing  directly  in 
line  with  that  narrow  port-hole. 

The  cell  was  barren,  there  was  not  even  a  box  for  a  seat. 
A  half  hour  was  hardly  gone,  when  I  heard  the  click  of  the 
bolt  again.  This  time  it  was  food  that  was  pushed  in,  on  a 
wooden  tray.  Recalling  those  stories  of  the  poisoned  food 
given  by  the  voodoos  to  their  victims,  I  denied  myself,  even  of 
the  drink.  In  that  hot,  airless  hole,  what  would  I  have  not  given 
for  a  draught  of  pure  water! 

I  got  the  food  off  the  tray  and  used  it  to  sit  on. 

When  I  thrust  the  little  one  into  Robert's  arms,  he  and 
Carlos  had  run  for  it,  as  I  directed.  They  got  far  enough  into 
the  jungle  for  safe  hiding,  and  then  Carlos  went  back  to  lead 
me  there.  I  had  already  got  that  whack  on  the  head,  and 
the  thing  Carlos  saw  was  the  crew  of  blacks  securing  their 
prisoner. 

It  was  then  Robert  decided  to  call  our  friends  from  the 


A  DISTRESS  CALL  GOES  TO  THE  PEARL       57 

Pearl.  So  the  two,  carrying  the  little  rescued  mulatto,  turn 
about,  hurried  back  toward  home.  When  they  came  to  the 
place  where  we  had  cooked  our  meal,  Robert  made  his  signal 
fire.  He  made  it  big,  for  it  was  fifteen  miles  to  the  Pearl's 
anchorage.  The  two  plaited  a  big  screen  of  leaves  and  grasses. 
Again  and  again  he  spelled  out  in  flashes  the  following: 
Come  ask  for  Brill. 

To  make  out  any  answering  signal  at  so  great  a  distance, 
was  a  thing  not  to  be  expected,  where  a  mere  lantern  was  to 
be  used.  But  he  knew  they  would  be  on  the  lookout,  and 
could  not  miss  so  great  a  flare. 

Daylight  had  come  before  the  two  arrived  at  the  Brill  hut. 
Melie  took  the  little  one  in  charge;  and  it  may  here  be  said 
that  the  yellow  tot  was  finally  restored  to  the  rejoicing  parents. 

RAY'S    NARRATIVE 

When  Wayne  and  Robert  had  got  out  of  sight,  as  they  started 
on  the  trail  of  that  Duran  fellow,  right  away  Grant  Norris 
began  to  fuss. 

"  I  don't  think  those  boys  ought  to  be  allowed  to  go  after 
those  cannibals  alone,"  he  said.  "Suppose  those  black  cusses 
get  wind  of  them  and  put  up  a  fight.  And  they  haven't  any- 
thing but  those  dinky  little  rifles!" 

"  Meaning,"  I  told  him,  "that  they  ought  to  have  an  old 
campaigner  to  protect  them,  and  that  old  campaigner's  name 
is  Grant  Norris." 

"  Oh,  go  'long!  you  red-headed  wag,  you,"  he  shot  back  at 
me. 

"  'Fess  up  now,"  I  said.    "You're  just  itching  for  excitment. 


58  THE  VOODOO   GOLD  TRAIL 

But  never  fear,  Wayne  will  send  for  you  before  the  fighting 
begins — he  knows  you.  In  the  meantime,  you  know  Wayne 
and  Robert  well  enough;  there  won't  anyone  get  much  the 
best  of  them." 

When  we  had  rowed  back  to  the  Pearl,  things  were  got 
ready  for  a  move  to  a  new  anchorage — nearer  to  the  place 
where  we  had  landed  Wayne  and  Robert.  Captain  Marat 
said  we  must  avoid  having  the  lights  of  the  town  between  us 
and  any  signal  from  Wayne. 

Grant  Norris  was  watching  the  hills  back  inland  while  the 
sun  was  still  holding  its  fire  on  the  tops  of  the  mountains. 

"  Say,"  I  asked  him,  "you  don't  expect  to  see  fire  signals  in 
broad  daylight,  do  you?" 

"  Daylight!"  he  sniffed — "It'll  be  night  before  you  can  turn 
round  twice." 

And  sure  enough,  while  we  were  talking  the  sun  was  off 
the  peaks,  and  the  lower  hills  were  black  enough  to  show  a 
fire. 

I  hadn't  any  more  than  got  ready  the  big  lantern  with  the 
strong  reflector,  than  Wayne's  signal  began  to  flash,  eight 
or  ten  miles  back  in  the  hills.  I  answered.  And  then  came 
the  message:  "Good  so  far." 

"  I  guess  they  find  out  sometheeng,"  said  Captain  Marat. 

"  It's  good  to  know  they're  already  making  progress,"  ob- 
served Julian. 

"  Next,"  said  Norris,  "they'll  be  signalling — 'Come  on,  the 
trail  is  hot.'  "  And  he  stayed  on  deck  till  long  after  midnight. 

The  next  day  dragged  for  all  of  us,  waiting  for  night.  Noth- 
ing was  right.  Even  Rufe's  noon  meal  was  no  success. 

"Say,  you-all  is  jest  de  cantankerest  bunch  1"  said  Rufe. 


A  DISTRESS  CALL  GOES  TO  THE  PEARL       59 

"Dem  'are  biscuits  is  jest  de  kin'  you-all  been  a  braggin'  on; 
an'  dat  fish,  an'  de  puddin' — Wat's  wrong  wid  dem,  ah  likes 
to  know?" 

But  no  one  had  a  word  on  that. 

And  when  the  supper  went  the  same  way,  Rufe  put  his 
foot  down,  said  he  wouldn't  cook  another  meal  till  we  got  the 
voodoo  out  of  our  systems. 

"  Dat  w'at  it  is,  hit's  de  voodoo  w'at's  got  into  you-all's 
stummicks,"  he  declared.  "Dey  ain't  no  use  o'  my  cookin'  no 
more  till  you  is  busted  wid  it." 

That  hot  lazy  sun  finally  dipped  down  west,  and  from  then 
on,  every  candle  or  firefly  on  shore  had  us  on  the  jump.  Grant 
Norris  was  the  worst  of  the  bunch.  At  ten  o'clock  he  broke 
loose. 

"Those  young  skunks!"  he  said.  "Won't  I  give  them  a 
piece  of  my  mind!  They  might  give  us  a  word.  No  sense  in 
keeping  mum  like  this." 

At  midnight  all  but  Norris  gave  it  up  and  turned  in.  He 
said  he  wouldn't  trust  the  watch,  and  anyway  there  wasn't 
any  sleep  in  him. 

I  hadn't  any  more  than  got  two  winks  of  my  first  beauty 
sleep,  than  something  had  me  by  the  scruff,  and  bounced  me 
out  of  my  bunk  onto  the  floor.  It  was  worse  than  the  night- 
mare. 

I  was  kneading  the  cobwebs  of  fairyland  out  of  my  eyes, 
and  I  heard  Norris  saying: 

"  Pile  up  on  deck  you  sleepy-head!  Wayne's  talking  to  you." 

I  "piled  up"  on  deck;  and  there,  way  back  in  the  hills,  ever 
so  far  away,  I  saw  the  flashing  of  a  beacon  light.  A  long  flash, 
a  short  one,  another  long,  a  short.  That's  C.  Three  long  ones 


60  THE  VOODOO   GOLD  TRAIL 

—  O.     And  so  on.     "Come  ask   for   Brill.     Come  ask  for 
Brill,"  the  message  went. 

Norris  brought  the  lamp  with  the  strong  reflector,  and  I 
flashed  back  an  answer.  But  they  evidently  didn't  see  our 
smaller  light,  for  they  continued  with  their — "Come,  ask  for 
Brill.  Come  ask  for  Brill." 

Now  I  can't  explain  just  how,  but  I  knew  from  the  way 
the  flashes  were  given  that  it  wasn't  Wayne,  but  Robert,  who 
was  doing  the  signalling.  Then  they  were  not  together  up 
there,  for  Wayne  always  did  that  job. 

I  told  Norris  the  message,  and  he  began  to  poke  every- 
body else  up.  He  went  banging  at  Rufe,  too,  and  there  was 
considerable  excitement  all  round. 

"  Oh,  yes,  sah,  yes,  sah,  Mistah  Norris,"  said  Rufe  "dat 
coffee  '11  be  a'bilin'  in  jes'  a  minute.    Glory  be  to  goodness! 
dis  heah  voodoo  carryin's  on  is  wus  dan  gittin'  religion  at  a 
shoutin'  Methodis'  camp  meetin'." 

I  watched  the  flashes  up  in  the  hills  till  finally  they  quit; 
but  there  was  never  a  word  but  just  those  four:  "Come,  ask  for 
Brill." 

Our  packs  were  already  made  up;  it  remained  only  for  Rufe 
to  put  the  finishing  touches  to  the  grub  we  were  going  to  take. 
Captain  Marat  and  Grant  Norris  had  their  high  powered  rifles, 
the  hand  ax  was  more  than  I  needed,  for  my  legs  were  nimble. 
Julian  got  out  his  handsome  shotgun,  and  a  dozen  shells  Rufe 
had  loaded  with  buck-shot. 

"  Jes'  two  of  dem  'ar  buck-shot  shells  in  my  ol'  gun  and 
dat's  all  I  needs,"  Rufe  said.  "Dey  ain't  nobody  guine  to 
come  nigh  dis  heah  schooner  'less'n  I  says  de  word." 

We  pulled  the  small  boat  high  on  the  beach,  near  the  place 


A  DISTRESS  CALL  GOES  TO  THE  PEARL       61 

where  we  had  parted  with  Wayne  and  Robert,  and  without 
preliminaries  we  started  off  by  the  road.  It  was  fearfully 
dark,  but  the  trail  was  the  path  of  least  resistance,  so  we 
couldn't  get  lost.  Two  hours  after  the  start  daylight  busted 
through  the  trees.  In  another  hour  or  so  we  butted  into  a 
village.  And  the  first  pickaninny  we  met  told  us  the  way  to 
"Brills,"  on  the  upper  side  of  the  village. 

A  black  man,  and  a  black  woman,  and  a  black  boy,  were  at 
the  door  of  the  Brill  mansion. 

"  We're  looking  for  two  white  boys,"  announced  Norris. 

"  Dey  ain't  no  white  boys  'round  heah,"  said  that  black 
boy.  And  say!  that  voice  had  a  familiar  twang  to  it. 

"  Say,  Robert,"  I  spit  out,  "your  face  goes  all  right,  but 
you'll  have  to  smear  the  black  better  on  that  voice  of  yours, 
if  you  want  to  fool  this  kid." 

We  were  all  inside  now;  and  it  didn't  take  Robert  long  to 
tell  his  story. 

"  And  so  you  are  sure  they've  got  Wayne  in  that  old  ruin?" 
said  Norris,  addressing  this  black  man,  Carlos  Brill. 

"  Yes,  I  think  ver'  sure,"  said  the  man.  "I  see  they  go  that 
way  with  him." 

"  Well,  Captain  Marat,"  began  Norris,  "I  say  storm  the 
place  at  once." 

"  Yes,"  assented  Captain  Marat,  "we  have  to  do  something." 

"  But  we'll  have  to  go  slow,"  Robert  said.  "That  place  must 
be  lousy  with  those  cannibals;  and  no  one  knows  how  many 
guns  they'll  have." 

Well,  Norris  was  willing  to  go  slow,  if  he  could  only  go 
soon.  And  we  were  not  long  getting  started. 

That  black  fellow,  Carlos  Brill,  led  the  way,  and  that  black 


62  THE  VOODOO  GOLD  TRAIL 

fellow,  Robert  Murtry,  with  him.  Julian  and  I  were  rear  guard. 
And  they  gave  me  Wayne's  rifle  to  carry. 

It  wasn't  long  till  we  got  out  of  the  woods  into  an  open  spot; 
and  then  they  showed  us  what  they'd  figured  out  was  Wayne's 
prison.  It  was  way  over  on  the  other  side  of  a  ravine;  and 
say!  it  was  the  queerest  looking,  half  tumble-down  old  palace! 

We  went  down  into  the  ravine;  and  on  the  other  side  Carlos 
Brill  took  us  out  of  the  path — afraid  of  an  ambush,  or  some- 
thing— and  we  began  to  slip  and  stumble  among  the  roots, 
and  brush,  and  snaky-looking  lianas  that  hung  between  the 
trees.  Why  the  place  wasn't  full  of  monkeys  I  don't  know. 
There  wasn't  any  use  of  anyone  telling  us  to  go  slow,  this 
wasn't  any  fast  track. 

When  we  stopped,  to  let  our  breaths  catch  up  with  us, 
Carlos  told  us  we  hadn't  much  farther  to  go.  But  he  wouldn't 
be  able  to  get  us  nearer  to  the  palace  under  shelter  of  the 
forest  than  about  four  hundred  yards. 

"  Don't  let  that  worry  you  any,"  said  Norris.  "Captain 
Marat  or  I,  either  one,  won't  ask  anything  better,  if  we  can 
draw  them  out." 

"  Yes,"  agreed  Captain  Marat,  "four  honderd  yard'  do  ver' 
well." 

I'd  seen  them  both  shoot,  and  I  agreed  with  that.  And  they 
had  belts  and  pockets  full  of  ammunition. 

Well,  we  finally  got  to  the  place,  with  that  big  old  half 
ruin  on  the  opposite  side  of  the  clearing.  Norris  picked  a 
tree,  with  big  branches  near  the  ground.  Captain  Marat  took 
up  a  position  seventy-five  or  a  hundred  yards  to  the  left. 
Those  two  big-gun  men  and  Carlos  had  decided  on  their  plan 


A  DISTRESS  CALL  GOES  TO  THE  PEARL       63 

of  campaign,  and  the  rest  of  us  got  behind  a  good  screen  and 
awaited  developments. 

Jean  Marat  banged  away  first,  sending  a  ball  through  an 
opening  in  the  second  story  of  that  old  palace.  All  waited  to 
see  some  attention  paid  to  it  over  there.  We  calculated  it 
ought  to  start  some  curiosity  at  least — that  is,  if  there  really 
was  anybody  about  the  shebang.  I  began  to  have  my  doubts; 
it  looked  dead  as  a  tomb. 

But  we  didn't  have  to  wait  more  than  about  a  minute.  I 
saw  a  black  scamp  scamper  across  the  open  space  with  a  gun 
in  his  hand,  going  from  the  woods  we  were  in  right  for  that 
palace.  I  pointed  him  out  to  Norris,  who  let  fly  at  him  with 
a  bullet  just  as  he  disappeared  round  a  bush. 

Robert  said  it  was  most  likely  a  sentry,  stationed  on  that 
path. 

Then  Captain  Marat's  rifle  went  off  again.  Robert  ran  over, 
and  brought  back  news  that  Marat  had  toppled  over  a  black, 
who  was  running  for  the  palace  from  that  side. 

The  next  shot  fired  came  from  the  palace.  I  saw  the  smoke 
up  at  the  second  story.  Norris  banged  away — said  he  saw 
a  black  head  peep  round  a  piece  of  stone  wall.  Two  more 
shots  came  from  the  palace,  they  tore  loose  a  twig  or  two 
over  our  heads. 

Then  Captain  Marat  shot  twice.  It  was  a  minute  before 
the  palace  artillery  opened  up  again.  They  must  have  fired 
ten  shots — they  came  faster  than  I  could  count  them.  Grant 
Norris  was  happy.  He  up  with  his  rifle,  and  at  his  shot  I 
heard  a  yell  over  at  the  palace.  Jean  Marat  got  another  one, 
too,  Robert  came  to  tell  me. 

And  now  Robert  got  hold  of  me  and  dragged  me  along  with 


64  THE  VOODOO   GOLD  TRAIL 

him  round  about  through  the  woods.  It  was  some  time  before 
I  could  hold  him  up  long  enough  to  get  it  out  of  him  what  it 
was  all  about.  He  meant  we  two  should  have  a  little  of  the 
kind  of  sport  Marat  and  Norris  were  revelling  in.  There  was 
a  patch  of  trees  off  to  the  right — south  of  the  old  palace;  and 
it  was  there  we  finally  won  round  to.  We  climbed  high  in  a 
tree,  and  got  us  to  where  we  had  a  fine  view  behind  that  broken 
wall  the  blacks  were  using  for  a  breast-works.  There  wasn't 
less  than  a  dozen  of  those  voodoo  cannibals  there,  in  plain 
view  of  our  perch,  and  we  weren't  three  hundred  yards  from 
them. 

"  Now  let's  give  it  to  them  fast,"  said  Robert,  and  he  began 
to  work  the  slide  handle  of  his  little  rifle.  I  followed  suit  with 
Wayne's  gun. 

There  wasn't  a  sound  of  our  firing,  of  course,  on  account  of 
the  silencers.  So  the  stings  those  fellows  got  on  the  flank  be- 
gan to  puzzle  them.  There  was  one  black  who  gave  me  a  good 
target.  I  wasn't  much  of  a  shot,  but  after  a  few  pulls  on  my 
trigger,  I  saw  that  fellow  put  his  hand  in  a  place,  and  in  a 
way  that  convinced  me  that  he  would  be  sitting  on  a  sore  spot 
for  a  day  or  two  anyway.  Those  blacks  quit  firing  and  got 
to  discussing  some  question  or  other,  and  some  of  them  slunk 
away. 

And  just  about  then  I  heard  something  familiar,  back  in 
the  forest.  It  was  the  call  of  the  Whip-poor-will;  and  I  didn't 
need  anyone  to  tell  me  what  bird  it  came  from;  there  was  only 
one  particular  bird  who  could  be  whistling  that  call  in  broad 
daylight. 

"There's  Wayne!"  said  Robert.  And  he  almost  knocked 
me  off  my  limb,  with  his  hurry  to  get  to  the  ground. 


A  DISTRESS  CALL  GOES  TO  THE  PEARL   65 

And  then  as  we  hurried  over  to  the  others,  we  answered 
Wayne's  call ;  and  in  just  a  little,  he  was  among  us. 
And  here's  where  Wayne  takes  up  the  story  again. 


CHAPTER  VIII 

THE  VOODOO  STRONGHOLD 

How  long  I  had  been  dozing  the  last  spell,  I  don't  know, 
but  when  my  eyes  opened,  daylight  was  showing  through  that 
little  slit  high  up  in  the  cell  wall.  It  wasn't  much  light  that 
came  in,  but  it  was  enough  to  show  me  some  kind  of  decorative 
affair  on  the  otherwise  plain  walls  of  the  dungeon. 

I  moved  close  to  the  thing;  and  I  set  the  tray  against  the 
wall,  below  it,  and  got  me  up  closer.  Then  I  was  able  to  make 
out  it  was  a  kind  of  shrine,  built  into  the  wall.  There  was  a 
crucifix  back  in  the  niche,  and  kneeling  figures  at  the  foot. 

Then  suddenly  I  felt  a  queer  sense  of  creeping  hi  my  flesh — 
a  thought,  like  a  revelation,  had  flashed  in  my  mind.  Here  was 
just  the  sort  of  thing  I  had  heard  that  taciturn  black  fellow, 
Amos,  tell  about;  a  dungeon,  in  the  wall  a  shrine — Christ  on 
the  cross,  and  figures  at  the  foot!  Could  this  be  the  very  cell 
and  shrine  Amos  had  told  of?  It  seemed  too  good  to  be  true. 
And  yet  there  was  eloquent  argument.  For  wasn't  there  that 
mysterious  interest  of  Amos  in  Mordaunt,  alias  Duran,  at 
Kingston?  And  was  it  not  reasonably  certain  that  Amos  had 
lost  his  life  at  the  hands  of  this  Duran?  And  now  had  we  not 
traced  Duran  to  this  very  place?  Trembling  with  eagerness 
and  suspense,  I  sought,  and  got  my  hand  on,  the  figure  of  the 
Virgin.  I  shook  it  gently,  ashamed  to  so  manhandle  a  holy 

66 


THE   VOODOO   STRONGHOLD  67 

thing.  It  held  fast.  I  put  on  greater  and  greater  violence; 
and  finally  I  felt  it  give  a  little.  Compunction  was  all  gone 
now;  and  at  last  I  lifted  out  the  figure,  which  was  prolonged 
at  the  bottom  to  make  a  round  peg. 

My  heart  thumped  with  excitement.  I  pulled  on  the  frame 
of  the  shrine.  A  few  tugs  and  the  whole  thing  swung  in  like 
a  door,  on  hinges.  And  so  there  was  uncovered  a  black  hole 
behind. 

I  put  my  hands  on  the  edge  and  tried  to  pull  myself  up 
into  that  hole.  It  was  no  go — I  hadn't  the  strength.  I  tried 
again  and  again,  but  I  weakened  at  every  effort. 

I  went  over  and  looked  at  that  food  and  drink,  tempted  to 
have  a  few  mouthfuls — for  strength's  sake.  But  I  finally  de- 
cided against  the  risk.  Instead,  I  filled  my  lungs  with  air  — 
such  as  there  was — and  rested. 

After  five  minutes  I  got  my  toes  on  the  tray  again.  And 
this  time  I  made  it.  I  got  through.  And  I  pulled  the  shrine 
door  shut  after  me.  There  was  an  interstice  through  which 
I  got  my  hand,  and  put  that  figure-peg  in  place  again.  I  meant 
they  should  not  discover  the  manner  of  my  escape  from  the  cell. 

That  place  I  was  now  in  was  entirely  dark,  and  the  air 
damp  and  oppressive.  I  could  touch  both  walls  at  once,  so 
narrow  was  the  place. 

And  now  which  way  to  turn?  How  I  wished  for  my  flash- 
light! I  tried  it  to  the  left,  moving  cautiously.  I  had  taken 
about  twenty  short  paces,  when  I  noted  little  beams  of  light 
coming  through  the  wall.  I  got  my  eye  to  a  chink,  and  made 
it  out  that  here  was  another  shrine,  set  in  the  wall  of  some  room 
of  the  palace. 

I  got  a  view,  too,  of  some  part  of  that  room.    A  cluster  of 


68  THE  VOODOO  GOLD  TRAIL 

burning  candles  stood  on  a  table,  which  piece  of  furniture,  I 
could  see,  was  of  richly-carved  mahogany.  And  there  lay  my 
flashlight  in  plain  view. 

A  figure  moved  into  the  field  of  my  eye.  It  was  the  papaloi; 
his  wounded  hand  was  still  in  a  bandage.  He  bustled  about, 
though  I  could  make  nothing  of  his  occupation;  till  finally  he 
set  a  pomade  jar  on  the  table,  turned  in  his  clothing  at  the 
neck,  and  began  to  smear  his  face.  Here  was  a  fastidious 
black.  The  process  was  long  and  leisurely,  and  there  came 
a  period  of  wait — to  let  the  oil  that  shone  on  his  dark  skin 
soak  in.  And  then  he  took  up  a  cloth  and  began  to  wipe. 

It  was  then  I  got  a  start,  for  his  face  came  out  from  under 
the  rag — white!  And  it  was  then  I  recognized  Duran,  alias 
Mordaunt!  This  voodoo  papaloi,  who  put  the  knife  to  little 
innocents,  was  no  other  than  Duran  himself.  I  was  now  pre- 
pared to  believe  the  stories  of  the  horrifying  cruelty,  and 
strange  fanaticism — or  whatever  it  may  be  called — of  some  of 
those  of  mixed  blood. 

A  black  attendant  came  into  the  room  with  a  vessel  of 
water.  Duran  washed,  while  the  black  busied  himself  with  lay- 
ing out  clothing,  as  I  could  see  when  he  moved  into  my  view. 
These  Duran  began  to  don,  making  himself  into  more  the  ap- 
pearance of  a  gentleman,  a  role  he  had  learned  to  assume. 
Only  now  he  allowed  his  features  to  relax  into  an  expression 
that  was  more  that  of  a  hardened  criminal  than  of  a  gentle- 
man. There  was  little  talk,  and  that  was  in  French;  no  word 
of  it  that  I  could  understand. 

I  lingered  in  the  hope  that  the  room  should  be  vacated,  and 
I  might  try  if  his  Calvary — through  whose  filigree  chinks  I 
peeked — should  not  prove  to  be  another  door,  and  so  be  the 


THE  VOODOO   STRONGHOLD  69 

means  of  my  recovering  my  electric  flash-light.  It  was  a  thing 
I  wanted,  to  help  me  find  my  way  out  of  that  black  hole. 

The  black  man  went  out,  finally,  soon  followed  by  Duran.  I 
heard  the  door  close.  Now  was  my  time!  I  got  my  hand 
through  a  crevice.  I  tried  one  kneeling  figure,  and  then  another. 
It  came  out,  and  I  swung  the  gate  in.  In  another  moment  I 
was  on  the  floor,  though  I  turned  over  a  chair  in  the  jump.  I 
closed  the  portal  and  looked  about. 

The  furnishings  were  rich,  the  floors  marble.  A  single  win- 
dow there  was,  tightly  shuttered;  a  bed,  with  an  end  to  the 
wall. 

I  thrust  my  flash-light  into  a  pocket  of  my  trousers;  I  still 
held  the  stone  peg  in  my  hand. 

The  candles  had  been  left  burning;  likely  Duran  would  be 
back;  so  it  was  time  I  was  scrambling  out.  But  my  presence 
was  already  known,  for  the  door  opened,  and  in  sprang  a  black. 

There  was  no  time  for  anything  but  defense.  The  black 
reached  for  me.  I  dodged,  and  made  toward  the  bed.  As  I 
landed  on  the  covers,  he  had  me  by  the  ankle.  And  then  I 
came  down  on  his  woolly  pate  with  my  stone  peg,  using  all  my 
force. 

The  black  doubled  up  on  the  floor  without  a  sound.  I  rushed 
a  chair  under  the  secret  portal,  and  in  two  moments  was  back 
in  the  dark  passage,  the  door  with  its  peg  back  in  place. 

I  put  my  eyes  to  the  chink.  In  a  minute  Duran  appeared. 
That  he  was  all  in  a  knot — dumfounded  at  the  thing  he  saw, 
was  plain. 

I  was  curious  to  know  whether  I  had  committed  man- 
slaughter, but  when  Duran  opened  the  door  and  began  to  call 
out  to  others,  I  thought  it  wise  to  move.  I  used  my  light,  and 


70  THE  VOODOO  GOLD  TRAIL 

went  back  the  way  I  had  come.  There  showed  nothing  but 
bare  stone  walls;  the  passage,  between  four  and  five  feet  wide, 
and  not  twice  so  high. 

Presently  it  descended,  in  steps;  at  the  bottom  my  light 
showed  a  door.  I  lifted  a  long,  rusty  latch,  and  with  repeated 
strong  pulls,  swung  it  open.  There  was  a  hole  through,  ostensi- 
bly to  permit  of  reaching  the  latch  with  a  stick  from  the  out- 
side. 

The  welcome  outdoor  air  came  through  a  heavy  growth  of 
vines.  It  was  perhaps  fifteen  feet  to  the  ground.  I  swung  the 
door  to  after  me,  and  scrambled  down  by  the  vines. 

Ah,  how  good  that  bit  of  turf  felt  under  my  feet!  Trees 
were  all  about,  though  just  here  they  were  new  growth — small. 
A  stream  trickled  over  stones  close  by.  I  went  down  to  its 
edge  and  drank  my  fill,  and  I  took  the  brook  for  my  guide, 
upward,  toward  the  hills. 

I  came  to  a  place  where  I  must  walk  in  the  water  to  go  round 
a  low  cliff.  And  then  I  came  upon  a  path,  new  used,  and  seem- 
ing to  come  from  that  great  building  whose  upper  walls  I  could 
still  see  peeping  through  the  tree-tops. 

I  heard  voices,  and  jumped  behind  a  bushy  screen.  There 
appeared  on  the  path  a  half  dozen  black  men,  and  an  old  black 
crone.  Two  pairs  of  the  men  were  burdened  with  litters,  and 
two  went  before  as  an  advance  guard — they  were  armed  with 
guns.  On  the  litter  were  bundles,  some  in  gunny  sacks,  and 
some  tied  in  blankets.  I  was  sure  I  saw  some  movement  in  the 
bundle  on  one  litter,  as  of  some  living  thing  there.  My  heart 
thumped  with  the  thought  that  here  were  some  little  ones  being 
transported  for  voodoo  slaughter.  And  my  reason  told  me  that 
little  Marie  Cambon  was  of  the  number. 


THE   VOODOO   STRONGHOLD  71 

I  followed  for  some  miles,  for  the  most  part  out  of  view — 
but  now  and  then  getting  glimpses  of  the  blacks  ahead.  The 
trail — much  used  I  could  see  it  was — held  pretty  much  to  the 
shores  of  the  stream;  at  times  the  way  was  through  the  brush, 
avoiding  a  bend  or  some  bad  going;  at  times  the  path  lay  in 
the  water  itself.  Grand  tree  ferns  and  a  great  variety  of  tropic 
growth  made  it  a  wonderfully  romantic  and  beautiful  woods 
path.  And  yet  here  it  was  given  over  to  hell's  own  purposes. 

I  went  far  enough  to  convince  my  mind  that  the  blacks  were 
making  direct  to  that  castle  fortress  on  the  mountain,  whose 
high  walls  now  and  anon  came  into  view.  I  turned  short  about 
then,  and  hurried  back.  I  would  go  to  the  Brill  cottage  for 
news  of  Robert  and  Carlos,  and  send  for  my  friends  on  the 
Pearl. 

I  was  still  a  mile  or  more  from  the  old  ruin  where  I'd  been  a 
prisoner,  when  I  heard  shots.  I  soon  cut  away  from  the  path, 
and  stumbled  through  the  jungle,  in  the  direction  of  the  sounds 
of  battle.  My  mind  was  full  with  conjecture. 

"  It  must  be  Jean  Marat,  and  Norris,  and  the  others  from 
the  Pearl,"  I  said  to  myself  at  last.  Robert  must  have  signalled 
them  last  night,  and  now  they  were  attacking. 

When  the  sounds  of  firing  told  me  I  was  near,  I  whistled  a 
call.  And  then  I  came  up  with  them.  And  there  were  Robert, 
and  Ray  with  my  rifle;  and  Ray  had  a  story  of  his  perform- 
ance with  the  gun.  "I  peppered  him  at  the  south  end,  going 
northwards,"  he  said,  "and  it's  a  hot  tack  he'll  be  sitting  on 
every  time  he  'plunks'  down  on  a  stool." 

For  some  reason  those  at  the  palace  had  ceased  their  firing. 
Maybe  the  unscathed  blacks  had  taken  their  lesson  of  the 
things  those  two  crack  shots,  Marat  and  Norris,  had  proven 


72  THE  VOODOO   GOLD  TRAIL 

themselves  able  to  do  to  every  black  head  that  showed  round 
the  edge  of  portal  or  stone  wall.  And  perhaps  those  mysterious 
—  silent  —  little  missiles  sent  by  Robert  and  Ray  had  also 
had  a  thing  to  do  with  it.  Anyway,  the  old  palace  opposite, 
had  become  as  silent  as  from  its  appearance  it  ought  to  be. 

"Now,  how  did  you  get  away?"  demanded  Robert. 

"  Yes,  you  might  have  stayed  a  while  longer  and  let  us  have 
the  credit  of  rescuing  you,"  exclaimed  Ray. 

And  so  I  told  my  tale.  And  next  I  had  a  word  for  Carlos. 
I'd  been  spoiling  for  this  word  from  the  moment  of  our  re- 
union. 

"Who  was  Amos?"  I  asked  bluntly. 

Carlos  jerked  himself  erect  at  the  word.  He  was  caught 
with  surprise. 

"  Amos,  he  is  my  brother,"  he  said,  still  staring  his  wonder. 

"  I  don't  know  why  I  never  thought  to  mention  it  to  you," 
I  said,  "but  Amos  was  with  us  from  New  Orleans  to  Kingston, 
Jamaica." 

And  we  gave  Carlos  the  whole  story.  And  when  we  came 
to  the  mention  of  Amos'  death,  the  poor  fellow  went  all  of  a 
heap  for  a  minute.  Then  he  got  a  grip  of  himself,  and  his 
frame  became  rigid;  and  I  could  see  his  lips  move  as  he  made 
some  silent  vow. 

Carlos  told  us  how  he  had  been  awaiting  the  coming  of  his 
brother,  whom  he  had  sent  forth  to  seek  help  for  the  recovery 
of  a  hidden  gold  mine,  belonging,  by  right  of  inheritance,  to 
the  Brills. 

"  My  father,  he  discover  that  mine  somewhar  in  the  hills," 
said  Carlos.  "It  was  when  Amos,  and  I,  and  Melie  ver'  small. 
He  tell  us  how  sometime  he  goin'  to  show  us  the  place  — 


THE  VOODOO   STRONGHOLD  73 

when  we  little  bigger.  He  go  'way  five — six  day,  and  come  back 
with  plenty  gold,  some  piece  big  as  my  thumb  —  Melie  got 
one  home.  Father  go  to  the  city,  and  bring  home  plenty  fine 
things,  and  much  to  eat.  And  one  day  that  man  Duran  come 
with  him.  They  talk  big  things  —  we  little,  and  don't  under- 
stand. Then  they  go  'way  together  in  the  hills.  We  wait  six 
day  —  seven  day  —  more,  two  week.  No  use,  our  father  he 
never  come  back. 

"  That  Duran  then,  we  find  out,  have  plenty  money:  he 
buy  fine  schooner,  wear  fine  clothes  —  diamon's,  go  to  France, 
study,  and  everything  fine  he  want  to  have.  We  —  Amos,  I, 
Melie  —  we  say,  'Duran,  he  kill  our  father  —  he  steal  the 
gold  mine.'  And  we  know  what  we  have  to  do.  We  try  to 
watch  Duran.  We  see  him  with  the  voodoo.  He  a  sang  mele* 
We  see  him  go  to  the  old  king's  palace.  He  send  warning  we 
to  keep  away.  One  time  Amos  is  shot  in  leg.  But  we  can 
never  find  the  mine.  Duran  never  go  from  the  palace  to  the 
mine.  We  think  he  go  in  the  schooner  when  he  go  to  the  mine, 
so  no  one  can  follow.  And  then,  at  las'  we  decide  we  mus' 
have  help,  if  we  can  find  some  that  are  honest.  And  so  Amos 
he  go." 

And  thus  we  of  the  Pearl  came  to  know  that  Amos,  even 
despite  his  untimely  death,  had  led  us  —  or  at  the  least  he 
had  set  us  on  the  way  —  to  the  very  place  he  had  meant  to 
pilot  us. 

Norris  suggested  that  perhaps  the  mine  was  worked  out 
long  ago.  But  Carlos  declared  that  a  friend  he  had  in  the  city 
had  seen  Duran  convert  a  fresh  supply  of  gold  dust  and  nug- 
gets but  a  few  months  ago. 

*Sang  mele  —  said  to  be  127  parts  white  and  one  part  black. 


74  THE  VOODOO   GOLD  TRAIL 

"  Well,"  said  Norris,  "then  we're  going  to  have  a  try  for 
that  gold  mine,  after  all." 

"  Yes,"  said  Jean  Marat,  "when  we  have  find  little  Marie 
Cambon." 

I  had  renewed  my  courage  with  food  my  friends  carried; 
and  now,  with  Carlos'  help  I  conducted  our  party  to  the  trail, 
going  to  the  fortress  on  the  mountain.  Carlos  had  been  many 
tunes  on  that  trail,  he  said,  and  he  led  us  over  a  number  of 
short-cuts.  Robert  and  I  were  still  in  our  black  paint;  and 
Ray  abused  us  shamefully  —  hi  play  —  at  every  turn,  for  pre- 
suming to  hobnob  so  freely  with  our  superiors. 

Half  the  hot  afternoon  was  gone  when  we  had  climbed  to 
the  end  of  that  path.  It  was  at  the  bottom  of  a  hundred-foot 
wall.  Carlos  pointed  to  where  there  was  to  be  found  a  door, 
sheltered  from  view  by  the  brush.  We  did  not  venture  too 
close,  for  it  was  certain  the  door  would  be  fast,  and  we 
planned  to  try  for  an  entry  by  a  ruse.  Carlos  knew  a  call  that 
was  much  used  by  these  blacks  of  Duran's,  and  he  was  confi- 
dent he  could  make  it  serve  our  purpose. 

So  we  laid  our  trap.  Norris  and  Robert  crawled  cautiously 
into  the  bushes  up  to  either  side  of  the  door,  Robert  armed 
with  a  strong  cord,  that  Carlos  plaited  of  long  grasses.  Carlos 
then  sent  out  his  call.  It  sounded  much  like  the  screech  of  a 
sea-gull.  He  repeated  it  three  or  four  times,  and  waited.  Then 
again  he  gave  the  call.  In  a  minute,  now,  came  an  answer 
from  high  overhead.  Another  little  space,  and  that  door  opened, 
and  a  black  came  forth. 

Norris  pounced  on  him,  bearing  him  down,  one  hand  on  the 
black's  mouth,  to  prevent  an  outcry.  Robert  soon  had  the 


THE  VOODOO   STRONGHOLD  75 

bonds  on  the  fellow's  wrists,  and  the  others  of  us  moved 
forward. 

Captain  Marat  spoke  to  the  black  in  French.  He  told  him 
he  must  answer  us  truthfully,  on  pain  of  torture;  and  he  had 
Norris  give  him  a  twist  of  the  arm  for  a  sample.  And  so  we 
got  it  out  of  the  man  that  Duran  was  not  in  the  fortress,  and 
that  there  were  three  children  there,  brought  this  day;  one, 
he  admitted  was  white.  There  were  seven  men  there,  two  of 
them  armed. 

Then,  with  a  gun  at  his  back,  the  black  was  ordered  to  lead 
the  way. 

It  was  a  long  climb,  by  stone  steps;  then  came  a  long  cor- 
ridor. At  last  a  room,  where  was  a  fire  and  cookery,  utilizing 
a  break  in  the  wall,  looking  on  the  court,  for  a  fireplace. 

The  six  men,  and  the  voodoo  woman,  at  the  cooking,  were 
taken  unawares,  their  two  rifles  confiscated,  and  they  were 
lined  up  against  the  wall ;  Norris  patting  his  rifle  and  winking, 
to  accentuate  what  Marat  was  telling  them  in  the  French. 

The  three  children  sat  on  the  floor  in  a  corner:  two  of  them 
blacks,  about  three  years  of  age  each  —  and  little  Marie  Cam- 
bon,  looking  like  her  portrait,  but  now  big-eyed  and  dazed 
with  trying  to  realize  the  meaning  of  this  new  appearance.  I 
divined  the  prelude  to  a  storm;  so  I  hurried  over  and  took 
her  up  in  my  arms.  "Little  Marie!"  I  said.  And  then  burst 
forth  that  flood.  You  have  seen  children  cry.  It  continued 
till  she  was  exhausted;  and  then  she  sobbed  long  hi  her  sleep. 
She  wouldn't  let  me  put  her  down;  even  while  she  slept,  my 
attempt  to  relinquish  her  little  body  invariably  awakened  her. 
For  two  hours  I  must  carry  her,  and  we  were  far  from  that 
place  before  she  would  let  me  rest  my  arms. 


76  THE   VOODOO   GOLD  TRAIL 

The  two  little  pickaninnies  were  taken  on,  and  we  went  off 
the  way  we  had  come,  leaving  the  seven  blacks  to  reflect  on 
the  words  of  a  lecture  Jean  Marat  delivered  them  on  the  evil 
of  their  ways,  and  to  consider  how  they  were  to  account  to 
their  lord  and  master  —  and  papaloi  —  Duran,  for  the  loss  of 
the  three  "goats  without  horns." 

Night  sprung  upon  us  before  we  reached  the  Brill  cottage. 
And  it  was  truly  a  happy  throng  that  gathered  there.  Melie 
bustled  about  preparing  a  supper,  between  whiles  crooning 
over  the  three  little  ones  —  white  and  black. 

"  Shall  I  see  my  papa  and  mamma?"  said  little  Marie 
Cambon. 

"  Yes,"  Melie  assured  her.  "You  shall  go  to  your  papa 
and  mamma,"  and  they  both  giggled,  girl-like,  for  happiness. 

And  the  little  pickaninnies  echoed:  "Maman,  maman,"  and 
Melie  delighted  them  with  creole  baby-talk;  and  they  grinned 
and  clapped  their  hands. 

Robert  and  I  had  soon  got  the  stain  off  our  skins.  Little 
Marie  watched  the  process,  and  said  I  looked  "more  beautiful" 
without  the  black.  At  supper  there  was  held  a  council  of  war. 
Before  we  could  move  about  the  business  of  the  gold  mine, 
there  were  two  things  left  to  be  done:  we  must  take  the  Brills 
under  our  protection,  for  by  enlisting  their  active  help  we  had 
got  them  under  the  anathema  of  the  voodoos;  and  we  must 
see  to  the  return  of  little  Marie  to  the  arms  of  her  waiting 
parents.  Some  of  the  effects  of  the  Brills  we  got  over  to  the 
care  of  a  friendly  neighbor.  Norris  and  Robert  were  to  remain 
to  assist  Carlos  and  Melie  with  their  little  wagon  to  the  city. 
They  were  also  to  look  out  for  the  two  little  blacks. 

The  rest  of  our  party  moved  seaward  over  the  old  trail  by 


THE   VOODOO   STRONGHOLD  77 

which  we  had  come.  Little  Marie  clung  to  myself;  she  would 
have  none  but  the  one  who  had  been  the  first  to  take  her  from 
her  captors. 

The  morning  was  not  yet  gone,  when  we  got  to  the  coast. 
We  drew  our  boat  to  the  water;  and  then  it  was  —  back  to 
the  Pearl  again. 

Marat  and  Julian  were  at  the  oars,  and  our  boat  swung 
round  and  pointed  toward  the  Pearl.  It  was  then  we  perceived 
a  boat  coming  toward  us.  And  we  made  it  out  to  be  the  other 
small  boat  from  the  Pearl.  Two  of  the  black  sailors  manned 
the  oars,  and  a  stranger  sat  in  the  stern  sheets. 

The  two  boats  rapidly  approached;  in  another  pair  of  min- 
utes I  had  identified  that  new  figure. 

"  It's  Monsieur  Cambon!"  I  cried.  Little  Marie  was  beside 
me;  I  turned  her  face  to  the  approaching  boat. 

"See!    It's  papa!"  I  told  her. 

Her  little  face  lighted  up,  and  she  seemed  to  expand  with 
happiness,  as  she  looked. 

"Papa!    Papa!"  she  murmured. 

The  two  boats  came  together,  by  oars  they  were  held  fast; 
and  I  passed  the  child  over  to  the  silent,  eager  father. 

"Oh!  My  little  daughter!  —Marie!"  he  said,  then.  "You 
are  safe!  Your  mamma  will  be  so  happy!  So  happy!" 

Madame  Cambon  was  on  the  Pearl,  Monsieur  told  us.  She 
was  worn  to  a  shadow  with  anguish.  The  good  news  must 
trickle  to  her  gently.  It  was  for  that  he  came  to  meet  us. 

A  strange  thing  it  seems,  that  emotions  of  happiness  can 
be  as  deadly  as  the  tragic.  Monsieur  Cambon's  boat  lingered 
behind,  as  ours  moved  to  the  Pearl.  Madame  Cambon  lay  on 


78  THE  VOODOO  GOLD  TRAIL 

a  hammock  set  up  under  the  awning.  Dark  patches  were  under 
her  eyes.  She  tried  to  smile  a  greeting. 

"  I  am  happy  that  you  are  here,"  I  began. 

I  did  not  rightly  hear  her  murmured  reply;  and  I  had  no 
mind  for  it  anyway,  whatever  it  was,  for  my  mind  was  in  a 
rack  —  how  to  proceed? 

"  You  must  not  give  in  that  way,"  I  protested. 

"  How  can  I  help?"  she  said. 

"  You  help  us  all  if  you  have  courage,"  I  said. 

"  Oh,  I  have  tried,"  she  said.  "If  only  I  could  have  hope." 

"  If  you  have  courage  I  promise  you  hope,"  I  ventured. 

She  sat  up.   "Hope!    Only  give  me  hope!" 

"  Yes,"  I  said,  with  all  the  assurance  of  which  I  was  capable, 
"I  give  you  hope  —  you  have  it." 

"  Oh,  I  like  the  way  you  say  that!"  And  her  face  took  on 
a  new  look. 

"  I  even  promise  you  she  shall  come  back  to  you  again,"  I 
ventured  once  more. 

Her  bosom  heaved  for  some  moments;  then  she  got  control. 

"  Please  do  not  give  me  false  hopes,"  she  begged. 

"  No,"  I  asserted,  now  more  sure  of  her,  "  I  even  promise 
you  shall  see  her  soon." 

She  looked  me  in  the  eyes,  to  read  if  I  told  the  whole  truth. 

"You  have  come  with  news!"  she  cried.  "I  understand 
you  now.  Tell  me  all  —  I  can  bear  it  —  I  see;  you  have  pre- 
pared me.  She  is  coming.  Where  is  my  husband?" 

"Yes,"  I  said.  "She  is  coming.  She  is  with  her  father; 
they  will  soon  be  here." 

Her  eyes  swept  the  water,  but  the  boat  was  hidden  under 
the  rail.  I  went  to  the  side,  reached  down  and  took  up  little 


THE  VOODOO  STRONGHOLD  79 

Marie  from  her  father's  hands,  and  brought  her  to  her  mother. 

No  need  to  describe  that  scene.  Madame  Cambon's  now 
was  a  quiet,  restrained  emotion.  She  shed  some  tears,  but 
there  was  no  violence.  And  at  last  she  came  to  talk  of  grati- 
tude, and  we  had  to  cut  off  her  speech.  That  task  fell  to  Ray. 

"  You  don't  know  what  you're  doing,"  he  said.  "  You're 
making  us  ashamed  of  all  the  fun  we  had.  And  I  want  to 
tell  you  of  the  bee  I  turned  loose  in  one  voodoo  fellow's 
bonnet." 

And  in  a  minute  Ray  had  her  laughing. 

Monsieur  Cambon  told  us  how  Madame's  condition  made  it 
imperative  that  they  follow  us  in  our  search  for  Marie.  He 
said,  "We  must  go,  she  insisted,  if  only  to  be  near." 

The  Cambons  were  destined  to  leave  us  on  the  following 
day,  and  to  carry  Melie  Brill  with  them  on  the  steamer  to 
Jamaica.  But  in  the  meantime  we  awaited  the  coming  of  that 
portion  of  our  party  left  behind  up  in  the  foothills. 

It  was  long  after  dark  had  come  that  we  heard  the  call  of 
Robert  on  the  beach  opposite.  Ray  and  I  hurried  the  boat  to 
shore,  and  took  on  Robert,  Norris,  Carlos  and  Melie  Brill. 
And  they  had  a  story  to  tell. 


CHAPTER  IX 

THE    STAMPEDE 

"  YOU'RE  a  long  time  getting  here,"  I  observed,  as  Norris 
took  up  the  oars. 

"  Yes,"  returned  Norris.  "And  we  wouldn't  be  getting  here 
at  all,  if  those  voodoo  skunks  had  had  their  own  way  about 
it." 

"  Did  they  give  you  trouble?"  I  asked. 

"  Oh,  I  guess  —  yes,  some,"  he  said.  "But  we  gave  them 
trouble,  eh,  Robert?" 

Robert  acquiesced. 

"  I  reckon  they'll  some  day  be  telling  their  voodoo  grand- 
children how  a  bunch  of  white  devils  came  to  their  island 
and  raised  particular — " 

"  Raised  particular  'hotel,' "  assisted  Ray,  who  saw  that 
Norris  was  about  to  stumble  on  an  impolite  word. 

We  climbed  aboard  the  Pearl  and  Rufe  fed  the  four  while 
they  gave  us  their  tale. 

"  We  got  nearly  everything  loaded  onto  Carlos'  little  wagon, 
and  Carlos  was  going  to  hitch  up  the  donkey,  when  those 
voodoo  skunks  showed  up,"  said  Norris.  "They  didn't  knock 
on  the  door  or  ring  the  bell,  but  stood  off  like  the  pack  of 
hyenas  they  are. 

"  Carlos  talked  to  them.  They  said  we  must  give  up  the 

80 


THE   STAMPEDE  81 

kids,  or  they  would  burn  the  shack  with  us  in  it.  I  told  Carlos: 
'Tell  them  that  if  they  don't  clear  out  right  quick  some  of  them 
will  soon  be  burning  in  —  in  —  " 

"  Where  Beelzebub  tends  the  ovens  and  the  climate  is 
equable,"  offered  Ray,  politely. 

"  I  don't  know  how  many  voodoo  there  was  in  the  crowd," 
continued  Norris.  "The  people  from  the  village  came  round, 
too, — I  suppose,  to  see  the  fun.  There  were  some  guns;  and 
those  fellows  began  to  get  their  heads  together.  I  got  mad, 
finally,  to  see  those  skunks  so  cheeky;  and  I  forgot  English 
wasn't  their  talk,  and  called  out:  'Any  of  you  who  don't  want 
to  get  into  the  battle  better  crawl  into  your  holes!  ' 

"  There  must  have  been  some  that  got  that,  for  pretty  quick 
there  was  a  scattering,  and  only  about  a  dozen  or  so  stayed 
on.  They  were  the  ones  who'd  come  on  business,  I  guess. 

"  Pretty  soon  Melie  said  there  were  some  of  the  blacks 
sneaking  up  toward  the  wagon,  out  by  the  barn.  I  got  to  the 
back  door  with  my  rifle,  and  I  blowed  the  high  peaked  hat  off 
the  nearest  skunk  —  sorry  now  I  didn't  blow  his  head  off. 
Those  fellows  didn't  stop  to  pick  up  that  hat. 

"  Those  cusses  in  front  had  begun  to  move  up  with  their 
guns  ready.  But  Robert  had  his  little  twenty-two  ready  too; 
and  they  hadn't  come  far  when  he  let  the  leader  have  one  in 
his  off  hind  foot.  He  limped  off  howling,  and  the  others  sud- 
denly recollected  other  appointments. 

" '  Now  we've  got  to  make  our  start,'  T  said." 

"  While  the  audience  is  wondering  what'll  be  the  next  scene," 
prompted  Ray. 

"  Something  like  that,"  admitted  Norris.  "So  we  bundled 
the  black  babies  up,  while  Carlos  hitched  up  the  mule.  And 


82  THE  VOODOO   GOLD   TRAIL 

when  we  started  for  the  barn,  I  saw  Melie  sprinkling  some 
seeds  about  the  ground  and  back  stoop.  'What  are  you  plant- 
ing grass  for?'  I  said.  'You're  not  coming  back.' 

"  She  laughed  and  said  that  the  voodoo  men  were  barefoot, 
and  the  seeds  would  give  them  sores  that  would  disable  them 
for  weeks.  Well,  we  got  started.  Carlos  drove;  Robert  went 
ahead  with  his  rifle,  and  I  followed  behind  with  mine. 

"  We  poked  along  for  about  three  miles,  and  no  sign  of  those 
voodoo  cusses.  Then  Carlos  pulled  up  and  waited  for  me  to 
catch  up. 

"  '  Well,'  I  said,  'do  you  reckon  they've  given  up  the  fight?' 
And  Carlos  said  there  was  a  little  steep  hill  about  a  mile  ahead, 
that  the  road  passed  round ;  and  he  was  some  afraid  the  enemy 
might  be  laying  for  us  there,  and  would  roll  rocks  down  on  us. 
He  said  we  might  avoid  the  place  by  a  roundabout  way  through 
the  woods,  but  it  would  be  hard  going,  and  we'd  lose  time. 

"  I  called  Robert  and  told  him  our  troubles.  'Wait  ten 
minutes/  he  said,  'and  then  drive  up  to  a  couple  of  hundred 
yards  of  the  place,  and  stop  till  I  whistle  for  you  to  come  on.' 
And  then  he  trotted  on  ahead.  In  ten  minutes  we  started. 
Carlos  pulled  the  donkey  to  a  stop  at  the  right  place,  and  we 
waited. 

"  In  a  minute  we  heard  a  howl — then  another  howl— then  a 
howl  every  second,  for  about  six  howls.  Then  we  heard  a 
stampede  in  the  woods,  off  to  our  right. — Better  let  Bob  tell 
what  happened." 

"  I  hurried  on  ahead  till  I  saw  the  hill,"  said  Robert.  "It 
was  a  ridge  that  ended  right  at  the  road,  and  all  covered  with 
the  woods.  I  turned  off  and  climbed  to  the  top  of  the  ridge 
pretty  well  back;  and  I  moved  toward  the  road  cautiously. 


THE   STAMPEDE  83 

Then  I  saw  those  black  fellows — I  guess  there  was  near  a 
dozen — right  at  the  end  of  the  ridge.  They  had  a  screen  of 
brush  toward  the  road,  but  on  my  side  it  was  all  open.  They 
had  some  big  bowlders  all  ready  to  push  over.  I  slipped  back 
a  little  and  climbed  into  a  tree.  I  got  a  good  seat  in  a  crotch, 
from  where  the  view  was  good. 

"Pretty  soon  I  heard  the  wagon.  And  those  fellows  heard 
it  too.  They  peeked  through  the  brush,  and — " 

"  And  they  licked  their  chops,"  struck  in  Ray. 

"  I  had  my  magazine  full,"  continued  Robert,  "and  I  had 
my  peep-sight  set.  One  black's  pants  were  tight  with  stoop- 
ing to  look — and  I  gave  him  the  first  little  bullet." 

"  Right  on  the  lspank,' "  said  Ray. 

"  Yes,"  continued  Robert,  "I  got  the  idea  from  Ray.  Well 
that  one  let  out  a  howl.  And  then  I  peppered  the  next  one  in 
the  leg,  and  he  howled.  Another  one  got  it  in  the  shoulder. 
They  were  mightily  puzzled — not  hearing  anything — so  they 
couldn't  use  their  guns.  They  didn't  wait  to  look  round  very 
long,  but  hiked  out,  running  by  right  under  my  tree.  Before 
they  got  away  I  hit  six  or  seven — some  of  them  limped  as  they 
ran." 

"When  we  heard  the  stampede,"  said  Grant  Norris,  "we 
didn't  need  Bob's  whistle  to  tell  us  to  come  on.  There  were 
no  voodoo  skunks  going  to  hang  back  for  any  more,  after  all 
that  'whoop-er-up.'  We  got  into  town  without  any  more 
accidents,  and — " 

"  That  was  mighty  fortunate  for  the  voodoos,"  drawled  Ray. 
"But  where's  the  pickaninnies?" 

"  Melie  here,  turned  them  over  to  a  priest,"  said  Norris. 
"We  lost  some  time  finding  him." 


84  THE  VOODOO  GOLD  TRAIL 

Carlos  had  edged  up,  and  I  could  see  he  wanted  a  word  with 
me.  So  I  led  him  toward  the  schooner's  bow;  and  he  told  me 
his  news,  leaning  on  the  rail. 

"  Duran,  he  is  in  the  city,"  he  said. 

He  had  touched  on  the  thing  that  was  in  my  mind;  for  dur- 
ing Norris's  and  Robert's  recital  of  their  adventures,  I  was 
wondering  where  this  white  voodoo  should  be  all  that  while. 
I  was  conscious  that  it  was  this  man — or  fiend —  that  was  to 
continue  to  be  the  center  and  spring  of  all  our  interest  to  the 
end  of  the  chapter. 

"  Have  you  seen  him?"  I  asked. 

"  No,  I  have  one  friend  in  the  city  who  see  him,"  Carlos 
said.  "He  buy  new  picks,  an'  he  buy  pack-straps,  for  to  carry 
things  on  thee  back,  and  new  rope  an'  pulleys." 

It  developed  that  this  friend  of  Carlos  had  long  been  of  help 
to  him,  in  keeping  an  observant  eye  on  Duran  when  in  his  city 
haunts;  and  it  came  out  that  this  friend's  home  was  on  the 
very  street  on  which  Robert  and  I  had  first  encountered  Duran. 

"  Well,  Carlos,"  I  said,  "if  we  are  to  find  this  gold  mine  of 
yours,  we'll  have  to  keep  an  eye  on  Duran." 

"  Yes,"  he  nodded.  "And  he  kill'  my  father,  an'  my  brother." 
And  Carlos  smiled  a  smile  with  his  teeth  set,  and  that  gave 
him  a  sinister  look.  In  spite  of  the  night  I  could  see  so  much 
of  his  face.  It  was  more  lust  for  vengeance  than  love  of  gold 
that  showed  there  then. 

"  I  can  speak  for  us  all,  Carlos,"  I  said.  "We  will  see  this 
thing  through.  And  we  all  want  to  see  this  man  brought  to 
justice  for  his  crimes." 

"Ah,  I  glad  for  to  hear  you  say  that!"  he  said.  "Maybe 
we  can  find  for  you  much  gold.  I  hope  that." 


THE   STAMPEDE  85 

I  called  the  others  into  conference;  and  we  made  plans  for 
our  next  move.  We  would  turn  in  at  once  for  a  good  sleep; 
and  before  daylight  we  would  go  ashore  and  into  the  city  and 
pick  up  Duran's  trail.  Carlos's  friend  had  promised  to  keep  his 
eye  on  Duran's  movements,  which  he  had  learned  to  interpret 
in  limited  measure. 

Before  taking  to  our  pallets,  on  the  deck,  we  bade  good-bye 
to  the  Cambons,  who  were  to  take  steamer  for  home  on  the 
morrow.  Little  Marie  made  me  promise  to  come  to  her  home 
some  time  soon,  said  she  would  adopt  me  for  her  brother,  so 
that  I  could  have  a  good  mother,  too,  in  the  place  of  the  good 
mother  I  had  lost. 


CHAPTER  X 

ON  THE  GOLD  TRAIL  AGAIN 

IT  was  Carlos  and  Rufe,  together,  who  routed  us  all  out 
long  before  day;  and  soon  we  were  set  on  shore — Captain 
Marat,  Norris,  Julian,  Ray,  Robert  and  myself.  We  moved 
to  the  eastern  edge  of  the  city,  and  there  awaited  Carlos,  who 
had  hurried  off  to  consult  with  his  friend.  We  hadn't  long  to 
wait.  He  came  with  the  intelligence  that  Duran  had  gone  from 
the  city  at  dusk  the  evening  before.  He  had  doubtless  gone  to 
the  old  ruin,  since  he  had  been  attended  by  a  man  who  was 
wont  to  wait  on  him,  carrying  his  burdens,  when  going  inland. 
When  going  direct  to  his  ship,  his  attendants  were  always  two 
or  more  sailors. 

"  Well,  then  it's  for  another  visit  to  that  old  palace,  where 
we  had  so  much  fun,  eh  Wayne?"  said  Norris. 

Carlos  led  us  over  an  old,  seldom  used  trail;  one  that  ran 
back  of  the  old  ruin. 

It  was  a  long,  tedious  march.  And  yet  the  morning  was  still 
fresh  when  we  found  ourselves  at  the  bottom  of  the  rear  wall 
of  the  palace,  looking  up  to  where  that  escape  door  was  hidden 
among  the  vines.  I  went  up  first.  With  my  stick  through  the 
hole,  I  had  up  the  latch,  and  pushed  the  door  open.  Next  came 
Robert. 

86 


ON  THE  GOLD  TRAIL  AGAIN  87 

"  Say,"  spoke  up  Grant  Norris,  "is  that  ladder  of  yours  go- 
ing to  hold  two  hundred  ten  pounds?" 

"  It'll  hold  three  times  that,"  I  assured  him.  And  so  he  came 
up  with  ease,  in  spite  of  his  weight. 

Ray,  Julian,  Carlos,  and  Marat,  soon  were  standing  with  us 
in  the  dark  passage.  Flashing  my  light,  I  led  the  way  up  the 
stone  steps,  and  along  the  passage. 

We  came  at  last  to  that  little  door  opening  into  Duran's 
room — that  door  through  which  I  had  made  my  rash  entry,  and 
hasty  retreat. 

There  was  no  light  shining  through  the  chinks  of  the  shrine 
this  time.  But  I  put  my  ear  close,  and  in  a  little  I  distinguished 
the  sound  of  heavy  breathing  within.  Someone  slept  there.  I 
communicated  that  piece  of  intelligence  to  the  others  in  a 
low  whisper.  And  we  waited  for  the  sleeper  to  waken. 

Near  half  an  hour  must  have  passed  and  Norris  had  moved 
back  down  the  passage,  to  calm  his  impatience.  It  was  then 
we  heard  a  loud  knocking  on  a  door  of  that  room.  The  sleeper 
was  aroused,  and  then  light  shone  through  the  crevices. 

Captain  Marat  and  Carlos  gave  ear  to  the  talk  of  those  in 
the  room.  Duran,  in  sleeping  garb,  and  a  lame  black  attend- 
ant, were  the  occupants,  as  a  peek  through  those  chinks 
showed. 

By  Marat's  report  the  following  was  the  talk  of  the  two: 

"  Well,"  said  Duran,  "any  news  of  those  dogs  of  Americans 
having  gone?" 

"  Gani,  just  come,"  said  the  black.  "He  say  French  man 
and  woman,  and  baby,  and  Brill  woman,  go  way  in  steamer; 
schooner  stay." 

"So!    The    schooner    stay!"    thundered    Duran.   And    he 


88  THE   VOODOO   GOLD  TRAIL 

cursed  and  fumed  a  spell.  "The  schooner  stay!  Why  do  they 
stay? — It  is  that  Carlos  Brill.  He  has  told  them  something. 
It  is  the  gold  now  they  want.  Why  did  I  not  kill  him?" 

"  The  men  have  try,"  spoke  the  black.    "They  cannot — 

"They  have  try!"  thundered  Duran.  "They  try  a  little, 
and  because  he  escape  one,  two  bad  shots,  the  fools  they  say 
the  Zombi  protect  him.  Well,  no  Zombi  protect  him  when 
I  see  him! — They  shall  not  find  the  gold. — Go,  make  ready 
my  breakfast." 

The  black  left  the  room.  Duran  turned  to  his  toilet,  man- 
ifesting his  ill  humor  the  while  with  grumbling  to  himself. 
The  man  presently  brought  in  his  food,  and  again  retired. 
The  meal  finished,  Duran  sat  in  deep  contemplation  for  some 
minutes,  staring  before  him,  and  intermittently  pulling  on  the 
lobe  of  his  ear  in  his  characteristic  manner. 

Finally  he  stepped  to  the  door,  and  called.  The  black  man 
again  appeared. 

"  Tell  Gani  I  go  to  the  Orion"  he  said.  The  door  closed 
and  again  Duran  fell  into  soliloquy. 

"  Yes,  I  make  the  gold  safe,"  he  said.  "That  Carlos  Brill— 
I  should  kill  him  long  ago." 

We  could  hear  him  in  the  room,  but  his  activities  were,  for 
the  most  part,  out  of  our  range  of  vision. 

Then  presently  he  brought  a  box  to  the  table.  He  laid  out 
a  money-belt.  Then  from  the  box  he  took  bundles  of  bills, 
of  money;  and  then  came  a  half  dozen  fat  pouches.  That  this 
was  gold  we  had  no  doubt.  The  paper  money  and  bags  of 
gold  Duran  soon  had  transferred  to  the  money-belt.  And  this 
he  hung  about  his  waist,  with  straps  over  the  shoulders.  A 
light  jacket  concealed  the  whole.  He  put  away  the  box  again. 


ON  THE  GOLD  TRAIL  AGAIN  89 

His  preparations  were  soon  completed,  and  he  went  out  oi 
the  room,  having  put  out  the  lights. 

It  was  then  Marat  gave  us  the  account  of  that  which  he  had 
heard. 

"  Well,"  I  said,  "if  he's  going  to  his  schooner,  we'll  have  to 
get  a  move  on  us." 

I  professed  that  I  wanted  to  see  the  place  Duran  got  that 
box  from.  And  Norris  confessed  a  like  curiosity.  "And  I 
want  to  see  how  this  door  works,"  he  said.  So  we  two  lingered, 
while  the  others  hurried  down  the  passage,  meaning  to  have 
an  eye  on  Duran  when  he  should  start  off  toward  his  ship. 

Norris  and  I  crawled  through  the  little  door.  We  first  put 
lights  to  the  candles,  and  looked  to  the  security  of  the  door. 
And  then  came  search  for  a  secret  recess.  After  some  minutes 
survey,  we  found  a  marble  slab  of  the  floor,  next  the  wall, 
showing  dust  about  the  edges.  Hung  on  the  wall  was  a  hook 
of  metal.  With  this  we  succeeded  to  pull  up  an  end  of  the 
slab. 

To  take  out  the  stone  and  thrust  our  hands  into  the  recess, 
where  it  extended  under  the  wall,  was  the  effort  of  two  mo- 
ments. We  pulled  forth  the  box. 

It  now  held  only  two  objects:  a  small  account  book,  and  a 
gold  ring  having  the  form  of  a  serpent.  The  ring  I  pocketed. 
The  book  held  some  figures — amounts  with  many  ciphers,  and 
a  number  of  addresses.  One  in  Paris,  others  in  Porto  Rico, 
Jamaica,  Cuba — the  Cambons'  among  them.  I  tore  out  a 
leaf  and  made  copies  of  them. 

"That's  right,  Wayne,"  said  Grant  Norris.  "They  might 
be  of  value." 

Soon  we  were  out  in  the  passage. 


90  THE  VOODOO  GOLD  TRAIL 

Down  in  the  bed  of  the  stream  we  found  Robert  awaiting 
us. 

"  He's  gone,"  said  Robert.  "We  were  in  time  to  see  him 
and  one  black  man  go  off  through  the  woods." 

Robert  led  the  way;  and  soon  we  were  on  a  trail  going 
toward  the  sea. 

We  hurried  to  catch  up  with  the  others,  and  in  a  little, 
came  upon  Julian  and  Ray,  lingering  to  make  sure  we'd  found 
the  way. 

"  I  suppose  you  two  are  now  sporting  a  money-belt  apiece." 
said  Ray. 

I  showed  him  the  serpent  ring. 

"  Ugh!"  he  grunted.   "That  voodoo's  coat  of  arms,  I  guess." 

We'd  covered  about  two  miles  when  we  got  sight  of  Cap- 
tain Marat  and  Carlos.  Carlos  kept  well  ahead;  and  he  was 
never  long  without  a  glimpse  of  Duran  and  his  black,  whose 
progress  was  slow,  because  of  a  burden. 

That  Duran  was  on  his  way  to  the  gold  mine,  there  was 
little  doubt.  Carlos  assured  us  that  it  was  always  this  way  he 
went  when  he  meant  to  conceal  his  movements.  And  on  these 
occasions  he  would  sail  away  in  his  schooner  in  the  night. 
And  it  was  this  had  made  it  impossible  for  Carlos  to  follow 
him  to  the  place.  That  his  father  had  never  travelled  to  the 
mine  by  a  water  route  Carlos  was  quite  sure,  though  he  had 
been  much  too  young  to  have  much  judgment  in  the  matter,  or 
over  much  curiosity. 

Duran's  sailors  had  proven  uncorruptible.  Voodoo  super- 
stition had  had  much  to  do  with  it,  doubtless,  and  they  were 
liberally  paid  by  their  master.  Carlos  knew  of  only  one  black 


ON  THE  GOLD  TRAIL  AGAIN  91 

who  had  deserted  Duran's  service;  and  he  had  afterward  been 
found  murdered,  in  the  city. 

The  character  of  the  growth  changed  as  we  approached  the 
sea.  The  greater  trees  were  less  plentiful;  there  were  more 
open  spaces;  bamboo,  tall  grasses,  came  in  our  way;  cocoa 
palms,  royal  palms,  cabbage  palms,  looked  down  upon  us  as 
we  passed.  And  then  came  vistas,  giving  view  of  the  blue 
sea.  Here  the  course  turned  east. 

In  the  comparative  sparsity  of  the  growth,  there  was  less 
need  for  a  path,  so  now  Carlos  soon  had  lost  the  trail  of  Duran 
and  his  black.  He  recommended  that  we  remain  where  we 
then  were,  while  he  was  gone  forward,  to  seek  for  signs  of  the 
two. 

"  Thanks,  Carlos,"  said  Ray,  throwing  himself  on  the 
ground,  "I  never  was  so  hot,  and  done  up." 

All  were  glad  of  a  rest,  except  perhaps  Grant  Norris,  who 
was  always  for  going  forward.  Now,  though,  the  heat  must 
have  taken,  temporarily,  some  of  the  go  out  of  him,  for  he  lay 
immovable  for  so  much  as  ten  minutes.  The  mid-day  sun 
was  almost  directly  overhead,  and  there  was  scarcely  a 
breath  of  air  stirring. 

When  an  hour  had  passed,  Norris  was  on  nettles  again.  He 
had  smoked  three  pipefuls,  to  calm  his  nerves.  Again  and 
again  he  made  short  excursions  to  the  east  to  anticipate  the 
return  of  Carlos. 

Ray  had  been  observing  him.  "Say,  Norris,"  he  said, 
"there  won't  be  slow  music  at  your  funeral." 

Then,  finally,  Carlos  turned  up.  He  beckoned  us  to  follow 
him.  We  tramped  two  more  miles,  much  of  it  through  a 
heavy  bushy  growth.  And  then  at  Just  he  halted  us  in  a 


92  THE  VOODOO  GOLD  TRAIL 

screen  of  bush,  whence  we  looked  out  on  the  waters  of  a  small 
cove,  almost  surrounded  by  palms,  whose  tall  trunks  leaned 
over  the  white  sand  beach.  Resting  in  that  cove  was  a 
schooner — the  Orion. 

11  Duran,  he  go  on  board,"  said  Carlos. 

We  could  see  the  figures  of  black  sailors  on  the  deck;  and 
with  binoculars  distinguished  their  white  master,  Duran. 

"  Well,  and  now  then?"  said  Norris. 

"  Yes,  what  next,  Wayne?"  said  Ray,  "Norris  and  I  are 
ready  to  bust." 

There  was  only  one  thing  to  do.  We  must  have  the  Pearl 
ready  to  follow  when  the  Orion  should  sail. 

"  And  when  do  you  think  she'll  sail?"  asked  Julian. 

"  Sometime  after  dark,  more  than  likely,"  said  Robert. 

It  was  Captain  Marat,  Robert  and  Julian,  that  went  for 
the  Pearl.  They  were  to  bring  her  to  within  a  few  miles  of 
this  cove,  and  pick  up  the  rest  of  us  in  a  small  boat.  They 
had  ten  miles  ahead  of  them,  most  of  it  along  the  beach,  and 
the  going  all  good,  where  the  sand  was  hard  with  moisture. 

The  hot  tropic  sun  beat  down  on  us  in  the  brush,  where  we 
crouched,  sweltering,  till  Carlos  found  us  a  less  ovenlike  look- 
out, under  the  palms  of  a  tongue  of  land  to  the  west  of  the 
cove.  Our  move  got  us  some  closer,  too,  to  the  object  of 
our  interest.  And  it  was  but  a  short  run  to  the  opposite  side 
of  the  point,  where  we  could  have  an  eye  on  the  coming  of 
the  Pearl. 

I  took  occasion  to  show  Carlos  that  gold  ring  I  had  found 
in  Duran's  hiding-place.  He  showed  surprise  and  some  emo- 
tion at  sight  of  it. 

"  That  my  father's  ring,"  he  declared.  "He  have  that  ring  on 


ON  THE  GOLD  TRAIL  AGAIN  93 

his  finger  that  day  he  went  away  with  Duran — an'  never  come 
back.  My  father  he  tell  us  he  in  the  city  have  that  ring  made 
of  gold  he  take  from  hees  mine.  He  was  no  voodoo,  my 
father,  but  I  do  not  know  why  he  have  thee  ring  made  like 
the  serpent.  He  was  mostly  negro — my  mother  was  Carib." 

Carlos  refused  the  ring.  He  asked  that  I  keep  it  for  him, 
till  he  should  ask  for  it.  It  was  when  we  were  all  at  sea  one 
day,  he  asked  for  the  ring.  I  handed  it  toward  him,  and  he 
held  up  a  belaying  pin,  asking  me  to  thrust  it  on  the  point. 
And  then  with  much  tapping  with  a  hammer,  he  blotted  out 
the  serpent;  and  on  the  broad  part,  where  the  head  had  been, 
he  contrived  a  cross,  using  hammer  and  chisel.  This  done,  he 
was  content  to  take  the  ring  his  father  had  worn. 

"  Now  thee  ring  be  good  luck,"  he  said.  And  he  placed 
it  on  his  finger. 

There  was  apparently  little  activity  on  board  the  Orion, 
though  once  or  twice  we  heard  the  laugh  of  a  sailor  wafted  in 
on  the  light  breeze. 

The  hot,  tedious  hours  dragged  along,  one  after  the  other, 
with  tropic  lassitude;  till  finally  the  shadows  of  the  palms  had 
spread  over  the  waters  of  the  cove.  And  at  last,  too,  Grant 
Norris  came  to  tell  us  that  the  Pearl  had  come  to  anchor, 
about  three  miles  away. 

It  was  then  activity  began  on  board  Duran's  schooner: 
The  binoculars  showed  us  sailors  throwing  off  the  gaskets. 
And  then — and  this  to  us  was  a  surprise — up  went  her  sails. 

"  Surely,"  said  Ray,  "they  can't  be  going  to  make  a  start 
yet?" 

"  We'd  better  hump,"  began  Norris,  "or  they'll  be  getting 
away  before  we  get  aboard  the  Pearl." 


94  THE  VOODOO   GOLD   TRAIL 

"Wait,"  I  said,  "I  don't  believe  they'll  sail  before  dark." 

"  Always,"  offered  Carlos,  "when  they  sail  from  the  city 
it  is  dark." 

"  I'm  thinking,"  said  Ray,  "that  what  that  Duran  finds 
to  do  in  daylight  wouldn't  make  a  long  sermon." 

One  thing  led  to  another,  and  soon  we  were  in  the  midst 
of  that  newly  popular  discussion  of  the  probable  location  of 
the  gold  mine.  "Well,"  concluded  Grant  Norris,  "it  can't 
be  very  far,  if  Carlos's  father  made  the  trip  overland,  there 
and  back,  in  five  or  six  days." 

Carlos  re-affirmed  his  statement.  "The  first  time  he  is 
away  some  weeks,  when  he  come  back  very  happy,  and  say 
he  have  find  gold  mine,  and  he  show  us  gold.  But  he  have 
been  away  five  and  six  day  and  come  back." 

It  was  then  the  schooner  again  took  our  notice,  for  the  sails 
began  to  come  down  again,  and  soon  they  were  all  snug  between 
gaffs  and  booms. 

"  Just  shaking  the  wrinkles  out  of  them,"  suggested  Ray. 

The  sun  was  now  nearing  the  horizon.  Norris  and  Ray 
hurried  up  the  beach,  to  get  themselves  aboard  the  Pearl,  and 
have  Captain  Marat  move  down,  after  dark,  close  to  the  point 
on  its  west.  Thus  this  tongue  of  land  with  its  tall  palms, 
would  still  hold  a  screen  between  the  two  schooners. 

Night,  with  the  precipitancy  peculiar  to  the  tropics,  rose 
up  and  lay  its  black  cloak  over  everything.  While  the  stars 
were  out  bright,  the  moon  was  not  due  till  near  daylight.  An 
hour  Carlos  and  I  waited,  watching  that  dark  spot  in  the  cove 
that  represented  the  Orion.  Then  Norris  and  Robert  joined 
us.  Our  schooner  now  lay  about  a  mile  from  shore,  they  told 


ON  THE  GOLD  TRAIL  AGAIN  95 

us.  The  land  breeze  soon  sprung  up,  and  still  there  was  no 
movement  in  the  cove. 

"  Looks  like  they've  settled  down  there  for  the  night,"  sug- 
gested Robert. 

"  Don't  say  that,"  said  Norris. 

Then  came  a  faint  flash  of  light  over  there,  and  in  another 
minute  we  heard  the  squeak  of  a  block. 

"  The  sails  are  going  up!"  I  said.  "Now  back  to  the  Pearl." 

We  hurried  on  among  the  pillar-like  trunks  of  palms;  in  a 
little  we  were  in  the  small  boat,  and  at  last  the  Pearl  took  us 
in. 

"  They're  making  sail,"  I  told  Captain  Marat. 

He  took  me  into  the  cabin,  and  showed  me  the  chart.  There 
was  there  shown  a  long  shoal,  that  would  necessitate  the 
Orion  passing  us  and  going  some  miles  west,  to  round  the  end 
of  the  shoal,  and  so  out  to  sea,  for  a  run  down  the  coast  to 
the  east.  "Unless,"  said  Captain  Marat,  "they  have  some 
safe  passage  through  the  shoal,  say  through  here."  And  he 
pointed  to  a  place  opposite  the  point,  where  the  depth  figures 
indicated  such  a  possible  passage. 

We  got  on  a  jib,  and  crawled  out  a  bit  nearer  to  the  place 
indicated;  and  again  we  let  down  the  anchor. 

We  had  not  long  to  wait  this  time.  A  dark  object  moved 
into  our  view.  With  a  distant  squeak  of  a  block  or  two,  it 
turned  seaward.  We  were  not  many  minutes  getting  under 
way.  We  lost  sight  of  the  Orion  before  we  got  way  on,  and 
when  we  were  well  beyond  the  shoal,  we  took  our  course  east 
at  a  guess. 

We  had  sailed  there  an  hour,  covering  some  miles,  before 
that  dark  mass  again  showed  before  us.  We  then  almost  ran 


96  THE  VOODOO  GOLD  TRAIL 

the  other  schooner  down,  for  she  lay  hove  to,  her  sails  flap- 
ping. With  quick  work  Captain  Marat  likewise  brought  the 
Pearl  about. 

During  the  maneuver  I  had  had  opportunity  to  note  that 
a  small  boat  of  the  Orion  had  separated  itself  from  that 
vessel,  and  was  a  little  way  shoreward.  But  at  our  coming 
the  boat  turned  about,  and  made  back  to  the  Orion  again. 

That  vessel's  sails  directly  filled  once  more,  its  bowsprit 
pointing  down  the  coast.  The  Pearl  was  not  long  in  falling 
into  its  wake.  And  then  came  a  flash  and  report  from  the 
Orion.  Norris  rushed  into  the  cabin,  brought  out  his  rifle 
and  sent  a  bullet  after  that  vessel. 

"Tit  for  tat!"  he  said.  "I'll  bet  that  that  cooled  his  en- 
thusiasm." 

The  enemy  did  not  see  fit  to  continue  the  exchange. 

"  Humph — 'tit  for  tat' "  mused  Ray.  "Norris  and  Duran 
talk  to  one  another  in  the  old  code." 

"  Oh,  and  maybe  you  can  tell  what  we  were  saying," 
bantered  Norris. 

"  Sure,"  said  Ray.  "That  fellow's  'tat'  said  —  'Don't  you 
dare  follow  me!'  and  your  'tit'  said — 'You're  another.'" 

"  You're  a  mighty  wise  gazabo,"  said  Norris. 

"  Of  course,"  said  Ray.    "And  I'm  a  mind  reader,  too." 

"You,  a  mind  reader!"  said  Norris.  "And  do  you  mean 
to  say  you  can  tell  what  I'm  thinking?" 

"  Sure,"  said  Ray.  "You're  thinking — a — you're  thinking 
that  I  don't  know  what  you're  thinking." 

And  he  had  to  dodge  Norris's  moccasin. 

We  were  now  keeping  pretty  much  in  that  other  schooner's 


ON  THE  GOLD  TRAIL  AGAIN  97 

wake.  It  gave  us  much  satisfaction  to  find  that  the  Pearl 
had  superiority  in  speed,  at  least  in  a  moderate  breeze. 

The  Orion  apparently  had  on  all  her  sail;  we  were  obliged 
to  shorten  sail  a  bit,  to  avoid  overhauling  the  other.  The 
waning  moon  came  out  of  the  horizon  an  hour  before  day- 
break. 

It  was  then  we  began  to  draw  off  a  little,  for  we  now  had 
but  one  purpose — to  keep  an  unwavering  eye  on  the  Orion. 
That  vessel,  it  became  plain,  had  come  to  have  its  single 
aim — to  shake  the  Pearl  from  her  trail.  And  now  day  after 
day,  and  night  after  night,  the  contest  was  on.  The  Orion 
at  first  put  on  every  effort  to  outsail  us;  that  was  vain.  Then 
she  sought  to  hang  us  on  dangerous  shoals;  but  Captain 
Marat's  charts  told  him  where  they  lay.  The  Orion  tried  at 
night,  by  sudden  changes  in  her  course,  to  lose  us  in  the  dark. 
But  sundown  always  found  us  clinging  to  her  apron  strings, 
and  a  sharp  eye  on  every  shift  of  her. 

A  week  passed  thus,  and  then  the  island  of  —  well,  suffice 
it  to  say  it  was  an  important  island  of  the  West  Indies  — 
This  island  hove  in  sight.  The  Orion  made  straight  in,  the 
Pearl  at  her  heels.  The  frowning  guns  of  a  fort  guarded  the 
harbor  and  city,  which  lay  on  the  west  coast. 

At  ten  of  the  morning  the  two  schooners  came  to  anchor. 
The  Pearl  chose  a  berth  less  than  a  hundred  fathoms  from  the 
other.  And  it  was  little  thought  that  these  ships  would  go  out 
of  that  harbor  with  rather  a  different  distribution  of  passengers 
than  that  with  which  they  went  in. 


CHAPTER  XI 

AT  HIDE  AND  SEEK  WITH  THE  ENEMY 

THE  white  buildings  of  that  city,  with  the  green  mountain 
background,  and  the  white  beach,  overhung  with  its  graceful 
palms,  presented  a  pleasing  picture.  I  remember  I  thought 
what  a  place  this  would  be  to  spend  a  peaceful  holiday;  to 
fish,  to  hunt,  to  feast  on  the  luscious  fruits,  and  explore  those 
forests  of  mountain  and  valley,  and  the  wonders  of  the  caves. 
If  only  we  had  never  come  up  with  that  fiend,  Duran. 

When  Captain  Marat  had  seen  to  it  that  all  was  snug,  and 
the  awning  stretched,  he  turned  his  eyes  toward  the  Orion, 
who  likewise  had  stowed  her  cloth  under  gaskets. 

"  I  did  not  think  that  Duran  would  come  in  to  thees  place," 
he  said. 

"  He  tried  to  shake  us  off  his  tail  by  running  fast,"  said 
Ray;  "and  he  tried  to  scrape  us  off  on  reefs;  and  now  I  guess 
he's  come  in  here  to  try  to  crawl  through  some  hole  that'll 
be  too  small  for  us." 

"  Well,  that  skunk  is  here  to  try  some  devilment,  that's 
sure,"  observed  Norris. 

We  kept  a  sharp  eye  on  the  Orion.  Within  the  hour  we 
saw  a  small  boat  from  the  city  boarding  her.  In  twenty  min- 
utes that  boat  came  to  the  Pearl.  The  port  doctor  came  over 
the  rail.  He  was  a  Spaniard,  but  with  a  good  command  ot 
English.  He  asked  the  usual  questions  of  Captain  Marat. 

98 


AT  HIDE  AND  SEEK  WITH  THE  ENEMY      99 

"  Well,"  he  said,  when  he  had  his  answers,  "I  am  afraid 
we'll  have  to  hold  you  in  quarantine.  I  learn  there  is  yellow 
fever  in  the  port  from  which  you  came." 

"  I  believe  there  is  some  mistake,"  said  Marat,  "we  heard 
of  no  yellow  fever  there." 

"  Pardon  me,"  I  interposed,  "but  did  you  get  your  informa- 
tion from  the  Orion?" 

"  Yes,"  admitted  the  doctor,  "from  Monsieur  Duran." 

"  And  is  the  Orion  to  be  quarantined?"  I  asked. 

"  No,"  he  said,  "the  Orion  has  not  been  in  that  port  for 
months.  The  outbreak  of  yellow  fever  is  less  than  three 
weeks  old.  Duran  was  hailed  by  a  ship  that  gave  him  the 
news." 

"  We  know,"  I  told  him,  "that  that  man  Duran  was  in  the 
port  on  the  day  preceding  that  on  which  we  sailed." 

There  was  a  dubious  look  in  the  official's  face.  And  now  he 
had  come  to  dividing  his  attention  between  myself  and  a 
steamer  that  was  just  moving  in.  He  put  his  binoculars  to 
his  eyes.  Some  moments  he  looked,  and  then  he  turned  to 
us. 

"  Wait,"  he  said.  "There  is  a  steamer  from  your  port.  I 
shall  be  back  presently." 

With  that  he  got  over  the  rail  and  went  off  in  his  boat  to 
the  steamer. 

"  Now  then,"  said  Norris,  when  he  was  gone,  "there's  that 
skunk's  trick." 

"  But  it's  a  monkey  trick,"  said  Ray.  "He  ought  to  know 
we'd  have  our  story  to  tell." 

"  Maybe,"  suggested  Julian,  "he  thought  his  wines — and 
rnaybe  some  gold — would  give  greater  weight  to  his  story." 


100  THE  VOODOO  GOLD   TRAIL 

I,  too,  had  got  the  smell  of  liquor  from  the  doctor's  breath. 
It  was  quite  probable  Duran  had  been  making  very  friendly 
with  this  official. 

"  Perhaps  Duran  counted  on  our  going  outside  the  harbor 
rather  than  be  delayed  in  quarantine,"  said  Robert. 

"  Yes,  and  that  would  suit  him  ver'  well,"  said  Marat.  "He 
could  then  try  and  slip  by  in  thee  dark." 

The  doctor  came  back,  as  he  had  promised.  And  he  spoke 
us  without  again  coming  aboard. 

"  That  was  some  mistake  about  the  yellow  fever,"  he  said. 
"You  will  be  free  to  go  ashore." 

"  Well,  and  what  will  our  voodoo  priest  try  next?"  said 
Grant  Norris. 

"Next,  he'll  have  us  arrested,  for  disturbing  the  peace," 
said  Julian. 

"  His  peace  of  mind,"  added  Ray. 

Our  discussion  became  serious  now.  The  more  Duran 
sought  to  shake  us,  the  more  important  that  we  observe  his 
every  movement. 

That  he  would  be  going  ashore  into  the  city  was  reasonably 
certain.  If  we  were  to  see  what  he  did  there,  it  might  be 
well  to  precede  him,  and  lie  in  wait.  Grant  Norris,  Robert 
Murtry,  and  Julian  Lamartine,  were  selected  for  this  expedi- 
tion. Julian,  like  Jean  Marat,  had  a  fair  command  of  the 
Spanish,  which  was  the  language  of  this  port. 

The  three  were  in  the  small  boat,  ready  to  push  off,  when 
I  recollected  the  bit  of  paper  in  my  pocket,  on  which  I  had 
copied  the  addresses  from  Duran's  book  in  the  old  ruin.  There 
was  among  them  an  address  in  this  port.  I  had  out  the  paper, 
and  called  out  the  name  to  Julian,  Paul  Marcel  was  the  name. 


AT  HIDE  AND  SEEK  WITH  THE  ENEMY     101 

We  saw  the  boat  of  our  friends  go  among  the  wharves.  It 
was  not  long  till — "There  he  goes  now!"  cried  Ray,  and  we 
saw  a  small  boat  moving  shoreward  from  the  schooner  Orion. 

The  moon,  approaching  its  first  quarter,  set  at  ten  that 
night,  and  our  three  had  not  returned  from  the  city.  The 
anchor-light  on  the  Orion  was  all  we  could  see  of  her. 

It  was  near  midnight  when  I  heard  the  dip  of  oars  approach- 
ing, and  directly  Norris,  Julian,  and  Robert  climbed  over  the 
rail. 

"  It  was  a  tame  party  we  had,"  grumbled  Norris.  "Our 
friend  Duran  is  back  on  his  schooner." 

"  But  the  address  was  right,"  said  Robert. 

"  Yes,"  offered  Julian,  "Duran  spent  most  of  his  time  at 
the  home  of  a  Monsieur  Paul  Marcel;  and  when  he  came  out 
on  the  verandah  to  go,  I  heard  him  appoint  to  come  back  to- 
morrow. And  they  talked  of  some  kind  of  party  for  tomorrow 
night." 

Tame  as  Norris  considered  their  excursion  on  shore,  Robert 
recounted  a  feature  of  that  adventure  that  had  not  a  little 
to  do  toward  putting  Norris  in  a  bad  humour.  When  they 
saw  Duran,  accompanied  by  his  two  blacks,  very  evidently 
making  to  the  boat,  our  party  fell  back,  not  to  be  seen  by 
Duran  at  the  wharf.  But  what  should  happen  but  that  Duran 
should  suddenly  step  from  behind  a  corner  of  a  shed  and 
laugh  derisively  in  their  faces. 

It  occurred  to  me  that,  in  view  of  the  circumstance,  there 
might  be  some  talk  on  the  Orion  that  it  should  profit  us  to 
hear  a  word  of.  I  said  as  much  to  Captain  Marat;  and  we 
two  set  off  forthwith  in  a  small  boat,  to  have  a  try. 

We  made  a  detour,  and  approached  the  Orion  from  the 


102  THE  VOODOO  GOLD  TRAIL 

far  side.  There  were  other  boats  moving  about,  making  us 
the  less  conspicuous,  and  besides,  the  inky  darkness  favored 
us.  So  that  we  came  in  under  the  Orion's  bows  unnoted. 
Voices  there  were  speaking  on  the  deck,  and  Captain  Marat 
cocked  his  ear  to  them,  as  we  held  to  the  stays. 

He  repeated  it  all  to  me  afterward,  and  this  is  pretty  much 
the  way  of  the  talk  he  heard: 

"  There  will  be  no  risk.  Of  course,  if  the  big  one  is  there, 
we  will  wait  till  the  next  night." 

"  But  the  noise  will—" 

"  But  there  need  be  no  noise.    It  must  be — " 

"  Yes,  that  won't  be  so  bad,  and  it  will  be  dark.  And  now 
I  want  you  to  know,  Monsieur,  that  the  men  are  beginning  to 
fear  they  will  never  see  the  gold  you  have  promised  them. 
This  being  pursued  is  a  new  thing  for  them.  And  then,  you 
have  always  been  all  powerful,  and  never  had  to  give  over 
your  plans  and  flee.  And  we  have  come  so  far  from — " 

"  Bah !  You  must  make  them  to  understand  again  that 
these  infernal  Americans  have  Carlos  Brill  with  them,  and 
they  are  after  my  secrets — they  want  the  gold.  And  I  can- 
not afford  to  give  them  the  least  hint  where  it  lies.  We  must 
finally  shake  them  off;  then  we  go  back  home;  I  land  the 
regular  place,  at  the  foot  of  Twin  Hills.  Then  no  one  can 
follow.  And  in  the  week  I  will  have  out  all  the  gold  that  is 
mined.  Then  I  will  give  the  men  more  gold  than  they  ever 
dreamed  of  having,  and  they  will  be  free  to  go  and  spend. 
And  for  two  years,  maybe  three  years,  I  will  not  go  near  the 
mine. 

"And  no  one  will  ever  find  it.  No,  it  is  safe;  that  is  very 
sure.  Tell  them.  And  you — you  know  what  I  have  promised 


AT  HIDE  AND  SEEK  WITH  THE  ENEMY     103 

you.  I  make  you  the  most  wealthy  black  that  ever  lived,  and 
I  will  never  feel  the  loss  of  what  I  give  you.  But  you  must 
not  fail  me." 

"  Oh,  monsieur,  believe  me,  I  will  do  my  work  well." 

"If  you  succeed,  you  must  make  no  mistake  about  the 
place  to  meet  us;  we  must  not  leave  them  behind,  here." 

"  Yes,  monsieur ;  there  will  be  no  mistake.  I  know  my 
work." 

The  voices  became  indistinct  as  the  speakers  moved  away. 
Then  Marat  took  up  the  oars  again  and  quietly  got  our  boat 
away  in  the  dark. 

It  was  then  he  repeated  to  me  what  he  had  heard. 

"  Then  we  came  just  too  late  to  hear  what  this  thing  is 
they  plan,"  I  said. 

"  Yes,"  agreed  Captain  Marat,  "but  we  got  one  clue  to  the 
mine.  He  say  he  weel  'land  at  foot  of  Twin  Hills' — back 
home.  We  look  on  thee  chart;  that  it  is  near  that  place  where 
we  begin  the  pursuit." 

We  were  soon  aboard  the  Pearl,  the  chart  on  the  table. 

"There!"  said  Captain  Marat.  And  he  put  the  end  of  a 
match  on  the  spot  marked,  "Twin  Hills."  It  was  close  to 
the  sea  line,  less  than  five  miles  from  the  cove  in  which  we 
discovered  the  Orion. 

And  then  I  had  a  thought. 

"  That  must  be  where  we  saw  a  small  boat  starting  toward 
shore  from  the  Orion,"  I  said. 

"  Just  so,"  said  Marat.  "It  was  Duran,  going  to  land 
The  regular  place,'  to  go  to  his  mine." 

"  Well,  now,"  began  Ray,  who  had  followed  us  into  the 


104  THE  VOODOO   GOLD  TRAIL 

cabin,  "you  folks  seem  to  know  a  heap.  Where  do  you  get 
all  your  wisdom?" 

We  got  all  our  party  together,  and  Marat  repeated  what 
we  had  learned. 

"  So  the  mine  is  away  back  up  there  where  we  started  from, 
after  all,"  said  Norris.  "And  here  we  are  a  week's  sail  from 
the  place  we're  after.  If  that  skunk  would  only  drop  some 
decent  clue  to  the  place,  I  trust  Wayne  here  to  find  it,  and  we 
could  leave  Mr.  'Monsieur  voodoo  priest'  to  sail  the  globe,  if  he 
likes,  while  we  go  back  and  take  possession  of  Carlos's  mine." 

"  But  what  is  the  meaning  of  the  other  talk,"  said  Julian. 
"What  is  this  thing  they  are  up  to?" 

And  this  is  the  thing  we  got  news  of  the  following  night,  as 
shall  be  seen. 

We  were  early  astir  in  the  morning.  Most  of  us  spent  the 
greater  part  of  the  day  ashore.  And  we  had  an  eye  on  Duran's 
movements,  for  he,  too,  put  in  the  day  in  the  city.  He  was 
apparently  well  known  among  a  number  of  the  citizens,  for 
he  was  often  greeted  familiarly.  And  he  spent  much  money 
that  day,  for  wines,  flowers,  and  dainties  for  the  palate,  all 
of  which  were  carted  to  the  residence  of  Monsieur  Marcel; 
so  it  became  apparent  it  was  Duran  that  was  giving  the  party. 

Night  found  Ray  and  myself  among  the  lookers-on,  made 
up  of  the  poor  of  the  neighborhood.  They  were  allowed  to  en- 
croach on  the  lawn,  where  they  stood  among  the  planted  bushes 
and  under  the  palms.  And  drink  and  dainties  were  sent  out 
for  the  rabble,  who  gorged  themselves  at  the  expense  of  Duran. 

The  house  was  large,  with  extensive  verandas,  on  which  the 
guests  danced  to  the  music  of  an  orchestra.  There  was  a  great 
hum  of  voices,  and  much  laughter. 


AT  HIDE  AND  SEEK  WITH  THE  ENEMY     105 

Ray  and  I  could  see  Duran,  from  time  to  time,  as  he  played 
the  gay  cavalier;  and  he  was  apparently  very  popular  with 
the  ladies,  with  whom  he  danced  and  promenaded.  His  de- 
portment was  that  of  a  real  gentleman,  and  his  dress  was  most 
correct.  I  thought  of  that  other  night,  when  I  had  seen  this 
same  man  in  a  red  robe;  in  his  blackened  face,  under  a  tur- 
ban, the  look  of  a  fiend;  in  his  hand  a  knife  ready  for  a  horrid 
deed.  To  fathom  such  a  character  was  beyond  my  power  of 
reasoning.  A  learned  man  has  since  sought  to  explain  the 
thing  to  me,  by  saying  that  the  little  part  of  black  blood  in 
this  man  was  doubtless  descended  from  a  cannibal;  and  those 
instincts  would  at  times  come  to  the  fore.  And  then,  too,  he 
said,  much  of  the  white  in  this  man  might  easily  be  descended 
from  a  "wolf  in  sheep's  clothing,"  which  is  not  so  uncommon 
a  phenomenon  in  society  today. 

The  mob  that  was  about  us  was  all  gone,  long  before  eleven 
o'clock.  But  the  dancing  and  gaiety  at  the  house  showed  no 
abatement. 

We  two  were  in  a  bit  of  brush,  at  a  point  that  gave  us  a 
good  view  of  the  premises.  The  moon  was  long  gone,  but  the 
house  lights  made  a  halo  all  about. 

"  Well,  I  don't  see  what  good  we  are  doing  here,"  said  Ray 
at  last.  "That  Duran  will  go  to  his  schooner  when  this  thing 
is  over,  and  we  don't  care  what  he  does  before  then." 

"  He  might  slip  away  in  some  other  vessel,"  I  said. 

Another  hour  passed. 

And  then  Duran  came  out  on  the  verandah,  and  appeared 
to  be  looking  directly  toward  us.  I  was  sure  he  could  not  see 
us,  for  we  crouched  in  the  blackest  of  shadows. 

"  There  is  that  white  voodoo,  again,"  said  Ray.    "I  wonder 


106  THE  VOODOO  GOLD  TRAIL 

if  he's  going  to  keep  that  crowd  going  till  daylight.  Folks 
ought  to  have  some  sense  of — " 

His  speech  was  cut  off.  And  that  instant  I  was  enveloped 
in  a  cloth,  held  about  me  with  strong  arms;  and  I  felt  a  pres- 
sure on  my  mouth. 

To  struggle,  I  soon  found  to  be  useless.  Many  hands  seemed 
to  be  holding  me,  and  I  was  picked  off  the  ground,  my  bearers 
pattering  along  at  a  rate. 

Presently  we  came  to  a  stop,  and  I  was  tumbled  into  some 
kind  of  a  wagon,  as  the  creak  of  the  wheels  told  me.  And 
there  was  a  body  jostling  me  in  the  wagon-bed — Ray. 


CHAPTER  XII 

IN    CAPTIVITY THE    MESSAGE 

HERE  was  a  mishap  entirely  unexpected.  And  it  flashed  on 
me  that  here  at  last  was  the  explanation  of  the  enigmatic  part 
of  the  talk  Marat  heard  the  night  before.  That  some  of  us 
were  keeping  an  eye  on  him  in  town,  Duran  had  known;  and 
"the  big  one"  whose  absence  was  desired,  was  doubtless  Norris. 
And,  "there  need  be  no  noise,"  Duran  had  said.  Verily  the 
capture  could  not  have  been  effected  with  less. 

Where  we  were  to  be  taken,  and  what  was  to  be  done  to  us, 
filled  my  mind.  There  was  something  in  the  talk  last  night 
about  a  place  to  meet.  And — "We  must  not  leave  them  be- 
hind here,"  Duran  had  said.  So  then  the  captors  were  to  meet 
the  others  at  some  appointed  place,  and  the  captured  were  not 
to  be  left  behind.  What  could  that  mean  other  than  that  we 
were  to  be  finally  taken  aboard  the  schooner  Orion. 

The  ihing  cleared  in  my  mind.  Duran  counted  on  the  Pearl 
refusing  to  sail  without  Ray  and  myself — that  our  friends 
would  remain  and  seek  us,  even  at  the  risk  of  losing  the  trail 
of  Duran.  And  so  the  Orion  would  sail  away  to  the  mine  with- 
out fear  of  discovery.  The  thought  of  defeat  in  the  thing  we 
had  so  much  suffered  for,  caused  my  heart  to  sink.  I  had  no 
real  fear  that  our  lives  were  in  danger.  Duran  had  but  the  one 
thought  now — to  save  the  gold.  Now  that  at  last  there  were 
those  who  had  penetrated  to  his  lair  in  the  hills,  he  would  not 

107 


108  THE  VOODOO  GOLD  TRAIL 

add  zest  to  the  pursuit  of  himself  by  a  needless  crime,  a  crime 
that  would  be  easily  laid  to  his  door. 

The  wagon  went  bumping  along  over  the  rough  road,  shak- 
ing us  thoroughly,  while  these  thoughts  were  passing  in  my 
mind.  Hot  as  was  the  night,  I  was  almost  stifled  by  this  thing 
over  my  head,  reinforced  by  the  tight  binder  on  my  mouth. 

We  must  have  traveled  at  least  five  miles,  I  judged,  when 
the  wheels  ceased  to  turn.  The  cloths  were  taken  from  our 
heads.  The  bonds  on  our  arms  and  legs  remained.  There 
was  one  black  who  spoke  some  English,  and  he  warned  us  to 
make  no  noise. 

"  We  put  them  on  again,  if  you  do,"  he  said. 

Once  more  the  wagon  moved  on.  The  stars  shone  overhead, 
and  I  could  see  trees  and  palms  looking  down  on  me,  now  and 
then. 

"  This  is  a  pretty  pickle  you've  pulled  me  into,"  Ray  said. 
"My  mouth  all  tied  up  for  more  than  an  hour;  and  my  liver's 
all  scrambled."  Ray  would  make  a  joke  of  the  rope,  if  the 
hangman's  noose  were  round  his  neck.  I've  never  known  a 
situation  so  bad  as  to  dampen  his  spirits.  I  would  have  liked 
to  talk  with  him  about  our  present  unhappy  situation,  and 
try  to  devise  something  by  way  of  bettering  it;  but  there  was 
that  black  man  who  spoke  English.  With  him  on  the  seat,  and 
in  the  wagon  box  were  four  other  blacks, — as  I  finally  made 
out — Duran  was  making  sure  of  our  security.  I  wondered 
how  far  it  would  be  to  this  place  on  the  coast,  where  we  were 
to  be  met  by  the  Orion. 

Day  finally  came,  and  we  were  allowed  to  sit,  thus  having 
our  heads  more  in  the  air.  Ray  grumbled  about  the  hardness 
of  the  springs — the  wagon  had  none — ;  and  the  meat,  and 


IN  CAPTIVITY  — THE  MESSAGE  109 

bread,  and  water,  that  were  thrust  into  his  mouth  did  not 
make  a  breakfast  to  his  liking.  The  morning  was  not  yet  half 
gone,  when  we  came  to  a  stop,  at  a  hut  by  the  roadside. 
Then  came  an  opportunity  that  I  had  not  even  ventured  to 
hope  for — an  opportunity  to  send  a  message  back  to  our 
friends. 

The  black  who  spoke  English  came  and  leaned  on  the  wagon 
wheel.  He  had  something  to  say  to  us.  He  offered  us  free- 
dom, on  condition  that  we  should  prepare  a  message  to  be 
taken  back  to  our  friends  on  the  Pearl,  a  writing  that  should 
induce  them  to  remain  in  harbor,  and  cease  to  follow  the  Orion. 

"  You  will  then  let  us  go  back  to  our  friends?"  I  asked. 

"  Yes,  you  go  back,"  he  said. 

I  felt  that  the  fellow  lied,  for  he  would  not  have  time  to  learn 
the  result  of  the  message  before  meeting  with  the  Orion;  for 
that  would  not  appear  until  the  Orion  had  sailed  away.  And 
Duran  was  little  likely  to  permit  us  to  go  back  and  point  out 
to  our  friends  the  way  the  Orion  had  gone.  But  of  course  I 
jumped  at  the  proposal. 

"Just  plain  letter,"  the  black  said.  "No  trick  letter,"  he 
warned. 

A  piece  of  wrapping  paper  was  brought  out  from  the  hut, 
and  a  pencil  to  write  with. 

My  arms  were  freed  for  the  purpose.  The  black  looked  on 
expectantly.  How  was  I  to  make  the  most  of  this  opportunity? 
I  had  not  slept,  my  mind  was  confused.  I  must  have  time  to 
think.  I  exaggerated  my  drowsiness,  and  my  eyes  winked  and 
drooped. 

"  I  am  too  tired  now,"  I  told  that  black.  "I  must  have  a 
little  rest,  first." 


110  THE  VOODOO   GOLD  TRAIL 

He  grunted.   "Rest,  then  write,"  he  said. 

The  man  was  himself  fatigued,  and  so,  doubtless,  eager  for 
a  snack  of  slumber.  He  went  into  the  hut,  leaving  one  black 
to  guard  us. 

"  Well,  I'm  going  to  have  a  snooze,"  murmured  Ray.  "If 
you  need  me,  ring."  And  in  another  minute  he  was  breathing 
heavily. 

I  pretended  to  doze  while  I  sought  in  my  mind  to  contrive 
a  secret  message  that  should  be  concealed  in  this  note  I  was 
to  write  our  friends  on  the  Pearl.  First,  I  must  make  it  very 
plain  to  them  that  they  should  continue  on  the  trail  of  the 
Orion,  and  that  we  two  were  to  be  taken  on  board  that  vessel. 
And  then,  in  order  that  they  might  safely  stay  behind  for  some 
hours,  when  the  Orion  sailed,  and  thus  seem  to  have  given  over 
the  chase  without  actually  losing  the  trail,  I  must  contrive  to 
let  them  know  which  way  the  Orion  would  go  to  meet  us.  That 
it  was  to  the  north  coast  of  the  island  was  plain,  for  the  stars 
had  kept  me  informed  as  to  the  general  direction  we  had  been 
moving.  But  how  to  conceal  all  that  intelligence  in  a  letter  of 
apparently  contrary  import? 

I  had  fallen  asleep.  I  awoke  with  a  start,  much  refreshed. 
And  when  I  opened  my  eyes,  it  was  with  the  feeling  that  my 
problem  was  solved.  The  thing  was  now  quite  clear ;  it  was  as 
if  I  had  dreamed  the  thing  to  a  conclusion.  Years  back,  we 
boys,  particularly  Robert  and  myself,  had  worked  on  various 
means  of  secret  communication  by  writing.  It  was  one  of  those 
methods  that  I  would  now  employ.  I  had  the  pencil  that  was 
brought  from  the  hut,  where  the  English-speaking  black  still 
lingered;  and  beside,  I  had  by  habit  long  carried  a  bit  of  in- 
delible pencil  in  my  trousers  pocket.  Those  words  I  wished  to 


IN  CAPTIVITY  — THE  MESSAGE  111 

convey  to  our  friends  in  secret  I  would  write  with  the  indelible 
pencil;  the  words  I  wished  to  be  ignored  I  would  put  with  the 
ordinary  pencil.  I  immediately  set  to  work  on  the  message.  I 
have  here  italicized  the  words — and  the  part  of  a  word — that 
were  done  with  the  indelible  pencil. 

Do  not  follow  the  Orion.  We  will  not  be  on  board 
oj  her.  We  are  promised  freedom  if  you  go  not 
from  the  northwest  coast,  where  you  are,  for  three 
days.  Then  keep  a  lookout  for  us,  and  we  will 
come  to  you  as  soon  as  we  can. 

Wayne  Scott. 

Now  I  had  not  the  least  doubt  that  when  our  friends  should 
come  to  read  this  note,  they  would  search  for  some  hidden 
message.  And  I  was  sure  that  Robert  would  finally  recollect 
our  old  practices,  and  finally  put  the  proper  test  to  it  that 
should  bring  out  the  words  that  I  wished  to  convey  to  them. 
I  contrived  so  to  use  the  pencils,  that  even  a  sharp  eye  would 
not  readily  detect  the  fact  that  two  pencils  had  been  employed 
in  the  writing.  The  color  in  the  piece  of  wrapping  paper  on 
which  I  wrote  helped  me  in  this. 

I  had  little  doubt  that  the  paper  would  come  under  Duran's 
sharp  eye  before  being  delivered  to  the  Pearl.  But  when  I 
surveyed  my  work,  I  had  little  fear  that  he  would  discover  the 
trick. 

It  was  still  far  from  noon  when  the  blacks  came  out  of  the 
hut.  I  gave  the  note  I  had  written  to  the  one  who  came  for 
it.  He  gazed  at  the  writing  —  I  believe  pretending  to  read. 
He  then  gave  it,  well  wrapped,  to  the  driver,  who  was  to  carry 
it  back  to  the  city. 


112  THE  VOODOO   GOLD  TRAIL 

My  hands  were  again  bound  to  my  body,  but  they  loosed 
the  legs  of  us,  and  stood  us  on  the  ground.  When  the  wagon 
was  gone  on  the  back  trail,  Ray  and  I  were  placed  between 
the  four  men  remaining,  and  conducted  afoot  over  the  rough 
way  to  the  northward.  It  was  an  uneven  road  we  trod;  and, 
tied  as  our  arms  were,  it  was  extremely  hard  to  keep  balance; 
so  that  we  would  stumble,  and  bump  into  one  another,  at 
times.  Once,  when  an  irregularity  caused  me  to  find  Ray's 
shoulder  with  an  unusually  hard  thump  from  mine,  he  said 
—  "Say I  Lean  on  your  own  flapjacks."  Which  was  by  way 
of  ironical  pretending  he'd  had  some  for  his  breakfast;  and 
he  knew  he  would  have  had  them  of  Rufe  for  the  asking,  had 
he  been  wise,  and  had  not  left  the  Pearl  to  go  on  shore  with 
me,  adventuring.  Subtle  Ray!  And  he  knew  I  was  fully  con- 
scious that  he  (in  his  playful  way)  implied  all  this. 

Cocoa  palms  were  more  and  more  in  evidence  as  we  went, 
so  it  was  plain  we  were  nearing  the  north  coast  of  the  island. 
And  after  perhaps  two  hours  laboring  over  that  trail,  we  turned 
off  to  the  left,  into  a  narrow  path,  going  through  a  thicket. 
Times,  crossing  open  ground,  where  the  hot  tropic  sun  beat 
down  on  us  unmercifully;  times,  threading  a  piece  of  forest 
whose  shade  was  most  welcome;  we  at  last  came  to  a  stop  in 
a  grove  of  palms.  For  some  little  while  I  had  seemed  to  hear 
a  distant  sound  that  was  familiar.  Now  it  was  become  plain; 
we  were  near  the  sea,  for  the  rolling  of  the  surf  on  the  beach 
was  distinct  to  our  ears. 

We  were  denied  a  sight  of  the  blue  expanse,  however,  for 
the  blacks  kept  us  well  within  the  shelter  of  the  trees,  and  our 
legs  again  were  well  trussed,  and  hands  freed.  They  set  about 
preparing  a  meal;  it  was  some  time  past  the  noon  hour;  and 


IN  CAPTIVITY  — THE  MESSAGE  113 

Ray  and  I  were  given  a  portion  of  the  mess,  whose  chief  in- 
gredient was  salt  codfish.  A  spring  was  found,  which  supplied 
drink. 

Once  a  wet  squall  came  and  gave  us  a  most  agreeable,  cool 
wetting,  though  Ray  complained  to  the  blacks  of  the  leaky 
roof. 

The  blacks,  two  and  two,  turn  about,  stood  guard  and  slept. 
We  two  slept  soundly,  refreshed  by  that  shower. 

Night  had  come,  when  I  awoke  to  hear  again  the  rumbling 
of  the  surf.  Ray  still  slept,  and  I  refrained  from  disturbing 
him.  Now  and  again  one  of  the  guards  would  make  an  exami- 
nation of  our  cords,  to  see  that  we  were  not  tampering  with 
them;  they  had  doubtless  been  well  instructed  by  Duran.  Ray 
finally  stirred  and  sat  erect. 

"Well,"  said  he,  "who  blew  out  the  light?"  One  of  the 
guard  crawled  close.  "Hello,  Uncle  Tom,"  said  Ray,  observing 
the  black.  "This  is  a  cheerful  crowd.  Haven't  you  got  a  banjo, 
or  something?" 

The  fellow  grunted  in  non-comprehension. 

"  Ugh,"  continued  Ray.  "Colored  gentlemen  where  I  come 
from  have  got  some  music  in  them.  If  Rufe  was  Ijere  he'd 
show  you  a  double-shuffle  that'd  make  your  mouth  water." 

And  thus  he  continued  to  babble,  until  at  last  he  stretched 
out  with  a  final  grumble  —  "This  is  a  rum  crowd.  The  only 
way  to  pass  the  time  is  to  sleep."  And  in  a  minute  he  was 
breathing  heavily  again. 

I  remained  awake  for  a  considerable  period.  The  continued 
chirping  of  a  cricket,  and  the  bellowing  of  distant  bull-frogs, 
finally  lulled  me  to  sleep. 


114  THE  VOODOO  GOLD  TRAIL 

Day  brought  us  both  awake.  The  two  blacks  on  guard  ob- 
served us  dully. 

"  See  here,"  began  Ray.  "Is  breakfast  ready?  I  want  my 
breakfast." 

The  man  who  had  some  English  chanced  to  be  one  of  the 
pair.  "You  get  breakfas'  when  we  ready  —  not  befo'." 

"  Huh?"  grunted  Ray,  feigning  astonishment,  and  glaring  at 
the  black.  "I  want  you  to  understand  I  pay  my  board.  I 
want  my  money's  worth,  and  if  I  don't  get  it,  I'll  change  my 
hotel." 

The  fellow  had  enough  comprehension  to  finally  sense  Ray's 
playfulness.  He  grinned;  and  forthwith  he  routed  out  the  two 
sleeping  blacks,  and  sent  them  scampering  for  wood. 

And  thus  had  begun  the  second  day  of  our  captivity.  We 
were  most  carefully  watched,  the  guards — always  two — made 
frequent  inspection  of  the  cords;  and  I  should  say,  they  had 
two  guns  between  them,  one  a  shot-gun,  perhaps  loaded  with 
buckshot.  So  that  any  thoughts  we  had  of  escape  found  little 
encouragement.  The  morning  hours  dragged,  and  the  heat 
increased.  I  had  my  thoughts  much  on  our  friends  on  board 
the  Pearl;  wondered  when  they  had  got  my  note,  and  if  they 
had  finally  picked  out  the  words  I  had  meant  for  their  under- 
standing; and  so,  if  they  had  acted  on  them.  During  occa- 
sional absences  on  the  part  of  that  one  black,  Ray  and  I  had 
found  opportunity  to  exchange  words  on  this  theme,  and  I  got 
much  encouragement  from  that  cheerful  comrade's  observa- 
tions. 

"  Leave  it  to  Bob,"  he  said,  "he's  figured  it  out.  He's  got 
his  mind  so  saturated  with  you,  he'll  feel  out  your  meaning 
in  anything  you  put  your  finger  to." 


IN  CAPTIVITY  —  THE  MESSAGE  115 

Our  captors,  one  or  two  at  a  time,  got  to  absenting  them- 
selves with  marked  regularity.  They  always  went  in  the  direc- 
tion from  which  came  the  music  of  the  surf.  We  had  nc 
difficulty  to  divine  the  cause.  "It  must  be  getting  time  for 
their  brother  cannibals  to  show  up,"  said  Ray. 

And  then,  at  last,  two  came  in,  showing  some  excitement; 
and  there  was  much  jabbering  among  them.  An  hour  passed. 
And  it  was  then  we  were  hustled  down  to  the  edge  of  the 
palms;  and  the  sea  opened  before  us.  And  there  was  a 
schooner,  perhaps  a  mile  from  the  beach,  and  a  small  boat 
coming  in.  We  were  thrust  forward  into  the  water,  and  we 
climbed  in.  And  soon  we  stood  on  the  deck  of  the  Orion, 
which  vessel  pointed  her  bow  out  to  sea.  Duran's  grinning 
face  confronted  us. 

"  And  so,"  said  Duran,  "you  like  very  much  to  sail  in  my 
company.  I  like  very  much  to  have  you."  His  smile  was 
derisive. 


CHAPTER  XIII 

JULIAN'S  NARRATIVE -THE  SECRET  MESSAGE 

IT  was  dark  when  we  parted  with  Wayne  and  Ray,  who 
went  to  the  Marcel  place,  where  Duran  was  to  give  a  ball.  I 
gathered  from  the  talk  I  heard  that  he  had  often  visited  the 
Port,  where  he  loved  to  display  his  wealth;  and  he  seemed 
even  to  nurse  the  curiosity  people  had  as  to  the  source  of  it. 
I  talked  with  a  French  tobacconist,  who  said  it  was  given  out 
that  Duran  claimed  descent  from  a  king. 

When  we  climbed  aboard  the  Pearl,  Grant  Norris  had  his 
usual  good-natured  grumble.  "I  don't  see  the  sense  in  losing 
sleep  watching  that  skunk  of  a  Duran,"  he  said.  "If  we  watch 
his  schooner,  that  he  travels  by,  he  isn't  going  to  slip  far  to 
that  gold  mine  without  our  knowing." 

"  Yes,  if  we  could  be  sure,"  said  Captain  Marat,  "that  would 
be  all  right.  But  it  may  be  he  give  this  party  to  confuse  us; 
and  then  he  sneak  away,  and  go  off  in  some  other  boat.  And 
then,  what  I  hear  las'  night  when  we  are  by  the  Orion,  show 
he  is  up  to  some  theeng,  as  you  say;  and  Wayne  and  Ray 
they  fin'  out  what  it  is,  maybe." 

Most  of  us  on  the  Pearl  went  to  sleep  early.  Robert  alone 
said  he  would  stay  awake  till  Wayne  and  Ray  should  come. 

It  was  long  past  midnight  when  Robert  came  and  wakened 
us.  He  said  he  was  sure  something  was  wrong.  At  midnight 

116 


JULIAN'S  NARRATIVE— THE  SECRET  MESSAGE     117 

he  had  rowed  off  in  the  boat,  and  hovered  around  the  schooner 
Orion  to  see  when  Duran  should  return.  He  said  it  was  a  feel- 
ing of  uneasiness  that  prompted  him.  He  had  had  that  uneasi- 
ness all  evening,  though  he  hadn't  liked  to  talk  about  it.  He 
said  —  "Duran  went  aboard  his  schooner  a  little  bit  ago;  and 
he  seemed  an  awful  sight  pleased  about  something.  I  heard 
that  voice  of  his  laughing  while  he  talked  with  those  black 
fellows  of  his." 

"  I  wish  you  had  taken  me  with  you,"  I  told  him.  "I  might 
have  heard  what  he  said." 

Robert's  fears  quickly  permeated  the  rest  of  us,  and  soon 
we  were  in  a  small  boat,  moving  toward  shore.  We  passed 
near  the  Orion  in  the  dark.  Duran  must  have  made  us  out, 
for  we  heard  his  laugh  from  the  rail.  It  was  such  a  laugh  as 
a  villain  laughs  —  with  derision  in  it.  Norris  almost  exploded 

with  rage  when  he  heard.   "I'll  plug  your  d d  carcass  yet, 

you  low  skunk!"  he  hissed  under  his  breath.  Carlos  grunted 
his  sympathy  with  Norris's  mood. 

We  found  the  other  small  boat  where  it  was  left  for  the 
boys.  Captain  Marat  remained  with  the  two  boats,  while 
Norris  and  Robert  and  I  hurried  to  the  Marcel  place  for  traces 
of  Wayne  and  Ray.  Our  uneasiness  increased  with  every 
moment.  We  got  amongst  the  shrubbery  with  our  lights,  for 
we  knew  their  plan.  At  last  Robert  called  us  to  a  spot  where 
there  were  many  prints  of  bare  feet,  among  one  or  two  shoe 
marks,  in  the  dew-moist  sand.  Those  prints  we  were  able  to 
follow  to  the  edge  of  a  palm  grove,  where  they  were  lost  in  a 
path  that  was  much  used.  We  held  to  the  trail  for  some  way; 
till  finally  we  came  to  many  branchings,  and  were  compelled 
to  give  it  up. 


118  THE  VOODOO   GOLD  TRAIL 

"  There's  no  telling  which  way  they  went,"  said  Robert. 
"But  those  voodoos  of  Duran's  got  the  boys  all  right." 

It  was  a  disheartening  speech. 

"  If  they  did,"  said  Norris,  "and  if  they  harm  them,  I'll 

put  a  bullet  in  every  d d  carcass;  and  I'll  hang  that  skunk, 

Duran,  by  a  hook  in  his  tongue,  gold  or  no  gold."  And  he  said 
more  that  was  not  altogether  fit  to  repeat.  And  he  meant  it, 
for  he  was  no  mere  boaster. 

Day  was  just  burst  when  we  came  back  to  Captain  Marat. 

"  Ah,"  he  said,  "thad  was  the  theeng,  Duran,  he  talk  about 
las'  night.  He  plan  it  all,  for  he  feel  sure  we  watch  heem  at 
the  ball." 

"  And  what  will  he  do  to  those  boys?  That's  what  I  want 
to  know,"  said  Norris.  And  there  was  fire  in  his  eyes. 

"  He  weel  not  harm  them,  I  theenk,"  said  Captain  Marat, 
"for  he  know  we  suspect  him." 

"He'll  keep  them  hid,"  said  Robert;  "and  while  we're 
looking  for  them,  he'll  up  and  run  off  to  the  gold  mine.  That's 
his  game." 

"  And  I,  for  one,"  declared  Norris,  "will  stay  and  hunt  for 
them,  gold  or  no  gold." 

We  rowed  back  to  the  Pearl  for  breakfast,  and  to  prepare 
for  the  search.  It  was  arranged  that  I  remain  on  board  with 
Rufe,  and  if  anything  should  occur,  to  require  the  others  to 
return,  I  was  to  hoist  a  red  ensign;  for  back  of  the  town  were 
hills  all  round,  and  they  would  be  never  far  from  a  vantage- 
point  whence  they  could  have  a  good  view  of  every  vessel  in 
the  harbor. 

They  went,  intending  to  scour  the  region  all  about  town, 
beginning  the  search  where  we  lost  that  trail  beyond  the  pine 


JULIAN'S  NARRATIVE— THE  SECRET  MESSAGE     119 

grove.  They  hoped  to  discover  the  boys  locked  in  some  hut. 
That  they  were  not  over-sanguine  was  plain.  Even  Norris 
must  have  some  notion  of  the  sagacity  of  Duran. 

I  used  a  slit  in  the  awning  for  my  view-port.  My  binoculars 
were  powerful,  and  I  kept  a  sharp  eye  on  the  Orion.  Duran 
I  saw  using  his  ship's  glasses  to  observe  the  Pearl's  boat  going 
to  shore.  And  some  time  in  each  hour  I  would  see  him  training 
them  on  some  particular  point  landward.  I  speculated  much 
on  what  might  be  the  object  of  his  interest. 

The  heat  of  the  afternoon  was  stifling;  the  pitch  bubbled 
in  the  seams  of  the  deck ;  and  the  barefoot  sailors  stepped  only 
on  the  shadowed  places. 

It  was  nearing  four  o'clock,  when  I  saw  Duran  go  into  a 
boat  and  start  shoreward.  Instantly  I  sent  aloft  the  red  ensign. 

Twenty  minutes  must  have  passed.  Cats'  paws  began  to 
show  on  the  bay,  suggesting  a  squall.  I  observed  a  skiff  making 
directly  to  the  Pearl.  It  had  but  one  occupant  —  a  black  boy. 
He  came  alongside,  and  held  up  some  paper,  folded.  I  reached 
down  and  took  it.  And  the  boy  was  for  making  off  at 
once.  I  told  him  to  come  aboard,  speaking  in  French.  He  did 
not  understand,  so  I  tried  him  in  Spanish.  No,  he  said,  he 
was  told  not  to  remain.  I  showed  him  a  handful  of  silver,  at 
which  his  expression  changed,  and  he  tarried. 

"  Wait  a  moment,"  I  said.  And  I  opened  the  paper.  Inside 
was  a  small  sheet  bearing  writing,  and  signed  by  Wayne.  I 
read  hastily. 

"  Who  gave  you  this?"  I  asked. 

"  A  black  man,"  he  said. 

"  Was  a  white  man  there?"  I  asked. 

"  I  can't  tell,"  he  answered,  faltering. 


120  THE  VOODOO  GOLD  TRAIL 

"Not  for  all  this  money?"  I  asked. 

"  You  won't  tell  on  me?"  he  asked. 

"  No,  I'll  not  tell,"  I  assured  him. 

"  Yes,  a  white  man  gave  it  to  me.  He  is  that  rich  white 
man  from  the  schooner." 

I  gave  the  boy  the  money. 

Then  it  was  not  long  till  I  saw  Duran  go  back  to  the  Orion. 

Dark  clouds  had  begun  to  gather  and  I  looked  anxiously 
for  the  Pearl's  boat.  At  last  I  saw  it  come  into  view. 

I  gave  them  the  writing,  telling  them  the  circumstances  of 
its  coming.  Captain  Marat  held  the  paper  while  all  read  as 
follows: 

Do  not  follow  the  Orion.  We  will  not  be  on  board 
of  her.  We  are  promised  freedom  if  you  go  not 
from  the  northwest  coast,  where  you  are,  for 
three  days.  Then  keep  a  lookout  for  us,  and 
we  will  come  to  you  as  soon  as  we  can. 

Wayne  Scott. 

The  wind  was  on  us,  so  we  hurried  down  into  the  cabin. 
Directly  the  rain  was  pattering  on  the  roof. 

"  So  we  must  give  up  the  gold  for  the  present,"  spoke  Cap- 
tain Marat.  "Ah,  thad  was  it  —  just  like  we  suspect:  Duran 
plan  thees  thing  to  give  us  the  slip." 

"  Let  me  see  that,"  said  Robert.  Arid  he  took  the  paper 
in  his  fingers,  studying  the  writing  with  intentness,  and  holding 
it  in  varying  positions. 

"  It's  Wayne's  writing,  all  right,  isn't  it?"  said  the  wondering 
Norris. 

"  Yes,"  said  Robert,  "but  I  know  Wayne." 


JULIAN'S  NARRATIVE— THE  SECRET  MESSAGE     121 

He  dug  out  from  the  papers  on  the  table  a  piece  of  blotting 
paper;  and  he  called  to  Rufe  to  bring  him  some  water.  The 
wondering  Rufe  jumped  for  it.  Robert  wet  the  blotting  paper; 
then  laying  Wayne's  writing  on  the  table,  he  pressed  the  wet 
blotter  on  it.  When  he  uncovered  the  paper  we  were  astounded 
to  see  some  of  the  words  standing  out  in  purple  letters,  the 
purple  reading  thus: 

Do       follow  the  Orion.   We  will       be  on  board 
of  her.  you  go 

north         coast 

Then  keep  a  lookout  for  us,  and 
we  will  come  to  you  as  soon  as  we  can. 

Wayne  Scott. 

"Ah!"  said  Captain  Marat.  "Thad  look  ver'  deeferent. 
They  want  we  shall  follow  thee  Orion  —  and  they  are  to  be 
on  board  of  thee  Orion.  And  so  that  what  Duran  mean  w'en 
he  say  —  'We  must  not  leave  them  behind.' " 

"And,"  offered  Robert,  "he  wants  us  to  look  out  for  them. 

i 
That  means  that  when  we  get  near  enough,  they'll  escape 

overboard  if  they  get  a  chance;  and  they  want  us  to  pick 
them  up  if  they  succeed." 

"  Say,"  broke  in  Norris,  holding  the  paper  and  addressing 
Robert.  "What  you  kids  can't  think  up  isn't  in  the  dictionary, 
or  Shakespeare.  That  Duran  is  a  sharp  one,  but  let  Wayne 
and  Robert,  here,  alone  —  we'll  beat  that  skunk  yet." 


CHAPTER  XIV 

JULIAN    CONTINUES   THE  NARRATIVE  -NOKRIS'   BIG   GUN 

THERE  was  much  discussion  now,  and  the  storm  having 
passed,  we  got  up  on  deck  again.  It  was  decided  to  make  it 
appear  to  Duran  that  we  meant  to  remain,  waiting  for  the 
return  of  the  boys.  We  got  a  boat  ready,  put  into  it  blankets 
and  provisions,  and  the  like,  as  if  for  a  sojourn  on  shore.  We 
made  certain  Duran  would  be  watching  our  preparations.  An 
hour  before  night  we  pushed  off,  Robert  and  Rufe,  only,  re- 
maining aboard  with  the  sailors. 

At  the  wharf  we  hired  a  mule  and  cart,  and  transferred  the 
cargo;  and  directly,  we  were  moving  to  the  back  of  the  town, 
stopping  only  when  we  had  reached  a  little  wooded  eminence. 
We  did  not  unload,  but  unhitched  the  mule  and  put  him  to 
graze. 

We  had  not  been  long  at  the  place,  when  Norris  went  off, 
saying  he  had  an  errand,  and  would  meet  us  at  the  boat- 
landing. 

We  could  see  both  schooners  from  the  little  hill,  until  dark- 
ness came.  Then  we  kept  watch  for  Robert's  signal. 

"  What  do  you  think  Norris  can  be  up  to?"  I  said. 

"Ah!"  returned  Marat,  "Thad  Englishman,  he  got  some 
buzz  in  hees  bonnet.  He  ver'  good  man.  He  — " 

"There  thee  light!"  said  Carlos. 

I  looked,  and  out  of  the  black  harbor,  dotted  with  anchor 

122 


JULIAN  CONTINUES  THE  NARRATIVE        123 

lights,  there  appeared  a  wee  flashing,  repeated  at  frequent 
intervals.  We  answered  with  a  few  flashes  from  our  lantern. 
Then  Robert's  signal  ceased. 

The  mule  was  put  to  the  cart  again,  and  we  returned  to  our 
boat. 

There  was  Norris,  waiting.  He  sat  on  the  bow  of  the  small 
boat,  twirling  his  thumbs.  While  we  were  transferring  our 
property  from  the  cart  to  the  boat  again,  I  noted  a  pair  of 
white  men  seated  in  a  flatboat  of  some  bulk,  lying  nose  on  the 
beach,  nearby.  When  we  started  for  the  Pearl,  Norris  made 
a  gesture  to  the  two  men  who  immediately  followed  with  their 
boat  in  our  wake. 

"  What  have  you  got  there?"  I  asked  of  Norris. 

"  Oh,  that's  just  a  couple  of  dagos  doing  a  job  for  me," 
Norris  answered. 

"  The  Orion's  gone,"  said  Robert,  as  we  drew  near  the 
Pearl 

We  threw  our  outfit  aboard.  And  then  Norris  unlashed  the 
block  from  the  main  gaff  and  swung  it  down  to  the  "  Dagos," 
who  had  come  alongside  with  their  boat.  They  hitched  the 
tackle  to  a  tarpaulin-wrapped  article.  From  its  shape,  it  might 
be  a  piece  of  cordwood.  When  that  had  been  pulled  aboard, 
the  block  went  down  into  the  boat  again,  and  soon  up  came 
a  gun  carriage.  It  was  that  type  so  much  seen  in  the  old  forti- 
fications, the  supports  of  wood,  with  small  wheels  at  the  base. 
Next  came  about  fifty  rounds  of,  perhaps,  two-pound  balls, 
and  powder  in  kegs,  not  forgetting  ram-rod  and  swabber. 

The  "Dagos"  moved  quietly  away,  money  in  their  fists. 

"Never  heard  of  a  ship  on  such  a  chase  as  ours  without 
some  kind  of  a  cannon,"  explained  Norris. 


124  THE  VOODOO   GOLD  TRAIL 

He  had  seen  some  old  cannon  lying  useless  in  an  old  forti- 
fication on  shore.  He  fastened  his  liking  on  a  brass  gun,  of 
not  too  great  size,  and  'by  hook  or  by  crook,'  had  made  a  deal 
for  it  —  "With  the  fixin's,"  as  he  said.  One  little  wheel  of 
the  carriage  was  broken,  but  he  contrived  a  temporary  prop 
in  its  place.  He  did  not  rest  till  he  had  the  brass  barrel 
mounted  and  lashed  up  near  the  bows,  and  hid  under  its 
tarpaulin. 

"What  are  you  going  to  do  with  that  'barker'?"  said 
Robert. 

"  First  of  all,"  said  Norris,  "I'm  going  to  polish  her  up  — 
to  decorate  the  ship.  And  then,  if  ever  that  skunk  voodoo 
gives  me  an  excuse,  I'm  going  to  find  out  what  my  old  training 
in  gunnery  has  done  for  me." 

The  land  breeze  had  been  blowing  for  a  long  time.  Though 
Captain  Marat  had  his  clearing  papers  all  in  proper  form 
long  ago,  we  waited  till  the  Orion  had  got  near  a  good  three 
hours  start,  before  we  got  up  our  anchor  and  set  the  Pearl's 
bow  out  to  sea. 

It  was  past  midnight,  the  moon  —  in  its  first  quarter  — 
was  just  setting.  In  half  an  hour  we  went  about,  and  made 
toward  the  north.  Daylight  found  us  rounding  the  northwest 
corner  of  the  island. 

"  How  long  do  you  think  it  will  take  us  to  get  sight  of 
that  skunk's  ship?"  asked  Norris. 

"Ah!"  mused  Captain  Marat,  "Maybe  one  day,  maybe 
two." 

"  And  if  the  Orion  is  going  back  home,"  said  Norris,  "after 
she  picks  up  Wayne  and  Ray,  which  way  will  she  turn — north 
and  then  back,  or  down  around  the  east  end  of  the  island?" 


JULIAN  CONTINUES  THE  NARRATIVE        125 

"  I  theenk,"  said  Marat,  "thad  she  go  aroun'  thees  island. 
She  make  faster  sail  thad  way,  and  Duran  weel  think  we  have 
not  so  much  chance  to  head  him  off  thad  way  —  if  we  should 
happen  to  come  after  heem." 

That  first  day,  while  the  Pearl  plowed  steadily  eastward, 
the  coast  always  in  view,  Norris  busied  himself  with  repairs 
on  his  gun-carriage.  The  second  day  broke  with  no  sight  of 
the  Orion.  And  this  day  Norris  gave  to  polishing  his  brass 
cannon;  a  job  that  took  grit  and  elbow-grease,  for  that  barrel 
carried  the  accumulations  of  many  years  of  exposure  to  all 
weathers. 

That  afternoon  he  got  out  powder  and  a  ball,  and  charged 
the  gun,  and  ten  minutes  before  we  were  to  turn  on  the  star- 
board tack,  he  set  adrift  a  little  raft  on  which  he  had  rigged 
a  square  bit  of  canvas.  And  then  when  we  got  round  on  that 
tack,  he  called  Rufe,  who  came  running  with  a  red  hot  poker. 
Norris  sighted  the  gun  on  that  raft,  the  while  shouting  orders 
to  the  man  at  the  helm.  A  touch  of  the  red  poker,  and 
"Boom!"  We  saw  the  splash,  perhaps  forty  feet  to  the  right 
of  the  raft,  which  now  floated  some  three  hundred  yards 
distant. 

"  If  that  had  been  the  Orion"  said  Norris,  "I'd  have  got 
her  in  the  bows.  That's  a  good  enough  shot,  I'll  say." 

It  was  near  nine  of  the  following  morning  that  we  sighted 
the  sails  of  a  vessel.  There  was  excitement  on  the  Pearl.  In 
two  hours  we  could  see  a  little  of  the  hull.  She  was  a  schooner. 

"  I  think  thad  the  Orion,"  said  Captain  Marat  then.  The 
impulsive  Norris  had  declared  it  that  vessel  from  the  first. 
Finally  came  an  experience  I  dread  to  recollect.  We  had 
passed  the  eastern  end  of  the  island,  and  were  abreast  of  some 


126  THE  VOODOO  GOLD  TRAIL 

lesser  islands.  The  schooner  ahead  was  on  the  starboard  tack. 
We  held  also  on  the  same  tack.  The  other  schooner  went 
about  on  the  port  tack.  We  followed  suit.  In  half  an  hour 
black  clouds  suddenly  rose  out  of  the  southwest.  They  were 
preceded  by  gray  clouds  that  curled  like  billows. 

Captain  Marat  at  once  shortened  sail  —  reefed  to  the  utter- 
most. The  schooner  ahead  went  about  and  made  for  a  small 
island  to  the  east.  The  Pearl  did  the  same. 

The  wind  struck  us.  Rapidly  it  increased  in  fury.  Captain 
Marat  got  a  loop  of  rope  round  the  mainmast,  whence  he 
called  his  orders  to  Norris  and  two  sailors  at  the  wheel.  I 
never  had  realized  that  a  vessel  could  skim  the  sea  with  such 
terrific  speed.  Spray  hissed  over  the  deck.  The  masts  bent; 
the  schooner  groaned  under  the  strain.  The  tempest  howled 
in  the  rigging.  Belated  birds  flew  past,  shoreward. 

Rapidly  that  island  loomed  ahead  in  the  semi-night.  Marat 
used  his  glasses. 

"  Hard  on!"  he  yelled  at  last. 

We  bore  down  directly  on  the  land,  now  close  aboard. 
Robert  and  I  braced  ourselves  for  a  shock,  for  we  expected 
the  Pearl  to  strike  on  the  shoals. 

Another  minute  and  we  saw  land  on  both  sides  of  us. 

"Luff!    Luff!"  shouted  Captain  Marat. 

The  Pearl  went  about;  the  sails  flapped  angrily;  the  anchor 
went  overboard,  and  we  lay  in  the  lee  of  a  wooded  hill.  Bits 
of  trees  flew  over  us  —  some  debris  lodged  in  our  rigging,  as 
the  fury  continued  overhead. 

In  ten  minutes  all  our  sails  were  snug. 

"  God  help  Wayne  and  Ray!"  said  Norris  at  last. 

"  They're  safe,"  said  Robert,  pointing  southward. 


JULIAN  CONTINUES  THE  NARRATIVE        127 

In  the  dim  light  we  could  make  out  a  vessel  lying  some 
hundreds  of  yards  away  and  in  the  lee  of  that  same  land. 

"  Thank  God!"  said  Norris.  "Then  this  is  an  islet  that  lies 
across  the  outside  of  this  harbor." 

"  Yes,"  said  Captain  Marat.  "They  come  in  the  other  side." 

The  storm  presently  lost  its  fury;  in  a  half  hour  it  was 
gone,  and  full  light  came  to  show  us  the  Orion  with  her  fore- 
sail in  shreds. 

And  so  it  is  now  that  Wayne  will  take  up  the  story  again. 


CHAPTER  XV 

AN   EXCHANGE  OF  PRISONS 

Ray  and  I  were  escorted  down  the  companionway  into  the 
cabin  of  the  Orion,  and  were  thrust  into  a  room  on  the  port 
side.  A  pair  of  blacks  cut  away  the  cords  from  our  arms;  and 
when  they  went  out  we  heard  a  bolt  pushed  home  in  the  door. 

"  We  travel  in  style,"  observed  Ray,  surveying  the  pair  of 
bunks,  one  above  the  other.  "Let's  see,"  he  continued,  "does 
your  ticket  call  for  an  upper  or  a  lower?" 

A  small,  round,  glazed  porthole  gave  light,  and  a  porcelain 
wash-bowl  with  faucets  was  fixed  in  the  wall. 

"  And  even  a  bathtub,"  said  Ray,  fingering  the  piece.  "It's 
almost  like  being  back  on  the  Pearl  again." 

We  were  waited  on  by  the  blacks,  who  brought  our  food. 
The  day  passed  uneventfully;  though  we  spent  much  time  at 
the  porthole  (which  we  finally  succeeded  to  open,  or  we  must 
have  stifled)  we  saw  not  so  much  as  a  sail,  nor  a  glimpse  of 
the  land.  This  last  would  be  explained  either  on  the  score 
that  the  island  lay  on  the  other  —  the  starboard  —  side,  or 
that  the  Orion  had  sailed  out  of  view  of  the  land.  She  might 
even  be  on  a  course  to  the  west,  going  back  home  again,  now. 
It  was  nqj  till  the  stars  were  out  that  this  point  was  settled. 
It  was  by  those  twinklers  we  learned  we  were  on  an  eastern 
course. 

128 


AN  EXCHANGE  OF  PRISONS  129 

The  next  morning  we  got  a  view  of  the  land.  It  was  just 
after  the  Orion  had  gone  about  on  the  starboard  tack.  The 
mountains  loomed  up  but  four  or  five  miles  away.  And  while 
the  vessel  slowly  came  up  into  the  wind,  I  eagerly  scanned 
the  horizon  for  a  sail  that  should  seem  to  be  the  Pearl.  But 
there  was  no  ship  of  any  kind  in  view.  My  heart  sank.  Could 
it  be  that  after  all  they  had  not  ferreted  out  our  secret 
message? 

The  day  following,  sometime  before  noon,  we  heard  sounds 
of  excitement  on  the  vessel.  And  we  heard  Duran's  voice; 
"cussing  in  French,"  Ray  said  he  was  doing. 

We  got  to  the  porthole. 

"  They  must  have  got  sight  of  the  Pearl,''  I  said.  Our  hopes 
were  high.  Even  on  the  starboard  tack,  we  saw  nothing  but 
the  sea,  now  fallen  almost  calm. 

A  half  hour  passed;  we  were  again  at  the  porthole. 

"  There  she  is!"  cried  Ray  and  I  together.  The  Pearl  was 
in  view. 

Soon  the  wind  was  on  us,  as  we  could  hear;  and  it  grew 
dark.  There  was  much  scurrying  on  the  deck  overhead.  Spray 
began  to  come  in  through  our  porthole,  and  we  must  close  it. 
We  could  see  birds  rushing  by.  Our  course  was  changed;  no 
longer  could  we  see  the  Pearl.  The  roar  of  the  storm  increased 
every  moment. 

"  It  must  be  a  hurricane,"  said  Ray. 

At  last  we  saw  land  close  by  our  porthole.  Directly,  we 
were  in  lee  of  it,  and  we  heard  the  anchor  go  overboard. 

"  Well,  we're  in  some  kind  of  a  harbor,"  I  told  Ray. 

"  But  where's  the  Pearl?"  returned  he. 

"  I  hope  she'll  make  the  same  harbor,"  I  said. 


130  THE  VOODOO  GOLD  TRAIL 

The  storm  blew  over,  and  broad  daylight  came  once  more. 
We  watched  continually  at  the  window  of  our  prison;  but 
while  we  saw  land  all  about,  beaches  and  palms,  and  hills 
beyond,  no  vessel  showed  to  us.  If  the  Pearl  were  near  she 
must  be  off  our  starboard.  But  we  were  not  left  long  in  doubt. 

The  bolt  clicked,  and  our  door  opened.  Duran  appeared, 
and  four  blacks,  who  set  to  work  to  bind  our  arms  again  to 
our  sides.  We  were  led  up  on  deck. 

There  lay  the  Pearl,  some  hundreds  of  yards  away.  My 
heart  jumped  at  sight  of  her. 

Accompanied  by  Duran,  we  were  hurried  over  the  side  into 
a  boat,  which  set  off  immediately  toward  a  beach  to  the  south- 
east. We  could  see  our  friends  but  imperfectly  on  the  deck 
of  the  Pearl,  where  their  figures  moved  about  in  some  hurry. 

We  were  nearing  the  shore  when  we  saw  a  boat  put  off  from 
the  Pearl.  Then  a  second  boat  moved  out  from  the  Orion, 
filled  with  blacks,  bearing  guns.  A  few  minutes,  and  we  were 
startled  by  the  boom  of  an  explosion,  and  smoke  rose  from 
the  Pearl 

My  heart  sank.  But  then  I  saw  the  blacks  in  the  water,  and 
their  boat  seemed  knocked  to  bits.  The  smoke  dispersed,  and 
I  saw  the  Pearl  as  right  as  ever. 

"  They've  got  a  cannon,"  murmured  Ray  in  my  ear.  "That 
is  Norris." 

The  blacks  swam  toward  the  Orion.  Duran  gazed,  rage  in 
his  look;  and  he  swore  roundly.  He  directed  the  men  to  a 
hurried  landing.  We  were  hustled  out,  pushed  in  among  the 
cocoa  palms,  thence  back  into  the  brush.  We  came  to  a  stop, 
and  the  four  blacks,  leaving  their  two  guns  with  Duran,  went 
back.  It  was  doubtless  to  pull  the  boat  up  into  concealment; 


AN  EXCHANGE  OF  PRISONS  131 

for  they  soon  appeared  again,  and  the  march  was  taken  up. 

What  direction  we  went  I  had  no  means  of  knowing,  but 
the  ground  gradually  rose,  and  we  came  to  where  the  under- 
growth was  less  dense.  This  proved  an  agreeable  change  — 
if  anything  in  our  situation  could  be  called  agreeable,  for  in 
the  briars  and  brush,  Ray's  and  my  arms  fast,  as  they  were, 
we  could  not  protect  our  faces  from  the  growth,  that  whacked 
and  scratched  us,  as  we  were  pushed  hurriedly  forward. 

At  last,  after  some  casting  about,  Duran  had  the  blacks 
get  down  on  their  hands  and  knees  and  literally  drag  the  two 
of  us  into  a  most  dense  thicket,  Duran  going  before,  cutting 
a  way.  Many  yards  we  went  thus,  scraping  the  ground;  and 
we  were  finally  dropped  at  the  foot  of  a  great  tree  which 
appeared  to  stand  alone  in  the  midst  of  the  thicket.  Here  was 
a  small  space  free  of  thicket  growth ;  knives  removed  encroach- 
ing pieces  of  growth.  Bags  of  food,  that  had  been  hanging  by 
the  necks  of  the  blacks,  were  transferred  to  the  low-hanging 
limbs  of  the  trees,  and  preparations  were  made  for  some  stay. 

Duran  crawled  out  of  the  place  again,  doubtless  to  recon- 
noiter. 

Ray  called  after  him  as  he  started  off  on  hands  and  knees 
—  "Hey'  there!  You!"  Duran  stopped  and  looked  back. 
"Don't  be  late  back  for  supper,"  continued  Ray. 

Duran  cursed  him  and  went,  upon  which  Ray  turned  with 
a  serious  face  on  one  of  the  blacks,  he  that  spoke  English, 
and  said,  "Your  boss'  Sunday  School  education  has  been  neg- 
lected. What  do  you  say  we  start  a  mission  right  here?" 

The  black  grinned.  It  was  not  his  first  experience  of  Ray's 
drollery. 

We  had  indeed  cause  for  cheer  —  knowing  that  our  friends 


132  THE  VOODOO   GOLD  TRAIL 

were  so  near  to  us.  I  was  now  sure  that  they  had  fathomed 
our  hidden  message.  We  felt  confident,  too,  that  Duran  would 
not  attempt  again  to  get  us  away  on  board  the  Orion;  and 
that  one  way  or  another  we  would  win  back  to  the  Pearl. 
Ray  and  I  contrived  to  talk  on  these  things,  by  veiling  our 
speech  beyond  the  comprehension  of  that  one  black  listener. 

"  And  where  do  you  think  they  got  their  dog?"  said  Ray, 
meaning,  of  course,  the  barker  —  cannon. 

"  Back  in  that  town,  of  course,"  I  returned.  "I've  no  doubt 
if  we'd  have  gone  sight-seeing,  we'd  found  many  old  dogs  of 
that  species  on  the  tumble-down  ramparts." 

"  Just  like  Norris,"  said  Ray.  "And  I  suppose  the  'skunk's' 
new  game  of  'pussy  wants  a  corner'  is  like  the  old  one." 

"  Yes,"  I  said.  "When  they're  off  hunting  for  this  new 
corner,  he's  got  Ray  and  Wayne  in,  the  'skunk'  means  to  make 
after  that  hole  of  his  without  company." 

And  so  on  we  continued. 

The  black  man  listened  to  our  talk,  eyes  large  with  non- 
comprehension.  He,  of  course,  could  not  know  that  "skunk" 
was  Norris'  pet  name  for  Duran. 

That  our  friends  would  immediately  be  searching  the  island 
for  us,  we  had  not  the  least  doubt.  That  they  had  seen  us  in 
the  boat  making  shoreward,  and  had  put  off  in  a  boat,  to 
intercept  the  blacks  and  rescue  us,  was  a  thing  plain  enough. 
We  understood  well  that  that  cannon-shot  —  that  had  found 
its  mark  with  such  telling  effect  —  was  sent  to  destroy  the 
boat  full  of  blacks  that  had  left  the  Orion  to  reinforce  the 
blacks  in  our  boat. 

That  our  friends  would  have  great  difficulty  to  find  us 
amongst  all  this  jungle  growth  was  certain.  But  now  what 


AN  EXCHANGE   OF  PRISONS  133 

would  Duran  contrive,  to  accomplish  his  purpose?  He  was 
intelligent  enough  to  know  that  however  securely  he  might 
truss  and  gag  us,  there  was  no  assurance  that  we  might  not 
succeed  to  worm  out  of  our  bonds  and  get  to  the  Pearl,  before 
the  Orion  should  be  far  enough  away  to  insure  against  our 
catching  up  with  him  again.  Would  he  leave  some  of  his 
blacks  to  guard  us?  None  would  agree  to  this;  for  it  would 
mean  nothing  less  than  finally  to  fall  into  the  hands  of  our 
party.  Who  among  them  would  have  the  stomach  for  that  — 
particularly  in  view  of  that  gold  that  lay  at  the  other  end  of 
the  rainbow? 

There  was  no  fire  made  for  supper,  which  was  eaten  cold. 
Ray  and  I  had  our  arms  freed  by  the  blacks,  who  put  the 
cords  on  our  legs.  It  was  a  great  relief  to  have  the  use  of 
our  hands  again,  for  we  had  become  infested  by  "chiggers" — 
wee  red  insects  that  burrowed  into  our  skins,  causing  severe 
itching  and  pain.  Therefore  it  was  little  sleep  we  got  when 
night  came.  The  blacks  were  not  free  of  the  pests,  and  so 
we  had  four  waking  guards;  and  two  guns  between  them  to 
discourage  ideas  we  had  of  escape. 

The  moon  was  well  down  behind  the  trees  when  Duran 
came  crawling  back.  He  had  a  strange  white  man  with  him. 
I  got  no  proper  look  at  the  man  in  the  dark,  but  his  voice  and 
manner  put  no  encouragement  in  my  heart.  That  he  was  some 
sort  of  scoundrel  was  not  hard  to  perceive. 

"  Here  they  are,"  spoke  Duran,  in  a  low  tone. 

"  Well,"  returned  the  man,  "shake  yourself,  and  let's  get 
out  o'  this." 

In  two  minutes  we  were  being  dragged  out  of  the  thicket 
again.  Silently,  and  with  some  hurry,  the  party  stumbled 


134  THE  VOODOO  GOLD  TRAIL 

through  the  woods.  When  I  got  a  view  of  the  stars,  I  per- 
ceived that  we  were  making  in  an  easterly  direction.  In  less 
than  an  hour  a  halt  was  made.  We  were  still  in  the  forest, 
but  I  could  hear  the  surf  not  far  off,  and  so  knew  we  were 
close  to  water. 

There  was  a  tent  under  the  trees,  and  four  other  white  men 
came  forward.  The  blacks  squatted  on  the  ground,  Ray  and 
I  between  them.  Duran  was  in  colloquy  with  one  of  the 
whites. 

"  There's  no  use  wastin'  yer  breath  on  that,  I'm  tellin'  ye," 
said  the  man.  "We  don't  sail  away  from  here.  We  got  busi- 
ness here  that's  pressin'.  Five  thousan'  ain't  temptin'  us,  with 
others  on  the  island." 

"  Yes,  but  I  give  five  t'ousand  more  if  you  keep  them  one 
week,"  said  Duran.  "And — " 

"  Now  looky  here,"  interrupted  the  other.  "It's  no  use. 
Besides  we  got  as  purty  a  little  place  to  hide  them  in,  the 
devil  himself  couldn't  find  them.  We  don't  sail  away  with 
them,  that's  sure  as  shootin'.  It's  just  a  thousand  apiece  down, 
we  hold  them  a  week,  and  if  you  succeed,  it's  a  thousand  apiece 
more,  when  you  come  back  in  a  month,  that's  all  there  is  to  it. 
Now  mush  along  after  the  spondulicks  afore  it's  daylight  an' 
too  late,  or  maybe  their  friends  has  got  some  gold,  and — " 

"No  —  No!"  said  Duran.  "They  can  never  have  what  I 
have.  When  I  come  back  I  breeng  ten  thousand  —  you  see!" 

Duran  and  the  four  blacks  were  soon  gone,  and  Ray  and  I 
had  new  keepers.  One  of  the  five  white  men  remained  by  us, 
while  the  other  four  moved  off  out  of  earshot  for  some  sort 
of  discussion.  Ray  sought  to  talk  with  our  guard,  but  he 
would  have  none  of  it. 


AN  EXCHANGE  OF  PRISONS  135 

"  Shut  your  palaver!"  he  ordered.  And  he  made  a  threaten- 
ing gesture. 

Within  two  hours  Duran  appeared.  Then  came  the  counting 
of  money,  in  bills  and  gold,  in  the  light  of  the  lantern.  Each 
white  man  took  his  own  share,  and  smacked  his  lips  over  it. 

"  You  keep  them  one  week,"  said  Duran,  then.  "I  come 
back  in  one  month,  and  I  give  you  ten  thousand,  maybe  more 
if  I  succeed  well." 

And  he  was  off  again  in  the  dark  forest. 


CHAPTER  XVI 

THE  ESCAPE 

"  That  was  good  business,"  said  the  leader  of  the  five. 

"  And  bad  policy,"  broke  in  Ray. 

"Shut  your  yap!"  said  the  man.  "And  who  was  askin' 
your  opines?" 

"  Oh,  I've  got  a  big  heart  for  the  miserable  and  ignorant," 
returned  Ray. 

"  And  a  long  tongue  for  a  kid,  I'm  thinkin',"  said  the  man. 

"  It'll  be  short  when  I  get  to  talking  to  some  purpose," 
snapped  Ray. 

"  It's  time  we're  shovin'  them  in  the  hole,"  said  the  leader 
now.  "Darby,  it'll  be  your  watch  first,"  he  continued  as  they 
led  us  away. 

In  ten  minutes  we  were  at  the  foot  of  a  hill,  stumbling 
over  roots,  and  stooping  to  avoid  the  branches. 

"  Now  bend  your  backs  an'  come  on,"  ordered  the  man  in 
front. 

We  pushed  through  a  tangle  of  growth,  and  next,  stood 
in  the  cool  of  a  cave,  as  we  saw  by  the  light  of  the  lantern. 
It  was  a  room  fifty  or  sixty  feet  across. 

"  Looks  like  there's  been  an  earthquake  in  here,"  observed 
Ray. 

136 


THE  ESCAPE  137 

The  dirt  of  the  floor,  for  the  greater  part,  was  in  irregular 
mounds.  It  was  evidently  done  with  spade  and  pick,  for 
nothing  else  would  account  for  the  condition  it  was  in. 

"  They're  hunting  for  treasure,"  I  said  in  Ray's  ear. 

We  sat  crouched  against  the  cool  of  one  of  the  heaps. 

The  men  had  squatted  close  to  the  entrance.  A  bottle  was 
produced. 

"  Here's  two  fingers  to  the  success  o'  this  new  deal,"  said 
the  leader,  turning  the  bottle  bottom  up  in  the  midst  of  his 
beard. 

The  flask  went  round  to  the  others.  One  said  —  "Here's 
hopin'  he'll  come  back  with  the  ten  thousand."  And  another 
—  "Here's  wishin'  him  in  h — 1  if  he  don't,"  as  he  drank. 

"  Well  the  kids'  party  ain't  after  our  game,  that's  a  com- 
fort," said  one,  lighting  his  pipe. 

"  Why  not  turn  the  kids  loose,  an'  so  we'll  get  rid  o'  the 
whole  mob  o'  them?" 

"  Why  not?  you  says;  an'  you  claim  to  have  brains  in  that 
thing  on  your  shoulders!  Now  didn't  our  man  with  the  money 
say  as  how  his  success  depended  on  keepin'  the  kids'  party 
here  a  week,  an'  ain't  our  ten  thousand  dependin'  on  his 
success?" 

"  Well,  he'll  never  come  back  with  no  ten  thousand,  success 
or  no  success." 

"  Maybe  no,  but  I'm  willin'  to  take  a  chance  on  it,  since 
the  chance  is  so  cheap." 

They  soon  fell  into  discussion  of  other  topics. 

"  Granddaddy  Par  always  said  it  was  buried  in  three  places. 
Now  because  some  others  have  been  before  us  in  this  cave, 
it's  no  sign  they  have  been  before  us  in  the  other  places.  If  I 


138  THE  VOODOO  GOLD  TRAIL 

hadn't  been  such  a  little  kid  when  he  showed  me  that  map, 
and  said  as  how  he'd  take  me  with  him  some  day  an'  go  after 
the  stuff  —  it  was  always  'some  day/  and  the  rheumatiz  never 
left  him  till  he  died.  As  I  was  sayin',  if  I  hadn't  been  such  a 
little  kid,  I'd  made  a  copy  o'  the  map." 

"  It's  queer  you  can't  remember  nothin'  on  the  map." 

"I  see  it  in  my  dreams,  times;  but  when  I  wakes  it's  all 
gone.  But  I  think  we're  on  the  right  track.  That  old  harpoon 
grown  tight  in  that  crotch  o'  the  tree,  pointin'  over  to  the  two 
trees,  blazed,  wasn't  for  nothin'." 

"  How  do  ye  know  them's  blazes  on  the  trees?" 

"  It's  plain  ye  ain't  no  woodsman.  They  ain't  nothin'  can 
cause  such  marks  'cept  blazin'.  An'  the  best  thing  about  it 
—  there  ain't  been  no  diggin'  anywhere  in  that  place." 

And  so  they  continued  till  the  bottle  was  finished,  and  all 
had  dozed  off  except  the  man  they  called  Darby,  who  came 
over  and  had  a  good  look  at  our  bonds. 

Ray  and  I  were  wakened  by  voices.  The  treasure-hunters 
were  all  stirring,  preparing  to  go  off  to  their  day's  digging. 
One  they  called  Stephen  Conry  remained  to  be  our  guard.  He 
brought  us  food  when  the  others  had  gone. 

"Now,  ye'll  not  monkey  with  the  ropes,"  said  our  guard, 
examining  the  knots  on  our  limbs,  after  having  given  our 
hands  freedom.  "I'm  quick  on  the  trigger  when  I'm  mad.  So 
no  gum  games  on  Conry.  Heed  that!" 

"Oh!  I  wouldn't  part  with  these  ropes  for  anything,"  said 
Ray.  "I'm  getting  so  used  to  them  I  couldn't  sleep  without 
them.  I'd  be  afraid  someone  would  kidnap  me  if  I  didn't  have 
them." 

The  man  stared,  lacking  humor. 


THE  ESCAPE  139 

"  You'd  be  none  the  worse  off,  if  you  turned  us  loose,"  I 
told  the  man.  "And  you'll  be  no  better  off  if  you  keep  us. 
That  man  will  never  come  back.  He  isn't  the  kind — " 

"  We  ain't  goin'  to  discuss  that,"  returned  the  man.  "We'll 
turn  you  two  loose,  'none  the  worse  off,'  when  the  time's  up, 
not  afore."  And  he  went  back  to  the  entrance  of  the  cave, 
leaving  the  lighted  lantern  on  a  box. 

My  mind  was  taken  with  painful  reveries.  Our  party  was 
now  facing  failure  again.  Here  had  Duran  got  the  two  of  us 
hidden  in  a  place,  our  new  guards  declared,  would  never  be 
found  out  by  our  friends.  Never  is  a  long  time,  you'll  say. 
But  suppose  our  party  was  to  delay  two  or  three  days  in  the 
search  for  us?  Would  not  Duran  then  be  off  beyond  possi- 
bility of  following,  and  so  gain  to  the  mine  without  fear  of 
detection?  That  he  had  much  reason  to  fear  our  pursuit  there 
had  been  ample  evidence.  And  now  he  had  paid  five  thousand 
dollars  to  these  men  to  hold  us  —  and  thus  indirectly  to  hold 
all  our  party  —  for  a  week,  that  he  might  safely  hie  away  to 
finish  enriching  himself  from  the  mine  of  the  Brills. 

These  reflections  made  me  squirm  with  impatience.  Some 
way  must  be  found  to  accomplish  escape  before  night,  for 
then  Duran  would  surely  be  off,  and  all  of  us  undone.  Our 
guard,  I  saw,  kept  a  sharp  eye  out,  so  we  durst  not  even  look 
at  our  bonds. 

A  little  before  noon,  John  Mullins,  the  leader  of  the  treasure- 
hunters,  came  crawling  into  the  cave,  chuckling  over  a  bit  of 
news. 

"  And  what  do  you  think,  Steve?  The  kids'  friends  have 
been  'round,  askin'  if  we'd  seen  anything  of  them.  There  was 
three  on  'em;  a  big  fellow  with  a  rifle  and  two  kids.  He  said 


140  THE   VOODOO  GOLD  TRAIL 

it  was  two  boys  they  was  lookin'  for.  I  says  I  ain't  never 
seen  no  boys  on  this  island  'cept  them  he  had  with  him.  An' 
then  he  wants  to  know  if  we'd  seen  some  black  cannibals,  an' 
a  white  cannibal  amongst  'em.  Think  o'  that,  Steve,  cannibals! 

"'Lor'  bless  you!'  I  says,  'there  ain't  no  cannibals  in  this 
part  o'  the  world!' 

"  '  Well/  says  he,  'you  can  take  it  from  me  as  how  there's 
no  less'n  a  dozen  cannibals  on  this  here  island  now,  an'  a 
white  skunk  is  their  leader.'  Now  what  do  you  think  o'  that, 
Steve  Conry?" 

"I  —  I  don't  rightly  make  it  out,"  said  Steve,  ruminating 
—  scratching  his  head.  "They  must  o'  had  their  bellies  full 
when  they  left  the  kids  with  us  to  keep.  Now  do  you  sup- 
pose," went  on  Steve  with  a  new  thought,  "as  how  maybe 
they  mean  to  come  back  at  the  end  o'  the  week  we  was  to 
keep  the  kids,  an'  that  then  they're  expectin'  to  have  their 
appetites  again,  an'  eat  the  kids  —  an'  then  eat  us  too,  an' 
get  back  the  five  thousan'  to  boot?" 

I  nudged  Ray  at  this,  and  got  a  poke  in  return. 

"  Ha!  That's  all  bosh,"  laughed  the  other.  "They  ain't  no 
more  cannibals  than  you  an'  me.  The  feller  was  just  tryin' 
to  scare  us  —  maybe  thought  he'd  get  us  to  help  them  against 
the  black  crowd  —  whatever  the  game  is,  but  I  let  him  see 
John  Mullins  wasn't  born  yesterday,  and  not  frightened  o' 
bogey  stories.  So  when  he  saw  it  was  no  use  he  just  moved 
on.  Well,  Steve,  you  go  an'  get  your  grub,  an'  bring  a  snack 
for  the  kids.  We  got  to  keep  'em  fed  up  for  the  cannibals." 
And  he  laughed  at  his  joke. 

Steve  disappeared  through  the  hole,  and  Mullins  turned  to 
Ray  and  myself. 


THE  ESCAPE  141 

"  I  reckon  your  friends  'd  pay  a  nice  little  wad  to  get  ye 
back,"  he  ventured. 

"  I  reckon  they  wouldn't,"  I  promptly  told  him.  I  began 
to  fear  he  might  try  them,  and  perhaps  find  Julian  too  willing 
to  offer  a  reward  for  us.  I  had  another  idea  than  that. 

"  Oh,  you  don't  think  they  would,  hey?"  said  Mullins,  a 
bit  taken  aback xby  my  answer.  "I  thought,"  he  said,  "they 
was  kind  o'  keen  to  get  ye." 

The  thought  of  that  piece  of  indelible  pencil  in  my  pocket 
rose  in  my  mind  again.  "Well,  they  might  if  I  was  to  write 
them  a  note  telling  them  to." 

"  Oh,"  said  Mullins,  "if  you  was  to  write  them  a  note." 
He  ruminated.  "Now  that  would  be  tellin'  them  we  knew 
where  you  was.  Well,  we'll  think  about  it  a  day  or  two." 

A  day  or  two,  I  thought,  wouldn't  suit  our  book. 

Steve  had  soon  returned,  and  Mullins  went  out.  Our  guard 
came  to  see  to  our  bonds;  and  he  twisted  his  head  in  a  way 
that  told  me  he  had  something  on  his  mind. 

"  These  here  niggers,"  he  began,  "they  ain't  no  cannibals, 
I  reckon?" 

"Well,  they  sure  are,"  said  Ray.  "I  reckon  we  ought  to 
know." 

The  man  looked  to  me,  as  if  for  my  verification. 

"  Yes,  they're  cannibals,"  I  told  him.  And  then  went  on  to 
relate  to  him  something  of  the  doings  that  night  in  the  forest, 
recounting  how  I'd  seen  Duran  with  the  knife  at  the  throat 
of  the  child,  and  the  kettle  for  the  boiling  of  the  human  meat. 
And  I  was  careful  to  tell  him  about  the  grown  man  who  had 
been  buried  alive,  and  in  the  night  disinterred  by  the  voodoos 
who  had  torn  out  his  heart  and  lungs  to  be  devoured.  I  assured 


142  THE  VOODOO  GOLD  TRAIL 

him  I  had  looked  on  the  wife  of  the  man,  while  she  told  the 
story,  which  had  been  verified  by  others.  My  story,  being 
fact,  rang  true,  and  I  could  see  the  man  was  nine  parts  con- 
vinced, and  not  a  little  frightened. 

A  number  of  things  had  come  under  my  observation.  Our 
guard  kept  a  knife  on  a  little  ledge  by  the  entrance  to  the 
cave,  which  knife  he  used  to  cut  tobacco  for  his  pipe.  And  it 
was  the  practice  to  tie  our  hands  tight  with  thongs  whenever 
the  guard  wished  to  leave  the  cave  for  a  minute  or  two.  While 
the  man,  Steve  —  he  was  the  weakest  of  the  five  —  smoked  his 
pipe  near  the  entrance  and  ruminated  over  the  story  I'd  told 
him,  I  whispered  to  Ray,  giving  him  a  plan  I  had  for  escape. 
Our  present  guard  was  to  remain  on  till  the  next  morning, 
when  he  would  be  relieved  by  one  called  Joseph  Glasby. 

Once,  when  Steve  Conry  came  to  set  the  thongs  on  our 
wrists  preparatory  to  a  turn  outside,  Ray  showed  a  pair  of 
sore  wrists  —  he  had  contrived  the  marks  —  and  begged  that 
he  would  not  pull  the  strings  so  tight  as  to  crucify  him  that  way. 
The  man  was  impressed,  and  the  thongs  were  set  a  bit  looser. 

When  the  guard  was  gone,  Ray  tugged  for  a  moment,  and 
—  "It's  easy,"  he  said,  and  he  held  up  his  hand.  His  hands 
were  thin,  a  little  easing  of  the  knot,  and  he  slipped  them  out 
of  the  thongs.  But  we  heard  the  guard  coming,  and  he  slipped 
his  hands  back  into  his  bonds  again. 

"  They're  a  long  time  away,"  grumbled  Conry.  "I'm  gettin' 
tired  o'  this." 

"Where  are  they  gone?"  said  Ray. 

"  They've  gone  to  have  a  look  at  the  ships  —  your  friends' 
an'  the  other  one,"  he  said.  "There's  too  much  o'  this  puttin' 
things  on — " 


THE  ESCAPE  143 

His  grumbling  was  cut  short.  There  occurred  some  kind  of 
concussion,  that  shook  the  earth.  Particles  fell  from  the  roof 
of  the  cave  to  the  floor. 

"  An  earthquake!"  shouted  Ray. 

Conry  jumped  erect.  And  the  next  moment  he  was  scramb- 
ling out  through  the  hole. 

"Now,  Ray!"  I  said. 

Ray  had  his  hands  out.  He  rolled  to  the  entrance,  got  up 
to  the  knife.  In  a  half  minute  both  of  us  were  free  of  our 
bonds.  I  grasped  a  box  of  matches,  then  blew  out  the  lantern 
light. 

Conry  came  crawling  back  into  the  cave. 

"  Humph!    What's  come  o'  the  light,"  grunted  Conry. 

When  he  went  groping  for  the  lantern,  Ray  and  I  scrambled 
out.  We  were  astonished  to  find  it  was  night,  when  we  came 
into  the  open.  We  hurried  through  the  forest,  not  caring  what 
the  direction,  till  we  should  be  safely  away  from  the  region. 

We  made  what  speed  we  could  for  a  considerable  time 
amongst  the  undergrowth;  and  when  at  last  we  came  to  an 
open  space,  we  heard  the  surf  close  by.  And  we  were  a  good 
deal  taken  aback  to  see  a  schooner  lying  at  anchor,  some  way 
off  from  the  beach,  in  the  small  harbor.  The  bright  moonlight 
showed  her  outlines  plain  to  us,  and  she  was  neither  the  Pearl 
nor  the  Orion.  We  had  traveled  in  a  circle  apparently;  and 
there  came  the  shouting  voice  of  Stephen  Conry,  nearby, 
calling  his  comrades. 

"  We're  back  almost  where  we  started  from,"  said  Ray. 

"  Yes,"  I  said.  "We'll  have  to  go  by  the  moon,  now,  or 
we'll  not  get  anywhere." 

We  plunged  again  into  the  forest,  and  were  careful  to  keep 


144  THE   VOODOO   GOLD   TRAIL 

the  moon  on  our  left;  this  insured  our  holding  our  course  in 
a  westerly  direction.  We  kept,  too,  as  much  as  possible  to  the 
higher  ground,  for  the  going  was  easier,  there  being  less  under- 
growth to  tangle  our  feet. 

We  hadn't  been  twenty  minutes  struggling  on,  when  we 
were  startled  by  a  voice  just  before  us.  I  seized  Ray  by  the 
arm  and  dragged  him  with  me  into  a  thick  bush. 

"  It's  just  like  I've  been  a  tellin'  ye.  The  kids'  friends  tried 
to  sink  the  other  schooner,"  said  the  voice  of  Mullins. 

"  An'  I've  been  axin'  ye,"  spoke  another  voice,  "for  why 
would  they  be  suddenly  —  now  —  be  wantin'  to  sink  them. 
Why  didn't  they  try  it  afore,  if — " 

The  voices  were  lost  in  the  forest,  as  the  men  went  back 
the  way  Ray  and  I  had  come.  We  took  up  our  march  again, 
and  a  half  hour  had  not  gone  when  we  arrived  at  the  western 
end  of  the  island,  and  stood  under  the  cocoanut  palms,  looking 
on  the  two  schoners,  the  Pearl  and  the  Orion.  A  little  breeze 
rippled  the  waters  of  the  bay.  No  lights  showed  on  either  vessel. 

"  Doesn't  she  look  good?"  said  Ray. 

"  Yes,"  I  assented.   "I  wish  we  were  aboard." 

I  led  the  way  up  the  beach  to  the  north  a  piece.  We  wove 
a  bit  of  matting  of  palm  fans,  for  a  screen;  and  then  soon  had 
collected  some  dry  wood  for  a  signal-fire.  We  selected  our  fire- 
place at  the  edge  of  the  palms,  and  so  disposed  the  screen  that 
the  fire  would  be  visible  to  the  Pearl  but  not  to  the  Orion. 

A  match  was  struck;  we  had  a  blaze.  Using  my  shirt,  I  let 
out  flash  after  flash  for  the  benefit  of  those  on  the  Pearl;  and 
we  watched  for  an  answer.  For  a  considerable  time  we  fed  the 
fire,  signalled,  and  watched.  But  no  answering  flash  came. 
"  Looks  like  they're  dead,"  grumbled  Ray. 


THE  ESCAPE  145 

"That  Mullins  didn't  talk  like  it,"  I  returned.  "Well, 
they'll  look  this  way  yet!"  And  I  continued  to  signal. 

Then  suddenly  we  heard  voices  down  the  beach.  Fortunately 
it  was  on  the  screened  side  of  the  fire. 

"  Quick,  Ray!"  I  said.  And  we  buried  the  fire  in  sand.  We 
grasped  the  screen  and  fled  into  the  brush. 

"  It's  Mullins  and  his  crowd  again,"  I  said. 

"  They've  come  looking  for  us,"  observed  Ray. 

We  went  a  little  way  to  the  north  in  the  forest,  and  came 
again  to  the  beach. 

"  There's  a  boat  from  the  Pearl/"  said  Ray. 

The  boat  was  moving  fast  toward  the  beach. 

"  They're  already  too  far  in  to  signal  them,"  I  said.  "Let's 
swim  down  and  crawl  to  the  boat  while  they're  talking  with 
Mullins  and  his  gang." 

We  entered  the  water.  The  little  waves  helped  to  keep  our 
heads  invisible.  We  kept  out  from  the  beach  till  we  were  in 
line  with  the  boat  and  the  group  on  shore.  It  was  then  we 
moved  directly  to  the  boat,  and  got  our  heads  close  under  the 
gunwale.  I  then  rose  close  to  a  thole  and  peeped  over.  The 
moon  was  fairly  bright. 

I  could  see  Robert  and  Julian  between  the  group  and  the 
boat.  I  gave  a  low  whistle  intended  to  carry  only  so  far  as  to 
the  boys.  Twice  I  repeated  it.  Then  Robert  started.  Once 
more  I  whistled  low.  Robert  now  joined  Julian,  and  the  two 
came  into  the  boat. 

They  made  of  themselves  a  screen  for  us,  while  Ray  and  I 
climbed  in.  And  we  lay  ourselves  down  under  the  thwarts. 


CHAPTER  XVII 

JULIAN'S  STORY  AGAIN -THE  SEARCH  FOR  THE  LOST  COMRADES 

The  storm  had  put  things  on  the  Pearl  topsy-turvy.  Norris' 
first  care  was  for  his  cannon,  of  which  he  was  happy  to  find 
the  lashings  had  held.  He  threw  off  the  tarpaulin. 

"Ah!"  he  said,  "she's  O.K.  Just  a  little—" 

He  was  cut  short  by  Robert. 

"There  goes  a  boat!"  cried  Robert.  "And  there's  Wayne 
and  Ray  in  it!" 

"  The  h — 1 ! "  said  the  staring  Norris,  and  he  ran  to  where 
Captain  Marat  and  two  sailors  were  unlashing  one  of  our 
boats.  In  a  pair  of  minutes  we  had  it  in  the  water. 

"  Robert,  Julian,  Carlos,"  spoke  Captain  Marat.   "  We  go." 

Captain  Marat  and  Carlos  each  took  up  a  rifle,  and  the 
next  minute  we  were  pulling  for  shore.  We  had  not  covered 
half  the  distance  to  the  beach,  when  we  were  attracted  to 
another  boat  moving  from  the  Orion,  this  one  full  of  black 
men.  Then  Norris'  cannon  boomed.  That  boat  full  of  black 
men  took  the  shot  in  the  middle  and  ceased  to  be  a  boat.  I 
saw  men  swimming  toward  the  Orion.  Some  must  have  been 
killed,  though  I  could  not  tell  for  the  debris. 

"Norris  got  them!"  Robert  said,  exulting. 

Captain  Marat's  eyes  danced.  "Thad  Englishman  one  ver' 
good  man,"  he  said. 

We  hurriedly  pulled  to  the  beach  and  sprang  out.  We  ran 

146 


JULIAN'S   STORY  AGAIN  147 

down  the  beach  a  way,  then  pushed  through  the  cocoanut 
palms  and  into  the  forest,  to  head  off  those  with  Wayne  and 
Ray.  But  we  were  too  late,  and  the  forest  too  thick,  we  could 
not  see  them.  We  searched  for  hours;  and  then  it  began  to 
grow  dark,  so  we  went  back  to  the  Pearl. 

"  When  they  got  in  the  jungle  you  had  no  chance,"  said 
Norris,  when  we  told  of  our  failure.  "I'll  have  a  try  in  the 
morning,"  he  added. 

Rufe  had  supper  on  the  table.  While  we  ate,  we  talked 
over  what  was  to  be  done. 

"  It  ver'  plain  what  Duran  he  want  to  do,"  said  Captain 
Marat.  "He  want  to  hide  thee  boys  again,  an'  w'en  we  look 
for  them,  then  he  sail  away." 

"  Well  it's  up  to  us,"  said  Norris,  "to  see  that  he  doesn't 
sail  away  till  we  find  them.  Now,  and  I'll  bet  he  don't!" 

We  divided  the  night  into  two  watches;  nine  to  twelve,  and 
twelve  to  three.  Norris,  Robert,  and  I  were  to  take  the  first 
watch,  Captain  Marat  and  Carlos  that  from  twelve  to  three. 
We  were  to  go  in  the  small  boat  to  the  islet,  and  move  along 
the  beach  to  some  place  near  the  Orion,  and  observe  any 
activity  that  might  be  going  on  there. 

During  that  first  watch  all  was  quiet  on  the  Orion.  There 
was  little  movement  on  her  deck,  which  was  plainly  visible  in 
the  bright  moonlight.  There  were  one  or  two  wounded,  as  we 
could  see  by  the  conduct  of  those  waiting  on  them. 

It  was  during  Captain  Marat's  watch  that  Duran  returned 
aboard  in  the  other  boat.  It  was  plain,  Captain  Marat  said, 
that  Wayne  and  Ray  were  not  in  the  boat  with  him. 

Day  had  just  dawned  when  Norris  and  Robert  and  I  climbed 
down  into  the  boat  to  go  ashore  in  search  of  the  boys. 


148  THE  VOODOO  GOLD  TRAIL 

"  Now,  Captain  Marat,"  said  Norris,  as  we  cast  loose,  "the 
first  signs  that  skunk  shows  of  clearing  out,  give  him  that  shot 
alongside.  Ill  hear  it  an'll  be  back  in  a  jiffy.  And  we'll  soon 
have  him  out  of  his  notion." 

"  All  righ',"  said  Captain  Marat.  "I  do  like  you  wish." 

We  pulled  our  boat  high  on  the  beach  and  cut  brush  and 
covered  it,  to  hide  it  and  protect  it  from  the  hot  sun.  We 
searched  all  over  the  south  half  of  the  island  —  it  was  three 
or  four  miles  long.  We  saw  no  signs  of  our  two  missing  friends. 

Near  noon,  we  came  to  the  eastern  end  of  the  island,  where 
were  two  hills.  And  there  we  were  surprised  to  see  a  schooner 
in  a  small  bay.  A  tent  was  among  the  trees  close  to  the  beach. 

"  We'll  have  to  see  what's  here,"  said  Grant  Norris.  And 
he  walked  up  and  lifted  the  flap  of  the  tent.  "No  one  home, 
it  seems,"  he  added. 

We  had  a  good  look  at  the  schooner.  Susanna  showed  on 
her  bows. 

"  I  won't  be  satisfied  till  we've  had  a  look  at  the  Susan- 
nians,"  said  Norris.  "We'll  take  a  look  round  for  them." 

"  Here's  a  new  trail,  going  up  this  way,"  said  Robert,  mov- 
ing toward  the  north. 

We'd  gone  above  half  a  mile,  a  good  deal  of  it  in  forest  not 
so  thick  in  underbrush,  when  we  heard  voices.  Then  we  came 
upon  four  rough-looking,  bearded  men,  digging.  They  saw  us, 
and  one  of  them  came  forward. 

"  Good  morning,"  said  Norris.  "We're  looking  for  a  couple 
of  boys  that  are  on  this  island  —  wonder  if  you've  seen  any- 
thing of  them." 

"  Boys,"  said  the  man,  "I  ain't  ever  seen  no  boys  on  this 
island  'cept  them  two  you  got  with  ye." 


JULIAN'S   STORY  AGAIN  149 

"  Well,"  said  Norris,  "maybe  you've  seen  some  black  can- 
nibals with  a  white  cannibal  among  them?" 

"Lor'  bless  you!"  returned  the  man,  "there  ain't  no  can- 
nibals in  these  parts." 

"  Well,"  said  Norris,  "you  can  take  it  from  me,  there's  no 
less  than  a  dozen  cannibals  on  this  here  island  right  now,  and 
a  white  skunk  is  their  leader." 

The  man  had  no  reply.  He  looked  a  little  nonplused. 

"  Well,  boys,"  said  Norris,  "I  guess  we'll  hike  along." 

And  we  moved  off,  leaving  the  man  staring  after  us. 

It  was  nearing  noon,  so  we  moved  directly  west.  We  had 
promised  to  be  back  at  mid-day. 

"  I  don't  like  the  looks  of  those  men,"  said  Robert.  "And 
that  fellow  we  talked  with  —  I  think  he  pretended  to  be  sur- 
prised when  you  told  him  about  the  black  men." 

"  They  don't  any  of  them  shine  with  honesty,  that's  certain," 
said  Norris.  "We'll  have  to  have  another  look  at  their  place, 
and  their  boat." 

He  had  some  thought  he  didn't  express. 

"  What  do  you  suppose  they're  digging  for?"  I  asked. 

"  I  guess  they've  got  a  hunch  there's  treasure  buried  on  this 
island,"  answered  Norris.  "I  wouldn't  wonder  if  this  place  has 
been  dug  over  twenty  times." 

We  approached  a  region  of  low,  wet  ground.  The  smell  of 
the  place  was  sickening.  It  gave  me  a  feeling  of  giddiness,  a 
nausea,  and  depression  of  spirits.  Robert  afterward  confessed 
the  same  thing.  He  said  it  made  him  feel  something  like  death 
and  corruption  was  rising  and  surrounding  him. 

At  last  we  got  to  our  boat,  and  rowed  aboard  the  Pearl. 
Captain  Marat  reported  that  Duran  had  remained  on  board 


ISO  THE  VOODOO   GOLD  TRAIL 

the  Orion  all  morning,  and  that  the  blacks  had  been  busy 
putting  on  a  new  foresail. 

Captain  Marat  and  Carlos  took  their  turn  on  shore,  after 
the  noon  meal,  to  search  over  the  north  half  of  the  island. 
Norris,  Robert,  and  myself  were  to  keep  watch  over  the  move- 
ments of  Duran  and  his  black  crew. 

"  What  do  you  think,  boys?"  said  Norris,  when  we  had  seen 
Marat  and  Carlos  disappear  among  the  palms  on  shore.  "Do 
you  think  Wayne  and  Ray  might  be  on  that  ship  of  those 
treasure-hunters?" 

"  Not  very  likely,"  said  Robert.  "Duran  has  found  a  better 
hiding  place.  The  boat  is  too  public.  But  I  shouldn't  wonder 
if  he  hasn't  some  deal  with  those  men." 

"  Just  what  I've  been  thinking,"  agreed  Norris.  "But  if 
they're  not  found  by  dark  we'll  have  to  look  out;  the  Orion 
will  sure  be  trying  for  a  getaway  tonight,  and  we've  got  to 
prevent  that.  I  don't  think  he'll  try  it  in  daylight,  for  he  isn't 
so  sure  what  we  might  do.  But  we'll  have  to  know  what  he's 
up  to." 

So  we  three  prepared  to  embark  in  the  small  boat.  It  was 
deep  water  close  under  the  sheltering  isle,  so  both  schooners 
lay  fairly  close  in  to  the  narrow  beach  of  it.  We  were  soon 
over,  and  up  among  the  brush  of  the  hill.  We  found  a  good 
lookout,  from  which  we  could  peer  down  on  the  deck  of  the 
Orion,  where  the  blacks  lounged  lazily. 

"  Everything's  ready  for  sailing,"  said  Norris.  "And  there's 
that  white  cuss  using  his  glasses  to  see  what  he  can  see  on 
shore." 

It  was  a  tedious  afternoon,  hot,  not  a  breath  stirring.  We 
were  glad  when  the  sun  set  and  we  saw  Captain  Marat  and 


JULIAN'S  STORY  AGAIN  151 

Carlos  returning.  We  hurried  back  to  the  Pearl  to  meet  them. 

They  were  alone.  Their  faces  were  gloomy  with  failure. 
Not  a  sign  of  any  kind  had  they  found  to  encourage  them. 
Rufe  was  so  disappointed,  tears  were  in  his  eyes. 

"  I  jes'  had  a  kind  o'  notion,"  he  said,"  you-all  would  a' 
had  dem  boys  back  wid  ye  dis  time.  I  jes'  been  fixin'  de  bes' 
kin'  o'  bread  puddin',  de  kin'  dem  boys  was  so  crazy  about. 
Dey  ain't  had  a  decen'  meal  for  ebber  so  long!" 

When  we  were  at  supper,  and  Rufe  had  poured  a  second 
cup  of  coffee  all  round;  I  heard  him  mumbling  to  himself,  as 
he  went  to  the  galley,  "I  jes'  goin'  to  save  dat  puddin'  anyway. 
I  ain't  goin'  to  give  up  —  no  sah,  I  ain't  goin'  to  give  up." 
And  the  pudding  was  not  forthcoming;  and  no  one  inquired 
for  it. 

Captain  Marat  and  Carlos  went  to  watch  the  Orion  this 
time.  The  moon  was  very  bright;  the  cocoanut  palms  stood 
out  distinct  on  that  shore  to  the  east.  Somewhere  behind  them 
lay  our  two  friends,  Wayne  and  Ray,  and  I  wondered  how 
they  were  faring.  A  light  breeze  sprang  up  after  nine  o'clock, 
and  the  ripples  danced  on  the  waters  of  the  bay.  It  was  then 
we  saw  Captain  Marat  and  Carlos  coming  in  the  boat. 

"  They  make  ready  to  sail,"  said  Captain  Marat,  before  he 
scrambled  over  the  rail. 

"High  there!  Rufe!"  called  Norris.  "Heat  that  poker." 
And  he  went  to  his  gun  and  threw  off  the  tarpaulin,  and  with 
help  rolled  the  carriage  round,  and  trained  the  gun. 

Presently  we  heard  the  squeal  of  a  block  coming  from  the 
Orion. 

"  That  means  a  sail  going  up,"  said  Robert. 

"Now,  the  poker!"  cried  Norris. 


152  THE  VOODOO  GOLD   TRAIL 

Rufe  came  running  forward  with  the  glowing  iron. 

There  came  a  flash  and  a  "Boom!"  —  and  a  splash  over 
near  the  Orion.  Then  we  heard  the  rattle  of  the  block  as  the 
sail  was  allowed  to  drop. 

"  They  took  the  hint,"  said  Norris.  "That  fellow  is  not  so 
dull." 

Marat  and  Carlos  were  soon  again  off  to  the  isle  to  watch; 
and  Norris  rammed  home  another  charge  in  the  brass  cannon; 
and  Rufe  kept  a  little  fire  going  in  the  galley  stove.  We  waited 
long  for  another  attempt  to  sail  on  the  part  of  the  Orion,  but 
no  such  news  came  from  the  watchers. 

At  last  came  an  alarm  from  Rufe.  "Dar!"  he  cried.  "You- 
all  — lookdar!" 

Instinctively  we  looked  toward  the  Orion.  Then  we  turned 
to  Rufe  who  pointed  shoreward.  There,  under  the  palms  we 
saw  a  beacon  flashing  —  flash  followed  flash. 

"It's  Wayne  and  Ray!"  cried  Robert. 

We  produced  a  lantern  and  signalled  back.  But  the  shore 
signals  had  suddenly  ceased. 

"  To  the  boat!"  cried  Norris. 

Directly,  the  three  of  us  were  moving  shoreward,  Norris 
and  Robert  pulling  with  all  their  might. 

When  we  touched  shore,  we  saw  four  men  coming  from 
down  the  beach. 

"  It  wasn't  them,"  said  Robert.    "The  light  was  up  here." 

The  four  were  the  treasure-hunters. 

"  It's  a  fine  night,"  said  Norris,  moving  to  meet  the  men. 

"  Tolerable,"  returnee!  the  leader. 

"  But  it's  awful  dry,"  said  Norris.  "We've  been  trying  to 
make  it  rain.  Hear  the  shot?" 


JULIAN'S   STORY  AGAIN  153 

Robert  and  I  fell  back,  gazing  into  the  shadows  under  the 
palms,  hoping  for  signs  of  Wayne  and  Ray.  Presently  I  heard 
a  low  whistle,  just  as  Robert  plucked  me  by  the  sleeve  and 
pulled  me  to  the  boat. 

There  were  the  two  boys  in  the  water.  We  covered  them 
while  they  climbed  in  and  crawled  under  the  seats. 

And  so  Robert  and  I  moved  back  to  the  group.  Just  to 
make  talk,  Norris  was  quizzing  the  men  about  the  game  on 
the  island;  but  we  contrived,  by  signs,  to  convey  to  Norris 
that  we  had  news. 

"  Well,  boys,"  said  Norris  at  last,  "let's  have  another  little 
row  before  we  turn  in." 

It  was  a  jolly  crowd  rowed  back  to  the  Pearl. 

"  Say,  Ray,"  said  Norris.  "What  did  you  want  to  run  off 
and  hide  yourself  that  way  for?" 

"  Want  to,"  sniffed  Ray.  "Oh,  just  to  see  how  good  a 
hunter  you  were  —  wonderful  how  easy  you  found  us!" 

"  Well,  let's  try  it  again,"  said  Norris,  "and  I'll  bet  you  my 
new  gun — " 

"  Thanks,"  said  Ray.  "Turn  about's  fair  play,  I'm  going 
to  stay  in  base  and  keep  Rufe  company." 

And  here  again  Wayne  takes  up  the  tale. 


CHAPTER  XVIII 

OUR   BOAT   IS    SCUTTLED 

WHEN  Ray  and  I  set  our  feet  on  the  deck  of  the  Pearl  again, 
I  felt  a  thrill  go  all  through  me.  I  felt  like  hugging  the  main- 
mast. Captain  Marat  and  Carlos  were  there,  and  Rufe.  Rufe 
fairly  blubbered  with  happiness. 

"Oh,  Lordy!"  he  said,  "somebody  clap  foh  me,  I  jes'  got 
to  dance." 

And  we  clapped  our  hands  and  patted  our  thighs  in  time 
for  him,  and  he  began  his  "double-shuffle."  Carlos  caught  the 
infection  and  jumped  into  the  ring,  and  there  the  two  black 
men  footed  it  hot  on  the  deck  for  five  minutes.  "Hoo-o-we," 
yelled  Rufe  at  last,  and  ran  for  the  galley. 

In  a  little  a  sumptuous  meal  was  on  the  table  for  Ray  and 
me;  and  while  we  ate,  waited  on  by  the  others,  we  told  our 
story. 

"Five  thousand  dollars!"  said  Norris.  "Duran  spending 
five  thousand  on  the  chance  of  getting  us  off  his  trail.  That 
must  be  some  gold  mine,  that  of  yours,  Carlos." 

"  Yes,  I  think,"  agreed  Carlos. 

At  last  came  a  whole  big  bread  pudding.  "I  jes'  know  you 
was  a'comin',  an'  I  saved  it,"  said  Rufe. 

Ray  turned  over  his  stool,  as  he  jumped  to  give  the  black 
a  hug.  "Oh,  if  I'd  only  known  that  was  coming."  And  he 
put  his  hand  on  his  stomach. 

154 


OUR  BOAT  IS  SCUTTLED  155 

When  we  two  had  stuffed  ourselves  the  limit,  Ray  lingered 
at  the  table,  looking  very  sober,  his  chin  in  his  hand,  his  eyes 
on  the  big  remaining  portion  of  the  pudding.  Rufe  sidled  up. 

"  What  it  is  make  you  so  sad?"  he  said. 

"  Say,  Rufe,"  said  Ray,  "isn't  it  the  chicken  that  has  two 
stomachs?" 

"  I  reckon  dat's  right,"  said  Rufe. 

"  Well,  I  guess  I'm  half  a  chicken,"  said  Ray. 

"Why,"  said  Rufe,  "has  you  got  two  stummicks?" 

"  No,"  returned  Ray,  a  wail  in  his  tone,  "but  I've  got  two 
appetites." 

And  Rufe  rolled  on  the  deck. 

"  Well,  now,"  said  Norris  at  last,  "that  voodoo  skunk  can 
sail  when  he  gets  ready,  the  sooner  the  better." 

"  Yes,"  agreed  Captain  Marat.  "Now  we  ready  for  heem. 
He  ver'  clever  if  he  fool  us  some  more,  now." 

Norris  volunteered  to  take  the  watch  till  two  o'clock;  then 
Robert  offered  to  follow  him.  All  others  turned  in. 

I  awoke,  hearing  Robert  in  talk  with  Captain  Marat.  "It 
looks  to  me  like  the  Orion's  moving,  slowly  —  no  sails  up," 
Robert  was  saying.  In  a  little  while  the  two  climbed  into  a 
small  boat.  The  moon  had  gone  down,  and  it  was  quite  dark. 
The  night  breeze  was  still  blowing  gently.  I  again  dozed  off, 
too  tired  to  note  what  was  going  forward. 

I  do  not  know  how  long  I  slept  this  time,  but  when  I  opened 
my  eyes  next,  it  was  to  hear  blocks  creaking;  and  jib  and 
mainsail  were  already  set,  and  the  foresail  was  going  up. 
Marat  and  Robert  had  gone  to  the  isle,  and  hurried  over 
opposite  the  Orion's  berth,  to  find  that  that  schooner's  crew 
had  been  warping  the  vessel  out  toward  the  south  passage. 


156  THE  VOODOO  GOLD  TRAIL 

The  two  waited  till  the  Orion  had  made  sufficient  progress  to 
set  her  sails  and  attain  headway,  then  they  had  hurried  back 
to  set  the  Pearl  in  pursuit  again. 

The  tail  end  of  a  squall  came  to  give  us  a  boost.  The  Orion 
got  a  greater  portion  of  it. 

Ray  did  not  waken  till  we  were  well  out  in  the  open  sea. 

"What!"  said  he,  looking  abroad.   "Has  the  island  sunk?" 

In  half  an  hour  the  sun  burst  out  of  the  sea,  showing  that 
island  astern.  The  Orion  was  perhaps  three  miles  away,  head- 
ing a  little  south  of  west.  It  was  not  till  eleven  that  morning 
that  we  got  a  wind  to  give  us  good  headway. 

Day  after  day,  now  again,  we  kept  the  schooner,  Orion, 
company.  She  seemed  to  make  no  effort  to  elude  us.  The 
nights  were  bright  moonlight,  making  us  an  easy  task.  Then 
at  last  we  sighted  the  towering,  ragged  mountains  of  the  great 
island  of  the  voodoos.  We  were  to  the  south  of  the  island  this 
tune. 

"  Looks  like  that  skunk  is  going  the  long  way  round,"  said 
Norris. 

"  Hopes  to  shake  us  off  somewhere  on  the  south  coast, 
maybe,"  I  suggested. 

"  Thad  is  ver'  evident,"  said  Captain  Marat.  "He  could 
save  ver'  much  time  to  go  back  by  the  north  coast." 

"  He'll  be  up  to  some  new  'gum-game',"  said  Norris. 

And  so  it  proved,  as  we  came  to  know. 

We  weathered  a  number  of  severe  squalls,  and  sizzled  during 
some  calm  days.  We  followed  the  Orion  around  a  point  of  the 
island,  and  into  a  harbor  of  that  south  coast. 

We  were  somewhat  disturbed  by  that  movement  of  Duran's, 
feeling  that  it  meant  some  new  trouble  to  meet.  We  picked  a 


OUR  BOAT  IS  SCUTTLED  157 

berth  for  the  Pearl  rather  close  to  the  Orion's,  for  we  must 
have  a  close  eye  on  Duran. 

"  Perhaps  he's  going  overland,"  suggested  Julian. 

"  If  he  does,  we'll  go  overland  too,"  I  offered. 

"  I  believe  he  too  lazy,"  said  Carlos.  "No  railroad  —  big 
mountain." 

"  Well,"  said  Norris,  "we'll  keep  a  sharp  lookout,  and  see." 

It  was  past  noon  when  we  cast  anchor  in  that  harbor.  The 
officials  of  the  place  came  and  went.  Duran  did  not  go  ashore, 
though  he  sent  some  blacks.  Carlos  we  sent  with  two  sailors, 
after  some  needed  provisions  and  water. 

The  hot  tropic  sun  beat  down  on  us  unmercifully;  there 
was  scarce  a  breath  of  air  coming  into  that  place.  I  sauntered 
up  to  Grant  Norris,  where  he  leaned,  dripping  sweat  on  his 
tarpaulin-covered  cannon,  looking  over  toward  the  Orion. 

"  To  think,"  he  said,  "that  it  depends  on  that  skunk  how 
long  we're  to  lie  in  this  blazing  hole.  I  can  almost  see  him 
sneering  over  there." 

"  Never  mind,  Mr.  Norris,"  I  told  him.  "Maybe  when  our 
turn  comes  we  can  pay  him  back." 

"And,  oh!  Let  me  at  him!"  said  Norris,  "when  that  time 
comes." 

Then  the  end  of  the  day  came;  darkness  fell.  It  turned 
almost  chill,  and  we  turned  in  below.  The  moon  was  due  to  rise 
some  time  after  nine,  so  that  there  would  be  but  a  short  time  of 
darkness;  and  then  would  come  moonlight,  making  the  watch 
on  Duran's  movements  easy.  It  was  Julian  took  the  first 
watch,  eight  to  ten.  When  he  called  Norris,  at  four  bells  —  or 
ten  o'clock  —  the  land  breeze  had  already  risen.  I  awoke  at 
the  change  of  watch,  for  I  had  come  to  be  a  light  sleeper,  and 


158  THE  VOODOO  GOLD   TRAIL 

I  heard  the  little  waves  rippling  along  the  schooner's  hull.  I 
saw,  too,  that  it  was  bright  moonlight;  the  moon  was  just  past 
the  full. 

It  was  not  yet  midnight,  when  I  was  aroused  by  a  clamor 
in  the  cabin.  Norris  had  come  in. 

"Out  with  you!  Every  mother's  son  of  you,"  he  said. 
"We're  sinking." 

There  was  much  consternation  as  we  all  turned  out,  jerking 
on  bits  of  clothing. 

We  followed  Captain  Marat  into  the  hold.  As  we  neared 
the  bows,  we  heard  the  splash  of  the  water.  Marat  sent  two 
sailors  to  the  pumps.  The  rest  of  us  set  to  work  to  shift  the 
stores  to  places  out  of  reach  of  the  incoming  water.  To  find 
the  leak  would  require  considerable  time.  Marat  soon  deter- 
mined that  the  water  was  not  coming  in  so  fast  but  that  the 
pump  would  be  able  to  hold  its  own  against  it. 

"  We  must  put  thee  schooner  on  the  beach,"  said  Captain 
Marat. 

Both  boats  were  manned,  and  tow-lines  put  aboard  them. 
The  tide  was  ebbing,  so  we  had  great  labor  to  move  the 
schooner  toward  the  mouth  of  the  little  river,  where  Captain 
Marat  looked  for  a  favorable  place  to  lay  the  bow  of-  the 
Pearl.  When  we  were  in  the  boats  and  beginning  to  bend  our 
backs  to  the  labor,  we  heard  the  voice  of  Duran  on  the  Orion 
in  a  loud,  hearty  laugh. 

"  Laugh,  you  filthy  skunk,"  said  Norris,  who  sat  next  to  me, 
"I'll  never  rest  till  you're  paid  for  all  your  foul  doings." 

It  was  not  many  minutes  till  we  saw  the  sails  of  the  Orion 
go  up,  and  the  land  breeze  and  ebbing  tide,  together,  carried 
that  schooner  off  into  the  open  sea,  at  last  beyond  our  vigi- 


OUR  BOAT  IS  SCUTTLED  159 

lance.  I  felt  a  sinking  within  me  at  the  realization.  But  I 
had  already  had  thoughts  of  what  should  be  done  in  case  we 
were  by  some  chance  to  lose  sight  of  Duran. 

We  had  been  tugging  at  our  oars  for  little  above  half  an 
hour,  making  very  poor  progress,  when  the  tide  came  to  the 
turn.  And  then  we  had  it  with  us,  and  it  was  not  long  till 
we  were  moving  in  at  a  rate  almost  to  make  us  cheerful  again. 

It  was  a  black  sailor  who  had  discovered  the  fact  of  the 
leak  in  the  Pearl.  He  had  heard  an  unusual  sound.  It  was  the 
trickling  water  more  or  less  confused  with  the  rippling  of  the 
waves  against  the  hull.  He  had  gone  to  Norris  with  the  news. 
And  Norris  had  given  his  ear  to  the  thing  only  for  a  moment, 
before  sounding  the  alarm. 

At  last  we  came  to  the  piece  of  beach  aimed  for.  We  took 
the  anchor  in  a  small  boat  well  in  to  shore,  so  that  as  the  tide 
rose  the  bow  of  the  schooner  was  pulled  more  and  more  on  the 
sand.  It  would  be  well  toward  noon  of  the  new  day,  before 
the  tide  will  have  reached  its  height,  and  so  begin  to  recede, 
and  leave  the  Pearl  showing  gradually  more  and  more  of  her 
hull  above  water. 

We  found  time  to  discuss  the  situation  and  the  probable 
means  employed  for  our  undoing;  for  no  one  of  us  was  in  any 
doubt  that  it  was  Duran  who  had  done  this  thing. 

"  He  send  one  black  weeth  the  augur,  or  brace  and  bit,  an' 
drill  holes  in  thee  hull,"  said  Captain  Marat.  And  he  pointed 
to  a  loop  of  rope  still  hanging  on  a  starboard  bowsprit  stay. 
It  was  by  that  rope  that  the  worker  had  swung  himself,  while 
he  bored  holes  into  the  hull  below  water-line. 

"  And  to  think  he  sneaked  up  on  me  in  broad  moonlight  and 
did  that  thing!"  said  Grant  Norris. 


160  THE  VOODOO  GOLD   TRAIL 

"  Well,  you  see,"  I  offered,  "the  swimmer  approached  on  the 
opposite  side  from  the  Orion;  and  the  waves  helped  hide  his 
head.  We  none  of  us  dreamed  of  his  trying  anything  like 
that." 

"  We  should  have  done  even  more  than  ever  dream  it," 
wailed  Norris.  "And  now  he'll  have  at  least  twenty-four  hours 
the  start  of  us,  the  best  we  can  do." 


CHAPTER  XIX 

WE  STEAL  A  MARCH  ON   THE  ENEMY 

"  WHAT  I'd  like  to  know,"  said  Robert,  "are  we  going  to  let 
that  —  that  — " 

"  Kidnapper-voodoo  priest  —  cannibal  —  son-of-a-polecat," 
prompted  Ray. 

"  What  I'd  like  to  know,"  continued  Robert,  "are  we  going 
to  let  him  beat  us  after  all?" 

"Not  if  I  have  to  go  after  him  single-handed,"  declared 
Grant  Norris. 

"  But  he's  making  direct  for  that  gold  mine,"  said  Robert. 

"  There's  only  one  thing  to  do,"  Julian  offered.  "Some  of 
us  will  have  to  go  overland." 

"  Yes,  that  ees  it,"  said  Carlos.   "We  beat  him  there!" 

"What!"  said  Ray.  "Jump  over  those  mountains!"  He 
looked  up  to  those  peaks  towering  many  thousands  of  feet; 
the  morning  sun  had  just  set  his  glow  on  them. 

"  Yes,"  I  said.  "There  are  roads  over  the  passes,  and  the 
distance  can't  be  over  two  hundred  miles." 

"  Id  is  thee  only  chance,"  said  Captain  Marat,  "I  get  thee 
chart." 

The  chart  was  spread  on  the  table. 

"  Id  take  anyway  five  day  for  the  Orion  to  sail  round  to 
thee  places,"  said  Captain  Marat,  making  measurements,  "if 
she  have  most  favorable  wind." 

161 


162  THE  VOODOO  GOLD  TRAIL 

"  It  won't  take  over  four  days  to  make  it  overland,"  I 
offered,  "if  we  make  only  thirty  miles  a  day  with  horses." 

"Just  so,"  agreed  Captain  Marat,  verifying  my  measure- 
ments. 

"  What  is  more,"  Robert  added,  "we  know  pretty  accurately 
where  Duran  will  land  to  go  to  the  gold  mine." 

We  all  of  us  caught  afire  with  the  prospect,  Carlos  not  the 
least,  for  the  sailing  away  of  Duran  had  set  a  melancholy  on 
his  face. 

"Hurray!"  cried  Norris,  "we'll  beat  that  skunk  yet." 

Preparations  went  immediately  forward.  Norris,  Julian,  and 
Carlos  hurried  over  to  the  town,  to  secure  horses  and  a  guide. 
Robert  and  I  set  to  work  on  our  packs,  for  it  was  we  two  that 
were  to  make  the  overland  journey,  accompanied  by  Carlos. 

It  wanted  an  hour  of  noon  when  the  three  came  back,  having 
been  eminently  successful.  They  had  found  horses  in  plenty, 
and  no  lack  of  guides. 

"  Now  looky  heah,"  began  Rufe,  when  Robert,  Carlos,  and 
I  had  taken  our  seats  in  the  small  boat.  "Don'  you-all  let  dat 
white  voodoo  debbil  git  his  han's  on  you  no  moh.  Keep  yo' 
eyes  peeled  foh  him;  he's  jes'  dat  sneaking." 

The  tide  was  ebbing  when  we  left  the  Pearl,  though  it  would 
be  some  time  before  the  leak  in  her  hull  would  be  uncovered. 
The  horses  and  guide  were  waiting  at  the  edge  of  town.  The 
saddles  were  on,  and  the  black  fellow  —  our  guide  —  was 
looking  to  the  cinches.  To  make  fast  our  packs  to  the  saddles 
was  the  work  of  but  a  few  minutes.  The  guide  had  already 
distributed  the  needed  provisions  to  the  various  ponies.  Cap- 
tain Marat,  Norris,  Ray,  and  Julian  stood  in  a  row  when  we 
had  mounted. 


WE  STEAL  A  MARCH  ON  THE  ENEMY      163 

"  Now  remember,"  we  told  them.  "We'll  leave  a  note  in 
the  deft  end  of  a  stake  —  on  the  top  of  the  first  hill,  or  at 
the  bottom.  And  we'll  blaze  trees  or  bushes,  or  whatever  there 
is  to  show  the  way  to  it." 

"  Trust  us,"  said  Norris.   "We'll  find  it." 

"  And  say!"  broke  in  Ray.  "If  there  should  be  any  battles 
on  the  docket,  just  hold  up  operations  till  Norris  gets  there 
with  his  brass  barker  and  Rufe's  red  hot  poker." 

The  trees  of  the  forest,  into  which  our  road  plunged,  soon 
cut  off  our  view  of  our  friends.  I  felt  a  little  sinking  of  the 
heart  at  this  new  separation,  for  there  was  still  much  room 
for  mishap  before  our  coming  together  again.  Our  guide  (Jan 
was  his  name)  and  Carlos  rode  before;  Robert  and  I  carried 
our  little  rifles  slung  at  our  backs.  The  ponies  were  evidently 
trained  to  the  saddle,  and  moved  at  a  gait  that  was  something 
between  a  walk  and  a  trot,  so  that  our  progress  was  agreeably 
rapid. 

We  traversed  first  the  bamboo;  then  palms,  oaks,  and  ma- 
hogany sheltered  our  way  for  long  stretches.  When  we  came 
to  the  foothills,  occasionally  an  open  vista  gave  us  view  of 
waving  golden-yellow  cane  fields.  The  streams  were  overhung 
with  the  wonderful  feathery  tree-ferns.  Oranges,  bananas, 
limes,  mangoes,  grew  in  abundance,  though  only  berries  were 
ripe  at  this  season.  Our  road  took  us  at  times  into  the  twi- 
light of  the  heavier  forests,  among  lofty  trunks,  from  which 
hung,  in  festoons  and  tangles,  the  rope-like  lianas.  It  was  as 
if  innumerable  ships  had  been  crammed  together  in  some  great 
storm,  their  rigging  intertwined,  and  in  time  all  overgrown 
with  green  parasites  and  slimy  mosses. 

All  this  display  of  nature  that  showed  to  us  on  our  way, 


164  THE  VOODOO   GOLD  TRAIL 

and  much  more  than  I  have  mentioned,  I  noted;  and  had  my 
mind  been  untroubled  by  serious  business,  I  would  have  found 
much  delight  in  this  journey  into  a  tropic  interior.  But  we 
were  under  the  necessity  of  pressing  forward,  always  with  the 
fear  that  Duran  might  come  before  us  to  that  certain  spot  of 
the  northern  coast,  and  so  elude  us  and  arrive  at  the  hidden 
mine  secure  from  discovery. 

By  night  we  had  mounted  high  among  the  hills.  It  was 
when  we  saw  the  azure  of  the  sea  and  the  coast  lines  begin  to 
darken,  and  the  hills  below  us  fall  into  shadow,  that  we  dis- 
mounted and  removed  the  saddles  from  our  ponies.  A  quick 
meal,  and  soon  we  were  under  our  mosquito-bars,  sleeping. 

We  were  again  on  the  move  before  the  sun  had  thrown  his 
rays  on  the  highest  peaks.  And  this  day  it  was  up  and  down, 
and  a  winding  about  among  the  mountains.  The  day  following 
was  but  a  repetition,  except  that  before  night  our  guide  told 
us  that  we  had  passed  the  greatest  of  the  mountains  and  were 
on  the  downward  slope  toward  the  northern  coast  of  the  island. 
But  we  got  no  view  of  the  sea  till  the  third  day,  and  then  the 
road  rounded  a  spur  of  mountain,  and  there  opened  to  our 
vision  that  great  blue  expanse  of  sea  and  the  irregular  coast 
line  below  us. 

"  We're  sure  to  make  it  in  time  now,"  observed  Robert. 

"  Yes,"  I  said.  "The  Orion  cannot  get  there  before  us  now." 

And  then,  as  our  ponies  continued  to  plod  onward  behind 
those  of  our  guide  and  Carlos,  we  made  some  discussion  of 
our  plan  of  action.  It  was  decided  to  discharge  our  guide  some 
way  short  of  our  destination,  and  start  him  back  before  he 
should  find  opportunity  to  tell  anyone  there  of  having  led  a 
pair  of  white  boys  across  the  island  and  into  the  region  of  the 


WE  STEAL  A  MARCH  ON  THE  ENEMY       165 

voodoos.  News  of  our  exploits  in  those  hills  had  doubtless 
been  spread  among  all  of  the  voodoo  faith;  and  so  if  the  fact 
of  our  return  were  noised  about,  we  would  doubtless  have  the 
pack  at  our  heels,  and  all  our  plans  gone  topsy-turvy  again. 

By  noon  we  were  come  to  a  place  in  the  hills  fifteen  miles 
from  Carlos'  old  home.  It  was  a  region  well  known  to  Carlos, 
as  he  professed. 

"  Here  very  good  place  to  stop,"  said  Carlos.  "I  go  for  the 
provision  while  you  rest  here." 

We  pulled  the  saddles  from  the  ponies,  and  Carlos  set  off 
alone  through  the  forest.  And  when  he  came  back,  after  less 
than  half  an  hour,  he  had  food  to  replenish  the  stock  of  the 
guide,  who  after  an  hour's  rest  expressed  himself  as  happy  to 
be  on  the  way  back  to  his  home  on  the  south  coast  of  the 
island.  When  the  guide  was  gone,  Robert  and  I  set  to  work  to 
stain  our  faces  and  hands,  and  don  again  those  ciirly  wigs. 
White  faces  were  too  rare  and  unpopular  in  this  region  to 
escape  comment  and  more  or  less  unpleasant  attention. 

So  when  we  again  took  up  the  march  we  all  went  afoot; 
and  in  three  hours  we  had  arrived  at  the  little  cove  where  we 
had  seen  Duran's  schooner,  Orion,  just  before  her  sailing  away 
with  the  Pearl  in  chase.  We  were  now  ten  miles  from  the  city, 
toward  which  we  turned  our  steps,  keeping  under  shelter  of 
the  palms  that  skirted  the  beach. 

When  we  were  come  within  four  miles  of  the  city  we  halted. 
It  was  near  to  the  huts  where  we  had  made  that  landing  —  to 
go  to  the  interior,  trailing  Duran  to  the  old  palace  ruin.  It 
was  our  plan  to  send  Carlos  into  the  city  for  articles  of  food 
and  a  rowboat  of  some  kind.  When  we  had  come  so  far,  the 


166  THE  VOODOO  GOLD  TRAIL 

sun  was  less  than  two  hours  high;  so  Carlos  had  but  an  hour's 
rest  before  setting  off  on  his  mission. 

When  at  last  Carlos  had  gone,  Robert  and  I  settled  down 
amongst  the  cocoanut  palms  just  above  the  beach.  We  watched 
land  crabs  and  turtles  crawling  up  on  the  sand ;  anon  we  would 
look  into  one  another's  black  faces. 

"  When  do  you  think  the  Orion  will  get  here?"  said  Robert. 

"Tomorrow,  if  the  winds  are  favorable,"  I  answered;  "or 
a  day  or  two  after,  if  they're  not.  Duran  will  come  as  fast  as 
he  can,  of  course." 

"  Of  course,"  agreed  Robert.  "But  I  can't  make  my  mind 
give  in  to  the  idea  that  he  will  land  at  that  place  on  the  beach 
that  you  and  Captain  Marat  marked.  There  can't  be  any  gold 
mine  about  that  place.  Except  those  two  hills,  the  map  shows 
nothing  but  sand  and  palms,  and  marshes,  and  bushes." 

I  brought  out  of  my  pocket  a  folded  paper  on  which  I  had 
copied  from  Marat's  chart  this  portion  of  the  coast.  I  put  my 
ringers  on  the  Twin  Hills,  near  the  foot  of  which  we  expected 
Duran  would  land;  for  it  will  be  remembered  Marat  had  heard 
him  say  as  much,  that  night  when  Marat  and  I,  in  our  own 
boat,  had  crept  up  to  the  Orion  in  the  dark.  To  the  west  of 
the  hills  was  a  shallow  bay  of  which  the  little  cove  mentioned 
was  a  part.  To  the  east  and  south  of  the  hills  lay  a  greater 
bay,  (not  to  mention  its  proper  name,  we  will  call  it  Crow 
Bay,  for  it  is  much  the  shape  of  a  crow's  foot).  The  neck  of 
land  between  the  two  bays  was  all  low,  marshy  and  impene- 
trable thickets. 

"  Now,"  I  said,  "I  agree  with  you  that  this  seems  not  a 
proper  place  —  at  these  hills  —  to  make  a  start  for  anything 
like  a  gold  mine.  But  is  not  that  the  very  reason  that  Duran 


WE  STEAL  A  MARCH  ON  THE  ENEMY      167 

makes  his  landing  here?  Isn't  it,  for  some  reason  or  other,  the 
most  favorable  for  covering  up  his  trail?  And  then,  too,  land- 
ing out  there  on  the  open  beach,  he  can  easily  see  whether 
anyone  is  following  him." 

"  Yes,"  said  Robert,  "that  must  be  it.  He's  just  that  shrewd. 
And  then,  when  he  sees  his  crew  row  back  to  the  Orion  and 
sail  away,  he  knows  none  of  his  blacks  are  following  him." 

Darkness  had  soon  spread  over  everything.  And  it  must 
have  been  ten  o'clock,  when  we  heard  Carlos'  whistle.  And 
then  at  our  answer  a  boat's  prow  touched  the  sand  of  the 
beach.  We  had  our  packs  and  guns  aboard  in  a  minute,  and 
Robert  and  I,  each  pulling  an  oar,  we  moved,  paralleling  the 
beach,  to  the  east.  The  boat  was  as  light  as  a  canoe,  almost, 
and  our  progress  was  rapid. 

"  I  find  my  friend,"  said  Carlos,  telling  of  his  visit  to  the 
city.  "An'  he  wonder  where  I  been  so  long.  He  say  Duran 
have  not  come  back.  But  he  hear  much  talk  among  voodoo 
about  devil-guns  —  shoot,  make  no  noise.  My  friend  help  me 
find  this  boat.  He  buy  it  for  me  —  eight  dollar.  The  man  glad 
to  sell  for  much  money." 

In  an  hour  the  moon  —  now  in  the  last  quarter  —  came  out 
of  the  sea  in  front  of  us.  We  rowed  round  the  point,  into  the 
bay.  We  passed  the  narrow  entrance  to  the  little  cove,  and 
made  for  the  east  side  of  the  bay,  where  a  bight  of  the  bay 
pushed  in  to  within  a  mile  and  a  half  of  the  back  of  the  Twin 
Hills,  as  our  bit  of  chart  showed  us. 

We  carried  our  boat  above  the  beach  into  the  bushes,  and 
so  made  our  camp,  at  midnight. 

When  the  sun  rose  we  were  abroad,  and  soon  we  had  picked 
our  way  over  to  the  Twin  Hills.  They  lay  some  way  apart, 


168  THE  VOODOO   GOLD  TRAIL 

towered  perhaps  a  hundred  feet,  and  were  grown  over  with 
brush.  We  climbed  to  the  top  of  that  nearest  the  beach.  That 
vantage  point  gave  us  a  splendid  view  of  the  beach  and  sea. 

All  that  day  some  of  us  remained  there  on  the  lookout.  The 
Orion  did  not  come.  We  all  three  made  our  beds  there  that 
night.  Before  morning  a  squall  sent  us  scampering  back  to 
our  boat,  and  we  escaped  a  drenching  by  turning  the  little 
vessel  bottom  up  and  creeping  under. 

Another  day  passed  on  the  hill-top,  and  no  Orion  came. 

"  I  wonder  if  he's  fooled  us  again,"  said  Robert. 

"  I  don't  think  it,"  I  answered. 

"  I  think  he  come,"  encouraged  Carlos. 

I  was  sleeping  soundly  when  an  insistent  hand  on  my  shoul- 
der brought  me  suddenly  awake.  It  was  Robert,  whose  watch 
was  eleven  to  one. 

"  They're  here,"  he  said.   "I  heard  a  block  rattle." 

Carlos  was  now  up.  We  could  barely  make  out  a  dark  mass 
well  out  from  the  beach;  the  night  was  very  dark  in  spite  of 
the  brilliancy  of  the  stars.  We  scrambled  down  the  hill,  and 
in  a  few  minutes  were  in  the  bushes  that  fringed  the  beach. 

Not  many  minutes  more  passed  till  we  heard  oars  knocking 
in  the  tholes.  And  then  a  small  boat  touched  the  sand,  and  a 
figure  stepped  out. 


CHAPTER  XX 

THE    MYSTERIOUS    TRAIL 

THAT  figure  stood  there  many  minutes,  almost  immobile, 
like  a  tree-stump.  Then,  when  I  saw  that  black  mass  of  ship 
out  on  the  sea  begin  to  move,  the  figure  stooped,  took  some 
bulky  thing  from  the  ground  and  started  off  inland. 

We  followed  cautiously  —  ah,  how  cautiously!  It  was  a 
ticklish  period  of  our  business.  The  rustling  in  the  brush 
ahead,  now  and  then,  told  us  how  he  went. 

Near  two  miles  that  figure  led  us  thus.  And  then  came  a 
halt  on  the  shore  of  Crow  Bay.  We  could  hear  him  in  the 
water,  into  which  he  waded.  And  we  crawled  close,  and  made 
out  he  was  tugging  at  something  on  the  bottom. 

In  a  little,  he  had  dragged  a  canoe  onto  the  shore,  and  with 
some  labor  he  turned  out  the  water.  I  could  hear  him  mum- 
bling to  himself,  and  chuckling,  as  it  seemed,  while  he  took 
up  his  burden  and  set  it  in  the  canoe.  That  sound  of  his  voice 
with  its  unpleasing  quality  settled  his  identity  for  me.  It  was 
Duran. 

He  sat  himself  in  the  little  boat,  and  pushing  with  a  paddle, 
moved  off  from  shore. 

"  We've  got  to  follow  close,"  I  whispered  to  my  comrades. 
"Robert,  you  better  stay,  and  Carlos  and  I  will  try  swimming 
for  it.  If  I  send  for  you,  leave  a  note  on  the  top  of  the  hill." 

I  removed  my  shoes  while  I  talked,  and  Carlos  and  I 

169 


170  THE  VOODOO   GOLD  TRAIL 

waded  in.  The  water  was  shallow,  and  we  pushed  along  with 
some  rapidity,  digging  our  toes  into  the  sandy  bottom.  We 
came,  in  time,  to  deeper  water,  and  swam  a  short  way,  then 
touched  bottom  again.  And  presently  we  came  up  on  a  piece 
of  beach  and  sprinted  round  a  tongue  of  land.  This  brought 
our  quarry  within  view  again.  So,  though  we  lost  sight  of  him 
when  again  we  were  obliged  to  enter  the  water  and  cross 
another  broad  bayou,  a  second  and  longer  run  on  the  beach, 
round  a  broader  tongue  of  land,  gave  us  his  view  once  more. 

One  more  swim  for  it,  and  we  came  up  in  time  to  see  Duran 
paddling  into  an  inlet,  or  bayou,  in  the  south  shore  of  Crow 
Bay.  By  this  time  the  moon  had  risen.  But  its  light  served 
only  to  show  us  the  extent  of  the  marshy  place  we  were  in, 
among  the  tall  reeds.  Progress  was  impossible,  except  by  way 
of  the  shallow  water  of  the  inlet,  for  there  was  no  beach  here. 

Wading,  we  continued  on  the  trail,  though  the  canoe  was 
beyond  our  view.  We  had  gone  thus,  in  the  bayou,  some  little 
way,  when  we  noted,  in  the  dim  moonlight,  the  place  where 
the  canoe  had  been  dragged  in  among  the  reeds.  And  close  by 
was  the  beginning  of  a  path,  and  the  ground  was  solid;  and 
heavy,  bushy  growth  replaced  the  grasses. 

We  now  ran  forward,  hoping  to  sight  Duran  before  he 
should  come  to  some  turning  and  be  lost  to  us.  We  went  thus, 
miles  it  seemed,  and  the  path  took  us,  in  time,  out  of  the  open 
and  into  the  forest.  Here  the  feel  of  our  bare  feet  on  the  path 
was  our  only  guide.  The  forest  ended,  and  we  came  out  into  a 
glade;  still  there  was  no  sign  of  him  we  followed.  Carlos 
stooped  to  the  ground,  pushing  aside  the  grasses  that  lined  the 
trail.  With  eyes  and  fingers  employed  together  he  sought  for 
marks. 


THE  MYSTERIOUS  TRAIL  171 

"  Yes,"  he  said  at  last,  "he  go  here." 

And  so  we  pushed  on,  the  trail  soon  taking  us  into  another 
piece  of  forest  growth.  But  our  path  came  to  an  abrupt  end 
at  the  bank  of  a  stream.  And  here  some  rays  of  moonlight, 
coming  in  through  interstices  of  the  green  canopy,  showed 
fresh  marks  of  some  one  having  gone  into  the  water.  We  hesi- 
tated but  a  few  moments,  and  stepped  into  that  cool  stream, 
following  up  its  course  a  hundred  yards. 

It  was  then  we  came,  of  necessity,  to  a  final  stand.  Before 
us  towered,  for  hundreds  of  feet,  sheer  cliffs  of  rock.  The 
stream  came  pouring  out  of  a  hole  at  the  foot.  The  waters, 
where  they  made  their  exit  from  the  earth,  were  divided  by  a 
large  rock.  That  part  on  the  left  rolled  out  in  a  smooth  flood. 
On  the  right  of  the  rock  the  water  came  over  a  ledge,  to 
tumble  down  in  a  thin  cascade  of  three  feet  in  height. 

The  light  of  the  moon  came  more  and  more  into  that  space 
among  the  trees;  and  we  examined  the  banks  for  marks  of  the 
way  Duran  had  gone.  Within  two  hours  day  broke;  and,  re- 
tracing our  steps,  we  went  back  to  where  that  trail  entered 
the  stream,  and  we  carefully  searched  both  banks  all  up  and 
down  for  traces.  But  nowhere  was  there  a  mark  of  any  kind 
to  show  where  he  we  sought  had  left  the  water. 

"  Well,"  I  said  at  last  to  Carlos,  "he  might  soon  be  coming 
back  this  way;  so  we'll  have  to  watch.  If  I  stay  here  do  you 
think  that  you  and  Robert  can  carry  our  boat  across  the  neck 
of  land  into  Crow  Bay?" 

"  Yes,"  said  Carlos,  "that  not  so  very  hard.  The  boat 
light." 

"  Well,  then,"  I  said,  "suppose  you  go  back,  and  you  and 
Robert  get  the  boat  into  the  bay,  and  hide  it  in  the  reeds 


172  THE  VOODOO  GOLD  TRAIL 

somewhere  near  where  Duran  hid  his  canoe.  But  tell  Robert 
to  leave  a  note  on  the  top  of  the  hill,  telling  our  friends  on  the 
Pearl  to  wait  there  to  hear  from  us." 

"  Yes,"  returned  Carlos,  "I  do  that." 

But  I  got  an  hour's  sleep  before  Carlos  was  started  on  the 
back  trail,  and  then  settled  down  in  a  nest  of  brush  on  the 
stream's  bank,  to  watch  for  the  possible  return  of  Duran. 

Over  my  head,  and  almost  meeting  the  trees  of  the  opposite 
bank  of  the  stream,  were  the  tree-tops,  through  which  the  rays 
of  the  morning  sun  were  now  creeping.  The  lianas  hung  all 
about;  birds  glided  from  limb  to  limb.  And  there,  on  my 
right,  was  that  high  wall  of  cliffs,  and  the  water  gushing  out 
of  the  rocks.  The  splashing  of  the  little  cascade  on  the  rocks 
overwhelmed  other  sounds,  of  insects  and  birds. 

I  thought  long  on  the  curious  disappearance  of  Duran,  leav- 
ing no  trace  to  point  the  way  he  had  gone.  I  looked  at  that 
rock  wall  and  wondered  if  perhaps  he  could  have  had  a  rope 
ladder  hanging  there,  up  which  he  had  gone,  pulling  it  after 
him.  I  had  read  of  such  things.  But  the  cliff  was  too  high, 
and  there  was  no  landing-place  on  that  sheer  wall  that  would 
have  given  foothold  even  to  a  mountain  goat.  It  was  very 
certain  that  he  could  not  have  climbed  from  the  water  out  on 
the  bank  anywhere  above  that  spot  where  his  path  went  into 
the  stream,  without  leaving  unmistakable  marks  on  the  ground. 
So  that  the  only  surmise  left  me  was  that  he  had  waded  down 
the  stream,  and  climbed  out  on  the  opposite  bank.  When 
Carlos  and  Robert  should  come  we  would  see.  But  it  was 
chagrining  to  have  followed  Duran  so  far,  and  then  to  have 
lost  him  just  when  we  had  reason  to  believe  we  were  coming 
near  to  the  hidden  mine. 


CHAPTER  XXI 

WE    SEEK    IN    VAIN    FOR    A    LOST    TRAIL 
AND   DISCOVER  A   LONE   MONKEY 

THE  sun's  rays  were  coming  down  almost  perpendicularly 
through  the  interstices  in  that  green  canopy  over  my  head, 
when  Robert  and  Carlos  appeared,  wading  in  the  stream. 

"  Did  you  get  the  boat  over?"  I  asked. 

"  Yes,"  said  Robert,  "and  it's  hid  in  the  high  grass  not  far 
from  that  canoe." 

"  And  you  left  a  note  on  the  top  of  the  hill?" 

"  Yes,"  he  answered.   "I  told  them  to  wait  for  us." 

I  explained  the  situation  to  Robert,  showing  him  where  we 
had  lost  the  trail  of  Duran.  And  while  we  made  a  meal  on 
food  brought  by  the  two,  we  discussed  our  situation  and  deter- 
mined our  movements. 

"Well,  then,  Bob,"  I  concluded,  "if  you'll  stay  here  and 
watch,  Carlos  and  I  will  have  a  look  down  stream,  and  then, 
maybe,  along  the  cliff." 

We  two  had  soon  got  to  the  other  bank,  and  in  a  few  min- 
utes had  passed  a  point  opposite  the  spot  where  the  path 
entered  the  water.  We  kept  to  the  water  as  we  scrutinized 
the  soft  dirt  banks.  The  brook  soon  widened,  and  it  became 
more  shallow,  till  finally  —  some  mile  or  more  toward  the 
bay  —  it  emerged  from  the  forest  and  spread  out  to  diffuse 

173 


174  THE  VOODOO  GOLD  TRAIL 

itself  into  a  number  of  bayous,  taking  slow  movement  among 
the  grasses  and  reeds. 

Nowhere  along  that  course  were  there  any  signs  of  anyone 
having  climbed  out  over  the  banks.  So  now  Carlos  and  I 
retraced  our  steps,  and  picked  our  way  through  the  forest  till 
we  came  to  the  foot  of  those  high  cliffs.  For  above  two  miles 
we  searched  for  a  break  in  that  great  wall,  and  the  forest  con- 
tinuing all  that  way.  Then  we  went  back  to  where  Robert 
kept  watch  by  the  stream.  We  stopped  to  report  our  failure, 
and  again  set  off,  this  time  skirting  the  cliffs  to  the  west. 

We  must  have  covered  three  miles  this  way,  when  the  cliffs 
melted  into  more  sloping  ground,  till  finally  we  came  to  where 
it  should  be  possible  to  climb  to  the  heights.  But  nowhere 
did  we  see  any  path,  or  any  mark  to  show  that  others  had 
trod  the  region  before  us.  The  afternoon  now  was  nearly  gone, 
and  I  turned  to  Carlos. 

"Well,  Carlos,"  I  said,  "the  only  thing  left  for  us  is  to 
camp  back  there  where  we  lost  Duran's  trail  and  wait  for  the 
Pearl" 

"  Yes,"  returned  Carlos.  "Duran  he  sure  to  come  back 
sometime  —  maybe  one  week  —  maybe  little  more." 

Night  was  nearly  on  us  when  we  had  joined  Robert  again. 

"  Isn't  it  about  time  for  the  Pearl?"  asked  Robert. 

"  The  moon  will  be  up  about  half-past-two,"  I  answered. 
"Then  two  of  us  might  go  and  have  a  lookout  for  her." 

Taking  two-hour  watches  turn  about,  we  slept  till  morning. 
Then  Robert  and  I  started,  leaving  Carlos  to  keep  the  watch 
for  Duran.  Crossing  the  west  end  of  Crow  Bay,  we  made 
landing  at  the  end  of  the  trail  that  led  from  the  sea  side,  and 
by  half-past-four  of  the  morning  came  to  Twin  Hills. 


WE  SEEK  IN  VAIN  FOR  A  LOST  TRAIL      175 

On  the  peak  of  that  hill  which  stood  nearest  the  beach,  we 
came  upon  a  figure  stretched  on  the  ground,  sleeping  peace- 
fully. It  was  Ray  Reid.  It  was  good  to  see  the  dear  lad. 

I  shook  him  gently. 

"  Don't,  Wayne,"  he  said.  "You'll  shake  the  gas  out  of  the 
balloon.  We've  got  to  make  the  other  side  of  the  mountain  — 
that's  where  the  gold  mine  is." 

He  was  either  dreaming  or  pretending.  I  lifted  him  by  the 
shoulders.  "Rayl  We're  here,"  I  said. 

"  Not  yet,"  he  returned.  "It's  not — "  And  then  he  opened 
his  eyes. 

"What  the  Sam — "  he  began.  And  he  gazed  on  Robert 
and  myself,  wonderingly. 

"Say!"  he  continued.  "You  spoiled  the  most  scrumptious 
dream  I  ever  had.  I  was  sailing  through  the  clouds  —  that 
soft  and  nice  —  on  the  way  to  the  gold  mine.  But  I  suppose 
you  kids  have  got  your  pockets  full  of  gold;  let's  see  the  color 
of  it;  what  have  you  done  with  Duran  and  the  rest  of  those 
voodoos?  Do  you  know  I  came  up  on  top  of  this  hill  so's  to 
get  a  good  running  start  if  that  polecat  (as  Norris  calls  him) 
got  after  me;  well,  what  have  you  been  up  to  —  why  don't 
you  say  something?" 

"  Say  something!"  I  mocked.  I  guess  my  smile  nettled  him. 

"  Say,"  he  began  again,  "if  I  talked  as  much  as  you  don't, 
Wayne,  my  tongue  would  soon  grow  callouses  on  it.  But  back 
to  business,"  he  continued.  "What  have  you  done  with  that 
Duran?  I  haven't  seen  him  for  a  coon's  age.  I've  got  so  I'm 
not  happy  if  I  don't  see  him  around." 

"  Take  us  to  the  Pearl,"  I  answered,  "and  I'll  tell  you  all 
there  is  to  tell." 


176  THE  VOODOO  GOLD   TRAIL 

We  descended  the  hill,  and  Ray  led  us  to  that  bay,  a  mile 
and  a  half  west,  even  past  the  spot  where  Robert,  Carlos,  and 
I  had  first  pulled  up  our  little  boat.  A  half  mile  more,  and  we 
came  upon  the  Pearl,  looking  pretty  in  the  moonlight,  resting 
just  within  a  deep  water  inlet,  and  hidden  behind  the  tall 
cocoanut  palms.  A  low  whistle  brought  the  small  boat  to 
shore  for  us. 

It  was  again  a  happy  reunion,  and  there  came  the  exchange 
of  tales.  That  of  the  Pearl's  adventures  was  simple;  they  had 
mended  those  augur-bored  leaks  with  little  difficulty.  But 
they  were  delayed  thirty-odd  hours,  waiting  for  a  spring  tide, 
enough  to  float  them  off.  The  voyage  round  the  upper  end  of 
the  island  had  been  without  unusual  happenings.  Captain 
Marat  had  seen  fit  to  pass  the  city  after  dark;  and  his  chart 
had  guided  him  to  the  present  berth  of  the  Pearl,  the  markings 
on  the  map  showing  water  a  plenty;  and  it  seemed  a  likely 
hiding  place,  one  Duran  and  his  voodoos  were  not  apt  to  visit, 
if  Carlos'  account  of  their  usual  practice  had  any  value. 

"  I  mightily  would  like  to  have  a  look  at  that  place  where 
you  lost  that  skunk's  trail,"  observed  Norris.  "That  gold  mine 
can't  be  very  far  away  from  there,  and  we'll  find  it  whether 
or  no." 

"  And  where  did  they  go  with  the  Orion,  do  you  think?" 
asked  Julian. 

"  They  sail  her  on  down  thee  coast,  to  draw  us  away  from 
here,  w'en  we  come,"  said  Captain  Marat. 

"  It's  a  wonder  they  didn't  go  into  Crow  Bay,"  said  Norris. 
"It's  a  fine  hiding  place,  according  to  the  chart." 

"  And  yet  Duran  might  have  considered  it  too  near  the 
place  he's  wanting  to  hide  from  us."  I  offered. 


WE  SEEK  IN  VAIN  FOR  A  LOST  TRAIL       177 

"  Well,  now,  when  are  we  going  to  get  up  there  where  Carlos 
is?"  said  Norris,  impatient  to  be  doing. 

"  Say,  Wayne,"  said  Ray.  "Norris  has  pretty  nigh  worn 
out  the  deck,  tramping  up  and  down;  and  over  there  on  shore 
his  clod-hoppers  have  flattened  out  all  the  grass  for  a  mile 
around.  For  heaven's  sake  sick  him  after  that  'polecat'  before 
he  starts  an  earthquake." 

Julian  volunteered  to  remain  behind  with  Rufe  and  the 
sailors  to  guard  the  schooner.  Captain  Marat,  Norris,  Ray, 
Robert,  and  myself,  set  off  to  rejoin  Carlos.  The  little  boat 
was  well  laden  with  the  five  of  us  in  her,  but  it  was  quiet 
water  we  moved  on. 

It  was  broad  day,  which  suited  us  illy,  since  we  did  not  wish 
to  be  seen  in  the  region  by  anyone  who  might  get  the  news 
to  Duran.  But  in  the  crossing  of  Crow  Bay,  only  Robert 
and  I  showed  our  faces  above  the  gunwale;  and  the  visible 
portions  of  our  skins,  it  will  be  remembered,  were  stained 
black. 

We  concealed  the  rowboat  again  among  the  reeds,  not  far 
from  where  lay  that  canoe  of  Duran's,  and  it  was  not  long 
till  we  had  joined  Carlos. 

"  Duran  —  no  one  —  come,"  reported  Carlos. 

"  Well,  it's  up  to  us  to  find  out  where  he's  gone,"  said  Grant 
Norris. 

"  Well,  here's  the  chance  you've  been  steaming  for,"  said 
Ray.  "Here's  the  end  of  the  trail,  where  it  goes  into  the 
water;  only  I'll  bet  he  took  to  a  balloon  right  here.  You  know, 
too,  I  dreamed  of  a  balloon  last  night,  and  if  Wayne  hadn't 
waked  me  just  when  he  did,  I'd  be  at  that  gold  mine  right 
now." 


178  THE  VOODOO  GOLD  TRAIL 

"  Yes,"  returned  Norris,  "and  you'd  have  to  go  to  sleep  to 
dream  yourself  back  again." 

"  Well,"  shot  back  Ray,  "why  not?  Maybe  the  gold  mine 
is  all  a  dream,  after  all." 

"  Ah,  no,"  declared  Carlos,  "  it  no  dream.  I  see  the  gold  — 
my  father  show  me." 

We  made  up  three  parties  for  the  search.  Norris  and  Carlos 
went  east;  Captain  Jean  Marat  and  I  west;  Robert  and  Ray 
remained  to  watch  by  the  stream. 

Captain  Marat  and  I  picked  our  way  through  the  forest  to 
the  west  for  the  three  miles,  to  the  place  where  the  sloping 
ground  permitted  an  ascent  to  the  heights  backing  the  cliffs. 

The  climb  was  a  stiff  one,  and  there  was  no  path  or  way 
cleared  of  the  brush,  and  so  were  our  difficulties  increased. 
When  we  had  gained  a  sufficient  height  we  moved  toward  the 
east,  intending  to  explore  the  region  that  looked  down  on  the 
stream  where  were  Robert  and  Ray.  But  we  encountered  cliffs 
again,  above  those  other  cliffs,  that  kept  us  off  some  miles  to 
the  back  of  that  region  we  hoped  to  penetrate. 

After  a  short  stop  at  noon,  for  a  bite  of  food  out  of  our 
pockets,  we  continued  moving  eastward  through  the  cedars 
that  ornamented  this  new  line  of  cliffs,  towering  so  many  hun- 
dreds of  feet  above  those  lying  between  us  and  Crow  Bay. 
Now  and  then  we  got  unobstructed  views  of  that  region  below, 
all  forest-clad,  and  there  seemed  to  be  pits  and  basins  there; 
but  nowhere  a  slope  permitting  a  descent.  We  got  a  view  of 
the  little  bay  where  the  Pearl  lay,  but  the  distance  (some 
seven  or  eight  miles)  was  too  great  to  permit  us  to  distinguish 
the  masts  among  the  palms,  even  with  the  glasses  that  Captain 
Marat  carried. 


WE  SEEK  IN  VAIN  FOR  A  LOST  TRAIL       179 

The  afternoon  was  not  far  gone  when  we  met  Grant  Norris 
and  Carlos,  who,  by  their  report,  had  encountered  practically 
the  same  conditions  as  we.  Except  only  that  they  had  come 
upon  a  brook  that  disappeared  into  the  hill-side,  a  thing  that 
Carlos  declared  was  common  enough  in  these  mountains.  But 
the  direction  of  the  stream  was  such  as  to  suggest  that  it  was 
the  same  rivulet  that  made  its  exit  from  the  rocks  right  where 
Ray  and  Robert  kept  watch.  Norris  and  Carlos  had  ascended 
this  mountain  brook  above  a  mile,  on  the  chance  that  it  might 
bring  them  to  some  trail  to  the  haunt  of  Duran.  But  they 
had  met  with  no  signs,  and  had  at  last  taken  to  the  heights. 

"  Now,  I'll  tell  you,  fellows,"  observed  Norris,  "I  propose 
to  follow  up  that  creek  some  miles  farther,  tomorrow.  I've 
been  in  more  than  one  gold  country,  and  that  creek  looks 
darned  likely  to  me.  I  dug  down  at  the  edge  with  my  hand, 
in  a  couple  of  places,  and  found  black  sand.  If  there  isn't 
gold  somewhere  up  that  stream  I  miss  my  guess." 

"  Well,  the  sun  soon  be  getting  low,"  said  Captain  Marat. 
"It  is  time  we  go  back." 

The  way  Norris  and  Carlos  had  come  was  considered  the 
shorter  way  back,  so  we  took  up  the  march,  moving  eastward. 
I  was  ahead  with  Carlos,  and  we  hadn't  taken  many  steps  on 
our  way,  when  I  was  startled  by  the  sight  of  some  furry  object 
scampering  up  a  cedar  just  below.  Norris  saw  it  too,  and 
raised  his  rifle.  It  was  then  I  got  another  view  of 'the  being, 
and  reached  out  to  stop  Norris  whose  finger  was  on  the  trigger. 

"Wait!"  I  cried.    "It's  a  monkey." 

Carlos,  too,  was  surprised  at  the  spectacle.  He  declared 
that  he  had  never  heard  of  monkeys  inhabiting  the  island, 

"It  must  be  tame  monkey,"  he  said. 


180  THE  VOODOO  GOLD  TRAIL 

The  animal  swung  from  a  branch  of  the  tree  to  that  of  the 
next,  and  soon  disappeared  over  the  edge  of  the  cliff. 

"  Well  then,"  declared  Norris,  "if  he's  tame,  he's  either  got 
loose  in  town  and  wandered  a  long  way  off,  or  there  are  other 
people  beside  ourselves  about  here." 

No  one  had  anything  to  add  to  Norris'  observations,  and 
we  continued  our  return  journey,  little  thinking  that  we  were 
destined  to  see  that  monkey  again. 

We  presently  came  to  where  descent  was  possible;  and 
when  the  brook  finally  came  in  our  way,  I  found  much  interest 
in  the  spot  where  the  waters  flowed  into  the  hole  in  the  rocks. 

"  It  seems  a  queer  freak,"  I  told  Norris,  "that  it  should 
make  its  way  through  the  hill  like  that." 

"  It  isn't  the  first  time  I  have  seen  nature  doing  such 
stunts,"  he  returned.  "I  guess  volcanic  action  has  had  most 
to  do  with  it." 


CHAPTER  XXII 

THE   ISLE    IN    CROW   BAY 

WE  had  barely  got  ourselves  back  to  where  Ray  and  Robert 
lay  awaiting  us,  when  night  came.  They  had  everything  ready 
for  the  cooking  of  a  meal,  so  that  our  bearish  appetites  had 
not  long  to  suffer. 

Our  nonsuccess  did  not  sit  heavily  on  us,  and  it  was  with 
some  cheer  we  gathered  round  the  fire,  that  was  made  in  the 
midst  of  the  underbrush,  far  enough  from  the  stream  to  be 
invisible  from  any  part  of  Duran's  trail.  Robert  remained  over 
there  alone  on  watch. 

"  Now,  I'll  tell  you,"  said  Ray,  addressing  Grant  Norris, 
"if  you're  going  to  find  that  gold  mine,  you'll  just  have  to  rig 
up  a  balloon,  and  fly  all  over  these  mountains  —  like  I  did 
in  my  dream." 

"  Well,"  returned  Norris,  plucking  the  bones  from  his  fish, 
"I'm  thinking  there'll  be  no  lack  of  gas  for  it  while  you're 
awake.  When  you're  not  awake  —  well,  you'll  dream  enough 
hot  air  to — " 

"  Just  what  I  was  going  to  say,"  broke  in  Ray.  "It  delights 
me  to  see  you've  come  round  to  my  dream  idea.  You're  awake 
at  last.  Not  that  you're  to  blame  for  having  golden  dreams; 
even  I,  in  my  younger  days — " 

"Not  on  your  life!"  interrupted  Norris,  "I — " 

"  Even  Wayne,  here,  has  dreams,"  continued  Ray.  "He 

181 


182  THE  VOODOO   GOLD   TRAIL 

follows  that  nightmare,  Duran,  and  suddenly  he  vanishes  into 
nothing  —  all  dreams." 

"Not  on  your  life!"  declared  Norris,  taking  Ray  half  in 
earnest.  ''There's  gold  somewhere  in  that  creek  we  were  on 
today,  and  I'll  show  you  before  we  get  through  with  it." 

"Maybe  Duran  has  already  cleaned  it  out,"  I  suggested. 

"Don't  you  believe  it!"  said  the  optimistic  Norris.  "He 
hasn't  got  away  with  it  at  any  rate,  or  what  is  he  doing  back 
here?" 

We  crawled  under  our  mosquito  bars  early,  leaving  Ray 
on  watch  by  the  stream.  I  fell  asleep  to  the  music  of  the 
little  cascade,  whose  continual  plash  kept  from  my  ears  the 
harassing  song  of  the  mosquitoes,  who  with  voodoo  thirst 
sought  flaws  in  my  citadel. 

I  was  awakened  at  last  by  an  insistent  hand  on  my  shoulder 
and  Robert's  voice  in  my  ear. 

"  I  think  Duran  or  somebody  just  went  by,"  he  said. 

He  had  detected  a  sound  of  plashing  in  the  water,  like 
someone  wading,  though  he  heard  it  imperfectly,  confused  as 
as  it  was  with  the  noise  of  the  little  waterfall.  He  had  peered 
hard  into  that  inky  darkness,  and  it  seemed  to  him  that  a 
shape  crept  along  the  bank  of  the  creek. 

We  aroused  the  others,  who  began  at  once  to  gather  our 
traps  together,  while  Robert  and  I,  with  utmost  caution, 
sought  the  path,  and  with  more  or  less  difficulty  followed  its 
course  toward  the  bay. 

It  was  about  two  o'clock  when  we  started,  and  when  we 
came  to  the  inlet,  there  showed  in  the  east  signs  of  the  moon 
coming,  topping  the  horizon.  That  was  half-past-three;  so  that 
we  were  an  hour  and  a  half  covering  those  three  or  four  miles. 


THE  ISLE  IN  CROW  BAY  183 

I  crept  to  the  spot  where  we  had  seen  Duran's  canoe  con- 
cealed in  the  tall  grass. 

"It's  gone!"  I  told  Robert.   "Let's  hurry  the  others." 

A  few  hundred  yards  back  Robert  came  upon  them.  And 
now  not  a  minute  was  lost  in  setting  our  little  boat  in  the 
water.  The  moon  lay  a  timid  light  on  the  bay  by  the  time  we 
had  come  out  of  the  inlet. 

"There!"  cried  Robert,  pointing  to  the  east. 

Barely  a  half  mile  away  we  made  out  an  object  on  the 
water. 

"  He's  going  down  the  bay,"  I  observed,  "not  across  to  the 
Twin  Hills." 

"  Well,  let's  keep  him  in  sight,"  said  Norris,  "now  that  we've 
got  our  peepers  on  him  at  last." 

"  He'll  see  us  if  we  go  too  fast,"  cautioned  Robert. 

A  camouflage  for  our  boat  was  suggested.  So  we  hurried  to 
the  shore,  and  six  pairs  of  hands  quickly  harvested  an  abun- 
dance of  reeds  and  grasses.  With  this  we  wove  a  screen,  as  for 
duck-stalking.  And  with  the  shore  for  a  background,  it  would 
have  taken  a  sharper  eye  than  a  human's  to  distinguish  us. 
Fortunately,  the  moon,  being  but  a  thin,  fading  crescent,  gave 
a  rather  imperfect  light. 

Now  we  moved  at  a  swift  pace  down  the  shore,  Norris  and 
Marat  at  the  oars.  And  so  we  gained  on  Duran,  who  was  out 
nearer  the  middle  of  the  bay,  little  thinking  that  his  plans 
were  gaun  agley,  with  his  enemies  hanging  on  his  tail  in  spite 
of  all  his  devices. 

Nearly  every  eye  was  on  that  canoe  and  its  paddler,  and 
barely  a  word  spoken  till  we  had  navigated  almost  a  mile  of 
the  bay. 


184  THE  VOODOO   GOLD  TRAIL 

"Now  where  is  that  skunk  making  for,  I  wonder?"  said 
Norris,  resting  on  his  oar  and  peering  through  the  screen. 

"  He  go  to  the  island,  there,  I  theenk,"  offered  Jean 
Marat. 

"  Yes,"  added  Carlos.   "He  go  right  for  thee  island." 

I  had  noted  the  island  when  we  were  on  the  cliffs.  It  was 
triangular,  and  on  Marat's  chart  it  measured  a  half  mile  in 
its  greatest  dimension. 

"  What's  on  it?"  queried  Norris,  again  resuming  his  rowing. 

Carlos  said  he  had  been  there  many  years  ago,  and  then 
there  were  palms  and  brush,  and  in  the  midst,  a  hut  and 
garden. 

"  There!    He's  going  to  land,"  spoke  Robert. 

Captain  Marat  trained  his  glasses  on  the  island,  now  barely 
more  than  a  half  mile  away. 

"  Yes,"  he  said,  "he  land.  He  is  on  thee  shore  now,  an'  he 
pull  out  thee  canoe,  I  theenk." 

We  set  our  boat  in  toward  the  south  shore  of  the  bay  and 
here  we  found  the  mouth  of  a  stream.  A  few  rods  up  this 
creek  we  made  our  landing,  and  in  a  little  we  had  got  boat 
and  all  out  of  the  water  and  into  a  sheltered  place  under  the 
palms,  for  day  would  soon  be  breaking. 

"You're  the  darndest  bunch!"  said  Ray,  rubbing  his  eyes. 
"You'd  think  I  hadn't  paid  for  my  lodging." 

He  had  fallen  asleep  in  the  boat,  and  didn't  awaken  till 
Norris  had  almost  rolled  him  out  into  the  water. 

"  It's  that  cannibal-priest-voodoo-skunk  again  I  suppose," 
continued  Ray.  "Where  have  you  got  him  now?" 

"  We've  got  him  cornered,  surrounded  on  Crusoe's  island," 
returned  Norris. 


THE  ISLE  IN  CROW  BAY  185 

"  Surrounded,"  sniffed  Ray,  "like  a  gay  porpoise,  with  water. 
And  I'll  bet  when  you  catch  him,  you'll  find  he's  only  Crusoe's 
man,  Friday." 

This  suggestion,  although  made  in  sport,  startled  us.  Per- 
haps after  all,  the  occupant  of  the  canoe  had  not  been  Duran. 
It  might  have  been  only  one  of  his  numerous  blacks,  one  more 
in  his  confidence  than  any  of  those  on  his  schooner. 

When  day  came,  and  that  was  but  an  hour  after  our  landing, 
I  began  anxiously  to  scan  that  island  through  Marat's  glasses. 
It  was  not  long  till  I  saw  a  rowboat  put  off  from  the  island 
and  move  toward  the  south  shore  far  down  the  bay.  Unmis- 
takably, it  was  a  black  in  the  boat,  and  alone,  apparently,  and 
his  bulk  was  much  too  portly  for  the  figure  of  Duran.  And 
before  the  morning  was  half  gone  another  figure  appeared, 
coming  out  of  the  palms  on  the  island.  And  my  heart  thumped 
with  excitement  as  I  strained  my  eyes  at  the  glasses. 

The  figure  (black  of  face)  stood  on  the  shore,  looking  out 
across  the  bay  to  the  west.  Was  it  Duran?  I  asked  myself. 
Surely  the  form  was  not  unlike  his,  but  there  were  many  real 
blacks  in  his  employ  who,  at  that  distance  would  have  looked 
much  the  same. 

And  then  occurred  a  thing  that  settled  the  matter,  and  I 
thrilled  all  over.  The  man's  hand  went  up  to  the  side  of  his 
head,  and  the  fingers  toyed  with  the  ear  in  that  characteristic 
manner  of  Duran's,  when  he  was  in  deep  thought.  There  could 
be  no  doubt,  I  saw  the  hand  moving  up  and  down  with  the 
stroking.  It  was  Duran! 

I  turned  to  my  friends  and  gave  them  my  news. 

"Well,  anyway,"  pouted  Ray,  "his  man  Friday  was  there; 
he  went  off  in  a  boat." 


186  THE  VOODOO  GOLD  TRAIL 

"  And  now,  what  do  you  suppose  he's  doing  on  that  island 
then?"  asked  Norris. 

"  He's  burying  his  gold,  of  course,"  said  Ray. 

"  Or  maybe  he's  just  after  provisions,"  I  suggested. 

"  And  he  sent  that  old  fellow  in  the  boat  on  his  errands," 
offered  Robert. 

Carlos,  appealed  to,  avowed  that  this  explanation  was  not 
unlikely,  since  there  was  a  bit  of  a  hamlet  far  down  the  bay. 

When  the  hot  tropic  sun  had  mounted  to  the  zenith,  Norris' 
restlessness  seemed  to  be  approaching  a  climax.  It  was  with 
some  difficulty  we  dissuaded  him  from  a  notion  that  had  taken 
him,  to  make  a  trip  back  into  the  hills  in  search  of  that  golden 
creek  of  his.  And  it  was  then  there  came  a  wet  squall  out  of 
the  west  that  drove  us  under  the  shelter  of  our  over-turned 
boat  till  it  went  by.  The  monotony  of  that  wait,  too,  was  a 
bit  relieved  by  the  return  to  the  island  of  that  boat  that  had 
gone  down  the  bay  in  the  morning. 

Before  dark  came  I  got  Jean  Marat  aside  and  communicated 
to  him  an  idea  that  had  grown  in  my  head  that  afternoon. 

"  Captain  Marat,"  I  began,  "it  is  going  to  be  very  dark 
nearly  all  of  tonight,  and  it  will  be  hard  to  see,  at  that  dis- 
tance, when  Duran  leaves  the  island  —  if  he  does." 

"  Yes,"  returned  Marat,  "I  have  think  of  that." 

"  Well,"  I  continued,  "even  in  the  dark  it  won't  be  safe  to 
row  over  to  the  island.  Duran  might  happen  to  be  on  the 
shore  and  so  see  us." 

"  Yes,  jus'  so,"  agreed  Marat. 

"  I  want  to  swim  over,"  I  said.  "It's  only  half  a  mile." 

"Ah!"  said  Jean  Marat.  "Thad  might  be.  Yes  — yes." 
(He  pondered  the  thing.)  "Yes,  I  swim  too,  with  you." 


THE  ISLE  IN  CROW  BAY  187 

It  was  the  very  thing  I  had  in  mind,  this  idea  of  his  accom- 
panying me,  though  I  hesitated  to  include  him  in  my  sug- 
gestion. 

"  And  then,"  Marat  continued,  "maybe  we  hear  some 
theengs  thad  will  help  us." 

Here,  too,  was  some  of  my  thought,  remembering  that  night 
when  he  and  I  had  rowed  over  to  the  Orion,  in  the  harbor,  and 
heard  Duran  say  things  that  had  enlightened  us  very  much. 
Though  some  of  the  things  he  had  said  had  not  been  at  all 
clear,  else  Ray  and  I  had  been  spared  that  period  of  captivity. 

We  were  not  long  in  giving  our  plan  to  the  others.  Norris, 
eager  for  activity,  would  like  to  be  one  of  the  party,  but  he 
himself  found  objections  the  moment  his  wish  was  expressed. 

"  It  won't  do  to  have  too  many,"  he  said;  "and  then  I  can't 
understand  the  parley  voo  like  Captain  Marat." 

"  Besides,"  put  in  Ray,  "there'd  be  an  awful  hulaboloo 
among  the  fish.  They'd  think  it  was  a  — "  Norris  had  him  in 
his  grasp.  " — A  mermaid,"  finished  Ray. 

We  did  not  wait  long  after  night  had  settled  over  the  bay. 
Jean  Marat  and  I  kicked  off  our  clothes  and,  entering  the 
water,  headed  for  the  island.  It  was  chalked  out  that  the  others 
should  hold  everything  in  readiness,  and  if  they  should  hear 
a  signal,  they  would  immediately  row  out  and  pick  us  up,  to 
take  up  the  trail  of  Duran  again. 

It  was  no  great  feat  to  swim  that  half  mile  of  smooth  water. 
And  then  it  was  with  great  caution  that  we  crawled  across 
that  island  beach.  I  must  have  been  a  curious  spectacle  for 
Jean  Marat  —  black  of  face  and  arms  and  feet,  the  rest  of 
me  all  white.  The  curly  wig,  of  course,  I  had  left  with  my 
clothing. 


188  THE  VOODOO   GOLD  TRAIL 

We  passed  in  among  the  cocoanut  palms,  traversed  a  belt 
of  hammock,  and  came  to  a  piece  of  clearing.  A  light  shone 
from  a  window  of  the  hut.  There  were  some  bushes  near  the 
wall;  these  we  got  amongst. 

Keeping  our  faces  in  the  shadow,  we  contrived  to  look  in. 
And  it  was  somewhat  a  startling  spectacle  presented  to  us 
there.  Duran's  features  —  though  stained  like  myself  and 
Robert  —  were  not  so  hard  to  distinguish  in  the  light  of  the 
lamp.  There  was  but  one  other  occupant,  a  negro,  old  and 
portly  of  body.  Duran's  head  bore  a  red  kerchief,  wound 
turban-wise,  and  his  body  was  clad  in  a  red  robe  —  much  like 
I  had  seen  him  wearing  that  night  in  the  forest.  He  stood  by 
the  table,  and  in  his  hands  he  clutched  a  fowl,  just  beheaded, 
for  the  blood  was  running  from  the  raw  stump  of  the  neck  into 
a  bowl. 

When  the  dripping  had  almost  ceased,  Duran  gave  the 
chicken  into  the  hands  of  the  negro,  who  laid  it  aside.  And 
then  Duran  poured  rum  from  a  jug  into  cups,  and  mixed  in 
blood  from  the  bowl;  and  now  the  two  drank.  And  there 
showed  that  horrid,  excited  hankering  of  an  old  toper,  in 
Duran's  face  when  he  brought  the  cup  to  his  lips.  Whether 
it  was  the  rum  he  craved,  or  the  blood,  or  the  combination,  or 
if  he  was  really  taken  with  a  religious  fanaticism,  I  have  never 
been  able  to  fathom.  But  that  his  emotion  was  real  I  could 
have  no  doubt. 

A  number  of  drinks  round,  and  the  black  set  himself  to 
plucking  the  feathers  from  the  fowl;  and  then  it  was  not  long 
till  he  had  the  bird  in  a  kettle  on  the  stove.  Duran,  after  a 
time,  inclined  his  head  to  a  little  box  on  the  table,  and  pres- 
ently it  occurred  to  me  that  they  must  have  the  voodoo  snake 


THE  ISLE  IN  CROW  BAY  189 

there  as  well.  It  was  evidently  a  voodoo  ceremony  they  were 
enacting,  and  I  knew  it  could  not  be  complete  —  if  bonafide 
—  without  the  snake. 

Through  it  all,  there  was  more  or  less  talk  between  those 
two,  and  to  that  Marat  was  giving  his  ear.  At  times  he  moved 
over  and  put  his  head  to  the  boards,  the  better  to  hear. 

When  at  last  the  fowl  was  cooked,  those  two  feasted  on  it, 
and  ate  little  else.  And  then,  in  time,  they  dropped  off  to 
sleep;  the  portly  negro  seeking  the  floor,  Duran  slumbering  in 
his  chair,  head  and  arms  on  the  table. 

Captain  Marat  and  I  now  seated  ourselves  on  the  ground, 
a  little  away  from  that  window  to  wait  while  those  two  within 
should  sleep  off  their  debauch.  Marat  told  me  something  of 
the  talk  of  Duran  and  the  other.  But  there  was  nothing  of 
new  interest  in  it,  since  it  referred  almost  solely  to  matters  on 
which  they  were  then  engaged.  Duran,  however,  had  found 
occasion  to  descant  on  a  purpose  he  professed  he  had,  to  be- 
stow great  riches  on  the  black,  how  he  would  be  required  to 
remain  faithful  to  Duran's  service  but  a  few  days  more,  and 
he  should  be  literally  over-burdened  with  the  gold  that  should 
be  his. 

Maybe  two  hours  of  waiting  had  passed,  with  occasional 
peeps  in  at  that  window,  when  Duran  raised  himself  from  his 
slumbers.  He  forthwith  aroused  the  black,  and  divesting  him- 
self of  the  red  gown,  he  addressed  himself  to  the  negro,  who 
began  putting  together  certain  parcels  of  supplies  in  a  pack. 
Duran  took  up  a  paddle,  and  the  two  moved  out  of  the  door, 
talking  as  they  went. 

Captain  Marat  and  I  crouched  in  the  shadows,  till  they  had 
gone  toward  the  beach.  Then  we  followed,  moving  from  bush 


190  THE  VOODOO  GOLD  TRAIL 

to  bush.  And  we  saw  Duran  embark  in  his  canoe,  going  back 
the  way  he  had  come  the  night  before. 

So  soon  as  the  black  had  moved  toward  the  hut,  Marat  and 
I  entered  the  water  and  started  for  the  shore  of  the  mainland, 
where  our  friends  awaited  us.  When  we  deemed  it  safe,  I  gave 
the  whistle  signal,  and  our  friends  came  off  in  the  boat  and 
took  us  in. 

"  Thee  Orion  weel  be  here  in  thees  bay  before  a  week  is 
gone,"  said  Captain  Marat.  "Duran  expect  then  to  sail  away, 
pay  off  hees  crew,  an'  come  back  with  new  crew  who  know 
nothing  about  thee  gold.  And  then  he  will  take  on  gold  cargo. 
And  then  for  Europe.  He  tell  that  black  man  he  take  him 
with,  and  he  will  make  him  ver'  rich." 

"  But  he  didn't  tell  that  black  where  he  was  going  to  get 
his  gold  cargo?"  ventured  Ray. 

Marat  said  no  to  that.  But  Duran  had  promised  the  negro 
that  he  should  go  with  him,  in  two  boats,  and  they  two  should 
transport  all  the  gold  aboard  the  vessel;  and  the  new  crew 
were  to  be  told  that  it  was  all  specimens  of  coral  and  other 
stones,  for  a  museum  in  Europe.  "And  so,"  Marat  continued, 
"Duran  tell  him  if  any  strangers  come  round,  he  must  not 
know  anyone  by  name  Duran,  or  Mordaunt,  or  anyone  like 
that.  And  Duran  tell  him,  too,  thad  when  the  Orion  come,  if 
anyone  on  the  schooner  come  to  the  little  island,  he  tell  them 
Duran  gives  order  thad  no  one  of  them  is  allowed  on  thee 
island;  they  must  stay  on  the  schooner." 

"  And  why,"  began  Norris,  "do  you  suppose  he  don't  want 
his  own  sailors  on  that  little  island?" 

"  Ask  Wayne,"  said  Ray. 

"Now,  Mr.  Norris,"  I  said,  "you're  just  wanting  to  hear 


THE  ISLE  IN  CROW  BAY  191 

somebody  echo  the  thought  that's  in  your  mind.  Suppose  you 
tell  us  what  it  is." 

"Well,"  said  Norris,  "Ray  said  it  last  night.  He's  been 
burying  some  of  the  gold  on  the  isle.  And  now  he's  afraid 
that  if  his  men  set  their  feet  on  the  place,  they'll  get  to  looking 
for  it." 

"  That's  the  way  with  people,"  said  Ray.  "If  they  hide 
something,  they  suspect  that  everybody  that  comes  around  can 
smell  it." 

"  Ease  on  your  oars,"  Marat  admonished. 

Norris  and  Robert  were  rowing.  Intent  on  our  discussion, 
they  had  forgotten  caution,  and  were  sending  the  boat  forward 
at  a  rate.  The  night  was  quite  dark  in  spite  of  the  stars,  and 
we  might  easily  drive  ourselves  within  hearing  of  Duran  with- 
out realizing  it.  The  night  breeze  rippled  the  bay,  so  that  the 
canoe  on  the  surface  would  not  be  visible  till  one  should  be 
almost  on  it. 

"  It's  a  mighty  good  thing,"  observed  Robert,  "that  he 
doesn't  make  his  trips  in  daylight.  He  couldn't  help  seeing 
that  a  good  many  besides  himself  have  been  tramping  on 
that  trail." 

"  He'd  think  a  whole  army  was  after  him,"  said  Ray. 

When  at  last  we  came  to  the  inlet,  it  was  with  some  diffi- 
culty we  found  our  way,  so  dark  was  it.  It  was  Carlos  who 
at  last  made  out  Duran's  canoe,  amongst  the  reeds. 

"  Well,  he's  got  a  good  deal  the  start  of  us,"  said  Norris, 
when  at  last  we  had  got  our  boat  in  hiding  and  were  ready  for 
the  trail. 

"  Perhaps  it's  just  as  well  we're  not  too  close,"  I  offered, 
falling  in  behind  Carlos,  to  whom  we  gave  the  lead. 


192  THE  VOODOO  GOLD   TRAIL 

"  You  don't  believe  he'd  give  us  another  chase  in  the 
schooner?"  queried  Robert. 

"  No,"  I  admitted,  "but  he  might  pick  a  new  trail,  and  throw 
us  clear  off  again." 

Single  file,  we  moved  forward.  We  were  soon  in  the  wood, 
where  night  birds  and  insects  gave  us  their  music.  Out  again 
in  the  glade;  again  into  the  forest.  And  at  last,  we  came  to 
where  the  trail  dipped  into  the  stream. 

There  was  nothing  to  do  but  remake  our  camp  in  the  old 
place,  a  little  way  to  the  west  of  the  creek.  There  came  renewed 
conjectures  seeking  solution  of  this  mystery. 

"  Well,  you'll  find  out  my  balloon  is  the  only  explanation," 
bantered  Ray.  "He  carries  one  in  his  vest  pocket,  all  neatly 
folded;  he  takes  it  out,  blows  it  full  of  voodoo  rum  stuff,  and 
—  whiff  —  up  he  goes." 

"  Maybe  there's  some  one  of  those  lianas  hanging  from  the 
trees  that  he  swings  out  of  the  water  on,"  offered  Robert. 

"That's  so!"  cried  Norris.  "A  fellow  might  swing  a  big 
long  jump  that  way  without  touching  his  foot  to  the  ground. 
I'm  going  to  have  another  good  look  there  first  thing  in  the 
morning." 

Captain  Marat  had  been  taking  stock  of  our  supply  of  food. 

"  Someone  have  to  go  for  more  provision,  if  we  stay  much 
longer,"  he  said.  "We  have  hardly  enough  for  one  day." 

So  that  after  some  hours  of  sleep  Robert  and  Marat  set  off 
to  return  to  the  Pearl  for  fresh  supplies.  They  planned  to  row 
across  the  end  of  Crow  Bay  before  day  should  come,  for  there 
was  no  certainty  that  Duran's  black  on  the  isle  might  not  have 
an  eye  out.  It  would  not  do  to  risk  another  daylight  crossing. 

Day  had  no  sooner  shot  its  earliest  rays  into  the  recessses  of 


THE  ISLE  IN  CROW  BAY  193 

our  forest,  than  Norris  was  over  to  the  creek  investigating  the 
big  vines  that  hung  like  so  many  ropes  from  the  branches 
above.  He  finally  came  back  to  his  breakfast,  his  face  giving 
no  signs  of  success. 

"  Never  mind,  Norris,"  said  Ray.  "If  you're  going  to  make 
that  Duran  out  a  monkey,  you  can  hardly  expect  to  find  tracks 
—  monkeys  don't  leave  any." 

"  Well,  anyway,"  insisted  Norris,  "that's  the  way  he  went, 
and  we'll  find  that  gold  mine  up  on  my  creek  —  see  if  we 
don't." 

For  some  unaccountable  reason,  I  was  not  any  more  im- 
pressed by  Norris'  conclusions  than  by  Ray's  playful  expli- 
cations, and  I  was  taken  with  a  desire  to  be  alone  with  the 
problem.  So  I  urged  the  others  to  go  and  explore  Norris'  creek, 
and  I  would  remain  on  watch  at  this  place  of  Duran's  strange 
disappearance. 

When  the  three  had  gone,  moving  eastward  along  the  foot 
of  that  towering  stone  wall,  I  began  where  the  water  came 
tumbling  out  of  that  hole  in  the  cliff,  and  carefully  examined 
the  banks  of  the  creek  again,  up  and  down,  for  half  a  mile  or 
so.  I  reasoned  that  if  he  waded  into  the  stream  he  must  cer- 
tainly have  waded  out  of  it  again.  Unless,  as  Norris  had  con- 
jectured, he  had  swung  himself  over  the  bank  by  the  means 
of  some  liana.  I  therefore  imitated  Norris  and  searched  both 
sides  for  evidence  of  any  such  means;  and  with  a  negative 
result.  Nowhere,  so  far  as  the  forest  followed  the  stream,  was 
there  a  loose  liana  near  the  bank  on  either  side. 

And  then  it  came  to  me  that  perhaps  Duran  had  gone  into 
the  water  at  the  end  of  the  path,  only  to  retrace  his  steps  and 
leave  the  path  some  way  on  the  back  trail,  thus  to  deceive  any 


194  THE  VOODOO   GOLD  TRAIL 

who  should  chance  to  come  so  far  on  his  track.  And  so  I  scru- 
tinized every  foot  of  the  path  back  to  the  edge  of  the  forest, 
and  some  way  across  the  glade.  I  even  went  off  the  trail,  and 
fought  my  way  through  the  growth  as  I  went  back,  paralleling 
the  path,  and  looking  for  signs. 

But  I  got  back  to  the  creek  bank  and  the  music  of  the  little 
cascade,  no  nearer  the  solution  than  when  I  had  started.  Hours 
had  been  consumed  in  my  search.  It  must  have  been  past  ten 
when  I  squatted  on  the  stream's  bank,  looking  into  the  clear 
water,  puzzling  over  this  thing. 

A  beam  of  sun  shone  down  through  the  water  and  illumined 
the  creek's  bottom.  A  round  bit  of  rock  or  coral  lay  there, 
almost  white  in  that  liquid  light.  For  a  long  time  I  stared 
on  that  spot,  as  if  the  solution  were  to  be  found  there.  I  never 
before  had  felt  so  baffled. 

And  then  I  was  startled!  I  could  no  longer  see  that  stone 
—  nor  any  part  of  the  creek's  bed.  The  water  had  in  that 
moment  become  turbid.  Something  had  muddied  it.  I  leaped 
to  my  feet  and  hurried  up  to  the  fountain  in  the  cliff.  The 
water  was  coming  out  of  the  rock  in  that  muddied  condition. 
Now  what  could  it  all  mean?  I  asked  myself.  And  I  set  my 
wits  to  the  thing  as  I  continued  to  stare  at  the  phenomenon. 
Presently  the  water  cleared  a  bit.  And  then  in  a  little  it  came 
as  muddy  as  ever  again. 


CHAPTER  XXIII 

WHAT    THE    WATER    HID 

MY  thoughts  flew.  In  a  moment  more  I  thrilled  with  an 
idea.  Then  I  dashed  into  the  water  and  got  myself  up  to  the 
little  waterfall,  made,  as  I  have  said,  by  a  portion  of  the  water 
coming  round  a  rock  and  flowing  over  the  edge  of  a  flat  shelf 
of  rock. 

I  tried  to  look  through  that  thin  veil  of  liquid,  failing  which, 
I  braved  a  shower  and  put  my  head  through.  In  another  mo- 
ment I  had  my  whole  body  behind  that  little  cascade.  I 
crouched,  sputtering,  under  the  rocky  shelf.  Then  for  eight  or 
ten  feet  I  crawled  forward  in  the  darkness.  Directly,  the  pas- 
sage made  a  little  turn  to  the  right,  and  the  ground  under  my 
hands  sloped  upward.  It  may  have  been  fifty  feet,  it  may 
have  been  a  hundred  and  fifty  feet,  that  I  had  penetrated  that 
cliff  —  my  excitement  had  taken  no  measure  of  the  distance 
—  when  I  found  that  I  could  no  longer  feel  the  wall  on  either 
side.  I  was  in  a  cavern  of  unknown  dimensions. 

I  could  hear  the  rushing  of  water,  below  and  to  my  left.  A 
feeling  of  exultation  filled  me  almost  to  bursting;  I  had  at  last 
discovered  Duran's  secret.  I  came  to  a  stop,  fearing  to  lose 
my  exit.  How  I  wished  for  my  flashlight!  I  had  come  away 
leaving  it  aboard  the  Pearl. 

I  do  not  know  how  long  I  had  tarried  in  that  spot,  when  a 
beam  of  light  struck  down  from  above  on  my  right.  And  then 

195 


196  THE  VOODOO   GOLD  TRAIL 

came  sounds  of  some  being  up  there,  and  the  light  approached. 

I  retreated  into  the  narrow  passage  by  which  I  had  come, 
ready  to  scramble  out  if  there  should  be  need.  But  soon  the 
slant  of  the  light  beams  showed  me  that  the  lamp  had  passed 
to  the  left,  and  I  ventured  forward  again,  and  peeked  around 
a  projection  of  rock. 

There  was  Duran's  blackened  face  in  the  light  of  a  lantern, 
which  he  was  in  the  act  of  hanging  on  some  form  of  hook  in 
the  cavern  wall.  The  vault,  I  saw,  was  high,  and  at  least  fifty 
feet  wide.  It  was  down  near  the  water  that  Duran  was;  and 
I  saw  him  stoop  and  put  his  hand  into  the  stream;  and  he 
fished  out  some  sort  of  packet  which  he  laid  on  the  cavern 
floor.  Time  after  time  he  reached  down  into  the  rushing  water, 
and  took  out  a  packet  each  dive,  till  he  had  a  pile  on  the  floor 
that  would  measure  a  peck. 

At  last  Duran  sat  himself  on  the  cavern's  floor,  and  he  busied 
himself  with  untying  knots  and  separating  the  objects  he  dealt 
with  in  two  piles.  And  next  he  rose  to  his  feet  and  set  to 
transporting  one  of  his  piles  to  some  niche  that  was  out  of  the 
field  of  my  eye. 

Duran's  next  procedure  was  to  gather  the  other  pile  into  a 
sack.  And  this  he  took  in  hand  and  forthwith  began  to  move 
back  toward  my  part  of  the  cavern. 

I  wormed  my  way  down  in  my  passage  again,  and  when  I 
had  got  a  little  way  from  the  cascade,  I  waited  and  listened. 
But  he  must  have  gone  back  the  way  he  had  come.  I  ventured 
in  again. 

When  I  poked  my  head  out  of  the  passage  into  the  cavern, 
there  was  no  sign  of  Duran.  But  the  lantern  still  hung  where 
he  had  fixed  it,  throwing  its  light  about  that  space. 


WHAT  THE  WATER  HID  197 

I  now  ventured  down  to  the  scene  of  Duran's  labors.  There, 
completely  spanning  the  stream,  and  reaching  down  to  its  bed, 
was  a  network  of  some  sort  of  tough  fibre,  reinforced  with 
slender  bamboo.  Near  at  hand,  in  a  niche,  lay,  in  a  pile  near  a 
foot  high,  short  sections  of  bamboo  as  thick  as  my  arm.  I  took 
up  one  in  my  hand.  Even  prepared  as  I  was  for  the  discovery, 
its  weight  nevertheless  startled  me;  it  might  have  been  solid 
brass. 

"  At  last  this  smells  of  the  gold  mine!"  I  thought  to  myself. 
He  would  hardly  miss  one  of  these.  And  after  hefting  in  my 
hand  a  half-dozen  more,  to  satisfy  myself  that  all  were 
loaded,  I  retained  that  first  bamboo  cylinder  and  hurried  to 
my  exit. 

As  I  passed  out  on  all  fours  through  that  little  waterfall,  I 
got  a  fresh  drenching.  I  waded  on  down  the  stream,  and  pres- 
ently I  heard  a  voice.  It  was  Ray's;  and  he  was  over  in  our 
little  camp. 

It  came  into  my  mind  to  even  up  for  some  of  the  tricks  Ray 
had  played  me.  So  I  trilled  out  a  low  whistle,  and  when  1 
heard  them  coming,  I  ducked  myself  in  the  creek.  I  held  my 
breath  for  as  long  a  space  as  I  could  manage,  and  then  rose 
out  of  the  water  and  made  for  the  path,  pretending  not  to 
see  those  petrified  forms  pedestaled  on  the  creek  bank.  I  went 
up  the  path  and  moved  toward  the  camp,  and  when  they  hur- 
ried forward — "Hello!"  I  said.  "Are  you  folks  back  already?" 

"Say,  now!"  began  Ray.  "What  in  Sam  Hill!  Are  you 
playing  alligator,  or  mermaid,  or  — " 

"  Playing!"  I  said.  "I've  had  no  time  for  play."  With  one 
hand  I  was  nursing  the  heavy  cylinder  that  I  now  carried 
under  my  shirt. 


198  THE  VOODOO  GOLD  TRAIL 

"  And  what  have  you  been  doing?"  demanded  Norris,  eyes 
big  with  perplexity. 

And  Carlos  appeared  no  less  mystified. 

"  I've  been  visiting  the  gold  mine,"  I  said  simply. 

Even  Ray  could  not  resist  a  look  over  to  that  spot  in  the 
stream  where  I  had  appeared  to  them  out  of  the  water. 

"  I  thought  I  heard  you  whistle,"  he  said. 

"  Dreaming  some  more,"  I  suggested. 

Norris  got  a  long  stick  and  began  poking  in  the  bottom  of 
of  the  creek. 

"  Oh,  not  that  way,"  I  told  him.  "You  have  to  say  'Open 
Sesame.' " 

"Now  look  here,  open  up!"  pressed  Norris,  dropping  his 
pole. 

"All  right,"  I  returned.  And  I  produced  the  cylinder  of 
bamboo. 

"Well  111—1"  began  Norris,  hefting  the  thing.  "Say, 
there's  sure  something  heavy  hi  that  thing.  Where'd  you — ?" 
And  again  his  eyes  turned  quizzically  toward  the  water. 

"  You  know  what  I  told  you  this  morning,"  broke  in  Ray, 
taking  the  section  of  bamboo  in  his  turn  of  scrutiny. 

"  Yes,"  assented  Norris,  "you  said  Wayne  would  have  it  all 
figured  out  —  what  became  of  Duran  —  by  the  time  we  came 
back.  And  that's  one  reason  why  I  was  ready  to  come  back 
as  soon  as  I  found  those  two  little  colors." 

And  Norris  showed  me  two  little  flakes  of  gold  he'd  washed 
out  of  the  black  sand  in  the  creek-bed. 

"  But  open  up  now,  Wayne,"  he  continued.  "Tell  us." 

"  Well  you  see,"  I  began,  "you,  Norris,  would  have  it  that 
Duran  had  gone  through  the  woods  by  the  lianas;  and  you, 


WHAT  THE  WATER  HID  199 

Ray,  insisted  on  it  that  he  went  through  the  air.  Now  none 
of  us  had  thought  of  his  going  through  the  water — " 

Instinctively  we  all  looked  into  the  creek,  and  there  I  dis- 
covered that  the  water  had  gone  muddy  again. 

"Look  there,  see  that!"  I  pointed.  "You  know  how  clear 
that  water  has  always  been.  And  now  see  how  riled  it  is." 

They  looked  intently  as  if  expecting  to  see  Duran  appear 
out  of  the  stream  as  I  had  seemed  to  do. 

"Aw,  say  now,  what  are  you  giving  us?"  said  Ray. 

Norris  and  Carlos  were  already  moving  up  toward  the  spot 
where  the  water  poured  out  of  the  cliff.  But  before  they  were 
half  the  way,  the  stream  cleared  again. 

And  then  I  went  on  to  tell  them  how  I  had  discovered  the 
hole  behind  the  little  cascade.  And  they  were  open-mouthed 
till  I  had  completed  my  narration  of  Duran 's  activities  in  that 
cavern  in  the  cliff. 

"  Well  now,  and  to  think  — "  began  Norris.  "Anyway  that 
proves  that  the  gold  mine  is  on  a  continuation  of  the  creek 
where  I  found  the  colors.  That  creek  goes  into  the  rocks  up 
there  and  comes  out  into  some  kind  of  a  basin,  and  then  goes 
into  the  cliffs  again  and  comes  out  here,  like  a  train  going 
through  two  tunnels." 

"  Brava!"  cried  Ray.  "Now  you  ought  to  have  told  us  that 
yesterday,  and  saved  all  that  trouble." 

Norris  had  to  penetrate  the  little  cascade  and  see  the  begin- 
ning of  the  passage  into  the  cliff.  When  he  came  out,  it  was 
decided  to  wait  for  night  and  the  coming  of  Captain  Marat 
and  Robert,  with  the  lantern,  before  going  into  the  cavern. 
For,  since  Duran  was  working  by  day  he  would  doubtless  sleep 
at  night. 


200  THE  VOODOO   GOLD  TRAIL 

"  Well,"  said  Ray,  when  we  got  to  the  camp.  "I  want  to 
see  what  makes  that  thing  so  heavy." 

The  cylinder  of  bamboo  was  plugged  at  the  one  end  with  a 
section  of  wood,  the  edges  being  sealed  with  raw  pitch.  We 
heated  the  thing  at  the  fire,  and  then  pried  out  the  plug  of 
wood. 

"  Hooray  1"  cried  Norris  and  Ray  together,  as  I  poured  the 
contents  into  a  tin. 

There  was  fine  dust  of  gold  mixed  with  many  small  nuggets. 

"  How  many  of  those  things  did  you  say  you  saw  in  there?" 
asked  Ray. 

"  I  didn't  count  them,"  I  returned.  But  I  showed  with  my 
hands  the  dimensions  of  that  space  that  was  filled  with  them. 

"  And  that's  only  the  beginning,"  said  Norris.  "Say,  Carlos, 
we've  found  your  gold  mine,"  he  continued,  seizing  that  black 
by  the  shoulder. 

"  Yes,  we  find  him  now,"  grinned  Carlos.  "Maybe  I  find 
where  my  father  buried."  And  his  face  went  serious  again 
with  the  sadness  I  saw  there,  something  that  was  doubtless 
hatred  of  Duran,  his  father's  murderer,  showed  too.  And  I 
wondered  —  and  conjectured  —  what  was  in  Carlos'  mind, 
and  shuddered. 

Marat  and  Robert  came  at  last,  in  the  dark,  and  they  mar- 
velled at  the  tale  of  success  we  had  to  tell  them. 

"  But,  Bob,"  said  Ray,  in  the  midst  of  the  tale,  "to  think 
that  Wayne  would  play  a  trick  like  that  on  me!  — who  nursed 
him  through  measles,  mumps,  chicken  pox,  cholera  morbus, 
and  a  stubbed  toe,  and  even  fed  him  up,  dozens  of  times,  on 
all-day  suckers!  — to  pop  out  of  the  water  like  that,  and  bow, 
and  tell  me  he  had  been  playing  Jonah,  and  that  the  whale 


WHAT  THE  WATER  HID  201 

had  just  stopped  behind  to  wipe  his  feet  on  the  mat  and  would 
be  in  directly." 

Everything,  Captain  Marat  told  us,  was  going  well  on  the 
Pearl;  and  Julian,  good  lad,  was  content  to  wait  indefinitely, 
while  we  searched  for  the  mine. 

Fortunately,  Robert  and  Marat  had  brought  the  lantern, 
and  Robert  had  thought  to  bring  along  the  electric  flashlights; 
and  most  of  us  were  supplied  with  matches,  protected  from  the 
damp  in  tightly  corked  vials.  We  were  soon  at  the  little  cas- 
cade, and  crawling,  one  after  the  other,  pushed  through  the 
curtain  of  water. 

"  I  say,"  began  Ray,  sputtering,  "I  feel  fit  to  enter  the 
holy  temple  now." 

The  lantern  was  set  alight,  and  I  led  the  way  up  into  the 
interior  of  the  cliff.  My  comrades  feasted  their  eyes  on  the 
accumulation  of  gold-laden  bamboo  cylinders;  and  then  they 
must  investigate  that  net  in  the  stream. 

"  Now  I'll  say  that's  a  clever  stunt  that  skunk  played  here," 
declared  Norris.  "Instead  of  toting  that  gold  around  some 
difficult  path,  he  makes  the  creek  carry  it  straight  down  here 
near  the  outlet.  And  he  ties  pieces  of  some  buoyant  stuff  to 
each  of  the  cylinders  to  make  it  float." 

"  Here's  what  he  used,"  said  Robert,  who  had  picked  up  a 
small  block  of  cork  that  he  thrust  into  the  lantern  light. 

"  Sure,  that's  it,"  said  Norris,  taking  it  into  his  fingers.  "He 
got  his  cork  out  of  a  life-belt,  and  he  makes  his  little  cork 
bricks  do  duty  time  after  time.  There's  no  telling  how  much 
gold  they've  floated  down  here." 

"  And  what  do  you  suppose  he  does  with  it  when  he  takes 
it  out  of  here?"  asked  Ray. 


202  THE  VOODOO   GOLD  TRAIL 

"  He  take  eet  to  thad  little  islan'  down  in  Crow  Bay," 
offered  Captain  Marat. 

"  He's  planning  to  take  over  there  all  that  he's  got  mined," 
added  Robert,  looking  to  me  for  confirmation  of  his  surmise. 

"  Yes,"  I  assented.  "And  then  he'll  likely  clear  out,  and 
keep  away  from  this  region  till  we've  all  had  time  to  forget 
him,  and  the  coast  is  clear  again." 

"  That's  it,"  agreed  Norris.  "But  now  we're  on  his  trail 
again,  let's  see  the  place  it  leads  to."  And  he  turned  up  that 
incline,  within  the  cavern,  down  which  I  had  seen  Duran  come 
during  the  day. 

The  climb  was  rather  arduous,  as  the  ascent  was  somewhat 
sudden,  though  it  was  smooth  going  under  foot.  We  went 
single  file,  all  following  Norris,  who  was  in  the  van,  carrying 
the  lantern. 

When  we  had  climbed  to  a  height  of  perhaps  a  hundred  feet, 
we  came  to  an  exit  of  the  cavern.  We  could  hear  the  rustling 
of  the  leaves  of  trees  in  the  night  breeze,  and  stars  showed 
above.  The  path  continued  on  up,  apparently  on  a  ledge;  and 
we  must  finally  have  attained  a  height  of  three  hundred  feet, 
when  something  like  a  plateau  presented  to  the  left.  We  took 
the  path  of  least  resistance,  picking  our  way  carefully  among 
rocks  and  scattered  growth  of  trees.  There  was  but  the  one 
way  sufficiently  free  of  obstacles,  and  on  this  road  we  moved 
without  hitch  or  hindrance,  till  we  finally  brought  up  sharp 
at  the  edge  of  a  precipice.  Further  progress  appeared  impos- 
sible, wanting  wings,  or  some  mechanical  means  of  descent.  It 
was  a  black  abyss  of  unknown  dimensions  that  lay  at  our  feet. 

"  It's  down  yonder  somewhere  we'll  find  our  gold  mine," 
said  Grant  Norris.  "And  how  to  get  down,  that's  — " 


WHAT  THE  WATER  HID  203 

"  It's  no  trick  to  get  down,"  interrupted  Ray,  "but  I'm 
thinking  you'll  be  all  out  of  the  notion  for  the  gold  mine  when 
you  land  there." 

My  mind  full  of  the  notion  to  discover  a  stone  stairway, 
or  some  other  medium  for  descent  used  by  Duran,  I  moved 
to  the  right,  where  a  clump  of  cedars  showed,  outlined  against 
the  starry  sky.  It  was  here  my  spirit  of  enterprise  nearly  cost 
me  my  life,  and  did  deprive  me  of  the  use  of  my  limb  and  the 
companionship  of  my  comrades  for  the  span  of  a  day.  I  got 
in  among  the  cedars,  and  threw  a  gleam  from  my  flashlight 
about  the  ground,  an  impulse  prompting  me  to  risk  the  chance 
that  it  might  be  seen  by  Duran  somewhere  below. 

In  that  flash  of  light  my  eyes  got  on  a  small  rope,  hanging 
from  the  limbs  above  me,  the  other  end  gone  somewhere  down 
the  cliff  below.  I  got  my  hand  on  the  rope  and  gave  a  gentle 
pull.  It  was  fast  above.  I  made  a  bolder  pull.  It  gave  several 
feet;  and  that  unexpected  and  sudden  release  lost  me  my 
balance,  and  I  toppled  off  the  brow  of  the  precipice,  clutching 
the  rope  for  dear  life.  Wildly  I  sought  to  wind  a  leg  about  the 
rope,  for  it  burned  and  tore  my  fingers  beyond  endurance.  I 
must  have  fallen  forty  or  fifty  feet,  when  I  struck  a  bit  of  a 
ledge;  but  my  fall  was  broken  by  brush  and  vines,  and  it  was 
these  vines  saved  my  life,  for  they  held  me  in  some  of  their 
tangle  till  I  finally  brought  up  with  a  thump  at  the  bottom. 

I  was  a  good  deal  shocked,  but  strange  though  it  seems, 
throughout  that  fall  I  had  not  experienced  a  moment's  fear 
for  my  life.  There  was  a  sharp  ache  in  my  right  ankle.  I 
wiggled  my  toes,  and  satisfied  myself  that  there  were  no  bones 
broken,  but  a  step  or  two  convinced  me  I  was  to  be  a  lame 
brother  for  a  greater  or  less  period. 


CHAPTER  XXIV 

IN   THE   HIDDEN   VALE-A   NEW   ACQUAINTANCE 

WITH  crawling,  I  managed  to  get  myself  away  from  the 
foot  of  the  cliff  a  piece,  and  I  found  I  was  in  a  space  of  open 
ground.  And  I  then  began  to  think  how  I  was  to  publish  my 
predicament  to  my  friends  on  the  top  of  the  cliff,  some  hun- 
dred, or  perhaps  two  hundred  feet  above.  I  felt  in  my  pocket 
for  my  flash-lamp,  and  it  gave  me  much  comfort,  on  pushing 
the  slide,  to  discover  that  it  had  not  been  put  out  of  com- 
mission by  the  fall. 

At  once  I  began  to  send  flash  after  flash  up  there.  Almost 
directly,  I  saw  answering  flashes  aloft.  And  then  I  spelled 
out,  in  code,  a  brief  story  of  my  adventure;  and  I  asked  that 
they  throw  me  some  grub,  and  then  to  stay  away  till  the 
next  night,  when  they  were  to  return  for  news  of  some  route 
by  which  they  might  join  me. 

I  waited  perhaps  three-quarters  of  an  hour,  when  a  flash 
of  light  showed  above.  I  answered  with  my  light.  And  thus 
came  Ray's  signal.  "Here  it  comes,"  it  said.  And  then  in  a 
little,  something  umbrella-like  appeared,  gently  oscillating  be- 
tween me  and  the  stars;  in  the  next  moment  quietly  collapsing 
on  the  ground,  near  by.  I  took  it  up;  it  was  a  parachute,  made 
of  four  handkerchiefs  hastily  sewed  together.  To  the  strings 
was  made  fast  a  packet  of  provisions;  biscuit,  cheese,  and  a 

204  '- 


IN  THE  HIDDEN  VALE  205 

cloth  bag  holding  a  mess  of  codfish  cooked  with  vegetables. 
And  there  was  a  note  from  Ray.   I  read: 

"  That  was  a  smelly  trick  —  to  ditch  us  like 
that.  If  you  only  knew  what  a  nasty  time  of  it 
we've  been  having  to  keep  Norris  from  sliding 
down  there  after  you!  He  said  if  you  could  do 
it  he  could,  and  so  on.  Now  don't  go  poking 
your  nose  in  any  alligator's  private  affairs.  And 
wire  us  soon,  and  give  us  all  the  news  of  that 
hades,  down  there." 

It  always  irked  Grant  Norris  to  know  that  anyone  was 
before  him  in  any  adventure,  and  I  began  to  fear  that  in  his 
impetuosity  he  might  make  a  try  for  a  descent,  in  which  event 
he  hadn't  one  chance  in  ten  to  come  off  with  as  little  damage 
as  I  suffered.  So  I  signalled,  then,  to  make  no  move  toward 
seeking  a  way  down  till  I  gave  the  word,  and  I  gave  a  terse 
hint  of  the  great  danger  in  such  an  attempt. 

It  was  a  matter  of  course  that  my  friends  would  keep  some- 
one on  watch  up  there;  and  it  would  be  Ray  and  Robert,  turn 
about;  for  they  two,  only,  knew  the  code  sufficiently  well  to 
take  my  signals. 

I  now  took  up  the  packet  of  grub  they'd  thrown  down  to 
me,  and  began  to  crawl  farther  from  the  cliff.  I  thus  came 
into  a  wood,  and  it  was  with  great  labor,  and  great  stabs  of 
pain  in  my  foot,  that  I  traversed  some  hundreds  of  yards  of 
the  forest,  at  last  to  come  upon  the  bank  of  the  rivulet.  It 
could  be  no  other  than  that  stream  that  tumbled  through  the 
cavern  to  gush  out  of  the  rock  to  make  the  little  cascade. 

Soon  now  I  was  bathing  my  swelling  foot  in  the  cool  water, 
and  I  did  not  take  it  out  for  above  an  hour,  and  then  I  bound 


206  THE  VOODOO   GOLD   TRAIL 

the  ankle  with  Ray's  parachute;  and  I  sat  me  beside  the  creek, 
my  back  to  a  palm,  feeling  less  discomfort,  and  so  was  able  to 
give  clearer  thought  to  our  situation.  There  was,  of  course, 
not  the  least  doubt  that  this  sink  I  had  fallen  into,  was  that 
secret  retreat  of  Duran,  we'd  been  searching  for,  and  the 
source  of  all  his  wealth.  It  was  the  very  place  discovered  by 
Carlos'  father,  who  in  an  evil  hour  had  communicated  his  find 
to  the  perfidious  Duran.  I  was  equally  convinced  that  this 
hidden  vale  was  hedged  in  on  the  sides,  and  closed  at  the  ends, 
by  sheer  cliffs;  and  that  that  rope  which  had  both  entrapped 
me  and  then  helped  to  save  me  in  my  fall,  was  some  part  of 
Duran's  means  of  ascent  and  descent.  It  should  now  be  my 
first  aim  to  discover  the  other  component  parts  and  the  work- 
ings of  that  mechanism,  to  the  end  that  I  might  put  my  friends 
in  a  safe  way  to  join  me. 

To  accomplish  this  it  was  only  necessary  that  I  have  an  eye 
on  the  place  when  Duran  should  find  it  in  his  way  to  go  out 
of  the  place  in  daylight.  And  that  was  a  thing  he  was  alto- 
gether likely  to  do,  if  he  were  to  have  more  business  in  the 
grotto. 

My  ankle  was  so  much  eased  that  I  could  have  slept  were  it 
not  for  the  myriad  mosquitoes  that  attacked  me,  the  while 
dinning  their  horrid  song  in  my  ear.  As  it  was  I  got  an  occa- 
sional short  snatch  of  rest  with  dozing  till  a  dozen  or  more 
wee  living  stilettos  got  home  in  my  flesh,  and  brought  me 
awake  and  set  me  to  thrashing  about  with  my  palm-fan  again. 
And  once  or  twice  I  jumped  awake  with  a  queer  notion  in  my 
consciousness,  and  that  was  that  one  or  more  of  those  mos- 
quitoes had  learned  to  crow  like  a  cock,  for  I  seemed  to  have 
heard  such  music  while  my  head  nodded. 


IN  THE  HIDDEN  VALE  207 

I  was  glad  when  the  dawn  broke  and  sent  the  greater  part 
of  my  pests  back  to  their  lairs  once  more.  I  made  a  meal  out 
of  the  packet  of  grub,  getting  my  drink  from  the  creek.  And 
then  I  searched  about  in  the  wood,  till  I  found  a  stick  having 
a  crotch  to  fit  under  my  arm;  and  so  I  made  me  a  wooden 
leg  for  my  lame  side.  I  hobbled  over  to  the  edge  of  the  bit  of 
forest,  where  I  could  command  that  place  where  I  had  suffered 
my  fall. 

I  gazed  to  the  cliff  top  and  waved,  hoping  to  attract  any 
of  my  friends  who  should  be  on  watch.  But  no  living  sign 
showed  there.  And  then,  finally,  I  set  myself  to  watching  for 
signs  of  the  enemy. 

It  was  a  tedious  wait,  though  one  not  so  very  long.  Less 
than  two  hours  had  passed  when  I  saw  a  figure  come  out  of 
the  brush  back  up  the  vale  a  piece.  Though  he  was  black  of 
face,  I  saw  it  was  Duran.  I  concealed  myself  more  carefully 
in  the  undergrowth  and  watched  his  approach. 

When  he  came  opposite  me,  less  than  fifty  yards  away,  I 
saw  he  carried  a  pack.  It  was  doubtless  no  more  nor  less  than 
another  freight  of  the  gold  in  bamboo.  He  passed  on  down  the 
vale,  looking  neither  to  right  nor  left,  never  dreaming  that  any 
enemy  eyes  could  win  to  a  near  view  of  any  part  of  his  retreat. 
As  he  disappeared,  presently,  round  a  portion  of  the  wood,  I 
had  also  a  very  good  guess  as  to  what  was  to  be  his  employ- 
ment down  there,  and  had  I  had  full  use  of  both  my  nether 
limbs,  I  should  have  followed  and  witnessed  his  manoeuvres. 
As  it  was  I  must  content  myself  with  picturing  him  in  my 
mind's  eye,  at  setting  afloat  in  the  little  stream  one  richly- 
laden  bamboo  section  after  the  other,  and  I  could  see  them 
bobbing  at  the  surface,  as  they  moved  in  line  to  a  hole  in  the 


208  THE  VOODOO   GOLD  TRAIL 

rocky  wall,  and  at  last  find  lodgment  against  the  reed  net 
within  the  cavern. 

My  heart  danced  with  anticipation,  as  I  crouched  there  in 
the  edge  of  the  wood,  awaiting  the  next  scene  of  Duran's 
performance.  And  this,  too,  I  knew  as  well  as  if  I  held  a 
printed  "synopsis"  in  my  hand. 

It  was  not  without  some  tremor  of  apprehension,  too,  that 
I  at  last  beheld  the  figure  of  Duran  appear  again  on  the  back 
trail,  for  I  was  not  at  all  sure  that  I  had  not  left  some  traces 
of  that  violent  entry  of  mine  into  this  sunken  pasture.  And 
sure  enough,  when  he  arrived  at  the  place,  he  came  to  a  stand, 
and  gazed  on  the  torn  vines  and  the  rocky  debris  that  had 
accompanied  me  down  that  cliff-side.  His  hand  went  up  to  his 
ear  in  that  characteristic  manner  of  his.  And  my  breath  came 
hard,  in  the  more  than  half  dread  that  he  should  discover  my 
trail  leading  here  to  the  wood. 

It  was  the  accident  to  my  ankle  that  saved  me,  for  having 
crawled  away  on  hands  and  knees,  I  had  left  no  tell-tale  prints 
of  shoes  in  the  sod.  He  must  have  concluded  that  it  was  a  bit 
of  landslide  had  disturbed  the  growth,  for  he  turned  from  his 
inspection  finally  with  an  air  of  unconcern. 

Duran  moved  over  to  the  left  a  piece,  and  then  began  to 
mount  the  cliff-side  on  a  gently  sloping  ledge,  which  came  to 
an  end  among  the  vines  I  had  so  violently  disarranged.  Here 
he  got  his  hand  on  that  little  rope  by  which  I  had  made  a 
portion  of  my  descent.  For  some  time  he  carried  on  a  species 
of  struggle  with  the  line.  (Doubtless  I  had  disarranged  that 
thing  too.)  But  at  last  things  seemed  to  have  come  right;  he 
began  to  pay  out  the  line;  and  then  I  could  see  something 
unfold  and  drop  down  the  cliff-side,  which  turned  out  to  be 


IN  THE  HIDDEN  VALE  209 

some  form  of  rope  ladder.  As  I  afterward  learned,  his  halliard 
worked  through  a  pulley  bent  on  a  limb  of  those  cedars  aloft, 
and  was  strung  in  and  out  among  the  rounds  of  the  ladder,  to 
be  tied  to  the  bottom  round.  When  he  was  abroad,  rope 
ladder,  halliard  and  all  was  stowed  up  there;  when  he  was 
home  in  this  hidden  vale,  the  ladder  was  pulled  aloft,  and  the 
halliard  made  fast  in  hiding  among  the  vines.  The  reason  for 
this  latter  precaution  I  was  yet  to  learn. 

Directly,  Duran  was  climbing  above  by  his  ladder,  and  then 
I  saw  his  form  disappear  amongst  those  cedars  on  the  cliff-top. 
And  now  he  was  gone  to  the  cavern  in  the  cliff  to  recover,  and 
stow  away,  that  new  lading  of  gold.  I  caught  myself  wonder- 
ing now  what  might  be  the  employment  of  my  friends,  whether 
any  of  them  might  be  in  any  part  of  Duran's  path.  And  I 
hoped  that  they  would  be  very  careful  not  to  allow  him  sight 
of  them;  for  we  were  not  yet  ready  to  give  him  warning  that 
we  were  so  close  on  his  trail.  It  was  not  merely  to  discover 
the  concealed  mine  that  we  were  putting  ourselves  to  so  much 
trouble,  and  danger  as  well,  but  we  had  a  mind  to  unearth  so 
much  as  might  be  possible  of  the  golden  product,  which  for 
so  many  years  had  been  niched,  piecemeal,  from  that  deposit 
that  belonged,  by  miner's  right  of  discovery,  to  the  Brill  family. 
To  give  Duran  notice  of  our  presence  would  manifestly  but 
serve  to  place  obstacles  in  our  way. 

Five  minutes  after  Duran  had  passed  out  of  view,  I  hobbled 
on  my  crutch  out  a  little  into  the  open  again,  once  more  hoping 
to  attract  any  one  of  my  crowd  who  might  be  stationed  up 
there  on  the  cliff.  And  sure  enough,  I  saw  the  head  and  hand 
of  someone  —  it  must  be  either  Robert  or  Ray. 

I  forthwith  began  with  my  signalling.    The  facility  shown 


210  THE  VOODOO   GOLD   TRAIL 

in  the  responses,  convinced  me  that  it  was  Ray  I  conversed 
with.  I  told  him  of  the  rope  ladder  and  the  manner  of  its 
disposition,  as  near  as  I  had  been  able  to  judge.  Then  I  hinted 
the  importance  of  some  of  our  party  following  Duran,  if  he 
should  go  off  with  a  burden  of  treasure  this  coming  night.  I 
ended  the  exchange  with  a  caution  to  get  back  in  hiding  against 
the  return  of  Duran,  and  discovery. 

I  crawled  back  into  the  cover  of  the  wood  again.  When 
Duran  finally  came  and  had  got  down  to  the  ledge,  and  with 
his  hands  on  the  halliard  was  hauling  the  ladder  up  to  its 
nest  in  the  firs,  I  saw  the  figure  of  Ray  up  there,  doubtless 
watching  the  working  of  the  rope  mechanism.  Duran  went 
down  that  piece  of  sloping  ledge,  and  marched  off  up  the  vale, 
the  way  he  had  come  when  I  first  set  eyes  on  him  that 
morning. 

It  was  well  past  noon  when  he  made  his  appearance  again, 
and  passed  on  down  the  vale  with  another  burden  on  his  back. 
He  made  a  second  trip  with  a  second  load  before  climbing  up 
the  cliff  on  his  ladder.  And  I  had  another  few  words  in  code 
with  Ray,  while  Duran  was  gone  to  the  grotto. 

For  that  day,  it  was  the  last  journeying  of  Duran  over  that 
route,  for  when  at  last  he  went  up  the  vale  again,  no  more 
was  seen  of  him  in  daylight.  I  hobbled  along  after,  in  time, 
keeping  within  the  edge  of  the  wood  which  flanked  the  stream. 
I  had  got  myself  some  two  hundred  yards  on  the  way,  when 
the  ground  rose  to  accommodate  a  ridge  of  rock  that  went 
all  the  way  across  the  vale,  from  the  sheer  and  beetling  crags 
of  one  side  to  those  of  the  other.  The  stream  broke,  tumbling 
partly  through,  and  partly  over  this  ridge;  and  the  country 
above  was  a  bit  more  elevated  than  that  part  of  this  out  of 


IN  THE  HIDDEN  VALE  211 

the  world  region  with  which  I  had  already  made  some  little 
acquaintance.  The  growth  consisted  of  palms,  live  oaks,  tree 
ferns,  and  other  plants,  tropical,  for  which  I  had  no  name. 

I  found  an  elevated  situation  on  the  ridge  that  gave  me  a 
fair  view  of  this  sunken  region  into  which  I  had  tumbled  so 
unceremoniously  the  night  before.  Less  than  two  miles  above, 
showed  the  wall  of  cliff  that  closed  the  vale  at  its  upper  end. 
The  forest  growth  hid  from  view  any  habitation  or  any  other 
works  of  man  that  might  be  between. 

Though  a  path  marked  the  way  Duran  had  gone,  I  durst 
not  tread  that  road  lest  I  unexpectedly  meet  up  with  him 
somewhere  on  its  windings  through  the  growth.  The  sun  had 
been  some  time  past  the  zenith  when  I  took  some  more  food, 
and  then  made  a  hurried  trip  to  the  stream  for  a  drink;  this, 
before  taking  up  a  position  within  some  screening  brush, 
whence  I  could  command  that  path.  I  looked  for  Duran  at 
the  earliest,  some  time  after  dark.  But  I  had  learned  to  be 
prepared  to  expect  the  unexpected,  as  Ray  would  have  put  it. 
And  it  was  well  I  did  so. 

I  was  almost  dead  for  sleep,  and  it  was  a  wonder  I  did  not 
drop  off  completely.  But  I  contrived  to  doze  in  cat-naps,  with 
one  eye  open,  as  it  were,  till  a  short  time  before  dusk,  when 
I  was  startled  erect  by  a  footfall  on  a  rocky  bit  of  the  path; 
and  there  came  Duran,  bearing  a  short  gun  slung  on  his  back. 
And  directly  he  had  passed  me,  I  picked  up  my  crutch  and 
started  after.  I  watched  him  climb  by  his  ladder,  and  saw  him 
haul  it  up  after  him,  and  he  brought  up  the  halliard  as  well. 
So  that  now  I  knew  I  was  indeed  a  prisoner  in  that  hidden  dell, 
till  someone  should  let  down  that  ladder  again. 

The  way  was  now  clear,  I  felt,  for  a  free  investigation  of 


212  THE  VOODOO  GOLD   TRAIL 

that  region  at  the  end  of  the  path.  And  I  must  hurry  if  I  was 
to  go  far  befqre  night  should  throw  its  black  mantle  over  the 
scene;  time  enough  to  summon  the  others  later. 

So  back  I  went,  boldly,  over  the  ridge.  I  moved  as  rapidly 
as  my  impromptu  crutch  and  one  good  leg  would  carry  me, 
till  I  passed  round  a  turn  of  the  path,  and  all  but  collided  with 
a  queer  figure  of  a  man.  He  plumped  down  on  his  knees  and 
began  to  beg  mercy. 

"  Oh,  sor!  Don't  kill  me,  sor!  I  wasn't  hafter  spyin'  on  ye, 
sor!  I  was  only  afraid  ye'd  forget  to  bring  me  the  morphine, 
sor!  I—" 

The  creature  opened  his  eyes,  which  had  gone  closed,  likely 
in  anticipation  of  the  dreaded  gunshot,  that  for  some  reason 
was  now  due  to  put  a  short  stop  to  his  miserable  existence. 
He  had  taken  me  for  Duran,  it  was  plain,  and  the  opening  of 
his  bleared  eyes  had  shown  him  his  mistake.  Undersized,  thin- 
lipped,  and  apparently  toothless,  was  this  slight  specimen  of 
a  being;  and  his  mouth,  eyes,  head,  shoulders,  and  limbs 
twitched  and  jerked  in  abominable  fashion.  Indeed  he  fairly 
danced  on  the  ground  like  those  jigging  toys  that  are  set  going 
by  winding  a  bit  of  clock-work.  I  afterwards  learned  that  it 
was  only  at  times  of  great  emotion  that  this  extreme  agitation 
of  all  the  muscles  on  his  slight  bones  were  set  in  motion;  but 
there  was  scarce  a  minute  of  the  day  that  he  was  not  at  some 
form  of  grimace  or  contortion. 

Taking  courage  of  this  being's  evident  fear,  I  demanded, 
"Who  are  you?" 

"  My  nyme  is  Handy  Awkins,"  he  replied.  By  which  I  came 
to  know  he  meant  —  "Andy  Hawkins." 

"  I  don't  know  'ow  you  came  'ere,"  he  said,  the  contortions 


IN  THE  HIDDEN  VALE  213 

of  his  body  quieting  considerably,  "but  I  sye,  ye  won't  tell 
the  boss  ye  sawr  me  down  'ere?" 

"  On  condition  you  won't  tell  'the  boss'  you  saw  me  any- 
where, I  won't  tell  him  I  saw  you  down  here,"  I  bargained. 

His  writhings  now  were  those  of  joy.  And  he  tried  to  set 
into  a  smile  that  slit  of  a  mouth  of  his. 

"  Yer  'and  on  it!"  he  cried.  "We're  on  the  syme  side  o' 
the  fence,  ain't  we?  An'  we'll  be  great  Bobs  together,  you  an' 
I,  if  ever  we  get  out  o'  this  'ell  of  a  'ole  —  I  don't  care  if  you 
are  a  nigger.  Eh  Tommy?  —  I'll  tell  ye,  I'm  the  only  white 
man  in  this  'ere  part  o'  the  world,  that  I  am,  'ceptin'  the 
boss,  and  — "  here  he  whispered  the  news  —  "  'ee's  only 
painted  black,  to  fool  the  likes  o'  you." 


CHAPTER  XXV 

WE    CONSORT   WITH   A  PICKPOCKET 

I  WAS  not  slow  to  perceive  that  this  Andy  Hawkins  was, 
in  some  manner,  an  unwilling  slave  of  Duran;  and  as  such, 
might  prove  a  more  or  less  valuable  ally  to  my  party.  With- 
out giving  him  more  information  than  that  my  party  was  a 
strong  one,  I  got  out  of  him  something  of  his  story.  It  seemed 
that  something  near  two  years  back  he  had  fallen  in  with 
Duran  in  one  of  the  British  islands. 

"  The  police  hofficers  in  that  town,"  said  Hawkins,  "were 
'aving  a  sharp  eye  on  me.  Some  gents  'ad  missed  their  purses, 
ye  see."  And  Hawkins  winked  slyly.  "I  was  runnin'  short  o' 
the  blunt,"  (he  meant  money)  "and  I  was  gettin'  a  little  of 
the  rhino  out  of  some  o'  Munseer  Duran's  niggers  by  way  o' 
the  three-shell  game,  when  sudden  along  comes  Munseer  Duran 
and  hoffers  to  turn  me  over  to  the  police.  But  'ee  ends  by 
taking  me  on  for  a  job  on  'is  ship. 

"  Then  the  next  day  I  was  to  go  on  board  his  ship,  and 
'ee  sends  one  o'  his  sailors  to  me  in  town.  I  'as  all  my  worl'ly 
goods  I  could  hide  distributed  about  under  my  clothes  —  I 
'ad  to  leave  my  portmanty,  bein'  as  'ow  I  was  owin'  my  land- 
lord a  pretty  penny,  an'  I  was  takin'  French  leave. 

"  Well,  this  nigger  sailor  showed  me  a  man  an'  a  kid  walkin' 
down  the  street,  an'  said  for  me  to  follow  them  down  that 

214 


WE  CONSORT  WITH  A  PICKPOCKET         215 

way  an'  I  would  come  up  with  Duran  an'  the  rest  o'  the  bunch, 
an'  be  taken  on  the  ship.  So  I  follers  the  man  an'  kid,  and 
they  goes  into  the  park  by  the  edge  o'  the  town. 

"  They  goes  out  o'  sight  behind  the  bushes.  And  then  next 
I  know  I  'ears  a  yell;  and  next,  I  see  Duran  an'  some  o'  his 
niggers,  an'  'ee  'ands  one  a  long  knife,  and  I  see  one  nigger 
'olding  the  kid.  And  Duran  tells  me  to  run  for  my  life  with 
the  niggers.  An'  so  we  dodge  into  the  woods  out  o'  town.  And 
we  don't  stop  for  ten  mile,  an'  I'm  almost  dead,  an'  then  that's 
in  some  thick  bush  near  the  water.  And  at  night  a  boat  comes 
ashore  after  us  —  kid  and  all. 

"  When  we  gets  on  the  ship  the  boss  is  in  the  cabin.  And 
'ee  shows  me  a  printed  bill  that  offers  one  thousand  pounds 
for  the  capture  of  a  man  known  as  Handy  'Awkins,  wanted 
for  the  murder  of  a  respected  citizen  and  the  kidnappin'  o' 
a  child. 

"  When  I  read  that  bill  my  knees  just  let  me  down  to  the 
deck.  I  see  'ow  it  was;  Duran  knifes  the  man,  steals  the  kid, 
and  'as  me  to  run;  and  'ee  stays  be'ind  to  'elp  put  the  blyme 
on  me.  And  I  'ave  never  done  no  worse  than  to  snitch  a  purse 
now  an'  then,  when  I  was  'ard  up;  an'  I  never  'urt  anyone  in 
my  life." 

Although  I  experienced  disgust  for  this  ill-favored  being, 
who  was  telling  me  his  hard  luck  tale,  I  felt  some  sense  of  pity 
as  well;  and  above  all,  I  could  have  gloried  in  the  spectacle 
of  that  inexplicable  fiend,  Duran,  being  slowly  tortured  — 
drawn  limb  from  limb.  And  I  fairly  ground  my  teeth  as  I 
thought  again  of  how  I  had  seen  him  mixing  with  clean  folk, 
and  his  blood-stained  hands  touching  the  fingers  of  mothers 
and  daughters. 


216  THE  VOODOO  GOLD  TRAIL 

"  'Ee  took  me  ashore  one  night,"  continued  Hawkins,  "and 
'ee  tied  a  rag  on  my  eyes,  an'  led  me  through  bushes  an'  water, 
an'  let  me  down  by  ropes.  And  'ee  set  me  to  work  with  a 
nigger  at  the  minin';  an'  many's  the  time  'ee  'as  laid  the  lash 
on  me.  An'  w'en  he  see  I  'ad  no  strength  to  work  without  the 
drug  'ee  brought  me  some.  An'  there's  times,  if  I  'adn't  'id 
some  away,  I  know  I'd  die;  for  'ee'd  forget  sometimes  to  bring 
the  dope.  Oh,  I  tell  ye  it's  hall  as  keeps  me  alive!" 

And  with  a  sudden  movement  he  produced  something  he 
held  between  his  fingers,  and  which  he  threw  into  his  mouth. 
He'd  got  the  vile  habit,  he  told  me,  one  time  when  he  was  in 
hiding  among  some  Chinese. 

"  Oh,  it's  been  'ell  'ere,"  continued  Hawkins,  "when  the 
boss  'as  been  away  a  long  time,  an'  the  dope  'as  all  run  out. 
Oh,  I  'ave  run  round  this  'ell  'ole,  and  tried  to  climb  the  rocks, 
and  tore  my  'ands;  and  once  I  like  to  broke  my  neck  in  a  fall." 

He  told  me  that  when  Duran  was  away  the  only  other  in- 
habitant was  a  black,  called  Limbo.  Hawkins  said  that  it 
must  be  he  was  named  for  the  place  he  lived  in.  The  two  were 
engaged  in  the  gold-digging;  and  even  when  Duran  was  gone, 
the  black  kept  spurring  him  at  the  work.  For  when  the  "boss" 
came  back,  and  there  wasn't  a  showing  to  please  him,  Hawkins 
said  there  was  "  'ell  to  pay." 

"  But  I  sye,  pard,"  he  went  on,  giving  me  a  poke  in  the 
side,  "Hi'm  slick,  Hi  am;  an'  when  your  friends  gets  us  out  o' 
this,  an'  the  boss  is  gone,  you  an'  me'll  come  back,  and  I'll 
show  you  enough  o'  the  yeller  stuff,  'id  syfe  awye,  to  keep  us 
in  dope,  and  drinks,  an'  livin'  'igh  all  our  d'ys." 

Night  had  turned  the  place  into  a  dark  pit,  and  the  mos- 
quitoes were  abroad  on  their  nightly  foray.  I  struggled  to  my 


WE  CONSORT  WITH  A  PICKPOCKET         217 

feet,  and  got  my  crutch  under  my  arm,  telling  Hawkins  that 
my  friends  would  be  expecting  to  hear  from  me;  and  I  began 
to  hobble  back  down  the  dark  vale.  It  was  with  some  feeling 
of  disrelish  that  I  accepted  Hawkins'  shoulder,  to  assist  me 
in  steadying  myself  on  this  unwonted  leg.  Hawkins  hoped 
that  my  friends  were  as  high-class  niggers  as  myself.  "Leave 
me  alone  to  know  a  'igh-toned  nigger  when  I  sees  one,"  he 
said.  The  irregular  twitching  of  his  shoulder  proved  rather  a 
doubtful  support,  and  more  than  once  all  but  upset  me.  But 
he  certainly  made  my  progress  more  rapid. 

"  It  happens  my  friends  are  all  white,"  I  told  him,  "except 
one;  and  he's  less  than  half  black,  the  rest  of  him  being 
Indian." 

"  You  don't  sye!"  cried  Hawkins,  coming  to  a  sudden  stop. 
"I'll  be  very  'appy  to  meet  some  folks  of  my  own  degree  — 
meanin'  no  disrespect  to  you ;  you  ain't  just  a  common  nigger, 
you  know." 

I  disclaimed  any  disposition  to  take  umbrage  at  his  show  of 
preference  for  the  white  race;  and  we  continued  our  walk. 

When  we  arrived  opposite  Duran's  ladder,  I  detected  the 
rattle  of  stones  over  at  the  cliff  wall.  I  began  to  fear  that 
Duran  had  returned,  till  I  heard  low  voices,  and  then  I  got 
the  conviction  that  it  was  my  friends,  who  were  coming  down 
by  Duran's  rope  stairway.  I  hurried  over  close,  and  called  to 
them,  directing  them  down  the  inclined  ledge.  And  at  last 
Norris  and  Ray  stood  before  me. 

"  I  couldn't  keep  this  kid,  Norris,  back  any  longer,"  ex- 
plained Ray.  "I  had  to  tell  him  how  the  ladder  worked,  and  — " 

"Who's  your  friend,  Wayne?"  said  Norris. 

Hawkins,  who  had  held  back,  was  now  moving  forward. 


218  THE  VOODOO  GOLD  TRAIL 

"  This  is  Andrew  Hawkins/'  I  began.   "He  — " 

"  Yes,  gentlemen,  my  nyme  is  Handrew  'Awkins,"  inter- 
rupted that  individual.  "An'  right  proud  I  am  to  make  yer 
acquyntance,"  he  bowed;  "an7  to  bid  you  welcome  to  — to  — 
this  —  this  — " 

"  'Ell  'ole,"  I  prompted  him,  by  way  of  cutting  short  his 
disgusting  performance. 

"  Yes,  'ell  'ole,  right  you  are,  my  black  friend,  'ell  'ole.  And 
'aven't  I  'ad  reason  to  know,  bein'  'ere  this  two  years  or 
about?" 

Ray  and  Norris  were  leaning  forward  in  the  dark,  the  better 
to  see  this  grimacing,  dancing  being  that  accompanied  me. 

"  Well,  I  say  now,  if  this  ain't  a  bloomin'  countryman  of 
mine!"  broke  out  Grant  Norris,  seizing  Hawkins  by  the  hand, 
with  a  squeeze  that  caused  that  being  to  writhe  and  dance  on 
the  sod,  with  mingled  agony,  joy,  and  the  contortions  of  his 
infirmity.  When  at  last  Norris  turned  him  loose,  he  nursed 
his  crushed  hand,  saying  —  "Ow,  yes,  God  bless  Queen  Vic- 
toria and  all  others  in  authority." 

From  that  moment  the  little  pickpocket  deserted  me,  and 
fastened  himself  like  a  barnacle  to  the  big,  hulking,  patronizing 
Norris. 

"  What  kind  of  a  plaything  have  you  got  here?"  demanded 
Ray,  putting  his  hand  on  my  improvised  crutch. 

And  then  I  had  to  tell  all  the  story  of  my  descent  into  the 
sink.  And  Ray  told  how  he  and  Robert  were  put  to  it,  at  the 
watching  on  the  cliff  top,  to  keep  awake,  and  to  dodge  Duran 
on  his  trips  to  the  cave.  When  at  last  Duran  was  observed 
to  start  down  the  path  to  Crow  Bay,  Captain  Marat,  Robert, 
and  Carlos  followed,  leaving  Ray  and  Norris  to  wait  on  my 


WE  CONSORT  WITH  A  PICKPOCKET         219 

signals.  And  here  was  a  strange  circumstance;  Duran  had 
gone  off  empty-handed,  leaving  behind  in  the  grotto,  not  only 
that  stack  of  gold;  but  his  bag  and  pack  straps  he  left  on  the 
floor  there  as  well. 

"  I  guess,"  said  Ray,  "that  he  went  to  get  a  mule,  or  an  ass, 
or  something,  to  carry  it  for  him.  You  see  he  didn't  know 
about  Norris  being — " 

Ray  got  behind  me  for  protection,  and  cautioned  Norris  to 
be  careful  of  my  sore  foot. 

"  Come  on  now,"  said  Norris,  "we're  going  to  see  where 
Carlos'  gold  mine  is.  Lead  on  Brother  'Awkins."  And  with 
that  he  seized  me  under  the  shoulders  and  threw  me  on  his 
back. 

Hawkins,  like  a  little  dog  eager  for  the  chase,  trotted  on 
ahead,  twisting  his  shoulders,  and  bobbing  his  head  in  a  man- 
ner without  rhyme  or  reason.  Ray,  I  could  see,  had  curious 
interest  in  the  miserable  being's  antics;  and  I  knew  he  was 
priming  for  some  sort  of  explosion,  and  wondered  when  it  was 
to  come. 

When  we  had  crossed  the  ridge,  our  way  went  through  the 
wood,  and  I  had  to  keep  my  head  well  down  a  share  of  the 
time,  to  avoid  having  my  eyes  put  out  by  branches  that  over- 
hung the  trail.  And  then  at  last  we  came  upon  a  clearing  of 
some  extent,  in  which  stood  an  occasional  cabbage-palm,  left, 
it  might  be,  for  decorative  effect.  And  as  we  moved  forward, 
there  loomed  two  or  three  structures  of  undetermined  size  or 
contour. 

We  now  came  to  a  halt,  and  Norris  set  me  on  the  ground, 
and  the  four  of  us  got  our  heads  together  to  whisper. 

"  It  strikes  me,"  I  said,  "that  we're  a  little  too  precipitate. 


220  THE  VOODOO   GOLD  TRAIL 

Here's  this  black  fellow,  likely  snoozing  over  yonder  in  one  of 
those  shacks.  There's  no  one  here  to  talk  with  him  and  explain 
our  presence;  even  Hawkins,  here,  hasn't  in  two  years,  learned 
the  language  he  speaks.  Now,  if  he  sees  us,  who's  to  say  he 
won't  tell  Duran  about  us  when  he  returns.  And  we're  not 
yet  ready  to  try  conclusions  with  that  —  that  — " 

"  Polecat,  skunk,"  prompted  severally,  Ray  and  Norris,  in 
the  same  breath. 

"  So/'  I  continued,  "we'd  best  get  back  in  the  brush;  and 
depend  on  Hawkins  to  steer  the  black  boy  out  of  the  way  in 
the  morning,  till  we  have  seen  what  we  want  to  see.  And  then 
we'll  get  back  to  our  own  camp,  till  the  time's  ripe  for  our 
next  move." 

"  And  then  clubs  will  be  trumps,"  said  Grant  Norris. 

"Hear  — hear!"  said  Ray. 

We  were  led  by  Hawkins  to  a  sheltered  place,  and  he  soon 
had  brought  a  pair  of  mosquito-bars  from  the  shacks.  Pro- 
tected thus,  it  was  not  many  minutes  till  I  had  dropped  off. 
I  opened  my  eyes  once  during  that  night,  and  that  was  to  hear 
the  crowing  of  roosters  nearby.  They  were  no  doubt  the  same 
birds  whose  music  I  had  heard  faintly  the  previous  night  and 
confused  with  the  mosquitoes.  There  were  not  less  than  three 
cocks  out  there  vicing  with  one  another,  and  each  sang  out 
perhaps  a  dozen  times. 

Ray,  who  lay  beside  me,  got  on  his  elbow.  He  listened 
silently  for  some  time;  then  he  said.  "Say  —  don't  it  listen 
good  to  hear  something  talk  good  old  United  States  again?" 

It  was  soon  after  daybreak  that  Hawkins  appeared,  to  say 
he  had  managed  by  their  sign  language,  to  talk  the  black  boy 
into  going  far  up  the  vale  for  a  jag  of  dry  wood.  And  then 


WE  CONSORT  WITH  A  PICKPOCKET         221 

he  told  us  where  to  find  the  gold  workings,  and  other  matters 
of  interest.  "When  we're  comin'  back,  I'll  be  singin',  'She  died 
of  the  fever,'  so'll  you  can  'ide  out,"  said  Hawkins. 

"  Well  now,  Hawkins,"  said  Norris.  "We'll  soon  have  you 
out  of  this  and  back  in  civilization  again,  if  you  play  square 
with  us,  and  don't  give  that  skunk  any  hint  that  we're  here, 
and—" 

"  You  don't  need  for  to  'ave  no  fear,  'ee'll  never  know," 
declared  Hawkins.  "Hi'm  slick,  Hi  am.  Hi  can  'old  my  gab 
-  Hi'm  old  at  that." 

And  away  he  went  with  his  head  and  shoulders  still  cutting 
capers  that  rendered  Ray  dumb  with  fascination.  And  then 
finally,  Ray  broke  out.  "There  goes  our  gold  mine,"  he  said. 
"We  mustn't  lose  him!  When  we  get  back  in  the  States  we'll 
join  a  side  show. —  'Ladies  and  gentlemen:  it  is  my  privilege 
to  present  to  your  astonished  eyes  the  one  and  only  living 
rubber-man.  Observe  the  wonderful  effect,  as  the  breath  and 
pulse  of  life  courses  through  him.  The  only  self-inflating  — 
why,  the  only  dread  we  have  is  that  he  may  chance  on  some 
unhappy  occasion  to  sit  down  on  a  bent  pin  or  a  sharp  tack. 
In  our  travels  we  found  him  in  the  tropical  jungles,  where  he 
had  been  lost,  and  where  he  had  subsisted  for  two  years  on  the 
juice  of  the  rubber  tree.  In  truth,  ladies  and  gentlemen,  even 
now,  the  only  sustenance  he  is  able  to  take  is  the  milk  of  the 
rubber  plant,  and  —  oh,  I  say  now,  ladies  and  gentlemen,  who 
have  kindness  and  charity  in  your  hearts,  if  you  have  any  old, 
worn  out  overshoes,  garden  hose,  and  — '  " 

Grant  Norris  had  picked  up  a  length  of  dead  limb  and  was 
now  manipulating  it  menacingly,  with  an  eye  on  Ray.  And 
then  there  came  through  the  brush  the  voice  of  Hawkins,  sing- 


222  THE  VOODOO  GOLD  TRAIL 

ing.  It  was  a  snatch  of  "Twickenham  Ferry,"  ending  with  a — 

"Oh!  yo  ho.   Oh!  yo  ho.   Oh!  yo  ho.   Oh!" 

"  That  means  they're  on  their  way  for  the  load  of  wood," 
said  Norris. 

We  waited  some  minutes,  to  insure  the  black  boy  getting 
out  of  view  with  Hawkins;  and  then  we  went  forward,  and 
out  across  the  semi-clearing.  There  were  four  palm-thatched 
structures  over  there,  with  frames  of  pine  saplings  and  bam- 
boo. Beside  the  fourth,  was  the  chicken  yard  of  bamboo  held 
together  with  tough  grasses.  In  this  corral  were  some  hundreds 
of  fowl,  scratching  and  clucking  much  in  the  fashion  of  chick- 
ens back  home. 

"Chick,  chick,  chick,  chick!"  called  Ray. 

The  fowl  flocked  toward  the  fence. 

"I  told  you!"  broke  out  Ray.  "They  sure  understand 
United  States." 

"  Oh,  come  on,"  pressed  Grant  Norris.  "Let's  get  up  to  the 
diggings." 

"  Poor  old  Norris,"  murmured  Ray,  as  if  talking  to  himself, 
while  he  followed.  "He'll  be  so  disappointed  when  he  finds  out 
there's  no  gold  mine." 

Ray  took  shelter  behind  me  as  Norris,  ahead,  cast  about 
for  some  kind  of  missile.  We  passed  by  a  vegetable  garden  as 
we  went;  neat  rows,  carefully  weeded. 

I  should  say  that  my  ankle  was  so  far  recovered  that  I  had 
discarded  my  crutch  and  now  limped  on  a  cane.  We  soon  had 
come  up  with  the  creek,  where  it  flowed  amongst  the  trees.  A 
path  showed  the  way  along  the  bank,  and  the  eager  Norris 
pushed  ahead,  urging  us  to  follow.  I  trotted  after,  at  the  best 
speed  my  lame  ankle  would  allow,  and  Ray  by  my  side.  We 


WE  CONSORT  WITH  A  PICKPOCKET 

hadn't  covered  two  hundred  yards,  when  another  bit  of  clear- 
ing showed  ahead. 

"Hurry  up,"  said  Norris.    "We'll  be  there  in  a  second  — 
Hurrah  for  the  gold  mine!" 


CHAPTER  XXVI 

DOINGS   ON    THE   LITTLE    ISLE    AGAIN 

"HURRAH!"  echoed  Ray,  with  teasing,  mock  enthusiasm. 

"Hurrah!" 

But  we  hadn't  taken  two  more  steps  forward,  now,  when 

there  broke  out  ahead  of  us  the  voice  of  Hawkins  again, 

singing: 

"She  died  of  the  fever,  no  doctor  could  save  her." 
Smash!  went  our  enthusiasm,  and  we  turned  tail  and  ske- 
daddled back  on  the  path.    We  pulled  up  a  moment  at  the 

edge  of  the  open  bit,  and  we  heard: 

"  She  was  a  fish  monger,  and  where  is  the  wonder  — " 
We  hopped  across  the  clearing,  and  still  the  song  followed: 
"For  they  all  wheeled  wheel-barrows  through  streets  wide 

and  narrow, 

"Crying  —  'Cockles!  and  mussels!  alive,  alive,  Ol" 

"  That  blooming  idiot!"  broke  out  Norris,  when  we  came  to 

a  stand  in  the  brush.   "What  business  had  he  coming  back  so 

soon!" 

"  He  just  couldn't  wait  to  sing  us  that  song,"  said  Ray. 

"  'Cockles!    and  muscles!'    But  say  —  Hurrah   for  the  gold 

mine!" 

"  Perhaps  the  black  boy  smelled  a  mouse,"  I  offered. 
We  hadn't  long  to  wait  till  Hawkins  came  pushing  through 

the  brush. 

224 


DOINGS  ON  THE  LITTLE  ISLE  AGAIN       225 

"  I  tell  you  wot,  fellahs,"  he  explained,  "that  nigger  sud- 
dent  got  stubborn,  an'  wouldn't  go  no  farther.  'Ee  was  just 
afraid,  I  guess,  as  'ow  the  boss  'ud  raise  ructions  if  we  'adn't 
got  enough  work  done  when  'ee  gets  back.  This  last  trip,  the 
boss  sure  'as  got  a  big  'urry  on;  'ee'd  'ave  us  workin'  night 
an'  day,  if  'ee  'ad  the  light." 

"  How  much,  now,  do  you  suppose  he  has  got  out  of  the 
diggings?"  questioned  Norris. 

"  Hit's  a  'eap  more  nor  I  can  guess,"  answered  Hawkins. 
"Hit's  a  'eap  o'  pounds  we  'ave  got  out  the  two  years  I  'ave 
been  'ere.  An'  now,  'ee's  a  cartin'  of  it  awye  from  some  'ole 
back  in  the  rocks  where  'ee's  been  keepin'  it,  'ee  don't  let  the 
nigger  nor  me  go  near  the  plyce.  'Ee  says  'ee  'as  got  a  trap 
there;  an'  'ee'll  shoot  us  if  we  foller  'im  anywhere  'ee  goes." 

Norris  had  many  queries  to  put  the  little  cockney  contor- 
tionist, but  I  soon  pressed  him  to  go,  lest  the  black  boy  should 
come  seeking  him.  And  so  he  went,  having  exacted  a  promise 
that  we  would  not  go  away  from  the  region  without  him.  In 
return,  he  contracted  to  play  into  our  hands  in  circumventing 
Duran.  "And  Hi'm  slick,"  he  declared.  "He  cawn't  fool  Handy 
'Awkins." 

"  And  now  — "  began  Norris. 

"  Now  we'll  get  back  to  our  little  camp,"  I  said. 

"  It's  hard  to  go  without  a  sight  of  the  gold  diggings,"  said 
Norris,  half  in  earnest,  half  playing  the  youngster. 

"  The  diggings  will  keep  till  the  time's  ripe,"  I  said,  assum- 
ing the  paternalism  forced  on  me. 

"  Hurrah  for  the  gold  mine!"  teased  Ray,  keeping  a  wary 
eye  on  Grant  Norris. 

We  were  soon  in  the  path,  and  presently  scaled  the  cliff  on 


226  THE  VOODOO  GOLD  TRAIL 

Duran's  contraption.  We  coiled  the  halliard  under  the  brush 
on  the  cliff-top,  as  Duran  had  left  it,  and  picked  our  way  to 
the  cavern  entry-hall.  A  flash  from  my  electric  lamp  revealed 
that  all  the  gold-laden  bamboo  cylinders  were  gone  from  that 
niche,  where  we  had  seen  them. 

"  I  hope  to  Heaven  our  fellows  saw  what  he  did  with  that 
stuff,"  prayed  Norris,  when  we  had  crawled  out  through  the 
curtain  of  water  into  that  outer  world  again. 

"  Trust  Bob  for  that,"  I  assured  him.  "He'll  have  the  place 
spotted  if  he's  had  half  a  chance." 

Everything  was  ship-shape  in  the  camp-place  amongst  the 
brush.  There  was  food  in  plenty,  and  though  it  was  late,  I  was 
glad  to  round  out  my  breakfast  with  some  fruit  and  a  nibble 
of  cheese.  We  had  nothing  to  do  but  to  rest  until  the  return 
of  our  comrades.  And  that  event  we  were  not  to  expect  until 
some  time  between  sunset  and  morning,  for  we  had  already 
seen  that  it  was  by  night,  by  preference,  that  Duran  traveled 
to  and  from  that  secret  vale  behind  the  cliffs. 

It  was  a  long  and  irksome  time  of  waiting  that  day  and 
night,  for  a  good  share  of  the  night  had  passed  ere  they  had 
come.  Even  now,  so  long  since  that  time,  I  yawn  to  think  of 
it.  And  I  am  thinking  that  I  can  do  no  better,  to  cover  that 
space,  than  tell  how  our  friends  employed  the  time,  while  they 
were  gone  down  Crow  Bay. 

X        •',-        -'f        *        * 

It  was  soon  after  nightfall,  Carlos  —  on  the  lookout  -  had 
heard  Duran  splashing  in  the  creek,  below  the  cascade,  and  he 
made  out  the  ill-defined  form  of  him  as  he  moved  away  down 
the  path  in  the  murk.  Carlos  hurried  over  to  the  nook  in  the 
brush  and  made  his  report. 


DOINGS  ON  THE  LITTLE  ISLE  AGAIN       227 

Duran's  coming,  of  course,  was  expected — though  he  seemed 
a  trifle  early  —  and  the  plan  of  procedure  had  already  been 
outlined.  Grant  Norris  set  off  at  once  to  again  achieve  that 
passage  through  the  grotto  and  join  Ray,  who  lingered  at  the 
cliff-top,  where  he  had  witnessed  Duran's  passage.  Captain 
Jean  Marat,  Robert,  and  Carlos  prepared  to  follow  on  Duran's 
trail. 

But  there  was  a  circumstance  troubled  Carlos,  and  he  had 
a  word  to  say. 

"  Duran,  he  walk  ver'  light,  an'  it  seem'  he  keep  ver' 
straight,"  he  began.  "I  think  he  do  not  carry  anything." 

"Let's  go  see!"  said  Robert. 

And  he  and  Carlos  hastened  into  the  cavern,  where  Robert 
threw  his  flashlight  on  the  scene.  There  was  that  stack  of 
gold-filled  sections  of  bamboo,  quite  of  the  same  size  as  they 
had  seen  it  hardly  more  than  two  hours  before.  And  more  — 
on  the  floor  of  the  cavern  lay  a  canvas  pack,  with  its  leather 
straps. 

"He  hasn't  taken  a  thing!"  broke  out  Robert. 

And  the  two  hurried  out  to  where  Marat  stood  waiting  on 
the  stream's  bank. 

Robert  gave  him  the  news. 

"Ah!"  said  Marat.  "He  go  for  help  to  carry  thee  big  load 
away." 

But  Robert's  mind  was  full  of  another  idea,  and  he  said, 
"Crotain  Marat,  suppose  you  and  Carlos  go  and  see  if  you 
can  see  anything  of  him  out  in  the  bay.  I'll  stay  here.  And 
if  you  see  him  going  off  in  the  canoe,  send  Carlos  after  me. 
If  you  don't  see  him,  wait  for  me." 

"  Ver'  well,"  said  Marat. 


228  THE  VOODOO  GOLD  TRAIL 

And  the  two  set  off  in  the  murk.  They  moved  rapidly, 
alternately  trotting  and  walking,  intent  on  covering  as  much 
of  the  space  between  them  and  Duran  as  might  be.  And  as 
they  went,  Marat  —  and  Carlos  as  well  —  began  to  have  an 
inkling  of  the  thought  that  was  in  Robert's  mind. 

When  they  got  to  the  water  they  quickly  satisfied  them- 
selves that  Duran's  sturdy  little  canoe  was  gone  from  its  place. 
Soon  they  were  in  the  skiff  and  out  on  the  bay.  Swiftly  they 
moved  down  the  shore,  looking  over  their  shoulders  now  and 
again,  for  the  sight  of  some  dark  object  on  the  quiet  surface 
of  the  water.  They  had  hardly  gone  a  mile  when  they  rested 
on  their  oars,  and  took  one  good  long  look  down  the  bay. 
Nothing  showed. 

Robert,  in  the  meantime,  squatted  on  the  bank  of  the  creek, 
and  waited  patiently  for  perhaps  two  hours,  A  tree-toad  trilled 
out,  now  and  then,  to  mingle  his  song  with  the  music  of  the 
nearby  cascade.  The  tree-tops  hung  over  the  stream  with 
never  a  rustle,  for  the  night  breeze  had  not  yet  risen. 

At  last  Robert  became  conscious  of  a  new  sound,  seeming 
to  come  from  some  point  way  down  the  creek.  In  another 
minute  it  had  grown  more  distinct,  and  he  knew  it  for  the 
gentle  and  regular  dip  of  a  paddle.  And  presently,  a  black 
mass  showed  between  the  banks.  And  then  a  canoe  poked  its 
nose  to  shore,  not  forty  feet  from  where  Robert  crouched  by 
the  tree  trunk. 

The  canoeist  secured  the  painter  to  a  root  in  the  bank,  and 
forthwith  moved  to  the  cascade.  In  five  minutes  that  figure 
appeared  again,  and  Robert  saw  him  stoop  over  the  edge  of  the 
canoe  and  distribute  something  on  its  bottom.  When  he  went 
back  a  second  trip,  Robert  made  a  hurried  visit  to  the  canoe 


DOINGS  ON  THE  LITTLE  ISLE  AGAIN       229 

and  satisfied  himself  that  it  was  the  gold-laden  bamboo  that 
found  placement  there.  Four  trips  that  figure  made,  all  told, 
and  then  loosed  the  painter  and  re-embarked,  moving  quietly 
down  the  stream  in  the  dark. 

Now,  Robert  took  to  the  path  and  sped  on  down  the  way 
the  others  had  gone.  He  found  them  awaiting  him  in  the 
skiff. 

"  He's  got  all  the  gold  in  the  canoe,"  Robert  explained. 
"And  he's  on  the  way." 

"  Thad  w'at  I  been  thinking,"  said  Captain  Marat.  "He  go 
roun'  by  one  lagoon  an'  fin'  thee  creek.  I  think  I  have  see 
where  thad  lagoon,  it  go  in.  We  go  there  an'  see." 

So  the  three  set  the  skiff  in  motion,  skirting  the  marsh- 
grass,  till  they  came  to  where  a  narrow  channel  opened  inland. 

"  Another  one  leedle  more  down,"  said  Jean  Marat;  "maybe 
he  come  out  thad  one." 

They  had  got  the  boat  to  within  view  of  the  opening  of  that 
next  channel,  when  an  object  shot  out  from  behind  the  grass. 

"  Down  —  queek!"  spoke  Marat,  in  a  hurried  whisper. 

All  ducked  their  heads  and  lay  quiet  for  some  minutes. 
Then  they  ventured  to  peer  over  the  gunwale,  and  saw  the 
canoe  as  a  dark  mass,  moving  steadily  away  down  the  bay. 

"  He  didn't  see  us,"  observed  Robert. 

"  No,"  agreed  Marat,  "fortunate'  he  did  not  look  round." 

There  was  little  doubt  as  to  Duran's  destination,  so  the 
three  made  the  passage  leisurely  down  over  the  same  route 
they  had  rowed  that  other  night.  And  they  turned  the  skiff 
up  that  same  creek  of  the  mainland.  This  time  they  were 
determined  on  a  bolder  move  than  before.  They  meant  to 
risk  discovery,  and  land  with  the  boat  on  that  little  island, 


230  THE  VOODOO   GOLD   TRAIL 

though  under  cover  of  night.  Carlos  and  Robert  —  who,  like 
myself,  still  retained  his  black-stained  face  and  hands  —  were 
to  remain  in  hiding  throughout  the  coming  day,  and  observe, 
if  possible,  how  Duran  should  dispose  of  that  gold  he  had 
taken  from  Carlos'  mine.  The  while,  Captain  Marat  would 
hold  the  skiff  over  at  the  mainland,  ready  to  pick  them  up  the 
following  night,  when  Duran  shall  have  departed  from  the 
island  again. 

They  waited  till  midnight,  and  then  rowed  to  the  isle  where 
Robert  and  Carlos  disembarked. 

"  Two  flashes  will  be  the  signal,"  said  Robert  in  a  whisper. 

"  All  right,"  returned  Marat.  And  he  rowed  away. 

The  two  crawled  into  the  shelter  of  the  brush.  In  time, 
they  had  gained  the  clearing  in  which  stood  the  little  hut.  No 
gleam  of  light  shone  there.  Creeping  close,  they  could  hear  the 
snoring  of  one,  and  the  heavy  breathing  of  another  sleeper 
within.  This  was  enough.  They  got  to  the  shore  again,  and 
found  where  the  skiff  of  the  isle  was  lying  on  the  beach. 

"  Well,  Carlos,"  said  Robert,  "suppose  we  have  a  snooze. 
There  won't  be  anything  going  on  till  daylight." 

"  Yes,"  agreed  Carlos. 

And  they  crawled  into  a  close  piece  of  underbrush. 

Carlos  was  the  first  abroad  when  day  had  come.  Robert 
missed  him  when  he  opened  his  eyes;  but  he  had  hardly  fin- 
ished rubbing  the  sleep  from  them  when  Carlos  appeared,  to 
say  that  the  negro  was  already  setting  off  in  the  skiff  for  a 
trip  to  mainland. 

"  That  Duran  is  sending  him  off  on  an  errand  again,"  ob- 
served Robert,  "so  he  will  be  alone  to  bury  the  gold." 

"  Yes,"  said  Carlos.    "I  heard  Duran  say  to  him  that  he 


DOINGS  ON  THE  LITTLE  ISLE  AGAIN       231 

must  not  forget  to  bring  the  drug.  He  say  something  about 
someone  who  do  not  work  anything  without  he  have  the 
drug." 

Robert  puzzled  a  moment  over  this  intelligence,  and  then, 
seeming  to  give  up  the  problem,  he  said,  "well,  let's  have  a 
bite  and  then  see  what  Duran's  up  to." 

Presently  they  got  themselves  behind  a  shelter,  whence  they 
could  look  out  into  the  little  clearing.  Duran  was  nowhere  in 
view.  They  waited  patiently  some  minutes,  and  were  rewarded 
with  the  spectacle  of  Duran  coming  into  the  clearing  from  a 
point  to  their  left,  and  bearing  on  his  back  a  heavy  pack.  He 
passed  the  cabin  and  moved  to  its  north  side.  In  ten  minutes 
he  returned  without  his  burden,  going  back  the  way  from 
which  he  had  brought  his  load. 

Now,  when  Duran  had  gone  out  of  view  again,  they  scurried 
round  to  a  point  of  vantage  situate  to  the  northeast  of  the  hut. 
So  when  Duran  appeared  with  his  next  load,  they  followed 
him  with  their  eyes  till  he  disappeared  in  a  thicket  that  de- 
bouched from  the  wood  on  the  north  into  the  clearing. 

In  a  little,  Duran  again  appeared.  And  he  had  no  sooner 
vanished  to  the  south  for  a  third  freight  of  the  gold,  than 
Robert  and  Carlos  were  startled  with  the  spectacle  of  a  naked, 
lithe,  black  body  springing  from  the  ground,  as  it  seemed,  and 
who  stole  snake-like  to  the  edge  of  the  thicket  where  Duran 
had  gone  in  and  out. 

Our  two  looked  at  one  another  in  their  astonishment.  It 
was  evident  there  was  at  least  one  other  than  themselves  spy- 
ing upon  Duran  and  his  doings. 

On  an  impulse,  Robert  took  up  a  cudgel  and  threw  it  hard 
to  the  place  that  naked  black  had  gone  into.  He  immediately 


232  THE  VOODOO  GOLD  TRAIL 

followed  it  with  another  missile.  That  black  body  suddenly 
appeared,  like  a  rabbit  flushed  out  of  his  brush,  and  sped  for 
the  shelter  of  the  wood. 

When  Robert  and  Carlos  came  to  the  wood's  edge,  by  the 
north  shore,  they  saw  the  black  head  of  a  swimmer  making 
haste  across  the  bay. 

"  I  wonder  where  he  came  from?"  queried  Robert. 

"  I  don'  know,"  said  Carlos.  "Maybe  from  the  Orion." 

"  Well,  we  gave  him  a  scare,"  said  Robert.  "He  won't  come 
back." 

They  got  to  their  point  of  vantage  again,  and  watched  till 
Duran  had  taken  into  the  thicket  a  fourth,  and  last  burden. 
This  time  they  had  above  an  hour's  wait  for  sight  of  him 
again.  And  now  he  bore  a  shovel,  with  which  implement  he 
disappeared  into  the  cabin. 

"  I  guess  he's  through  with  his  job,"  observed  Robert.  And 
such  was  the  case,  for  no  more  was  seen  of  Duran  for  some 
hours;  and  then  he  appeared,  but  to  go  down  to  the  south 
shore,  apparently  to  look  for  the  return  of  his  black.  That 
portly  individual  indeed  showed  up,  down  the  bay,  his  oars 
rising  and  dipping  leisurely.  Robert  and  Carlos  watched  the 
landing  of  the  skiff.  For  cargo,  there  was  a  coffee-sack,  hold- 
ing some  parcels  of  stores.  And  the  desired  drug  the  black 
brought,  too,  for  Carlos  heard  him  report  as  much  to  Duran. 

It  was  already  past  the  middle  of  the  afternoon  when  those 
two  disappeared  again  in  the  cabin  with  the  coffee-sack.  From 
then  till  dark,  neither  showed  a  face  except  the  once,  when  — 
near  dark  —  the  fat  black  came  out  for  an  armful  of  wood. 
And  then  the  coming  murk  encouraged  our  two  to  creep  closer, 
and  they  had  their  appetites  set  on  edge  by  the  smell  of  fresh- 


DOINGS  ON  THE  LITTLE  ISLE  AGAIN       233 

made  coffee.  They  peeked  through  the  window  to  see  those 
within  having  their  snack. 

Duran  rose  from  the  table  at  last.  Robert  and  Carlos  were 
down  by  the  shore  when  the  canoe  was  pushed  into  the  water, 
and  Duran  began  his  return  voyage  up  Crow  Bay. 

The  flash  of  Robert's  light  brought  Marat  over;  and  it  was 
an  interesting  report  Robert  had  to  make  to  him  as  they  pro- 
pelled the  skiff  again  on  Duran's  track. 

"  Ah,  thad  ver'  good,"  said  Captain  Marat.  "We  find  where 
he  hide  it  now  without  much  pain." 

Duran's  canoe  was  in  its  place  near  the  bay  end  of  that 
path;  and  within  the  hour  the  three  were  received  by  their 
comrades  in  the  camp. 


CHAPTER  XXVII 

THE   GOLD   MINE 

"  IT  looks  bad  that  that  black  cuss  should  be  there  spying 
on  Duran,"  Norris  said,  when  Robert  and  Captain  Marat  had 
told  their  tale. 

"  Yes,"  agreed  Marat.  "They  weel  be  there  some  time  to 
look  for  thad  treasure  he  hide;  but  eet  will  not  be  so  ver' 
soon,  I  theenk;  for  now  they  weel  know  thad  someone  find 
them  out." 

"  That  black  bird  wasn't  from  anywhere  but  the  Orion," 
said  Norris.  "That  schooner  of  Duran's  can't  be  far  away  — 
down  the  coast  a  few  miles  behind  some  point,  I'll  bet." 

"  Say,"  spoke  up  Ray,  who  had  hitherto  been  a  silent  lis- 
tener, "and  I'll  bet  that  poor  pickaninny  will  be  telling  the 
other  pickaninnies  what  a  narrow  escape  he  had,  and  how  he's 
sure  it  was  I  and  Norris  that  got  after  him." 

We  began  now  to  think  upon  the  next  move.  Robert  was 
for  making  a  trip  to  the  Pearl,  to  see  how  Julian  Lamartine 
and  Rufe  fared,  and  give  them  the  news;  and  incidentally,  he 
would  add  something  to  our  stock  of  provisions.  But  Norris 
maintained  that,  while  he  felt  it  too  bad  to  keep  Julian  so  long 
in  suspense,  he  felt  more  that  there  was  no  time  to  be  lost. 
"  Some  roaming,  black  voodoo  may  happen  to  get  an  eye  on 
us,"  he  said,  "and  then  we'd  likely  have  a  regular  swarm  of 

234 


THE   GOLD  MINE  235 

them  about  our  ears.  And  we've  already  seen  evidence  that 
Duran's  sailors  must  be  getting  restless." 

Captain  Marat  agreed  with  Norris.  "Julian  weel  be  ver' 
patient,"  he  said.  "And  there  ees  no  time  to  lose." 

And  then,  while  we  three  boys  and  Carlos  busied  ourselves 
with  making  a  cache  of  a  portion  of  our  belongings,  the  two 
elders  set  themselves  to  discuss,  in  some  detail,  a  plan  of 
action. 

It  must  have  been  near  midnight  when  we  moved,  all  in 
single  file.  On  our  hands  and  knees,  one  after  the  other,  we 
scurried  through  that  vale  of  water  and  passed  into  the  cavern 
in  the  cliff;  then  up  that  steep  slope  within,  and  again  down 
the  more  gentle,  rocky  slope  without,  on  the  other  side  of  the 
high  wall. 

Each  carried,  mostly  in  his  pockets,  some  little  portion  of 
the  food  that  remained;  and  Norris  had  insisted  on  taking 
along  his  rifle  with  several  rounds  of  ammunition. 

"  We're  not  looking  for  any  of  that  kind  of  trouble,"  he  said, 
"but  if—" 

"  Yes,"  interrupted  Ray,  "it's  sure  to  rain  if  you  don't  carry 
an  umbrella." 

We  found  Duran's  rope  ladder  tucked  up  in  the  cedars,  held 
by  the  halliard,  which  was  taut,  having  been  fastened  among 
the  vines  on  that  sloping  ledge  down  below.  It  took  some 
tugging  to  tear  loose  the  piece  of  vine  to  which  the  halliard 
was  knotted  down  there;  but  at  last  it  came  away,  and  we  got 
the  ladder  slung  down  the  cliff-side. 

When  we  all  had  got  down  to  the  ledge,  we  again  hauled 
the  ladder  aloft,  and  tied  the  halliard  to  another  piece  of  vine, 
so  that  Duran  should  not  suspect  that  it  had  been  tampered 


236  THE  VOODOO  GOLD  TRAIL 

with.  In  twenty  minutes  we  had  made  to  that  place  in  the 
brush  where  Ray,  Norris,  and  I  had  passed  a  night. 

For  the  rest  of  that  night  we  got  what  sleep  we  could,  taking 
watches,  turn  about.  Andy  Hawkins  had  left  one  of  the  mos- 
quito-bars at  the  place,  which  served  the  turn  of  the  sleepers. 
Day  had  not  yet  dawned,  when  Hawkins  crept  into  the  brush 
—  Norris  and  I  chanced  to  be  taking  the  watch  at  the  time. 

"  I'm  right  glad  to  see  as  'ow  ye've  got  back,"  he  said,  still 
at  his  bodily  contortions.  "The  boss  got  back,  an'  'ee  routed 
us  hout,  an'  seems  to  be  a  bit  hoff  'is  hoats.  'Ee  ain't  noway 
satisfied  with  the  way  'ee's  gettin'  out  the  bloomin'  gold.  'Ee 
says  as  'ow  there  ain't  a'goin  to  be  much  o'  the  stuff  for  any 
of  us,  if  we  don't  get  a  big  'ustle  on." 

Norris  put  it  to  Hawkins  that  he  was  expected  to  help  us 
this  day  to  find  the  storehouse  whence  Duran  took  the  gold 
that  went  out  water-wise,  through  that  hole  in  the  cliff. 

"I  s'y!"  began  Hawkins,  fairly  dancing  on  the  ground  in 
his  excitement.  "I  got  me  orders  from  the  boss  long  ago;  and 
'ee  marches  the  nigger  an'  myself  hoff  to  the  diggin's  each  day 
that  'ee's  'ere,  an'  if  I  so  much  as  turns  me  'ead  to  see  w'ich 
way  'ee's  goin',  'ee'll  plug  me  carcass  full  o'  cold  lead." 

And  then  Hawkins  told  how,  long  ago,  he  had  searched  a 
cavern  that  he  had  found  in  the  cliffs,  during  Duran's  absence, 
but  had  not  got  trace  of  Duran's  depository.  And  then,  more 
than  a  year  back,  Duran  had  cooled  his  zeal  for  further  search, 
by  warning  him  that  if  his  curiosity  got  the  better  of  him,  and 
he  went  poking  his  nose  about  those  cliffs,  he  would  certainly 
fall  into  a  trap,  and  pull  some  tons  of  rock  down  on  his  head 
for  his  pains. 

When  day  broke,  Hawkins  made  a  detour,  going  back  to 


THE   GOLD   MINE  237 

the  huts;  and  Norris  and  I  aroused  such  of  our  party  as  were 
still  asleep.  Our  first  move  was  to  seek  out  and  establish  our 
headquarters  on  the  other,  north,  side  of  the  stream.  And  then 
while  we  made  a  cold  breakfast,  our  plans  came  to  a  head. 
Ray  and  Robert  were  to  try  to  keep  an  eye  on  Duran,  while 
Captain  Marat,  Carlos,  Norris,  and  I  should  visit  the  scene  of 
the  mining,  and  incidentally,  to  have  a  try  at  a  piece  of 
proselyting. 

The  four  of  us  crept  through  the  undergrowth  on  this  north 
side  of  the  creek,  for  some  hundreds  of  yards.  A  harsh  sound, 
like  the  shaking  down  of  a  furnace,  presently  set  our  ears  alert. 
We  crept  forward  till  we  came  in  view  of  the  source.  And 
there  in  the  edge  of  the  creek-bed  stood  Andy  Hawkins,  hoe 
in  hand,  stirring  dirt  and  gravel  in  a  long  box,  into  the  one 
end  of  which  water  flowed  from  a  dam  in  the  stream.  Beside 
him  was  the  negro  lad,  wielding  a  shovel.  Another  object 
caught  my  eye,  for,  perched  on  the  edge  of  the  box  was  a 
monkey. 

As  far  as  we  could  see  up  the  stream  the  rocks  were  denuded 
of  soil,  showing  that  operations  in  this  small  way  must  have 
been  going  on  a  long,  long  time.  Norris  breathed  fast,  and 
his  eyes  shone  with  excitement.  It  was  by  no  means  the  first 
gold-diggings  his  eyes  had  looked  on,  but  the  tussle  with  nature 
for  her  treasures  was  no  less  meat  for  the  keen  spirit  of  this 
soldier  of  fortune  than  the  smell  of  battle  in  any  appealing 
cause. 

Captain  Marat  and  Carlos  moved  forward.  Then  the  black 
boy  discovered  them,  dropped  his  shovel  in  panic,  and  was 
about  to  flee.  But  Carlos  spoke  a  word  in  a  soft  tone,  and 
the  lad  stood,  staring  his  wonder. 


238  THE  VOODOO   GOLD   TRAIL 

Carlos  and  Marat,  together,  engaged  the  black  lad  in  talk; 
and  Norris  and  I  joined  the  group.  A  pair  of  mining  pans  lay 
nearby,  and  two  wooden  buckets  stood  on  the  ground.  I  could 
see  shining,  yellow  particles  of  gold  in  the  long  box,  called  a 
Long  Tom  by  the  miners,  as  I  learned.  Norris  scrutinized 
every  detail,  and  poked  among  the  gravel  with  the  acutest 
interest. 

At  last  Jean  Marat  turned  to  Norris  and  myself,  and  gave 
us  some  part  of  the  black  boy's  story;  more  of  it  came  to  us, 
piecemeal,  later. 

He  had  a  very  imperfect  recollection  of  the  coming  into  this 
hidden  vale.  Indeed,  he  was  a  creeping  babe  when  his  father 
carried  him  there.  The  father,  he  said,  was  a  cripple,  with  a 
very  crooked  leg,  and  who  ever  lived  in  great  fear  of  Duran, 
and  whose  sole  business  w^as  the  digging  in  the  creek,  and 
separating  out  the  yellow  grains,  and  tending  the  chickens,  and 
waiting  upon  Duran  when  he  appeared. 

The  father  told  him  nothing  of  the  world  without,  but  ever 
taught  him  to  seek  to  please  Duran  and  never  ask  questions; 
and  that  one  day  they  would  move  from  the  place  into  another 
world,  and  live  happy  in  a  home  of  their  own.  It  was  some 
years  after  the  boy  had  become  strong  enough  for  the  work, 
that  his  father  went  to  his  sleep  one  night  never  to  waken. 
It  appears  that  the  boy  drooped  with  his  loneliness,  thereafter, 
and  Duran  brought  him  the  monkey  for  a  companion.  And 
then,  finally,  he  came  with  the  grimacing  white  man  (Andy 
Hawkins).  Duran  warned  him,  on  pain  of  death,  not  to  seek 
to  learn  any  words  of  the  white  man's  language,  nor  to  make 
the  white  wise  in  any  of  his  French  speech. 

Jean  Marat  said  the  black  lad  was  struck  with  wonder  at 


THE  GOLD  MINE  239 

some  simple  things  he  had  told  him  of  the  world;  and  he  was 
greatly  elated  over  Marat's  promise  to  take  him  to  witness 
what  was  described. 

"  Do  you  think  he'll  have  the  wit  to  hold  his  tongue?"  asked 
Norris. 

Marat  spoke  with  the  lad  again,  who  listened  with  intent- 
ness,  and  nodded  eloquently. 

"  He  understand  the  importance  to  not  betray  us,"  said 
Marat.  "We  can  depend  on  him." 

The  monkey  had  scrambled  to  the  black  boy's  shoulder  on 
our  first  appearance;  and  he  eyed  us,  and  seemed  to  scold, 
during  the  whole  talk.  It  was  the  same  animal,  without  the 
least  doubt,  that  we  had  come  upon  far  up  on  the  higher  cliffs 
of  the  mountain  that  overlooked  this  vale. 

It  was  arranged  that  Hawkins  should  come  to  us  in  our 
covert,  whenever  the  opportunity  should  offer,  and  bring  some 
small  quantity  of  provision.  We  did  not  scruple  to  take  some 
sustenance  of  Duran's  providing,  since  it  was  paid  for  out  of 
Carlos'  gold. 

"  Blyme-me  if  I  don't  fetch  ye  a  roasted  chicken,"  said  Andy 
Hawkins,  punctuating  his  speech  with  a  violent  jerking  of  his 
shoulders.  "I  can  roast  it  right  under  the  boss'  nose,  an'  'ee 
won't  see  it.  Oh,  Hi'm  slick,  Hi  am." 

And  then,  astonishing  thing!  He  began  to  distribute  among 
us,  things  that  he  had  conjured  out  of  our  pockets;  some  rifle 
cartridges  to  Norris,  a  knife  to  Marat,  my  flash-lamp.  And 
then  another  curious  thing  happened.  The  monkey,  witnessing 
this  distribution,  scrambled  down  to  the  Long  Tom,  plunged 
in  his  fist,  and  handed  up  to  me  —  who  chanced  to  be  nearest 
—  a  little  gold  nugget,  the  size  of  a  bean.  He  looked  up, 


240  THE  VOODOO  GOLD  TRAIL 

watching  me  while  I  tied  the  little  lump  of  gold  in  a  corner 
of  my  handkerchief  and  tucked  it  into  my  pocket.  He  let  me 
take  his  hand  by  way  of  thanking  him,  and  took  kindly  to  the 
fondling  bestowed  on  him;  climbing  to  my  shoulder,  looking 
into  my  face,  and  chirping  some  kind  of  monkey  talk. 

We  finally  tore  Norris  away  from  his  explorations  in  the 
diggings,  which  he  declared  still  held  unlimited  store  of  gold, 
and  we  got  back  to  our  new  camp  site.  Carlos  and  I  forded 
the  creek,  to  go  to  seek  out  Ray  and  Robert.  And  we  found 
them  at  the  edge  of  the  clearing  wherein  stood  those  structures. 

They  were  just  on  the  point  of  moving  over  to  the  path 
that  went  down  to  the  lower  western  end  of  this  sunken  vale. 
For  they  said  that  Duran  had  just  gone  that  way,  carrying  a 
pack  on  his  back,  having  come  out  of  the  thick  wood  at  the 
rear  of  the  huts. 

"  Well,"  I  suggested,  "if  you,  Ray,  will  go  with  Carlos  and 
have  an  eye  on  Duran,  Bob  and  I  can  slip  over  into  that  brush 
and  see  if  we  can  find  the  place  where  he  gets  his  goods." 

We  found  the  way  easy  going  in  the  woods  for  a  piece;  but 
when  we  neared  the  cliffs  of  this  south  wall  of  the  vale,  the 
undergrowth  impeded  us.  With  much  going  about,  we  finally 
won  in  to  the  cliffs;  and  after  moving  some  way  to  the  east, 
we  came  upon  the  mouth  of  a  cavern. 

"There!"  said  Robert.   "How  about  that?" 

But  Hawkins  had  been  all  through  that,  as  he  had  assured 
us,  and  we  must  seek  elsewhere. 

We  finally  concluded  that  we  had  better  have  taken  the  way 
in  the  other  direction,  along  the  cliff  foot,  and  so  we  retraced 
our  steps.  The  farther  to  the  west  that  we  went,  the  more  dense 
the  tropic  growth.  The  damp  heat  here,  too,  was  stifling,  and 


THE  GOLD  MINE  241 

our  progress  was  most  slow.  We  had  struggled  on,  keeping 
close  to  the  high,  sheer,  rocky  wall  for  half  an  hour,  almost, 
and  finding  nothing  to  our  present  interest,  when  a  cautious 
whistle  brought  us  to  a  stand.  We  moved  out  toward  the 
sound  and  joined  Ray,  who  informed  us  that  Duran  was  on 
his  way  back. 

"  There's  no  telling  where  he'll  come  through  here,"  I  said. 
"Let  us  get  back  across  the  clearing." 

When  Duran  appeared,  after  one  look  toward  the  huts,  he 
plunged  into  that  brush  we  had  just  come  out  of.  In  twenty 
minutes  he  appeared  again,  and  again  he  stooped  under  a 
heavy  pack.  He  but  repeated  that  journey  down  the  path  that 
he  had  made  so  many  times  before.  Carlos  had  continued  on 
down  the  vale,  Ray  said,  to  discover  where  Duran  went  to  set 
afloat  the  gold-laden  bamboo. 

I  have  forgotten  how  many  trips  Duran  made  this  day, 
transporting  that  gold.  As  often  as  we  sought  to  discover 
whence  he  took  his  freight,  we  came  no  nearer  a  solution  of 
that  mystery  than  on  that  first  search  in  the  back  of  that 
jungle.  Once,  when  Duran  climbed  out  by  his  ladder,  to  go  to 
that  cavern  where  he  made  temporary  storage  of  the  treasure, 
Norris  took  Andy  Hawkins'  place  at  the  diggings,  while  that 
gesticulating  individual  went  to  act  as  guide  to  the  rest  of  us 
in  the  search.  But  he  proved  as  helpless  as  the  rest.  So  when 
night  found  us  all  gathered  together  in  our  cheerless  camp, 
we  were  conscious  of  a  day  passed  with  meager  progress. 

"  Wherever  that  hiding  place  is,"  Norris  was  saying,  "I'll 
bet  there's  a  big  heap  of  the  stuff  there." 

"  But  he's  been  toting  a  lot  of  it  away,"  suggested  Ray. 

"  Toting  it  away!"  burst  out  Norris.   "Ask  Captain  Marat, 


242  THE  VOODOO   GOLD  TRAIL 

here,  what  that  nigger  told  him  about  the  lot  of  stuff  that's 
been  mined  all  these  years." 

"  Yes,"  agreed  Jean  Marat,  "thad  boy  say  ver'  ver'  much 
gold  have  come  out  of  thee  creek.  I  theenk  not  one  ten'  part 
have  Duran  take  away." 

It  was  not  long  till  Andy  Hawkins  appeared.  And  true  to 
his  word,  he  brought  a  roast  chicken.  ' 

"  The  boss  was  a  bit  dumpish  tonight,"  he  said.  "  'Ee  was 
bloomin'  tired,  an'  'ee's  sleepin'  sixty  mile  to  the  minute  right 
now." 

While  we  feasted  on  the  bird,  Norris  pumped  Hawkins  for 
details  of  Duran 's  doings;  and  it  was  indeed  little  that  was 
enlightening  that  he  got  out  of  the  fellow.  But  he  got  loqua- 
cious with  reminiscences  of  his  own  past  life  as  a  pickpocket; 
and  while  Norris  pretended  to  get  much  amusement  out  of  that 
poor,  misguided  human's  escapades  in  crime,  we  were  not  sorry 
when  he  made  his  way  off  to  the  huts  to  seek  his  bed. 

On  the  morrow  we  began  the  day  with  much  the  same  em- 
ployment. But  the  day  was  not  far  gone  when  things  suddenly 
took  on  a  changed  aspect. 

Norris,  who  (true  to  his  nature)  found  the  suspense  unbear- 
able, determined  on  a  bold  move.  It  was  when  Duran  was 
returning  from  his  first  trip  with  a  load,  Norris  followed  him 
into  that  jungle  on  the  far  side  of  the  clearing.  He  meant  this 
time  to  see  where  Duran  went  for  his  gold.  The  rest  of  us  lay 
in  the  shelter  from  which  we  had  watched  Duran  the  day 
before. 

It  was  not  ten  minutes  after  Duran,  and  Norris  on  his  trail, 
had  been  swallowed  up  in  the  growth  over  there,  that  Duran 
suddenly  appeared  again,  this  time  without  his  pack.  And  he 


THE   GOLD  MINE  243 

seemed  to  be  in  excitement.  And  he  made  off,  running  down 
the  path,  directly  disappearing  from  our  sight  in  a  turning. 

"  I'll  bet  he  saw  Norris,"  said  Robert. 

"  Come,"  I  said. 

And  I  set  off,  followed  by  Robert.  When  we  got  across  that 
ridge,  of  which  I  have  spoken,  we  got  a  view  down  the  open 
space.  And  there,  nearing  the  top  of  his  rope  ladder,  we  saw 
Duran  climbing. 

In  another  moment  he  was  hauling  up  his  rope  ladder;  and 
quickly  he  got  both  ladder  and  halliard  on  the  cliff-top. 


CHAPTER  XXVIII 

WE   ARE    TRAPPED -THE   BATTLE 

WE  turned  back,  when  Duran  had  passed  out  of  our  view 
on  the  cliff-top.  Lest  he  should  be  watching,  we  still  kept  our- 
selves within  the  edge  of  the  wood,  till  we  had  recrossed  the 
ridge  where  the  trees  covered  all  of  the  ground.  And  there 
on  the  path  we  met  the  others  and  Norris,  looking  a  little 
embarrassed,  I  thought.  Doubtless,  he  was  conscious  that  he 
had  in  his  impetuosity  discovered  himself  to  Duran,  and  so 
spilled  the  soup,  as  it  were.  He  did  not  mention  it,  and  no 
one  taxed  him  with  it;  but  I  know  the  thought  punished  him, 
and  made  him  for  a  time  a  bit  humble. 

"  He  pulled  the  ladder  and  all  up  with  him,"  I  reported. 

"And  where  is  the  polecat  running  to,  do  you  suppose?" 
queried  Ray. 

And  no  one  had  an  answer  to  that  which  he  thought  fit  to 
give  voice  to.  I  doubt  not,  each  one  of  us  had  pretty  much 
the  same  thought,  one  that  he  dreaded  to  hear  echoed  by  some 
other. 

We  were  properly  immured  in  this  sink,  of  that  we  were 
all  well  assured.  For  we  had  Andy  Hawkins'  story  of  the 
times  —  in  the  two  years  —  that  he  had  made  the  round  of 
those  craggy  walls  in  search  of  a  possible  escape. 

It  was  a  silent  cavalcade  that  marched  back  to  the  clearing, 
and  up  to  where  Hawkins  and  the  black  boy  were  busy  in  the 

244 


WE  ARE  TRAPPED  245 

diggings.  We  gave  them  the  news  of  Duran's  precipitate  flight, 
and  Hawkins  gave  it  little  more  thought  than  to  "  'ope  'ee 
didn't  carry  hoff  the  brown  stuff,"  (meaning  the  opium)  and 
"Hi'd  give  my  'and  to  know  where  'ee  keeps  it." 

Carlos,  I  noticed,  had  some  private  word  with  the  black  boy, 
and  the  two  soon  were  gone  into  the  brush  together.  The  lad 
soon  came  back,  and  I  egged  on  Jean  Marat  to  question  him 
as  to  what  Carlos  might  be  up  to.  For  answer  he  led  the  two 
of  us  to  where  we  found  Carlos  kneeling  beside  the  skeleton 
of  a  human  —  it  was  in  a  patch  of  vines. 

When  finally  Carlos  discovered  us,  looking  on  wonderingly, 
he  beckoned  us.  "My  father,"  he  said,  in  explanation.  And  he 
held  up  a  gold  cross  that  was  on  a  chain  that  still  hung  on  the 
ghastly  figure. 

And  then  Carlos  got  to  his  feet.  "Duran  — "  he  began,  but 
the  rest  of  the  speech  stuck  in  his  throat.  And  I  saw  a  look  in 
his  face  that  I  had  seen  there  before,  and  which  boded  ill  for 
Duran. 

With  the  black  boy's  help  he  had  at  last  found  the  grave  of 
his  father.  And  such  a  grave!  It  went  indeed  hard  with  the 
elder  Brill.  The  spoiler  of  his  mine,  and  his  murderer,  had 
not  even  given  him  decent  burial.  We  sent  for  the  others;  and 
then  and  there  we  dug  a  grave,  and  Norris  was  able  to  sum- 
mon out  of  his  memory  a  few  words  of  the  burial  service.  We 
left  Carlos  kneeling  beside  the  mound.  And  when  he  rejoined 
us,  much  comfort  showed  in  his  face. 

That  bit  of  experience  somehow  drove,  in  large  part,  the 
gloom  from  our  spirits,  and  we  went  about  our  further  doings 
with  more  semblance  of  cheer. 

Norris  volunteered  to  go  down  and  watch  for  Duran's  pos- 


246  THE   VOODOO   GOLD  TRAIL 

sible  return.  I  guessed  his  thought;  that  he  felt  that  his  bung- 
ling, in  allowing  himself  to  be  discovered,  had  made  him  deserve 
this  less  agreeable  task.  The  rest  of  us  set  ourselves  to  the 
business  of  searching  out  Duran's  hidden  storehouse.  In  spite 
of  our  zeal  and  numbers,  the  afternoon  was  nearly  gone,  and 
we  no  nearer  the  solution.  We  explored  that  cavern  that  Andy 
Hawkins  had  told  us  of;  and  moved  forward  hi  a  passage  that 
went  upward  in  its  windings.  I  marvelled  at  the  singular  fresh- 
ness of  the  air,  till  —  having  traversed  some  couple  of  hundred 
yards  —  I  discovered  the  reason.  The  cave  had  but  the  one 
gallery,  and  that  ended  in  a  chimney,  just  over  our  heads 
where  we  now  stood,  and  through  which  showed  the  light  of 
day.  That  little  opening,  in  which  a  hat  would  have  stuck, 
was  high  in  the  cliff-side,  as  we  were  to  learn. 

Ray  and  I  hurried  down  the  path  hi  the  dark,  to  Norris,  to 
report  our  failure  and  to  relieve  him  on  watch.  But  he  refused 
to  budge  from  the  place. 

"  I  gave  us  all  away,"  he  said,  "and  now  I'm  going  to  make 
it  up  somehow.  I'm  going  to  make  that  skunk  show  us  where 
he's  got  the  stuff.  And  he'll  do  it,  too,  when  I  tell  him  a  few 
of  the  things  I've  seen  done  to  carcasses  like  him." 

When  he  would  not  leave  the  watch  to  us,  we  decided  to 
remain  with  him.  He  was  not  cheerful. 

"  You  see,"  began  Ray,  then,  "you'll  have  us  to  prove  things 
by,  when  you're  trying  to  convince  that  polecat.  You'll  say 
'Isn't  that  so,  Ray?'  And  I'll  answer,  'Yes,  that's  so,  Norris.' 
And  then  Wayne,  here,  he'll  say,  'Yes,  Norris,  that's  right,  I 
know,  because  you  never  tell  — '  " 

"Hist!"  I  interrupted  him.   "Listen." 

Some  little  time  back  I  thought  I  heard  a  thing  like  thunder, 


WE  ARE  TRAPPED  247 

far  back  in  the  mountains.  But  it  had  been  momentary,  and 
I  set  it  down  as  an  illusion.  While  Ray  prattled  his  nonsense, 
I  seemed  to  hear  it  again.  We  cocked  our  ears,  but  heard  not 
even  so  much  as  the  trill  of  a  tree-toad. 

"  Ah,  say,"  began  Ray,  "What  — "  And  this  time  he  inter- 
rupted himself,  to  listen. 

There  was  that  quavering,  rolling,  rumble  that  we  had  heard 
weeks  before.  Each  succeeding  wave  of  sound  seemed  to  join 
with,  and  accentuate,  the  preceding.  And  then  came  a  deca- 
dency, like  a  wagon  rolling  out  of  ear-shot.  And  again  —  we 
could  not  tell  just  the  moment  we  began  to  hear  the  sound  — 
there  came  from  afar  that  eerie  rumble,  swelling,  slowly  to  die 
away  once  more. 

"  The  voodoo  drum,"  said  Ray.  "Some  more  voodoo  doings 
—  that's  what  he  went  for." 

"  Yes,"  said  Norris,  "and  I'm  afraid  we'll  have  a  taste  of 
some  more  voodoo  doings  before  we  get  through." 

Neither  of  us  cared  to  ask  Norris  what  he  meant.  We  con- 
tinued to  give  ear  to  that  weird  music  for  long;  and  to  each  of 
us  it  seemed  full  of  a  portent;  and  each  dreaded  to  hear  an- 
other put  it  in  words. 

I  do  not  know  how  many  hours  we  three  continued  to  squat 
there,  at  the  edge  of  the  wood;  seldom  talking,  and  then  avoid- 
ing the  thought  uppermost  in  our  minds.  But  at  last  it  came, 
and  we  heard  voices  over  by  the  cliff  wall.  They  were  coming 
down  the  rope  ladder. 

We  rose  to  our  feet,  and  scurried  off  in  the  edge  of  the  wood, 
till  we  crossed  the  ridge  and  came  to  the  beginning  of  the  path. 
And  there  we  crouched  in  the  brush  and  waited. 

At  last  came  the  stealthy,  black  figures,  moving  in  silence, 


248  THE  VOODOO   GOLD  TRAIL 

and  in  single  file.  We  counted  twenty  as  they  went  by  us,  and 
each  carried  some  kind  of  gun.  My  heart  pounded  with  the 
emotion;  I  have  never  before  nor  since  experienced  such  fear 
as  gripped  me  at  sight  of  the  martial  array. 

When  they  had  passed,  we  got  over  across  the  stream  to  our 
friends,  and  gave  them  our  ill  news.  The  coming  of  those 
twenty  dusky  voodoos  could  have  but  the  one  explanation: 
Duran  had  brought  them  to  hunt  down,  and  destroy,  the  six 
of  us.  He  would  madden  them  with  rum,  mixed  with  the  blood 
of  fowls,  and  sick  them  on  to  us.  And  he  made  sure  of  us, 
since  there  was  but  the  one  exit  from  this  vale;  and  there  he 
doubtless  had  stationed  some  trusty  black  at  the  cliff-top,  to 
keep  the  ladder  and  the  halliard,  till  he  should  have  need  of  it 
—  when  the  work  shall  have  been  completed. 

We  trapped  ones,  got  our  heads  together  for  some  talk  of 
our  situation.  How  we  lamented  our  lack  of  foresight,  in  leav- 
ing behind  our  arms  and  ammunition!  Norris's  lone  rifle, 
with  but  a  handful  of  cartridges,  would  but  delay  for  a  little 
the  inevitable  end.  But  for  a  time  I  had  had  my  mind  full  of 
a  wild  thought.  And  I  pulled  Norris  to  one  side,  and  opened 
the  thing  to  him.  My  plan  was  so  desperate  that  I  hadn't  the 
courage  to  tell  it  to  anyone  less  bold  spirited  than  he.  It  was 
no  less  than  to  employ  that  under-water  way  that  Duran  had 
used  to  transport  the  gold  —  to  sink  into  the  stream  and  be 
carried  through  that  hole,  and  fetch  up  within  that  cavern; 
and  so  out  to  our  camp  in  the  forest,  and  return  with  the  three 
rifles  and  the  ammunition  by  way  of  the  ladder  —  that  was  the 
plan. 

Norris  seized  me  by  the  arms.  "The  very  thing!"  he  said. 
" if  it  can  be  done.  We'll  find  out!" 


WE  ARE  TRAPPED  249 

When  we  told  the  others  of  the  plan,  they  took  it  without 
enthusiasm;  declared  it  impossible  —  suicidal. 

"  You've  no  idea  how  far  it  is  in  to  the  cave,"  said  Ray. 

"  We'll  measure  and  find  out,"  I  answered.  "Besides,  it's 
our  only  chance." 

There  was  no  time  to  lose,  for  what  we  had  to  do  must  be 
done  before  daybreak;  when  we  would  have  the  whole  canni- 
bal crew  stalking  us. 

We  had  a  coil  of  half  inch  rope,  which,  with  other  things, 
we  had  taken  from  the  shacks.  This  I  took  up,  and  Norris, 
Robert,  and  Carlos,  made  up  the  rest  of  the  party.  We  moved 
down  the  stream  in  the  dark,  picking  our  way  amongst  the  un- 
derbrush. At  length  we  got  out  in  the  open,  beyond  the  place 
of  the  ladder;  and  Carlos  guided  us  to  the  spot  on  the  bank 
of  the  creek,  where  he  had  seen  Duran  setting  afloat  the  gold- 
laden  bamboo.  It  was  a  wide  pool  about  that  hole,  into  which 
the  waters  disappeared  in  the  cliff-side. 

We  found  a  piece  of  wood  the  size  of  a  man's  thigh.  In  this, 
all  around,  we  drove  a  half  dozen  sharpened  twigs;  and  we 
weighted  the  little  log  with  stones,  tied  on;  and  at  last  bent 
on  an  end  of  our  half  inch  rope.  We  then  set  it  afloat,  paying 
out  the  rope.  And  the  log,  neither  scraping  the  bottom,  nor  yet 
floating  on  the  surface,  was  carried  on  with  the  current  into 
that  hole. 

I  had  my  hand  on  the  rope,  and  presently  felt  the  impulse, 
as  the  log  found  an  obstruction.  It  rested  against  that  net  of 
Duran's  in  the  cavern;  of  that  there  was  little  doubt.  We 
pulled  back  the  log  again,  and  so  got  the  measure  of  the  dis- 
tance. 

"Not  over  twenty  feet!"  declared  Norris. 


250  THE  VOODOO   GOLD  TRAIL 

"  And  none  of  the  pegs  are  knocked  off,"  announced  Robert, 
who  explored  the  log. 

"  Now,"  I  said,  "I'm  going.  If  after  I  get  to  the  net,  you 
feel  two  sharp  jerks,  in  a  little  while  repeated,  you're  to  give 
me  the  rope.  If  I  give  five  or  six  jerks,  you're  to  pull  me  back; 
and  if,  after  I  touch  the  net  you  get  no  sort  of  signal,  pull 
me  out;  and  you,  Bob,  you  know  what  to  do." 

None  had  better  than  Robert,  the  technic  of  artificial  res- 
piration. 

"Now  look  here,  Wayne,"  began  Robert,  "I'm  going,  too; 
and  it's  my  turn  to  make  it  first." 

And  so  here  began  a  discussion,  and  if  each,  including  Car- 
los, had  had  his  way,  all  four  would  have  gone  that  route.  But 
at  last  we  came  to  a  decision,  and  Robert  and  I  won,  I  to  go 
first. 

I  selected  a  stone  of  sufficient  weight  to  hold  me  down,  so 
that  I  should  not  scrape  on  the  roof  of  that  passage;  and  I  let 
them  set  the  loop  of  rope  about  me,  under  the  arms.  I  waded 
into  the  pool.  I  felt  the  suck  of  the  water  on  my  legs  when  I 
neared  that  hole. 

"  Keep  your  nerve  and  trust  us,"  said  Norris. 

"  Let  her  go!"  I  cried,  and  took  a  breath  and  held  it,  and 
ducked  my  head. 

The  current  caught  me.  I  experienced  but  a  momentary 
pang  of  fear;  and  then  succeeded  a  pleasurable  sense  of  ex- 
citement. The  next  moment  my  feet  touched  something  more 
yielding  than  rock,  and  that  was  the  signal  to  lift  my  head  to 
the  surface.  I  was  in  the  cavern.  I  slipped  out  of  the  noose, 
and  gave  the  signal  to  haul  away,  and  the  rope  went  out  of  my 
hand.  I  crawled  out  of  the  stream. 


WE  ARE  TRAPPED  251 

It  seemed  little  more  than  a  minute,  and  Robert  was  beside 
me.  I  heard  him  gasping  for  his  first  breath. 

"  Who'd  have  thought  it  would  be  so  easy,"  he  said. 

We  took  in  the  rope  and  hurried  out  to  our  old  camp  in  the 
brush.  We  knew  well  where  to  lay  our  hands  on  the  rifles  — 
Marat's  and  Robert's  and  mine.  There  were  some  hundreds  of 
rounds  of  cartridges  for  the  larger  guns  —  Marat's  and  Nor- 
ris's  —  and  many  more  of  the  twenty-two  calibre  for  our  little 
rifles. 

We  tarried  not  at  all,  but  got  back  through  the  cascade  into 
the  cavern  again,  and  so  up  and  out,  on  the  way  to  that  cliff- 
top. 

We  moved  cautiously,  as  we  neared  those  cedars,  where  hung 
the  rope  ladder,  for  it  was  probable  there  should  be  a  peril 
there,  in  the  shape  of  a  black,  guarding  the  ladder,  and  it  was 
in  reason  that  he  should  have  some  kind  of  weapon.  Our  plan 
of  action  had  been  determined  before  we  left  Norris.  We 
would  surprise  the  fellow,  pounce  on  him  and  secure  him  with 
the  rope. 

Then  we  would  let  down  the  ladder  to  Norris  and  Carlos, 
who  would  come  up  and  help  us  lower  the  captive  into  the 
vale. 

Our  bare  feet  crept  forward  at  a  snail's  pace,  nearer  and 
nearer  to  the  cedars.  A  pebble  rolled,  and  suddenly  a  figure 
rose  up  before  us  with  a  startled  grunt.  And  that  instant  it 
toppled  over  the  the  cliff -edge  with  a  guttural  cry;  and  we 
heard  nothing  more. 

In  a  minute  we  had  the  rope  ladder  unrolling,  down  the  cliff- 
side.  We  threw  down  the  loose  end  of  halliard,  and  began  the 
descent. 


252  THE  VOODOO  GOLD   TRAIL 

"  I  didn't  expect  we'd  get  him  down  so  easy,"  observed 
Robert,  seeking  comfort  in  a  grim  joke. 

"  I  wish  it  could  have  been  as  we  planned/'  I  said.  I 
sickened  at  the  thought  of  that  mangled  body  somewhere  down 
below. 

We  soon  had  our  feet  on  the  sloping  ledge.  Norris  and 
Carlos  stood  there  waiting. 

"  Did  you  have  to  throw  him  down?"  queried  Norris.  And 
then,  when  I  had  related  the  circumstance: — "He  must  have 
been  asleep,"  he  said. 

Having  pulled  the  ladder  up  to  the  cedars,  I  took  up  the 
loose  end  of  the  halliard,  and  climbing  as  high  as  I  dared  ven- 
ture among  the  vines,  I  made  fast  the  rope  so  that  Duran  would 
not  easily  discover  it. 

Norris  and  Carlos  had  made  some  disposition  of  the  black's 
body,  for  which  I  was  thankful;  for  I  had  no  wish  to  set  my 
eye  on  the  thing,  even  in  the  dark. 

Norris  and  Carlos  took  over  the  heavy  ammunition,  and 
we  set  off  up  the  vale.  It  was  a  silent  file  that  stole  cautiously 
through  the  woods,  till  we  had  joined  Marat  and  Ray,  who 
were  greatly  relieved  to  learn  that  our  adventure  had  been 
carried  through  without  unhappy  accident.  That  it  had  cost 
the  life  of  one  of  the  enemy  was  accounted  a  gain.  There  had 
fallen  an  accession  to  our  party,  too,  while  we  were  gone;  and 
Hawkins  and  the  black  boy  had  stolen  away  from  Duran 's 
party  soon  after  the  arrival  at  the  huts. 

"  The  boss,"  said  Hawkins,  "  'ee  butchered  some  chickens, 
and  'ee  began  to  dose  them  niggers  up  on  the  rum." 

The  black  boy  had  told  Jean  Marat  a  startling  piece  of 
news:  no  less  than  that  Duran  had  promised  his  voodoo  crew 


WE  ARE  TRAPPED  253 

a  feasting,  on  the  morrow,  on  the  hearts  of  his  white  enemies. 

"  They've  a  surprise  in  store  for  them,  I  guess,"  said  Norris, 
when  Marat  had  repeated  the  intelligence. 

"  Yes,  I  think,"  agreed  Captain  Marat.  "We  maybe  feed 
them  on  thing'  what  give  indigestion."  And  he  continued  to 
distribute  about  his  person  his  share  of  the  ammunition. 

Day  was  not  many  hours  off,  and  Norris  and  Marat  put 
their  heads  together  to  discuss  the  plan  of  battle.  At  the  first, 
we  were  to  be  on  the  defensive,  and  when  the  enemy  had  been 
given  a  proper  reception,  a  vigorous  offensive  action  was  to 
follow  with  the  purpose  to  quickly  demoralize  the  blacks. 
Robert  and  I  came  forward  with  the  suggestion  that  while 
Marat  and  Norris  should  crouch  behind  some  breastworks  of 
logs,  that  should  be  thrown  up  at  the  edge  of  the  clearing, 
Robert  and  I  would  seek  sheltered  places  well  forward  on 
either  side  of  the  clearing,  and  with  our  little  silent  guns  we 
would  throw  lead  into  the  feet  and  legs  of  any  blacks  who 
should  spread  out  to  either  flank.  And  thus  we  would  help  to 
keep  the  enemy  in  a  single  mass  during  their  attack,  which 
would  give  Norris  and  Marat  their  chance. 

Some  parts  of  fallen  trees  were  dragged  near  the  edge  of 
the  clearing.  And  then  a  fire  was  made  back  among  the  trees, 
with  the  intent  to  give  direction  to  the  enemy  when  they  should 
come.  When  we  had  all  taken  our  places:  I  was  at  the  edge 
of  the  clearing,  close  to  the  beginning  of  the  path;  Carlos 
crouched  with  me  behind  a  tree,  to  lend  me  his  eyes;  Ray  was 
doing  the  same  for  Robert  on  the  opposite  side  of  the  clearing; 
Marat  and  Norris  lay  behind  their  breastworks;  Hawkins  and 
the  black  boy  were  at  the  back,  ready  to  call,  in  any  case  of 
need. 


254  THE  VOODOO   GOLD   TRAIL 

You  will  never  think  that  our  situation  was  an  agreeable 
one.  I  know  I  speak  for  all  of  our  party  —  except  perhaps, 
Norris  and  Carlos  —  when  I  say  that  we  would  gladly  have 
escaped  from  that  vale,  and  boarded  the  Pearl,  to  sail  away 
without  thought  of  return.  And  you  will  say,  there  was  the 
rope  ladder  ready  to  our  hand,  and  none  to  block  the  way. 
But  not  one  among  us  had  the  hardihood  to  suggest  retreat. 
It  was  Norris  held  us,  of  that  I  am  sure;  throughout,  the 
thought  of  retreat  never  entered  his  mind;  that  must  have 
been  plain  to  us  all.  We  had  some  things  in  our  favor.  Marat 
and  Norris,  each  with  his  own  heavy-powered  rifle,  had  long 
ago  forgotten  what  it  was  to  miss;  Robert  and  I,  with  our 
little  guns,  rarely  ever  lost  our  target. 

After  our  fire  had  been  set  alight,  not  a  sound  had  come 
from  the  huts.  Night  birds  and  tree-toads  intoned  peaceful 
notes.  The  night  breeze  rustled  the  tops  of  the  taller  palms. 
I  crouched  at  the  foot  of  my  tree,  getting  much  comfort  of  the 
sound  of  Carlos'  breathing  close  by.  Fortunately  I  had  not  to 
bear  that  suspense  for  long. 

The  first  hint  of  dawn  had  hardly  showed  above  the  trees, 
when  that  score  of  blacks  poured  into  view  by  the  huts,  each 
holding  a  gun.  They  moved  forward,  four  or  five  spreading  out 
on  either  flank.  There  was  one  who  was  about  to  enter  the 
wood  to  my  right.  I  drew  bead  on  his  foot  and  pulled  the 
trigger.  The  black  stooped,  uttering  a  painful  grunt.  I  did 
the  same  for  the  next  near  black  fellow.  He  cried  out  with  the 
pain.  And  the  two  forthwith  limped  back  the  way  they  had 
come.  The  others  of  the  stragglers  on  my  side  showed  them- 
selves startled  at  this  inexplicable  conduct  of  their  two  fellows, 
and  fell  in  to  the  main  body. 


WE  ARE  TRAPPED  255 

A  glance  told  me  that  Robert  was  having  similar  luck  on 
his  side.  And  there  was  evident  consternation  among  those  of 
the  enemy  who  saw  some  of  their  comrades  limping  painfully 
away;  for  up  to  now  there  had  been  no  sound  to  account  for 
such  conduct. 

But  now  the  quiet  of  that  dawn  was  broken.  Two  loud 
reports  rang  out  and  set  echoes  going  in  the  vale.  Two  more 
shots  followed,  and  there  lay  four  writhing  black  voodoos  on 
the  ground.  The  rest  of  the  blacks  let  go  one  volley,  and  then 
broke  and  ran.  One  more  among  them  fell  before  they  gained 
shelter  behind  the  huts. 

Then  Norris  joined  me  where  I  crouched.  "No  one  hurt 
amongst  us,  I  guess,"  he  observed,  as  he  kept  his  eyes  on  the 
structures.  When  a  head  or  shoulder  showed  there,  he  let  fly 
at  it  with  a  ball.  We  heard  an  occasional  shot  from  Marat's 
rifle  on  the  east  side  of  the  clearing,  where  he  had  gone  to  join 
Robert. 

"  If  you  can  drive  'em  back  into  the  cave  we've  got  'em," 
spoke  the  voice  of  Hawkins.  "Hi'll  take  care  of  'em  then,  Hi 
will."  And  he  crept  up  and  whispered  something  into  Norris' 
ear. 

"Good!"  said  Norris.  "We'll  get  them  there.  Run  round 
and  tell  that  to  Marat." 

And  the  fellow  set  off  through  the  woods  to  get  round  to 
Captain  Marat. 

For  a  time,  the  enemy  let  off  an  occasional  shot  on  general 
principles,  and  without  effect,  but  soon  lost  all  ambition,  ap- 
parently, and  silence  reigned.  It  was  then  I  heard  an  excla- 
mation from  Carlos.  "Ah!  Duranl"  he  cried,  and  he  set  off 
through  the  brush. 


256  THE  VOODOO  GOLD  TRAIL 

Instinctively  I  followed  him.  Directly,  we  were  on  the  path. 
When  we  had  crossed  the  ridge,  I  saw  Duran  out  in  the  open, 
legging  it  toward  the  cliff  under  the  cedars,  and  calling  out 
as  he  ran.  Doubtless  he  called  to  the  black  he  had  left  in 
charge  of  the  rope  ladder  —  he  who  now  lay,  a  mangled  corpse 
at  the  foot.  He  continued  to  call  as  he  hurried  up  that  inclined 
ledge.  But  no  ladder  came  down  to  him. 

Carlos  was  at  the  foot  of  the  incline  when  Duran  reached 
the  limit  of  the  ledge.  On  up  that  way  sped  Carlos,  after  him. 
My  heart,  my  breath,  my  feet,  all  alike  stopped,  as  I  awaited 
the  clash.  And  then  it  came.  The  struggle  was  short.  The  two 
tripped  over  the  edge  together.  I  saw  Carlos  grasp  at  some 
growth;  it  tore  loose.  And  then  he  seized  on  a  vine,  finally 
sliding  to  the  bottom.  I  rushed  to  him.  He  had  escaped  with 
a  badly  wrenched  shoulder. 

Duran  lay  at  the  rocky  foot  of  the  cliff  in  a  heap,  the  death- 
rattle  already  in  his  throat.  He  had  broken  his  skull. 


CHAPTER  XXIX 

HOW  THE  ENEMY  PERISH 

AND 
THE  MONKEY  DISCOVERS   THE   TREASURE 

IT  was  some  minutes  before  Carlos  could  hold  up  his  head, 
so  badly  shaken  was  he.  I  went  all  over  him,  and  had  soon 
satisfied  myself  there  were  no  broken  bones.  He  had  been 
saved  by  the  very  mass  of  vines  that  had  before  preserved  me 
from  death.  His  fall  had  been  but  forty  feet,  and  mine  had 
been  many  times  that;  a  fall,  after  a  manner  of  saying,  for,  as 
will  be  remembered,  I  slid  down  the  rope  halliard  the  greater 
part  of  the  descent. 

I  ran  through  the  wood  to  the  creek,  and  brought  Carlos  a 
drink;  and  it  was  then  he  got  to  his  feet.  We  stood  looking 
on  the  now  quite  inanimate  form  of  Duran,  for  a  little,  neither 
of  us  speaking  his  thoughts.  I  could  not  tell  by  Carlos'  stoic 
features  what  there  was  in  his  mind;  but  in  mine  there  was 
admixture,  of  some  sorrow,  that  the  presence  of  death  always 
puts  into  one  when  excitement  is  gone,  but  more  of  a  sense  of 
elation  that  Duran  had  come  by  his  death  in  the  manner  he 
had.  For  whatever  intent  Carlos  had  entertained  in  his  mind, 
he  had  not  actually  slain  the  man  with  his  own  hand.  And 
there  on  the  ground,  too,  lay  a  knife  that  Duran  had  tried  to 
use  on  Carlos,  who  was  without  a  weapon  of  any  sort,  his  own 
knife  being  in  the  camp. 

257 


258  THE  VOODOO  GOLD  TRAIL 

It  was  time  we  were  on  the  way  to  join  our  friends.  I  had 
been  hearing  occasional  shots,  but  when  we  turned  away  from 
Duran's  body,  all  sounds  had  ceased.  We  crossed  the  ridge, 
and  in  a  little  had  come  to  the  clearing.  There  was  no  one  in 
sight;  so  we  went  round  within  the  edge  of  the  wood  back  of 
the  huts;  and  as  we  neared  the  cliffs  my  nostrils  were  filled 
with  the  odor  of  sulphur.  And  we  had  no  sooner  got  to  the 
edge  of  the  little  open  space  in  front  of  the  cave,  than  Robert 
was  upon  us  and  pulled  us  to  the  ground.  He  had  us  to  crawl 
after  him  to  where  Norris  and  Marat  lay,  gun  in  hand,  behind 
a  fallen  tree-trunk. 

They  had  their  eyes  on  the  mouth  of  the  cave,  and  looking 
over  there,  I  saw  a  curious  thing.  A  fire  burned  at  the  very 
entrance  of  the  cave;  and  on  the  one  side,  Andy  Hawkins 
lingered  beside  a  pile  of  dried  brush-wood  and  dead  palm 
leaves.  This  fuel  he  cast  on  the  flames,  from  time  to  time. 
Ray  and  the  black  boy  soon  came  to  view,  back  of  Hawkins, 
with  arms  filled  with  more  fuel  which  they  added  to  the  pile. 

I  now  saw  how  it  was;  the  enemy  had  taken  refuge  in  the 
cave,  and  now  our  party  were  smoking  them  out.  The  smoke, 
I  saw,  was  drawn  into  the  cavern  as  into  a  chimney;  and  I 
remembered  how,  when  I  was  in  the  cave,  I  had  felt  the  draft 
of  air  going  through.  I  looked  up  the  cliff -side;  and  there,  far 
to  the  left,  I  saw  a  wee  column  of  smoke  going  up  from  a  cleft. 
And  then  —  there  was  that  odor  of  sulphur  again.  Smoking 
them  out!  Ay,  but  how  smoking  them  out?  My  flesh  crept 
with  the  horror  of  the  thing.  This  was  the  miserable  Hawkins' 
doing.  I  remembered  now  that  word  he  had  let  drop  about  his 
taking  care  of  them  if  we  should  but  drive  them  into  the  cave 
—  and  his  whispering  in  Norris'  ear.  I  felt  sick. 


HOW   THE   ENEMY  PERISH  259 

"  Are  we  doing  right?"  I  said  to  Norris,  beside  whom  I 
crouched. 

"Right!"  he  said,  turning  an  angry  look  at  me.  "Didn't 
they  plan  to  eat  our  hearts  this  night?  And  didn't  they  attack 
us,  twenty  guns  against  four  —  the  murderous,  child-eating 
cannibals?  And  isn't  smoking  as  easy  a  death  as  hanging? 
What  do  you  want?" 

I  was  effectively  silenced.  And  then  I  thought,  too,  on  the 
alternative.  Suppose  we  retire  and  let  the  blacks  out.  Would 
they  go  their  ways  and  let  us  alone?  I  knew  better.  They 
would  simply  set  a  strong  guard  on  the  only  exit;  and  then 
collect  many  more  of  their  voodoo  comrades;  and  they  would 
have  our  hearts  for  a  voodoo  feast  in  the  end.  So  I  gave  in  to 
this  thing  that  was  going  on,  distasteful  as  I  found  it. 

I  watched  Andy  Hawkins  over  there.  That  thin  body  of  his 
squirmed  with  his  infirmity,  and  made  him  seem  to  be  in  the 
throes  of  a  heathen  dance,  as  he  plied  the  fire  with  the  fuel. 
The  volumes  of  yellow-white  smoke  continued  to  pour  into 
the  cave's  mouth.  It  was  burning  sulphur,  as  I  learned. 

It  may  have  been  two  hours  that  we  lay  behind  that  fallen 
tree,  and  the  sun  was  mounted  well  on  toward  the  zenith. 
Then  Norris  and  Marat  conferred,  and  decided  that  the  enemy 
must  be  in  a  state  beyond  all  power  of  striking  back.  So  we 
approached  the  fire  and  pulled  it  away  from  the  cave's  mouth. 
But  nearly  another  hour  passed  before  we  ventured  in.  Norris 
took  the  lead  with  a  battery  lamp,  the  rest  of  us  following. 

A  little  way  within,  we  came  upon  a  body  that  lay  in  a  pool 
of  blood.  He  was  one  that  sought  to  rush  out,  and  got  a  ball 
in  his  body.  Then  at  various  portions  of  the  passage  we  saw 
three  more  blacks,  all  inanimate.  And  at  the  uttermost  con- 


260  THE  VOODOO  GOLD  TRAIL 

fines  of  the  cave,  just  below  that  narrow  opening  out  —  the 
chimney,  as  it  were  —  all  the  rest  lay  in  various  postures, 
where  they  fell,  choked  by  the  fumes. 

"  Well,  they  all  got  just  what  they  earned,"  observed  Norris. 
"The  world  would  be  better,  if  all  of  their  kind  were  here  with 
them." 

"  Yes,"  agreed  Jean  Marat,  "but  Duran,  he  ees  not  here. 
I  am  ver'  sorry  he  ees  not  here  weeth  hees  voodoo  frien's." 

I  had  not  told  of  Duran's  accident  at  the  foot  of  the  ladder. 
Now  I  told  it. 

"Ah!  You  don't  say!"  said  Norris.  "Are  you  sure  he's 
dead?" 

"  Yes,"  I  assured  him.   "His  skull  was  fractured." 

"  We're  in  great  luck,"  said  Norris.  "Now  we've  got  the 
whole  secret  of  this  place  among  us.  And  Carlos,  you  had  a 
narrow  escape." 

"  Yes,"  said  Carlos.  "And  my  father,  hees  murderer,  he 
dead." 

We  dug  a  long  trench  just  without  that  cave;  and  it  was 
well  past  noon  when  we  had  dragged  out  the  blacks  and  buried 
them  in  it,  with  the  five  that  had  fallen  at  the  clearing.  We 
took  a  meal  before  we  went  down  the  vale,  and  placed  Duran 
and  that  other  black  in  another  grave. 

It  was  while  we  were  dining  (and  it  was  a  pair  of  Duran's 
chickens  that  made  our  feast)  that  Andy  Hawkins  told  how 
he  had  come  by  the  conceit  of  the  sulphur  fumes.  It  was  one 
day  that  he  had  watched  Duran,  when  he  took  a  chicken  tied 
by  the  legs,  into  the  cave.  Duran  had  then  set  a  tin,  holding 
the  sulphur,  at  the  entrance,  and  built  a  fire  about  it.  An  hour 
or  two  later,  he  had  brought  out  the  chicken,  quite  dead. 


HOW  THE   ENEMY   PERISH  261 

"  I  thought  to  myself  then,"  continued  Hawkins,  "An'  w'y 
does  the  boss  be  doin'  of  that  thing?  And  then  I  got  the  idea. 
'Ah,  'ee's  a  slick  one,  the  boss  is,'  sez  I  to  myself.  '  'Ee's  after 
findin'  a  easy  way,  maybe,  to  get  rid  of  anyone  as  is  in  'is 
way  'ere.  And  that  might  be  you,  Handy  'Awkins,  and  you'll 
better  keep  out  of  that  cave!' ' 

We  took  possession  of  the  palm-thatched  huts;  and  made 
beds,  of  palm  fans  for  mattresses,  which  was  pretty  much  all 
the  bedding  that  was  required,  though  Duran  had  blankets 
enough  to  cover  us  all  in  the  event  of  a  chill  night.  Out  be- 
tween the  structures  was  the  kitchen;  and  this  was  no  more 
than  a  kind  of  shallow  box,  sand  filled,  and  elevated  on  four 
posts,  to  make  the  fire  on;  with  overhead  a  roof  —  palm- 
thatched  —  for  shade,  and  protection  against  rain. 

Our  day  had  been  pretty  full,  and  when  supper  had  been 
disposed  of,  all  were  ready  to  stretch  out  at  full  length  for  a 
needed  rest.  It  was  not  altogether  such  a  cheerful  company  as 
you  might  suppose.  Even  Ray  was  more  dashed  in  spirit  than 
I  have  seen  him  in  many  a  day.  You  might  say  that  we  had 
every  reason  to  be  in  high  feather,  having  so  lately  been  de- 
livered of  a  great  peril;  not  to  say  that  we  were  in  addition 
well  rid  of  Duran,  who  alone  was  in  a  position  —  rightly  or 
wrongly  —  to  dispute  with  us  the  possession  of  this  gold-paved 
vale. 

But  if  you  think  we  should  have  felt  blithe  that  night,  it  will 
be  because  you  have  never  been  in  the  presence  of  so  much 
death.  I  know  the  thought  worked  continually  in  my  mind, 
of  that  score  and  more  of  humans  —  however  villainous  they 
may  have  been  —  that  but  a  few  hours  before  had  danced  with 
life  and  vigour,  and  were  now  already  beginning  to  rot  in  their 


262  THE  VOODOO  GOLD  TRAIL 

graves.  Only  Norris  and  Hawkins  refused  to  be  downcast; 
Norris,  because  he  had  been  accustomed  to  battle,  and  had 
learned  through  discipline  to  rebate  his  natural  qualms;  with 
Hawkins,  it  was  his  dulled  moral  sense. 

"  Now  tomorrow,"  said  Norris,  "we  must  find  that  place 
where  Duran  has  been  storing  the  gold."  ( Duran 's  taking  off 
had  so  far  softened  him  at  least,  that  he  refrained  from  re- 
ferring to  him  as  "the  skunk.")  He  continued,  "I  know  bloom- 
ing well  he  has  taken  out  of  this  place  only  a  small  part  of 
what  has  been  mined." 

And  Hawkins  (and  the  black  boy,  too,  when  questioned) 
agreed  with  Norris. 

"  Thad  Duran  was  ver'  clever,"  said  Jean  Marat.  "He  find 
one  ver'  good  place  to  hide  thad  gold." 

And  now,  it  would  never  be  guessed  how  we  came  upon  a 
clue  to  that  spot.  It  came  about  this  way.  Although  we  turned 
in  early,  we  were  that  wearied  that  day  came  and  caught  us, 
every  one,  sound  asleep.  I  was  the  first  to  wake;  and  it  was 
with  the  feel  of  a  wee  hand  upon  my  face.  And  when  I  opened 
my  eyes,  there  was  the  monkey.  And  he  held  out  to  me  one  of 
Duran's  sections  of  bamboo. 

I  sat  up,  startled,  and  took  the  thing  he  held  out,  and  it  was 
weighty,  like  those  others  laden  with  the  gold. 

The  monkey  observed  me  narrowly,  as  though  to  gauge  the 
degree  of  my  interest  in  the  object  he  had  given  me.  Then  he 
took  my  hand;  and  without  stopping  to  slip  on  my  shoes,  I 
allowed  the  little  animal  to  lead  me  forth. 

My  heart  thumped  in  excitement  of  anticipation ;  I  was  filled 
with  a  hope,  as  we  went  into  the  wood  back  of  the  huts,  mak- 
ing direct  toward  the  cliffs.  He  led  me  to  where  the  vines, 


HOW   THE   ENEMY  PERISH  263 

in  a  dense  mass,  went  climbing  up  the  rocky  wall  to  a  very 
considerable  height.  There  he  let  go  my  hand  and  leaped  upon 
the  vines,  and  began  to  climb,  looking  over  his  shoulder,  as  if 
expecting  me  to  follow  monkey-fashion. 

Then,  seeing  me  hesitate,  the  monkey  came  down,  and  took 
me  by  the  hand  again.  And,  curious,  I  stepped  forward,  to 
find  that  where  the  vines  sprang  from  the  ground  the  wall  as- 
cended, for  some  six  or  eight  feet,  in  a  gentle  slope  that  I  could 
climb  with  ease. 

When  I  got  so  far,  and  spread  apart  the  vines,  to  my  amaze- 
ment I  discovered  that  what  I  had  thought  was  a  part  of  the 
cliff  wall,  was  no  real  piece  of  the  cliff  at  all,  but  just  a  ridge; 
and  behind  it,  and  concealed  by  the  mass  of  vines,  was  a  bit 
of  a  dingle,  perhaps  fifteen  feet  across.  The  monkey  and  I 
descended  into  the  place;  and  as  my  eyes  became  accustomed 
to  the  comparative  darkness,  I  made  out  the  low  entrance  to 
a  cavern. 

Stooping  low,  I  followed  the  monkey  in.  Twenty  steps,  and 
I  heard  the  squeaking  monkey-talk  at  my  feet.  Then  I  felt 
another  bamboo  cylinder  pressed  to  my  hand;  and  I  stooped 
to  feel  a  heap  of  the  bamboo,  of  unknown  proportions.  I  took 
up  several  of  the  cylinders.  All  were  heavy. 

At  last  we  had  the  thing  we  sought.  And  it  took  a  monkey 
to  find  it  for  us!  My  battery  lamp  was  out  there  in  the  hut; 
I  did  not  tarry  to  investigate  further,  but  hurried  out;  and, 
followed  by  the  nimble  monkey  got  back  to  my  friends,  who 
were  now  astir. 

The  black  boy  was  kindling  a  fire  on  the  elevated  hearth; 
Norris  stood  looking  on.  At  my  approach  he  turned. 

"Hello!"  he  said.   "And  where " 


264  THE  VOODOO   GOLD   TRAIL 

He  cut  off  his  speech  at  sight  of  the  bamboo  I  carried  in  my 
hands. 

"  Say,  now!"  he  began  again,  and  he  seized  and  hefted  the 
things.  "Where  have  you  been  picking  up  these?" 

By  this  time  all  the  party  were  crowded  round,  and  the  mon- 
key scrambled  to  my  shoulder.  I  told  the  story  of  the  find. 

"  Aw,"  began  Ray,  "he's  just  trying  to  make  monkeys  of  the 
whole  crowd." 

They  all  wanted  to  fondle  the  animal,  who,  scolding,  wormed 
himself  out  of  their  hands  and  scurried  up  a  post  to  the  kitchen 
roof. 

"  Now  you  know  I  told  you,  Norris,"  said  Ray,  "It  would 
be  Wayne  that  would  find  it." 

"  It's  all  right,  Ray,"  I  told  him.  "I  don't  mind  your  giv- 
ing my  name  to  the  monk." 

There  would  be  no  breakfast  till  they  had  seen  the  place. 

"  We've  got  to  see  how  much  there  is  there,"  declared  Norris. 

And  off  we  went,  the  monkey  again  leading  the  way,  over  the 
little  rising,  through  the  curtain  of  vines,  and  into  the  cave. 
The  lights  illumined  the  place,  and  the  sounds  of  amazement 
echoed.  For  there,  on  the  floor,  heaped  on  a  tarpaulin,  showed 
bushels  of  yellow,  glinting  gold-dust  and  nuggets.  And  there 
were  beside  it  two  greater  piles  of  the  bamboo  cylinders,  the 
one  heap  already  gold-laden,  as  we  found;  and  the  other  await- 
ing the  filling.  On  the  ground  stood  a  tin  holding  pitch,  for 
sealing;  and  there  were  small  bricks  of  cork,  and  pieces  of  life- 
jackets,  torn  open  to  extract  the  cork.  A  ship's  lantern  stood 
on  a  projection  of  rock. 

"  I  never  saw  such  a  pile  of  the  stuff!"  spoke  Grant  Norris, 
plunging  his  fist  in  the  yellow  mass. 


HOW   THE   ENEMY   PERISH  265 

Many  hands  went  in  to  feel  of  the  precious  commodity,  and 
nuggets  of  varying  size  were  held  to  the  light.  Even  the  mon- 
key must  imitate  the  others,  and  enjoy  the  feel  of  the  yellow 
stuff;  and  he  insisted  on  pressing  nugget  after  nugget  into  my 
hand. 

Andy  Hawkins  had  soon  borrowed  Robert's  light,  and  with 
many  jerks  and  grimaces  he  poked  about  in  the  nooks  and 
crannies  in  search  of  something.  I  easily  guessed  what  the 
thing  was  that  he  put  above  the  gold  in  his  interest ;  for  it  had 
been  plain  that  Duran  doled  out  the  drug  to  Hawkins  in  a 
fashion  that  best  served  his  ( Duran Js)  interest.  And,  having 
an  eye  on  Hawkins's  doings,  I  observed  him  at  last  to  pounce 
on  and  bring  out  a  little  parcel  from  a  nook,  his  face  lighting 
up  with  a  gleam  of  victory.  Later  in  the  day,  when  I  had  told 
Norris  of  the  circumstances,  he  bullied  Hawkins  into  giving 
up  the  supply  of  drug,  telling  him  that  he  (Norris)  would 
perhaps  be  a  better  judge  of  dosage  than  the  patient  himself. 

Before  we  left  that  cave,  we  explored  the  place,  to  find  that 
it  was  but  a  small  affair,  going  in  not  above  a  hundred  feet. 
It  was  a  joyous  breakfast  we  sat  down  to  at  the  huts,  for  we 
had  now  attained  the  thing  we  sought;  and  we  had  every  rea- 
son to  believe  that  no  one  living,  outside  of  our  little  party, 
had  any  knowledge  of  this  hidden  vale  with  its  gold  mine,  so 
long  ago  discovered  by  the  father  of  Carlos.  And  all  our  talk 
now  turned  on  how  we  should  get  all  that  mined  gold  out  and 
aboard  the  Pearl,  and  not  forgetting  that  unknown  portion  of 
the  treasure  that  yet  remained  to  be  discovered  on  the  isle  out 
in  Crow  Bay. 

"  We  can  find  that  without  much  trouble,"  declared  Robert. 

"  Yes,"  agreed  Captain  Marat,  "We  know  ver'  close  where 


266  THE  VOODOO   GOLD   TRAIL 

thad  place  ees.  We  take  the  schooner  in  to  the  bay,  an'  then 
eet  will  nod  be  so  ver'  hard  to  ged  all  of  thad  gold  on  board." 

I  observed  that  we  seemed  to  be  forgetting  that  black  that 
Robert  and  Carlos  had  seen  on  the  isle,  and  the  schooner, 
Orion. 

"  Yes,  I've  been  thinking  of  that,"  said  Norris.  "We'll  have 
to  be  getting  over  there,  or  that  crew'll  be  stealing  a  march  on 
us." 

In  an  hour  we  were  off.  Andy  Hawkins  and  Black  Boy  were 
left  behind,  to  keep  house.  We  promised  them  they'd  see  us 
back  the  second  day  at  the  latest;  and  then  it  would  not  be 
long  till  they  should  have  a  sight  of  the  world  —  again  for  the 
one,  and  for  the  first  time  for  the  other. 

In  that  open  bit,  below  the  ladder,  we  stopped  a  moment 
beside  the  two  mounds  covering  Duran  and  the  black  sentinel. 

Grant  Norris  was  looking  down  on  that  of  Duran. 

"  Drop  a  tear  on  him,"  said  Ray  to  Norris.  "Think  of  all 
the  fun  and  excitement  he  gave  you." 

"  He  was  a  queer  composition,"  observed  Norris.  "I've  met 
many  queer  cusses,  but  he's  the  first  white  cannibal  I  ever 
saw." 

We  soon  had  down  the  rope  ladder;  and  when  all  had 
mounted  to  the  cliff-top,  we  pulled  up  the  halliard,  for  we  had 
no  real  assurance  that  that  ex-pickpocket,  Hawkins,  might  not 
take  it  into  his  head  to  climb  out  and  wander  off  to  our 
betrayal. 

When  we  got  to  our  boat,  a  pair  of  us  sat  ourselves  in  Dur- 
an's  canoe,  and  soon  we  were  out  on  Crow  Bay.  It  was  with 
some  satisfaction  that  we  noted  the  absence  of  any  sail  upon 
that  water.  Those  black  sailors  of  Duran's  had  apparently  not 


HOW  THE  ENEMY  PERISH  267 

seen  fit  to  venture  in  as  yet  in  quest  of  the  treasure  in  the 
isle. 

We  crossed  the  end  of  the  bay,  and  in  time  had  joined  Ju- 
lian Lamartine  and  Rufe,  aboard  the  Pearl. 


CHAPTER  XXX 

THE   CACHE   ON   THE  ISLE 

JULIAN  was  much  relieved,  but  Rufe  was  overjoyed  to  see  us. 

"  De  Lord  o'  massy!"  he  began,  "but  Fs  glad  to  see  you-all! 
Whah  you  been  all  dis  heah  time?  I  jes'  been  a- telling  Jul'en, 
boy,  dat  shu'ah  dem  voodoo  niggahs  got  ye.  I  hopes,  now,  you- 
all  is  gwine  to  gib  up  dat  ol'  gold-huntin'." 

"  Give  up!"  said  Ray.  "Say,  Rufe,  did  you  ever  think  Nor- 
ris  would  ever  give  up  anything?  Why ." 

"  Look  here,  Rufe,"  broke  in  Norris  thrusting  a  pretty  nug- 
get under  the  cook's  nose.  "Does  that  look  like  giving  up  gold- 
hunting?" 

Rufe's  eyes  bulged.    "Is  dat  sho'  'miff  gold?"  he  queried. 

And  then  we  began  with  our  story.  And  Rufe  must  have  us 
over  by  the  galley  door  to  continue  the  tale,  while  he  hurried 
dinner,  for  he  said,  "I  jes'  knows  you-all  is  nigh  about  starved 
out." 

The  black  sailors  were  squatted  in  a  circle,  up  near  the  bows, 
when  we  came  aboard,  and  dice  rattled  on  the  deck,  with  snaps 
of  fingers  and  sharp  orders  spoken  to  the  bones  for  their  bet- 
ter performance.  Julian  said  it  was  the  dice  kept  them  con- 
tented, day  after  day  and  they  were  at  the  game  continuously. 

During  the  meal  our  plans  for  the  following  days  came  to  a 

268 


THE  CACHE  ON  THE  ISLE  269 

head.  It  was  the  purpose  to  sail  the  Pearl  round  to  and  through 
the  tortuous  channel  into  Crow  Bay.  The  schooner  would  go 
out  from  the  cove  under  the  land  breeze,  sometime  between 
nine  o'clock  at  night  and  morning,  and  the  trade  wind  —  from 
the  northeast  —  would  take  her  into  Crow  Bay  the  next  day. 
Three  of  us  would  row  in  the  little  boat,  down  the  bay  to  that 
isle,  to  see  that  the  coast  should  be  dear.  The  afternoon  was 
not  idle,  for  Norris  was  full  of  preparation  for  the  reception  of 
all  that  treasure  —  gold-dust;  and  there  must  be  bins  made  in 
the  schooner's  hold,  for,  "we'll  have  to  dump  some  of  it  in,  like 
grain,"  he  said.  "We  haven't  time  to  build  chests  for  it  all." 
And  then  Robert  and  I  were  tired  of  the  stain  on  our  skins, 
and  must  have  it  off. 

Before  night  spread  over  the  region,  Norris,  with  his  big 
rifle,  and  Robert  and  I  with  our  little  ones,  were  in  the  skiff, 
moving  slowly  out  on  Crow  Bay.  There  was  no  sign  of  a  boat 
on  the  bay  yet. 

"  I  guess  they  got  scared  out,"  said  Norris,  "and  are  still 
tying  in  some  cove,  waiting  for  word  from  Duran." 

In  these  tropics  you  sweep  the  bright  daylight  landscape 
\vith  your  eyes,  noting  the  graceful  palms  bowing  to  you  over 
the  beach;  then  you  close  your  eyes,  count  a  few  hundred 
slowly,  open  them  again,  and  —  presto!  all  is  black  night,  and 
the  palms  have  melted  into  eternity,  or  are  dimly  silhouetted 
against  the  night  sky.  The  narrow  crescent  of  the  new  moon 
was  among  the  tops  of  the  palms  behind  us. 

Within  the  hour,  we  made  landing  on  the  isle.  We  dragged 
our  boat  up  into  the  brush,  and  then  moved  back  through  the 
wood  to  the  edge  of  the  clearing.  A  light  shone  in  the  win- 
dow of  the  hut.  We  crept  up  and  looked  in.  That  same  portly 


270  THE  VOODOO   GOLD  TRAIL 

black  was  there,  and  he  was  in  the  midst  of  preparations  to 
turn  into  his  bunk.  In  another  minute  he  put  out  the  light. 

We  decided  to  go  round  the  island  beach  for  signs  of  any 
recent  landing  parties.  We  found  the  boat,  used  by  the  black 
of  the  cabin,  in  its  usual  place.  Then  we  took  to  the  beach, 
and  with  the  occasional  use  of  our  battery  lamps,  we  examined 
the  sand  floor  as  we  went.  We  completed  the  circuit,  seeing 
nothing  to  our  interest.  And  then  Norris  was  for  at  once  going 
into  that  thicket  where  Robert  and  Carlos  had  witnessed  the 
going  in  and  out  of  Duran  and  that  mysterious,  naked  black. 

Robert  led  the  way,  which  took  us  into  the  clearing  to  the 
north  of  the  cabin.  In  a  little,  we  had  found  a  winding  way, 
cut  into  the  thicket.  In  the  center  of  that  jungle  we  came  into 
a  space  having  the  dimensions  of  a  small  room.  The  floor  was 
level  —  of  sand.  We  threw  our  light  around. 

"  Not  a  sign  of  anything  here,"  declared  Norris. 

But  Robert  had  another  word  to  say.  "Here  it  is!"  he  cried. 
And  we  joined  him,  where  he  was  stamping  with  his  foot. 
There  was  a  sound  —  or  feel  —  as  we  came  down  with  our 
heels,  of  something  hollow  beneath. 

We  scraped  the  sand  away  with  our  hands,  making  a  hole 
less  than  a  foot  in  depth;  and  came  upon  something  made  of 
boards. 

"  So  far,  so  good,"  said  Norris.  "The  stuff  is  there  without 
much  doubt.  We  have  nothing  more  to  do,  now,  but  wait  till 
the  Pearl  gets  here,  tomorrow." 

When  we  settled  down  beside  our  boat,  close  to  the  south 
beach,  the  night  breeze  was  rustling  the  dry  palm  fans  above 
our  heads;  the  ripples  broke  on  the  beach  with  a  soft  play- 
ful sound. 


THE  CACHE  ON  THE  ISLE  271 

"  I  guess  Captain  Marat  will  be  getting  sail  on  the  schooner, 
now,"  I  observed. 

"  I  wish  this  same  wind  would  get  him  here  tonight,"  com- 
plained Norris. 

"  We  ought  to  be  glad  we  can  depend  on  another  wind  to 
get  him  in  tomorrow,"  I  reproved  the  impatient  one. 

"  Right  you  are,  Mr.  Philosopher,"  he  returned  with  proper 
humility.  "I'm  a  worse  kid  than  any  of  you.  But  then,  too, 
I  don't  mind  saying,  I  don't  want  the  interference  of  any  more 
of  these  voodoo  skunks  till  we  get  all  the  stuff  into  the  hold  of 
the  Pearl.  After  that,  let  them  come  on  —  I'd  just  like  another 
whack  at  some  more  of  those  blood-drinking  voodoo  canni- 
bals." And  he  rubbed  his  hands  with  contemplation  of  the 
experience. 

We  took  turn  about  on  watch,  though  we  did  not  think  it 
worth  while  to  keep  any  eye  on  the  hut.  It  was  three  of  the 
morning,  when  Norris  roused  me  for  my  watch.  I  paced  a 
little  stretch  of  beach  for  a  spell,  to  work  off  the  sleep  that 
clung  to  me. 

Suddenly,  I  heard  voices.  I  hurried  in  to  the  clearing.  And 
sure  enough,  over  near  the  hut,  there  were  those  who  were 
chattering  away  with  more  or  less  abandon. 

I  rushed  back  to  my  comrades,  shook  them  awake  and  gave 
them  the  news. 

"  Get  your  rifles,"  said  Norris. 

We  hurried  to  the  clearing.  The  voices  now  came  from  the 
shore  to  the  west.  We  scrambled  through  the  brush  till  we  got 
in  view  of  the  beach. 

There  we  made  out  in  the  dark  a  number  of  figures  moving 
in  a  mass  towards  a  boat.  These  figures  hovered  about  the 


272  THE  VOODOO  GOLD  TRAIL 

boat  for  some  minutes,  and  then  returned  the  way  they  had 
come,  disappearing  in  the  wood. 

We  three  lost  not  a  moment,  but  leaped  to  that  boat.  It 
was  a  ship's  life-boat  of  considerable  size,  and  clinker  built; 
and  between  two  of  the  thwarts  there  rested  a  chest  of  great 
weight,  as  we  found. 

"  They're  here  sure  enough,"  said  Norris,  in  a  whisper. 
"They're  getting  the  stuff.  Now  it's  for  a  fight! "  and  he  patted 
his  rifle. 

"  Wait!"  I  said,  as  he  was  about  to  lead  the  way  after  the 
blacks.  "Leave  the  shooting  to  Bob  and  me,  with  our  rifles  — 
they  can't  hear  ours." 

And  it  was  Robert,  then,  that  suggested  that  we  bore  holes 
in  the  boat. 

The  planks  were  thin,  since  the  boat  was  clinker  built,  so 
that  we  were  not  long  in  making  a  number  of  holes  with  our 
knives,  near  the  bow,  which  was  out  of  the  water.  We  got  in 
among  the  palms  and  brush  and  waited  the  coming  of  the 
blacks.  I  whispered  Robert  a  caution  not  to  aim  above  the 
knees;  no  need  to  do  more  than  should  serve  our  purpose. 

We  had  time  to  spare,  but  the  black  figures  presently  pushed 
out  on  the  beach,  toting  a  heavy  object  among  them.  There 
seemed  to  be  five  in  the  group. 

"  Now,"  I  whispered,  and  Robert  and  I  raised  our  little 
rifles.  As  we  pulled  the  triggers,  there  was  no  sound  but  two 
outcries.  Then  came  two  more  howls,  and  down  went  the 
heavy  thing  they  carried. 

The  blacks  ran  afoul  of  one  another,  in  their  frantic  haste 
to  get  to  the  boat.  They  pushed  off,  scrambling  into  the  boat, 
and  we  sent  more  silent,  hot  pepper  after  the  legs  that  dallied. 


THE  CACHE  ON  THE   ISLE  273 

Norris  could  not  resist;  he  jerked  his  rifle  to  his  shoulders. 
But  Robert  and  I  pulled  him  down. 

"  Don't  spoil  it  now,"  I  said.  "Let's  not  make  a  noise  if 
we  can  help  it." 

"  You're  right,"  he  said.  "I'll  maybe  get  my  chance  another 
time." 

That  boat  was  not  over  forty  yards  from  shore  now,  and 
even  in  the  dark  we  could  see  that  it  was  sinking.  And  the 
blacks  had  evidently  discovered  their  plight,  and  were  leaping 
into  the  water  and  striking  out  for  the  north  shore  of  Crow 
Bay. 

When  the  last  of  the  blacks  had  abandoned  the  boat,  we 
had  off  some  of  our  clothes,  and  rushed  into  the  water. 

It  was  up  to  our  arm-pits  where  we  found  the  boat.  Though 
the  water  was  within  a  few  inches  of  the  top  of  the  coaming, 
we  contrived  with  a  few  shoves  to  propel  the  boat  some  yards 
shoreward,  before  it  sank,  hi  five  feet  of  water. 

"  Well,  that's  safe,"  said  Norris,  striking  out  for  the  shore. 
"We'll  get  that  out  with  tackle." 

Day  broke  while  we  examined  that  chest  upon  the  beach. 
It  was  of  rough  lumber,  roughly,  but  strongly  made,  having 
rope  handles,  and  well  padlocked.  In  the  hut  we  found  food, 
cooking  utensils,  an  empty  jug  emitting  an  odor  of  rum,  an 
ax,  and  a  pair  of  shovels. 

"  That  fat,  black  fellow  who  lived  here  must  have  gone  off 
with  the  others,"  observed  Robert. 

Norris  led  the  way  into  the  thicket.  In  the  spot  we'd  found 
in  the  night,  a  tight  box  of  great  size  was  sunk  into  the  soil. 
Its  cover  lay  on  one  side.  On  this  cover  stood  an  open  chest, 
a  quarter  filled  with  the  gold-laden  bamboo  cylinders.  Down 


274  THE  VOODOO  GOLD  TRAIL 

in  the  great  box  were  three  more  of  the  chests;  and  these  we 
found  to  be  empty.  All  were  fitted  alike,  with  rope  handles, 
staples  and  hasps. 

"  Well,  anyway,"  said  Norris,  "we'll  make  good  use  of  these 
boxes.  There's  all  that  stuff  up  in  the  cave."  He  ran  on,  with 
enthusiasm,  on  the  things  we  would  do. 

"  All  right,  all  right,"  interrupted  the  usually  taciturn 
Robert  at  last,  "but  when's  breakfast?"  And  his  hand  went 
in  where  his  breakfast  should  be. 

"  That's  so,"  admitted  Norris.  "We've  forgotten  breakfast." 

The  odor  in  the  hut  was  too  much  for  our  stomachs,  so  we 
eschewed  the  place  for  all  that  it  had  a  stove,  and  made  our 
meal  down  by  our  boat. 

The  morning  dragged  tediously.  It  was  less  than  two  hours 
of  noon  before  the  day  breeze  sprung  up,  so  that  we  could 
hope  for  the  coming  of  the  Pearl.  We  crouched  in  the  sand 
on  the  northeast  shore  of  the  isle,  watching  anxiously.  And  at 
last  the  sails  of  the  schooner  appeared,  coming  from  behind  the 
point  near  the  inner  terminus  of  the  channel.  We  rose  to  our 
feet  and  shouted  with  joy. 

"Hold  on!"  I  cried,  when  I  had  taken  a  second  look. 
"That's  not  the  Pearl,  that's  the  Orion!" 

"  Good  God!  Yes,  you're  right,"  said  Norris.  "What  does 
that  mean?" 

We  retreated  into  the  shelter  of  the  trees.  And  I  sickened 
with  a  horrid  sensation.  It  was  as  much  anxiety  regarding 
the  Pearl,  as  fear  for  ourselves ;  and  we  had  no  proper  defence, 
from  which  we  could  stand  off  a  dozen  or  more  armed  black 
devils.  The  Orion  changed  her  course  and  bore  down  direct 
for  the  isle.  We  stood,  paralyzed  with  our  surprise  and  dread, 


THE  CACHE  ON  THE  ISLE  275 

gazing  on  that  vessel  as  it  bore  down  under  the  freshening 
breeze.  For  ten  minutes  we  stood  thus. 

"  Shall  we  take  to  the  skiff?"  said  Robert  at  last. 

None  answered  him.  I  had  just  noted  a  strange  thing.  The 
black  sailors  on  the  Orion  —  now  almost  directly  north  of 
us  —  had  none  of  their  interest  centered  on  the  isle.  I  turned 
my  eyes  back  the  way  the  Orion  had  come.  And  there  were 
the  sails  of  another  schooner  coming  from  behind  that  point. 

"Look!"  I  cried. 

"The  Pearl!"  said  Grant  Norris.  "That  tells  the  story: 
the  Orion's  running  away  from  her." 

He  danced  with  joy.  And  we  three  struck  one  another  in 
our  ecstacy  of  relief. 

The  Orion  rounded  the  isle,  and  the  Pearl,  coming  in  chase, 
was  soon  opposite  us,  and  near  enough  to  hail.  We  rushed 
down  to  the  water.  Our  friends,  at  the  rail,  waved  to  us. 

"  All  is  safe!"  we  called.  "Drive  the  Orion  out  if  you  can!" 

"Aye!  Aye!"  came  back  Ray's  voice,  and  the  chase  con- 
tinued. 

Round  the  isle  they  went.  We  followed  with  our  eyes,  walk- 
ing the  beach.  The  Orion  scudded  off  a  way  down  the  bay, 
to  the  east;  then  went  about  on  the  starboard  tack  and  made 
for  the  channel,  where  she  had  come  in.  At  last  she  disap- 
peared behind  that  point  again.  And  then  the  Pearl  left  the 
trail,  and  again  set  her  bow-sprit  toward  our  isle,  at  last  drop- 
ping her  anchor  some  two  hundred  yards  to  the  northwest. 

In  a  little,  Captain  Marat,  Ray,  Julian,  and  Carlos  came  to 
shore  in  the  boat. 

"  Well,  you  gave  us  a  proper  fright,"  I  told  them,  "driving 
that  schooner  in  on  us  that  way," 


276  THE  VOODOO   GOLD   TRAIL 

"  Norris  didn't  get  scared,  did  he?"  bantered  Ray. 

"  Yes,  he  did,"  declared  Norris,  speaking  for  himself.  "And 
the  skin  all  up  and  down  my  back  is  wrinkled  even  yet.  This 
little  place  isn't  like  that  up  there  in  that  rock  sink,  with  all 
those  holes  to  crawl  into  when  you're  getting  licked." 

"  I'll  tell  you,  Ray,"  I  interposed.  "The  thing  that  made 
most  of  those  wrinkles  in  his  back  was  thinking  what  must 
have  happened  to  you  and  the  Pearl  —  seeing  that  schooner 
coming  in  in  place  of  the  Pearl.  Now  tell  us  how  you  chased 
the  Orion  in  here." 

"  Ah,"  began  Captain  Marat.  "I  guess  thad  Orion  lay  all 
night  in  thee  passage.  We  see  her  there  when  we  come  in." 

And  now  the  party  must  visit  the  gold-cache  in  the  thicket. 

"  Well,"  observed  Julian,  "this  is  interesting,  but  I  want 
to  see  your  gold  mine  behind  that  waterfall." 

"  The  waterfall  isn't  much  for  size,"  returned  Norris,  "but 
it's  a  wonderful  accident  of  nature;  and  I  will  say  Carlos's 
father  had  a  remarkable  head  on  him  to  discover  what  it  hid. 
But  wait  till  you  see  his  gold  mine,  and  the  stuff  in  the  cave, 
that's  come  out  of  it,  and  you'll  have  an  eyeful." 

"Yes,"  added  Ray.  "And  you'll  see  a  monkey  in  there  that's 
always  filling  Wayne's  pocket  full.  That  monkey  and  Wayne 
are  in  cahoots." 

Our  first  care  was  to  recover  the  gold-laden  chest  that  went 
down  with  the  boat.  By  diving,  we  got  a  hawser  through  the 
two  rope  handles.  And  when  the  tide  was  all  in  —  and  that 
was  about  two  o'clock  —  we  warped  the  schooner  over  to  the 
place;  and  with  block  and  tackle  on  the  foresail  boom,  swung 
above,  we  had  soon  lifted  the  chest  aboard.  Many  hands  made 
light  work  of  the  other  boxes. 


THE  CACHE  ON  THE  ISLE  277 

With  careful  sounding,  as  we  moved  under  reefed  mainsail 
and  jib,  we  got  the  Pearl  to  a  good  anchorage  near  the  upper 
end  of  Crow  Bay.  And  as  there  were  still  some  hours  of  day- 
light, we  took  the  empty  chests  in  two  boats,  and  sought  out 
the  bayou  that  took  us  into  the  mouth  of  the  creek  whose 
waters  flowed  from  the  gold  mine. 

Julian  this  time  accompanied  the  party;  and  I  got  renewed 
thrills,  to  see  how  he  marveled  at  the  wonders  that  blazed  the 
trail,  from  the  little  cascade  that  screened  the  entrance,  to 
the  placer  mine,  and  the  shining  gold  horde  in  the  cave. 


CHAPTER  XXXI 

WE   RUN    THE   GAUNTLET -HOME    BOUND 

"  Too  bad  we  can't  put  in  a  week,  getting  some  more  gold 
out  of  this  creek,"  said  Norris.  He  was  plucking  little  bits  of 
the  precious  metal  out  of  a  pan  of  gravel  he'd  just  washed. 
"There's  no  end  of  the  stuff  here  still,"  he  complained. 

"Well,  but  aren't  we  coming  back  some  day?"  observed 
Robert. 

"  Just  like  some  folks,"  said  Ray.  "The  more  they  get,  the 
more  they  want." 

We  had  gone  to  the  diggings  to  break  up  the  Long  Tom,  to 
make  boxes  for  floating  the  horde  of  mined  gold  through  the 
hole  in  the  cliff.  The  little  bamboo  cylinders  offered  too  slow 
a  means  to  satisfy  our  impatience. 

Our  party  divided,  some  remaining  in  that  outer  cavern,  to 
receive  the  boxes,  as  they  floated  to  the  net,  and  empty  them 
into  the  chests  outside;  the  empty  boxes  being  towed  back 
again,  by  ropes,  to  be  new-laden  with  the  gold.  What  with 
making  our  three  little  "under-sea-boat"  boxes,  and  finding 
proper  floats  for  them,  we  did  not  get  much  of  our  precious 
freight  through  that  first  day.  Jean  Marat,  Robert,  and  Car- 
los slept  in  the  boats  on  their  side  of  the  cliffs;  the  rest  of 
our  party,  including  Andy  Hawkins,  and  the  black  boy,  took 
cheer  among  Duran's  huts  within.  We  gathered  round  a  fire 

278 


WE  RUN  THE  GAUNTLET  279 

after  we'd  had  our  supper,  and  it  was  a  blithesome  party,  of 
which  the  monkey  was  a  part,  perched  the  greater  part  of  the 
time  on  either  my  shoulder  or  the  black  boy's. 

There  was  some  exchange  of  yarns,  most  of  them  of  Nor- 
ris's  telling.  And  Andy  Hawkins  had  some  experiences  to  tell 
that  were  a  bit  off  color.  It  came  to  riddles  at  last.  And  here 
Norris  shone  again;  and  Hawkins  was  not  at  a  loss  for  one  or 
two.  Norris  insisted  that  we  must  each  offer  one  riddle  at  the 
least,  and  out  came  the  one  about,  "Why  does  a  miller  wear 
a  white  hat?"  and  others  of  later  coinage.  Norris  held  back 
Ray  for  the  last.  He  must  have  been  sure  Ray  should  break 
up  the  party. 

"  Now  your  turn,  Ray,"  said  Norris. 

"  Aw,  I  don't  know  any,"  pouted  Ray. 

"  Make  up  one,"  insisted  Norris. 

"  Well,"  began  Ray,  drawling  his  words,  "Mary  had  a  little 
—  Now  don't  interrupt!" 

"  Who  is  interrupting?"  said  Norris.  "But  you  might  give  us 
something  new." 

"  Well,  if  it  don't  suit  you,"  shot  back  Ray,  "you  tell  it." 

"  Go  on,"  said  Norris. 

Ray  continued:  "It  followed  her  to  school  —  one  day.  The 
teacher  dropped  his  book,  and  bent  down  for  it.  But  —  but 
— "  (Ray  seemed  to  have  got  to  the  end  of  his  powers  of 
"make  up")  "but  —  but  —  but  — " 

"Well,  go  on,"  pressed  Norris.   "But  what?" 

"  The  teacher,  of  course,"  said  Ray,  frowning.  "What  do 
you  suppose  Mary  brought  the  goat  to  school  for?" 

We  turned  in  early,  meaning  to  rise  with  the  sun  for  the 
next  day's  labors. 


280  THE  VOODOO   GOLD  TRAIL 

I  dreamed  I  was  at  the  railway  station,  back  home  in  Illi- 
nois. I  heard  the  roar  of  a  train  approaching.  Then  came  an 
explosion.  I  opened  my  eyes.  A  tropic  storm  was  on  us,  there 
was  thunder,  and  the  rain  came  down  in  a  deluge. 

I  started  up  in  excitement,  as  I  thought  of  that  little  hole  in 
the  cliff,  the  only  outlet  for  all  the  water.  What  if  this  terrific 
downpour  should  continue,  and  the  water  back  up  in  this 
walled  basin!  But  at  second  thought  I  remembered,  and  it 
was  only  the  water  that  fell  within  our  basin  that  we  had  to 
fear;  for  the  stream  met  the  same  sort  of  obstruction  to  its 
inflow,  above,  as  that  which  retarded  its  outflow,  below.  With 
that  comforting  thought  I  presently  fell  asleep  again. 

The  day  broke  fresh  and  cool.  The  creek  had  soon  dis- 
charged its  excess  waters,  and  our  labors  went  forward  with- 
out hitch,  till  the  last  of  the  gold-dust  had  been  sent  out 
through  that  watery  portal.  And  that  was  late  of  the  after- 
noon; so  that  when  our  party  had  said  a  goodbye  to  the  gold 
valley,  and  stood  by  the  cedars  at  the  cliff-top,  the  region  was 
all  in  shadow. 

We  unbent  the  ropes  from  the  cedars. 

"  No  use  to  chance  some  others  finding  their  way  in,"  said 
Norris.  "And  we  can  make  another  ladder  when  we  come 
back." 

Norris  must  have  had  Hawkins  blindfolded,  before  we  made 
that  passage  through  the  cavern.  There  was  no  assurance,  as 
he  afterwards  explained,  that  the  pickpocket  might  not  pick 
up  with  more  of  his  ilk,  who  would  wish  to  seek  out  the  place. 

Andy  Hawkins  thanked  him  for  the  precaution.  "Hi  never 
want  to  be  able  to  find  my  way  back  to  that  'ell  'ole  again," 
he  said. 


WE  RUN  THE  GAUNTLET  281 

It  was  quite  dark  when  we  doused  for  the  last  time  through 
the  little  waterfall.  Robert  awaited  us  with  one  of  the  boats, 
and  it  was  not  long  till  we  were  on  the  deck  of  the  Pearl. 

While  some  were  below,  stowing  the  precious  cargo,  others 
were  in  some  preparation  for  a  lifting  of  the  anchor  and  get- 
ting on  sail  at  the  very  first  waft  of  the  land  breeze.  Norris 
threw  off  the  jacket  of  his  big  gun,  and  looked  to  the  priming. 

"  You  must  never  think,"  he  said,  "that  those  black  devils 
are  going  to  see  us  get  away  with  the  gold  without  some  sort 
of  attempt  to  head  us  off." 

"  Yes,"  added  Captain  Marat.  "I  theenk  they  try  some- 
theeng." 

It  was  in  that  narrow,  tortuous  channel  the  attempt  would 
be  made,  if  at  all.  It  would  be  above  a  mile  of  ticklish  navi- 
gation, following  the  curves,  and  avoiding  the  points.  And 
there  were  heights  from  which  they  could  rain  shot  on  us  as 
we  passed.  We  got  out  all  the  mattresses;  of  one  we  con- 
structed a  bulwark  for  the  helmsman,  another  covered  the  sky- 
light, others  were  propped  up  at  convenient  places  on  the  deck. 
It  was  conjectured  that  the  attack  —  if  one  there  was  to  be 
—  would  take  us  on  the  starboard,  since  doubtless  the  sailors 
from  the  Orion  would  land  on  that  side  of  the  channel,  also 
since  it  was  that  side  offered  the  better  vantage  ground.  Nor- 
ris brought  his  gun  to  that  side  of  the  ship. 

The  moon,  which  was  in  its  first  quarter,  was  due  to  set  about 
ten  o'clock.  We  hoped  that  the  land  breeze  might  come  soon 
enough  to  get  us  through  before  its  light  should  have  gone.  We 
needed  the  view  of  the  channel,  and  some  sight  of  the  enemies' 
lurking-place  would  doubtless  be  to  our  advantage. 

True  to  its  practice,  the  land  breeze  rose  at  about  nine.  Up 


282  THE  VOODOO  GOLD  TRAIL 

came  the  anchor,  and  with  a  rattle  of  blocks,  up  went  the  sails. 
The  moonlight  glinted  among  the  wavelets  directly  in  our  wake, 
as  we  moved  down  Crow  Bay  toward  the  isle.  We  passed  the 
isle  on  the  left.  Arrived  at  the  wide  opening  of  the  channel, 
the  sheets  were  run  out  till  the  booms  hung  over  the  port  bul- 
warks. Robert  was  at  the  wheel;  Captain  Marat  with  his  rifle 
was  in  the  bows,  from  where  he  gave  his  orders;  Norris,  Ray, 
and  Carlos,  were  at  the  gun,  Carlos  holding  Norris's  rifle;  the 
rest  of  us,  including  two  of  the  sailors,  lay  behind  mattresses 
within  reach  of  the  sheets. 

The  breeze  was  brisk  enough,  and  soon  we  were  in  the 
narrows,  the  Pearl  in  the  shadows  cast  by  the  western  shore. 

"T'ree  points  to  port!  Ease  on  the  sheets!"  came  Captain 
Marat's  order. 

The  Pearl  swung  her  bowsprit  round  a  bit. 

"  Steady!  jus'  there!"  called  out  Captain  Marat  again. 

It  was  the  first  bend  in  the  tortuous  channel.  It  was  deep 
in  the  fairway,  we  had  only  to  avoid  the  points. 

We  had  made  another  turn,  and  were  near  half  way  down 
the  channel,  when  the  flash  and  rat-a-tat  of  a  score  of  guns 
sounded  on  the  heights  to  our  starboard,  and  the  lead  rained 
like  hail  on  our  deck.  Marat's  and  Norris's  rifles  answered. 
Norris,  for  some  reason  withheld  the  fire  of  the  big  gun. 

"Anyone  hurt?"  called  Norris. 

There  was  no  answer. 

"  Keep  behind  your  mattresses,"  he  cautioned. 

He  swung  the  big  gun  round,  as  I  could  hear.  As  much  as 
a  minute  passed  with  no  sound  on  shore.  Then  came  another 
volley  from  the  enemy.  The  two  rifles  replied  again.  There 
came  another  pattering  of  bullets  from  the  enemy.  Norris 


WE  RUN  THE  GAUNTLET  283 

spat  out  an  oath.  The  next  moment  Ray  called  to  me,  saying 
that  Norris  was  wounded.  Leaving  the  fore-sheet  to  the  sailors, 
I  scurried  over  to  the  gun,  and  we  began  to  uncover  Norris's 
wound. 

"  It's  nothing  bad,  give  them  the  gun  first,"  he  said. 

Carlos  seized  the  carriage  and  began  to  train  the  gun  while 
random  shots  continued  from  the  enemy. 

"  Hold  her  right  on  the  edge  of  the  bank,"  said  Norris, 
his  voice  husky  with  the  pain. 

"  Now,"  said  Carlos. 

Rufe  applied  the  fire. 

"  Boom!"  The  thunder  echoed  in  the  hills.  From  the  shore 
came  horrid  yells,  of  pain  or  fright,  but  never  another  shot. 

"  We  got  them  that  time,"  said  Norris,  with  a  sigh  of  satis- 
faction. 

And  now  we  turned  to  Norris's  wound.  The  ball  had  passed 
through  the  fleshy  part  of  his  shoulder,  and  was  not  deep.  We 
soon  had  on  a  bandage.  After  a  good  swig  out  of  the  water 
butt,  he  declared  he  was  ready  for  another  fight.  Though  after 
one  attempt  to  stand  he  was  content  to  recline  on  the  deck. 
But  he  insisted  on  our  re-loading  his  gun. 

The  moon  had  set  when  we  passed  out  over  the  bar,  between 
those  two  flanking  lines  of  surf. 

"  There's  a  schooner!"  called  Robert,  come  from  the  wheel, 
where  he  had  been  relieved  by  Captain  Marat. 

To  the  east,  the  vessel  showed,  all  sails  set,  scurrying  away. 

"The  Orion!"  cried  Grant  Norris.  "Give  her  that  shotl" 
he  commanded. 

Again  the  gun  boomed.  But  it  was  a  clean  miss.  Of  this 
I  was  glad,  for  there  was  no  occasion  for  further  bloodshed; 


284  THE  VOODOO  GOLD  TRAIL 

though  I  would  not  have  betrayed  the  thought  to  Grant  Nor- 
ris,  suffering  as  he  did  from  that  shot  of  the  blacks. 

We  got  Norris  down  under  the  cabin  light,  and  properly 
cleaned  and  dressed  the  wound.  While  we  were  busied  thus, 
Captain  Marat  had  brought  the  schooner  about  and  set  her 
bow  toward  the  west.  In  an  hour  everything  was  shipshape, 
and  Norris  propped  comfortably  on  a  mattress  on  deck,  with 
the  rest  of  our  party  squatted  about  him.  Rufe  was  busy  in 
his  galley,  for  none  having  had  any  lust  for  food  at  the  proper 
supper  time,  and  now  the  suspense  having  snapped,  we  had 
developed  keen  appetites. 

"  Dey  ain't  no  use  you-all  tellin'  me  how  yo'  feels,"  Rufe 
called  to  us.  "I  jes'  got  dat  same  feelin'  in  mah  insides." 

The  relief  was  general;  all  who  were  not  chattering,  were 
whistling  or  humming.  And  the  sailors,  forward,  were  mingling 
their  voices  in  a  negro  melody.  Even  the  monkey  caught  the 
infection,  and  scampered  about  like  a  playful  child,  times 
springing  from  shoulder  to  shoulder;  and  once  he  snatched  a 
biscuit  from  Rufe's  galley  and  thrust  it  into  my  hand,  to  Ray's 
pretended  disgust. 

"  I  told  you  the  monkey  and  Wayne  are  in  cahoots,"  he  said. 

But  before  we  came  to  Jamaica,  the  animal  had  transferred 
his  chief  liking  to  Ray.  None  could  long  resist  Ray. 

The  black  boy  never  tired  of  roaming  about  the  schooner, 
which  to  him  was  the  wonder  of  wonders,  never  having  so 
much  as  seen  the  picture  of  a  ship,  or  anything  calculated  to 
give  him  overmuch  yearning  for  the  world  without  those  rocky 
walls  of  that  sink  in  the  mountain.  Julian,  who  had  conversed 
much  with  the  boy,  told  us  that  he  could  not  understand  the 
value  of  that  gold  on  which  we  put  so  much  store.  To  him  it 


WE  RUN  THE  GAUNTLET  285 

was  nothing  but  so  much  dross  that  had  given  him  so  many 
lame  backs  with  the  delving  for  it. 

Andy  Hawkins  sat  there  grimacing  and  jerking  his  shoul- 
ders, and  telling  such  ears  as  would  listen,  of  the  bottles  of 
soda  water  he  would  be  drinking  when  he  got  to  the  shops. 
Strangely  enough,  strong  drink  had  no  charms  for  him,  though 
he  made  no  concealment  of  his  slavery  to  the  drug  that  had 
already  marked  him  for  an  early  grave. 

"  The  last  time  I  was  in  London,"  he  said,  "I  put  four  bottles 
of  'Utchinson's  Sarsaprilla  sody-water  down  be'ind  my  collar; 
and  if  Hi  'ad  them  now,  Hi  think  Hi'd  be  able  to  put  down 
a  heven  dozen." 

"  You  believe  in  getting  full  even  if  you  don't  get  drunk, 
don't  you?"  said  Ray. 

They  were  uneventful  days,  those  of  the  voyage  back  to 
Kingston,  in  the  Island  of  Jamaica.  It  was  before  noon  of  the 
twenty-fifth  of  September  that  we  let  go  the  anchor  in  the 
harbor. 

Captain  Marat  and  Grant  Norris  had  been  having  some 
conference  with  Carlos  Brill,  and  at  last  called  us  all  to- 
gether. 

"  We've  been  talking  with  Carlos  about  the  gold,"  said  Nor- 
ris. "Although  the  mine  is  his,  he  will  not  hear  of  any  arrange- 
ment other  than  share  and  share  alike  —  after  the  sailors  have 
been  paid  a  substantial  bonus,  and  Hawkins  and  the  boy  have 
received  a  proper  payment  for  their  labors  and  sufferings." 

There  was  an  echo  of  protest.  We  felt  that,  as  owners,  Car- 
los and  his  sister  should  retain  at  the  least  a  third  of  their 
patrimony. 

"  No,"  spoke  Carlos.  "No!    We  never  get  the  mine  if  it  not 


286  THE  VOODOO  GOLD  TRAIL 

be  for  you.  I  feel  in  here"  (and  he  put  his  finger  to  his  chest) 
"what  is  right,  and  I  can  never  be  happy  if  I  cannot  do  what 
is  right.  I  speak  for  my  sister,  too,  she  will  think  jus'  like 
me." 

The  final  upshot  of  the  whole  discussion  was,  that  he  would 
allow  that  his  sister  should  receive  an  equal  share  with  the 
rest,  instead  of  brother  and  sister  having  a  single  share  between 
them  as  he  intended.  What  our  gold  amounted  to  I  will  not 
put  down  —  this  is  no  business  volume  I  am  writing;  let  it  be 
enough,  that  no  one  of  our  party  had  need  to  want  for  any 
material  comfort  thereafter,  even  should  he  live  the  length  of 
two  average  lives. 

The  news  of  the  arrival  of  the  Pearl  had,  somehow,  passed 
quickly  into  the  city;  and  we  had  not  finished  our  noon  meal, 
when  a  boat  came  aboard,  and  we  dropped  our  ladder,  and 
received  on  deck  some  Kingston  friends.  There  were  Monsieur 
Cambon,  with  little  Marie  Cambon,  she  whom  we  rescued  from 
the  voodoos. 

"  She  could  not  wait,"  said  Cambon.  "She  must  go  and  see 
'the  good  American  boys'."  And  Monsieur  Duchanel,  the  old 
friend  of  the  Marats,  came  out  of  the  boat,  too.  He  brought  a 
message  from  Madame  Marat  to  her  son,  Captain  Marat.  Jean 
must  come  to  shore  early,  bringing  with  him  all  of  the  party; 
for  she  and  Madame  Duchanel  were  already  about  the  prepa- 
ration of  a  feast  to  the  returning  argonauts.  Melie  Brill  sent 
a  word,  too,  to  her  brother,  Carlos,  who  must  not  disappoint 
her  for  an  early  sight  of  him. 

"  You  all  seem  cheerful,  and  in  good  health,"  observed  Mon- 
sieur Cambon.  "But  I  see  Mistar  Norris,  here  —  he  have  some 
accident?"  Norris  still  wore  his  arm  in  a  sling. 


WE  RUN  THE  GAUNTLET  287 

"  Oh,  no,"  said  Ray.  "It  was  no  accident,  it  was  all  on  a 
program ;  only  all  the  program  was  not  carried  out,  as,  I  guess, 
there  are  some  voodoos  left  that  could  tell." 

And  then  we  had  to  recount  something  of  that  parting  clash 
with  the  blacks. 

"  Come,  Marie,"  said  her  father  at  last.  "We  must  leave 
these  boys  to  get  ready  for  the  party." 

The  child  had  discovered  the  monkey,  and  they  two  were 
making  friends,  by  inches. 

"  Oh,  bring  the  monkey  with  you ! "  cried  Marie,  as  she  went 
over  the  side. 

And  so  we  dug  out  all  our  best  bib  and  tucker  for  the  fete. 
Duchanel  sent  aboard  a  pair  of  men  from  his  establishment,  for 
a  guard  to  the  Pearl,  since  all  our  party  were  expected  ashore. 
And  the  sailors  were  given  shore  leave,  except  only  the  regu- 
lar watch. 

It  may  be  imagined  what  the  party  was,  that  evening,  with 
the  Cambons,  the  Duchanels,  and  the  music  of  the  little  orches- 
tra in  that  very  park  of  a  lawn,  lights  hung  between  the  trees, 
and  the  cooling  drinks  and  sherbets,  and  the  wonderful  cookery 
of  Madame  Marat,  assisted  by  Madame  Duchanel.  Andy  Haw- 
kins felt  a  bit  out  of  place,  and  kept  himself  a  good  deal  in 
the  background.  Once  during  the  evening,  Ray  got  me  by  the 
elbow  and  pulled  me  toward  a  clump  of  the  shrubbery. 

"  Hawkins  has  been  sending  someone  on  an  errand,"  he  said. 

We  peeked  round  a  bush.  On  the  ground  sat  Hawkins, 
grimacing  at  a  pop  bottle  in  his  hand.  He  set  it  to  his  lips,  and 
drained  it.  It  was  the  second;  the  first  —  empty  —  lay  beside 
him.  In  front,  ten  bottles,  untouched,  awaited  his  attack.  He 
drank  out  a  third,  and  with  some  access  of  squirming,  a  fourth. 


288  THE  VOODOO  GOLD  TRAIL 

The  fifth  he  barely  tasted  of,  and  he  groaned  with  his  defeat. 
He  set  the  bottles  on  the  ground,  put  his  hands  to  his  stomach 
and  belched  gas. 

"What's  the  matter,  Hawkins?"  said  Ray.   "Sick?" 

"  Oh,  I  s'y,"  returned  Hawkins.  "Hi  ain't  no  good  no  more. 
Four  bottles  puts  me  under  the  tyble." 

"  Are  you  full,"  said  Ray,  "or  just  intoxicated?" 

"  Oh,  Hi  feel  just  like  my  'ead  was  goin'  to  blow  hoff,  or 
somethink,"  said  Hawkins. 

For  near  a  week  we  lay  in  Kingston  Harbor.  Carlos  and 
Melie  Brill  established  themselves  here,  and  they  took  the 
black  boy  under  their  care.  Andy  Hawkins  found  the  place 
to  his  liking,  and  would  remain  till  the  spirit  should  move  him 
to  a  trip  back  to  London.  The  poor  chap  never  got  so  far,  for 
fever  did  for  him  before  five  months  had  gone.  Grant  Norris 
had  some  interest  in  Kingston,  and  would  make  it  his  home  for 
the  time. 

During  those  six  days,  we  made  the  division  of  the  gold, 
weighing  it  in  the  hopper  of  a  grocer's  scale,  set  in  the  hold, 
under  the  open  hatch. 

At  the  end  of  the  time,  Madame  Marat  came  aboard,  and 
we  set  sail  for  New  Orleans  —  and  for  home. 

And  then  one  day  we  passed  through  Lake  Bourne  and  the 
Rigolets;  the  next  morning  we  were  towed  in  the  basin  to  the 
very  heart  of  the  city.  Soon  we  saw  our  chests  of  treasure 
carted  off  to  the  mint. 

"Ah!"  said  Madame  Marat,  as  we  all  entered  her  door, 
"how  good  it  is  to  be  home!  And  to  think!"  she  spoke,  look- 
ing aghast,  "no  dust!  Thee  air  good  and  fresh!  And — "  (she 
sniffed)  "thee  smell  of  thee  coffeel" 


WE   RUN  THE   GAUNTLET  289 

The  door  to  the  back  opened,  and  the  grinning  Rufe  ap- 
peared. 

"  Ah!  thad  why  you  delay  so  long,"  she  said. 

At  Rufe's  own  suggestion,  Jean  Marat  had  given  Rufe  the 
key  and  permitted  him  to  run  ahead,  to  sweep,  dust,  and  air 
the  home,  and  get  the  fire  going.  The  thing  touched  her  good 
heart,  and  she  patted  the  happy  darky  approvingly  on  the 
back. 

Julian's  grandfather  was  sent  for,  and  there  was  a  joyful 
reunion. 

The  leave-takings  —  always,  some  way  sad  they  are  —  I 
omit.  The  three  of  us  —  Ray,  Robert,  and  myself,  made  a 
quiet  entry  one  night  into  our  good  old  home  town  in  Illinois. 
My  father,  who  had  returned  from  the  southwest  some  days 
ago,  on  wired  word  from  me,  met  us  at  the  train ;  and  he  took 
us  to  the  Reid  home,  where  a  little  spread  had  been  prepared. 

It  was  when  Mrs.  Reid  put  her  arms  round  Ray  that  I 
missed  my  mother  most.  But  this  good  mother  had  a  kiss  for 
Robert  and  myself.  Robert,  you  must  know,  was  a  full  orphan. 

There  was  consternation  in  the  bank  the  next  morning, 
when  the  three  of  us  presented  each  a  paper  bearing  amounts 
in  six  figures.  They  seemed  to  think  that  the  receiving  teller's 
cage  would  not  do  for  such  a  transaction,  but  the  business 
must  be  done  in  the  directors'  room,  on  the  long  table. 

That  afternoon  the  three  of  us  went  for  a  long  row  on  the 
old  Mississippi.  We  had  things  to  discuss  alone.  It  was  Robert 
who  finally  opened  the  subject  that  was  troubling  us  most. 

"  How  much  are  we  going  to  tell  the  world?"  he  said. 

"  Well,"  said  Ray,  giving  his  oar  a  vicious  pull,  "there's  a 
lot  of  things  I  don't  intend  to  tell,  and " 


290  THE  VOODOO   GOLD  TRAIL 

"  But,"  I  interrupted,  "if  you  tell  some  things,  and  keep 
back  some,  people  are  going  to  wonder  why." 

"  And,"  added  Robert,  "they'll  fill  in  the  blanks  with  all 
sorts  of  wild  stuff  that  won't  be  very  flattering  —  that's  the 
way  it  goes." 

And  the  discussion  went  on,  till  finally  Ray  put  it  flat,  thus: 

"  Well,  now  then,  Wayne,  it's  up  to  you  to  write  the  thing 
—  write  a  book.  Then  if  anyone  gets  curious  and  wants  the 
story,  we  can  say:  'All  right,  go  and  get  the  book.'  Gee!  It'll 
save  a  lot  of  talk  —  and  a  lot  of  fool  questions." 


THE  END 


University  of  California 

SOUTHERN  REGIONAL  LIBRARY  FACILITY 

405  Hilgard  Avenue,  Los  Angeles,  CA  90024-1388 

Retumthis  material  to  the  library 

tBrortfWhlch  it  was  borrowed. 


1  7 


••>  ••!•!    Mill    Mm    Mm  ||  [[[  ||[  ||  IIJ        III 

A     000133606     4 


